SM Sharp Mx3100n

2 : '09/Sep
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX3100/S3E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-2301N 2
MX-2600N/3100N
MODEL MX-2600G/3100G
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 [A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 [B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 [C] RSPF SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION [D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
For unpacking and installation, [E] PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . .E-1
refer to the installation manual [F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . .F-1
2 (00ZMX3100/I3E)
[G] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 [H] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . H-1
[6] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 [ i ] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . i -1
[7] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 [J] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . . J-1
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . 8-1 [K] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . .K-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 [L] FUSER SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
[10] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 [M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION. . M-1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 11-1 [N] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[12] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 [O] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
[P] FAN SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION . . . . Q-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
2 : '09/Sep
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A - 1
3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[B] OPERATION PANEL
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . B - 1
1. Article constitution (Main unit and option) . . . . . . . . .1 - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B - 4
2. Main function of the main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B - 4
3. Combination of options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2
[C] RSPF SECTION
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . C - 1
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 2
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C - 8
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1
[D] SCANNER SECTION
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 3
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . D - 1
3. Definition the developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 6
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 2
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 6
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D - 3
[4] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
[E] PAPER FEED SECTION
* For unpacking and installation, refer to the installation man-
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . E - 1
2 ual (00ZMX3100/I3E).
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 4
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E - 5
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . .5 - 1 [F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
[6] ADJUSTMENTS 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . F - 1
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 2
2. Adjustment item list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F - 2
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 3 [G] LSU SECTION
[7] SIMULATION 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . G - 1
1. General (Including basic operations) . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G - 2
2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 3 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G - 3
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 8 [H] PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . H - 1
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 2
2. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 4 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H - 3
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 7 [i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
[9] MAINTENANCE 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . .i - 1
1. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i - 2
2. Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 - 4 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .i - 2
3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 -36 [J] DEVELOPING SECTION
[10] FIRMWARE UPDATE 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . J - 1
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 2
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J - 2
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION [K] TRANSFER SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . K - 1
2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 11 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K - 3
3. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 -35 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K - 4
[12] OTHERS [L] FUSER SECTION
1. System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1 1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . L - 1
2. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 5 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L - 2
3. Necessary works when replacing the 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L - 3
PWB and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 7
[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . M - 1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M - 3
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M - 3
[N] DRIVE SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N - 1
[O] PWB SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O - 1
[P] FAN SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P - 1
[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q - 1
NOTE FOR SERVICING
MX-3100N 5) Do not damage,
Service Manual break, or work the power cord.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation. forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
1. Precautions for servicing
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
except when performing the communication test, etc.
may drop inside the machine.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use
8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
extreme care when servicing.
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
It may cause a burn. do not perform servicing.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may It may cause an electric shock.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective 3. Note for installing site
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
Do not install the machine at the following sites.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
pinch your hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
perature and humidity.
driving sections.
Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.
ing paper jam or copy dirt.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or
described later.
an injury.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
Alternatively, follow the instruction of the MSDS
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to
damage fingers when servicing.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise,
toner may pop and burn you. 2) Place of much vibrations
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified It may cause a breakdown.
one only.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
2. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric 3) Poorly ventilated place
shock. An electro-static type copier will produce ozone inside it.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock. The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug. such a machine may produce an odor of ozone. Install the
It may cause a fire or an electric shock. machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage

occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
4) When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
Gas tube
Lightning conductor
A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
Grounding wire for telephone line
MX-3100N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4) Place of direct sunlight.
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may
undergo qualitative change.
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
6) Place of much dust

When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.
7) Place near a wall

Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.
30cm
30cm 45cm
8) Unstable or slant surface

If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX-3100N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

2 : '09/Sep
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

MX-3100N
Service Manual
1. Article constitution (Main unit and option)
Paper exit system Document feeder system
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
12 MX-SCX1 REVERSING
SINGLE PASS FEEDER DOCUMENT COVER
EXIT TRAY UNIT
6 MX-TRX1 1 MX-RPX2 2 MX-VRX1
DIGITAL FULL COLOR
MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
FINISHER
7 MX-FNX9 2 MX-2301N/2600N/3100N Paper feed system
PUNCH MODULE
10 MX-PNX1 MX-2600G/3100G
A/B/C/D
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
12 MX-SCX1 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
5 MX-LCX1
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
13 AR-SC3 (For saddle)
PAPER PASS UNIT
8 MX-RBX3
SADDLE STITCH
FINISHER
9 MX-FN10
PUNCH MODULE
11 MX-PNX5 STAND/1 x 500 SHEET STAND/2 x 500 SHEET
A/B/C/D PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER
3 MX-DEX6 4 MX-DEX7
Printer expansion Image send expansion
PRINTER
EXPANSION KIT BARCODE FONT KIT
14 MX-PBX3 17 AR-PF1 FACSIMILE INTERNET FAX APPLICATION
EXPANSION KIT STAMP UNIT EXPANSION KIT INTEGRATION MODULE
PS3 EXPANSION KIT 18 MX-FXX2 19 AR-SU1 21 MX-FWX1 23 MX-AMX1
15 MX-PKX1
NETWORK SCANNER
XPS EXPANSION KIT STAMP CARTRIDGE EXPANSION KIT
16 MX-PUX1 20 AR-SV1 22 MX-NSX1
Authentication/Security Application/Solution
SHARPDESK SHARPDESK APPLICATION

DATA SECURITY KIT DATA SECURITY KIT 1 LICENSE KIT 50 LICENSE KIT COMMUNICATION MODULE KEYBOARD
24 MX-FR10U 25 MX-FR10 26 MX-USX1 29 MX-US50 31 MX-AMX2 33 MX-KBX1
SHARPDESK SHARPDESK EXTERNAL
Memory 5 LICENSE KIT
27 MX-USX5
100 LICENSE KIT
30 MX-USA0
ACCOUNT MODULE
32 MX-AMX3
EXPANSION
SHARPDESK
MEMORY BOARD
34 MX-SMX3 10 LICENSE KIT
28 MX-US10
MX-3100N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1

2 : '09/Sep
2. Main function of the main unit

2 MX-2301N MX-2600N/3100N MX-2600G/3100G
Copier STD STD
GDI printer --- --- STD
PCL printer STD STD OPT*3
PS printer OPT*1 OPT*1
Main body LCD MONOCHROME HVGA 8.1" COLOR WVGA 8.5" MONOCHROME HVGA 8.1"
FAX OPT OPT
Scanner STD STD OPT
Filing STD STD
HDD STD STD
RSPF STD STD OPT
Automatic duplex STD STD
Security --- OPT*2
Internet Fax OPT OPT
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option

OPT*1: Product key target. When PS is used, PCL function must be available.
OPT*2: Product key target.
OPT*3: When expansion for PCL printer, GDI printer is not available.
3. Combination of options
Model MX-2600N/ MX-2600G/ Product
2 Section Name MX-2301N Remarks
name 3100N 3100G key target
Document 1 REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER MX-RPX2 STD STD {
feeder system 2 DOCUMENT COVER MX-VRX1 --- --- {
Paper feed 3 STAND/1 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DEX6 { { {
system 4 STAND/2 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DEX7 { { {
5 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY MX-LCX1 --- { { A4
Paper exit 6 EXIT TRAY UNIT MX-TRX1 { { {
system 7 FINISHER MX-FNX9 { { { Inner finisher
8 PAPER PASS UNIT MX-RBX3 --- { {
9 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MX-FN10 --- { {
10 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX1 { { { For inner finisher
A/B/C/D
11 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX5 --- { { For saddle stitch
A/B/C/D finisher
12 STAPLE CARTRIDGE MX-SCX1 --- { { For finisher
13 STAPLE CARTRIDGE AR-SC3 --- { { For saddle
Printer 14 PRINTER EXPANSION KIT MX-PBX3 STD STD { {
expansion 15 PS3 EXPANSION KIT MX-PKX1 { { {*1 {
16 XPS EXPANSION KIT MX-PUX1 --- {*4 {*1, *4 {
17 BARCODE FONT KIT AR-PF1 { { {
Image send 18 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT MX-FXX2 { {*2 {*2
expansion 19 STAMP UNIT AR-SU1 --- { {
20 STAMP CARTRIDGE AR-SV1 --- { {
21 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT MX-FWX1 { { { {
22 NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT MX-NSX1 STD STD { { Includes the
Sharpdesk.
23 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE MX-AMX1 { { { {
Authentication/ 24 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR10U --- { { { Commercial version
Security 25 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR10 --- { { { Authentication
version
Application/ 26 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT MX-USX1 { { {
Solution 27 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT MX-USX5 { { {
28 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT MX-US10 { { {
29 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT MX-US50 { { {
30 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT MX-USA0 { { {
31 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MX-AMX2 { { { {
MODULE
32 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE MX-AMX3 { { { {
33 KEYBOARD MX-KBX1 --- STD/{*3 ---
Memory 34 EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD MX-SMX3 --- { { 1GB
STD: Standard provision. {: Installable. ---: Cannot be connected.

* 1: Printer expansion (PCL) is required.
* 2: No support for some destinations.
* 3: Standard for North America and some destinations, option for the other destinations.
* 4: Memory expansion are required.
MX-3100N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 2

2 : '09/Sep
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
MX-3100N (4) Warmup
Service Manual
Warm-up time 60 seconds or less (The value may be
1. Basic specifications increased by operating condition)
Pre-heat Yes
A. Base engine recovery time from jam * 30 sec. or less
(1) Type * Condition: After the door is kept open for 60 seconds, the poly-
gon motor halt.
Type Desktop
(5) First copy time
Platen/RSPF Monochrome Color

(2) Engine composition
Platen 6.0 sec. or less 8.9 sec. or less
RSPF 10.7 sec. or less 13.5 sec. or less
Photoconductor kind OPC (Drum diameter:30mm)
Black x1, Color x 3
* Measurement conditions: When paper of A4/8.5 x 11 is fed to
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser)
narrow side direction from the main unit tray 1, and the polygon
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush
motor is rotating.
development
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method (6) Engine resolution
Transfer system Primary transfer belt
Cleaning system Counter blade Writing resolution Copy: 600 x 600dpi
Fusing system Heat roller Print: 1200 x 1200dpi (26/31 ppm model) 2
Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system / Waste toner / 600 x 600 dpi (23 ppm model)
bottle system Smoothing No
Gradation Copy: 600 x 600dpi
(Monochrome/Color) Print : 600 x 600 (1bit)
/ 600 x 600 (4bit)
(3) Dimensions / Weight / 1200 x 1200 (1bit) (Except 23 ppm model) 2
Outer dimensions MX-2301N/2600G/3100G: (7) Printable area

2
(W x D x H) 620 x 670 x 795 mm
MX-2600N/3100N: 620 x 695 x 950 mm Max. print size 299 x 450 mm
2 Dimensions occupied by MX-2301N/2600G/3100G: 970 x 670 mm Void area Image loss Lead edge: 4mm or less
Machine (W x D) MX-2600N/3100N: 970 x 695 mm Rear edge: 2 mm or more, and 5 mm or less
(State of the manual paper Total of the lead edge and the rear edge:
feed tray is expansion.) 8mm or less
2 Weight MX-2301N/2600G/3100G: Approx. 102 kg
(Including OPC drum/ MX-2600N/3100N: Approx. 112 kg Full A3 / 11 X 17 dimension (299 x 450 mm) can be printed with
excluding consumble parts) PCL / PS driver.
(8) Engine speed (ppm)
a. Tray (1-4, LCC) paper feeding
2 23-sheets model 26-sheets model 31-sheets model

Paper type Paper size
Monochrome Color Monochrome Color Monochrome Color
Standard paper A3 12 12 13 13 14 14
B4 14 14 15 15 17 17
A4
23 23 26 26 31 31
B5
A4R
B5R 16 16 18 18 20 20
A5R
Extra 11 11 12 12 13 13
11 x 17 12 12 13 13 14 14
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13
14 14 15 15 17 17
8.5 x 13.4
8.5 x 13.5
8.5 x 11 23 23 26 26 31 31
8.5 x 11R
7.25 x 10.5R 16 16 18 18 20 20
5.5 x 8.5R
Heavy paper A4
B5
A5R 12 12 12 12 12 12
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 5.5R
A4R
B5R
9 9 9 9 9 9
8.5 x 11R
7.25 x 10.5R
In the other sizes 7 7 7 7 7 7
* LCC is not allowed the heavy paper passing.
MX-3100N SPECIFICATIONS 2 1
2 : '09/Sep
b. Manual paper feed tray paper feeding
2 23-sheets model 26-sheets model 31-sheets model

Paper type Paper size
Monochrome Color Monochrome Color Monochrome Color
Standard paper A3W *1 11 11 12 11 13 11
A3 12 12 13 12 14 12
B4 14 14 15 14 16 14
A4 22 22 22
23 23 23
B5 23 23 23
A4R 16 16
19
B5R 16 16 18 17 17
A5R 18 20 20
Extra
11 11 12 11 13 11
12 x 18 *1
11 x 17 12 12 13 12 14 12
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13
14 14 15 14 16 14
8.5 x 13.4
8.5 x 13.5
8.5 x 11 23 22 23 22 23 22
8.5 x 11R 16 16
19
7.25 x 10.5R 16 16 18 17 17
5.5 x 8.5R 18 20 20
OHP A4, 8.5 x 11 12 10 12 10 12 10
A4R, 8.5 x 11R 9 7 9 7 9 7
Envelope Monarch,
8 7 8 7 8 7
Com-10, DL, C5
Heavy paper A4
B5
A5R 12 10 12 10 12 10
8.5 x 11
8.5 x 5.5R
A4R
B5R
9 7 9 7 9 7
8.5 x 11R
7.25 x 10.5R
In the other sizes 7 5 7 5 7 5
*1: Engine speed in finisher output

(9) Power source B. Controller board
100V series 200V series
(1) Controller board
Voltage / Current 100 - 127V 12A 220 - 240V 8A
CPU Power QUICCIII-MPC8533E (800MHz)
Frequency 50/60Hz
Interface
Power source code Fixed type Inlet
IEEE 1284 Parallel No
(Direct connection)
Ethernet 1 port
Power switch 2 switches
(Primary switch: in the front cover; Interface 10Base-T , 100Base-TX,
Secondary switch: the operation panel) 1000Base-T
Support TCP/IP (IPv4 IPv6), IPX/
(10) Power consumption Protocol SPX , NetBEUI , EtherTalk
USB 2.0 1 port
100V series 200V series (Either on the front section or rear section)
Max. Rated Power 1.44Kw 1.84Kw For connection of USB memory, USB
Consumption *1 keyboard, IC card reader, IC reader writer
or USB hab
*1: When the power supply is turned on, when the dehumidification USB authentication No
heater is OFF. acquisition
Serial I/F 1 port
Memory expansion slot 1 slot
(2) Memory, hard disk

Memory capacity, HDD capacity
Local Memory (Copy) Standard 1GB

Memory
System Memory (Print) Standard 512MB
Memory
Expansion 1GB (Except 23 ppm model) 2
Memory
Max. 1.5GB
HDD 80GB *
* Capacity depends on procurement and sourcing status.
2 : '09/Sep
C. Operation panel D. Scanner section

(1) Display device (1) Resolution/Gradation
2 a. Monochrome LCD (MX-2301N/2600G/3100G) Scanning copy mode
Resolution Platen Mono- 600 x 300 dpi (Default)
Type Dot matrix STN LCD, touch panel (dpi) chrome 600 x 400 dpi
Size 8.1 inch 600 x 600 dpi
Display dot number 640 x 240 dots (H-VGA) Color 600 x 600dpi
LCD drive display area 192 x 72 mm RSPF Mono- 600 x 400 dpi (Default)
LCD backlight Fluorescent lamp backlight system chrome 600 x 600 dpi
LCD contrast adjustment Yes Color 600 x 600dpi
In sending Internet Fax /
b. Color LCD (MX-2600N/3100N) Scanner Fax
Resolution Direct SMTP
(dpi) 200dpi x 100dpi Standard
Type Dot matrix TFT LCD, touch panel
(middle tone not (203.2 x 97.8 dpi)
Size 8.5 inch 100dpi x 100dpi
allowed) (middle tone not
Display dot number 800 x 480 (W-VGA) allowed)
LCD drive display area 184.8 x 110.88mm Fine
LCD backlight Fluorescent lamp backlight system 200dpi x 200dpi 200dpi x 200dpi
(203.2 x 195.6 dpi)
LCD contrast adjustment Yes Super Fine
300dpi x 300dpi 200dpi x 400dpi
(203.2 x 391 dpi)
Ultra Fine
400dpi x 400dpi 400dpi x 400dpi
(406.4 x 391 dpi)
600dpi x 600dpi 600dpi x 600dpi ---
Exposure lamp Xenon
Reading 10bits
gradation
Output B/W: 1bit
gradation Gray scale: 8bit
Full color: RGB colors are 8bit each
(2) Document table
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)

Scanning area 297 x 432mm
Original standard position Left bottom reference
Detection Yes
detection size Automatic detection
Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
Inch-3 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Platen
AB-2 A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13
AB-3 8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5
AB-4 A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13.4
AB-5 A3, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5 x 13.5
Dehumidifying heater Supplied as a service part
(Scanner section) DKIT-0373FCZZ
(3) Automatic document feeder
Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)

Scan speed
Monochrome (A4 / 8.5 x 11) Color (A4 / 8.5 x 11)
Copy Single: 50-sheet/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1bit) Single: 36-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 4 bit)
36-sheet/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 1 bit) Duplex: 14-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 4 bit)
Duplex: 16-page/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1bit)
14-page/min. (600 x 600 dpi, 1bit)
FAX / Internet FAX Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
N/A
Duplex: 16-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
Scanner Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
Duplex: 16-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Duplex: 16-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
Detection Yes
Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection unit)
Inch-1 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Inch-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
Inch-3 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11
RSPF
AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11
AB-3 8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11
AB-4 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 11
AB-5 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 11
2 : '09/Sep
Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding)
position
Document size Standard size (Refer to the "paper detection size")
Long paper: 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Internet FAX 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm. When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available.
Mix paper feed (Same series, same width paper) enabled
Random paper feed
(The following two kinds of sizes can be combined; A3 and B4, B4 and A4R, B5 and A5, 11" and 8.5". AMS is available.)
* In random paper feeding, scanning with duplex is not available.
Original copy weight Single: (Thin paper) 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2), (plain paper) 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)
Max. loading capacity of Max. 100 sheet (21 lbs Bond, 80g/m2) or 13 mm (height limitation)
documents
Transport disable OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper, cutout
document document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch unit
is allowed.)
Finish stamp Option
E. Paper feed section

(1) Type (4) Tray 3, 4 (2-stage paper feed tray)
Type Standard: Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) x 2
2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14,
feed tray 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
Full option: 8.5 x 11 R, 7.25 x 10.5R
4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper Paper type Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper,
feed + LCC letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper,
Paper type setting Yes heavy paper
Dehumidifying heater Service parts (Supported by kit) Feedable Paper Weight Plain paper:
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
(2) Tray 1, 2 (Main unit) Heavy paper:
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2)
Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Paper size setting when Maximum position of paper guide width
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17, shipping
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels)
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R detection
Paper type Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper, Power consumption 20W (Power is supplied from main unit)
letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper, Dimensions with adjuster 720 x 670 x 303 mm
heavy paper (W x D x H) without adjuster 590 x 670 x 303 mm
Feedable Paper Weight Plain paper: 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Heavy paper: 28 - 110 lb bond (106 - 209g/m2) (5) Tray 5 (LCC)
Paper size setting when AB series; Tray 1: A4, Tray 2: A3
shipping Inch series; Tray 1: 8.5 x 11, Tray 2: 11 x 17 Type 3,500-Sheet Large Capacity Tray
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels) Transport speed 124 mm/s - 360 mm/s
detection Paper size A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
Paper size setting Simulation setup
Paper size setting when A4
(3) Manual paper feed tray (main unit) shipping
Paper type setting Yes
Paper capacity Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) Allowable paper type Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper,
envelope/OHP: 20 sheets and weight for paper letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper:
2 Tab paper, Gross paper: 20 sheets feed 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Heavy paper: 40 sheets Paper capacity 3,500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper size A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Effective height: 385 mm
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 , 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, Paper remaining Yes (5 levels: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, none)
8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, detection
2 5.5 x 8.5R, 12 x 18, envelope Driving form The transport motor (DC brush-less motor)
Paper type Plain paper, re-printed paper, recycled paper, and control PWB are built-in to LCC.
letter head, pre-punched paper, colored paper, Off-center adjustment 3mm
2 heavy paper, Thin paper, envelop, OHP, (Move the regulation plate F/R to adjustment)
Label paper, Tab paper, Gross paper
Power consumption Normal operation : 26.4W
Feedable Paper Weight Thin paper: (without heater) During lift-up : 40.8W
13 lb bond - 16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2)
Power source 5V5% and 24V5% are supplied from main
Plain paper:
unit
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
External dimensions 370 x 550 x 520 mm
Heavy paper:
(W x D x H)
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2),
110 lb index - 140 lb index (210 - 256g/m2) Dimensions occupied by 370 x 550 (mm) * Clearance with main unit:
Machine 235 mm
(W x D)
Weight Approx. 30 kg
Optional detection Auto detection system
F. Paper exit section (3) Color copy mode
(1) Center tray of main unit Auto color selection Copy mode automatically discerning color/
monochrome.
Paper exit section Center section of the main unit Full color Full color copy
Paper exit system Face-down paper exit system Two color (Red/Black mode)
Paper exit capacity 500 sheets (When A4, 8.5 x 11) Copies with one color (R/G/B/C/M/Y) that is
(recommended paper for color) replaced from red color area in document, and
Paper exit paper size/ Thin paper: black color.
weight 13 lb bond - 16 lb bond (55 - 59g/m2) Single color Mode to select one color from R/G/B/C/M/Y
Plain paper:
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) (4) Duplex
Heavy paper:
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2), System Non stack system
110 lb index -140 lb index (210 - 256g/m2) Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x 17,
* A3W/12x8 paper exiting is not allowed. 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13,
Shifter function Yes 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R
Paper exit full detection Yes Type and weight of Plain paper:
paper which can be 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
(2) Shifter passed Heavy paper:
28 - 110 lb bond (106 - 209 g/m2)
Paper weight 55 - 256g/m2 Paper type Plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper,
Paper size/type Offset mode Size: letter head, re-printed paper, pre-punched
Envelope and custom size are paper, heavy paper
not acceptable
Type: (5) Copy functions
Envelope, OHP, label paper and
tab paper are not acceptable Function
Offset width 30 mm Automatic paper selection Job reservation (99 items)
Integrity Non-offset Getting out: Automatic magnification ratio Tray installation priority
It doesn't fall down from tray selection
Offset mode Getting out: within 50 mm Paper type selection Program call/register (48 items)
FR shift: within 10 mm Auto tray switching Document paper size input
JOB distance: 10 mm or more Rotation copy Indefinite paper size input
Electronic sort Duplex copy direction switching
(3) Paper exit tray
Special functions
Type Exit tray unit Binding margin (Left and Right/Top) (Multi shot) (Centering provided,
Erase (Edge/Center/center + edge/ page printing based on number
Paper exit position/ Paper exit to external in the right side of the
side erase) of original pages is provided)
system main unit/Paper exits in face-down
Paper exit capacity 100 sheets (When A4/8.5 x 11) 2 in 1
(recommended paer for color) Center binding (Centering provided) Book copy
Paper exit paper size/ All of allowable paper for paper feed except Large volume document mode Tab copy
type envelope, tab paper and gloss paper. Tandem copy Card shot
Paper exit paper full Yes Cover paper insertion Automatic temporary save
detection Only insertion of tab paper. Filing
Shifter function No Combination with tab copy is not Trial copy
allowed. Document count
G. Copy functions Mixed document feeder
(1) Copy magnification ratio OHP insert paper Thin paper scanning
Document control (When the data security kit is installed)
Copy magnification ratio Normal ratio1 :1 0.8% Print menu Color adjustment
AB series 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, Date print Stamp RGB Color balance
100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, Character print Page print Sharpness Brightness
200%, 400% adjustment
Inch series 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, Modifying image Background Vividness
121%, 129%, 200%, 400% removal adjustment
Zoom 25-400% (RSPF: 25-200%) Photo repeat A3 wide copy Auto color calibration
Preset magnification 4 (Setting with system)
ratio Enlargement Centering Registration
continuous copy (Setting with system)
(2) Density/copy image quality process Mirror image Black-white
reversion
Exposure mode Automatic, Text, Text/Printed Photo,
Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph,
Map, light document
Number of manual steps 9 steps
Toner save mode Yes
* Off on printed photo, photograph or light
document
2 : '09/Sep
H. Printer function I. Image send function

(1) Platform (1) Mode
IBM PC/AT Scanner Scan to e-mail
Macintosh Scan to Desktop
Scan to FTP
(2) Support OS Scan to Folder (SMB)
Scan to USB memory
Custo Scan to e-mail with Meta
Custo Custom SPLC
OS m PPD Scan to Desktop with Meta
m PCL6 PCL5c -c
PS Scan to FTP with Meta
Win- 98 / Me Yes Scan to SMB with Meta
dows NT 4.0 SP5 or Scan to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
No (Document Admin)
later Yes
2000 Fax Fax to Fax (Manual)
XP Fax to e-mail/Internet Fax/Fax (Relay transfer)
Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Inbound routing)
XP x 64 No
Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Document Admin)
Server 2003 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Internet Fax Internet Fax to Internet FAX (Manual)
Server 2003
No Yes Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
x 64
(Inbound routing)
Vista Yes Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
Vista x 64 (Document Admin)
2 Server 2008 No
Server 2008 x 64 (2) Support system
Mac 9.2.2
X 10.2.8 Mode Scanner Internet Fax Fax
X 10.3.9 No No No Yes No Corresponding SMTP POP server
10.4.11 server/protocol FTP (TCP / IP) SMTP server ---
SMB ESMTP server
2 X 10.5-10.5.6
(3) PDL emulation (3) Support image
Mode Scanner Internet Fax Fax

2 MX-2600G/ MX-2301N/
Enulation MX-3100G MX-2600N/ File format Monochrome: TIFF-FX
MX-3100N TIFF, PDF, Encrypted (TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
PDF, XPS
PCL5c compatibility, PCL6 compatibility Option Standard
Color/
---
Gray scale:
PostScript 3 compatibility Option
Color TIFF, JPEG,
PDF, Encrypted PDF,
(4) Font
XPS
Compression Monochrome: Non-compression,
Emulation Built-in fonts Option font
system Non-compression MH, MMR
PCL5c Roman outline fonts = 80 fonts Font for bar code
G3 = MH
copatibility, Line printer font (BMP) = 1 font = 28 fonts
G4 = MMR
PCL6
Color / Gray scale:
compatibility ---
JPEG
PostScript 3 Roman outline fonts (High compression/
compatibility = 136 fonts Middle
compression/
(5) Print channel Low compression)
Conversion for
Support print PSERVER/RPRINT for netware environment
each page to a
channel LPR
file (Available Yes ---
IPP
to quantity
PAP:EtherTalk
specification)
FTP
NetBEUI
Raw Port (Port 9100)
USB 1.1 (Windows98/Me/2000/Server2003/XP/Vista)
USB 2.0 (For Windows2000/XP/Vista only)
HTTP (Web Submit Print)
POP3 (E-Mail To Print)
(6) Environment setting
Setting item General

Default setting Basic settings for using the printer such as the number
of copies and the print direction
PCL Setting of the PCL symbol and fonts
PS Setting of enabling/disabling of print in case of a PS
error, setting of binary data outputting
(4) Item Number of registration items Document filing function Filing
Automatic temporary save
Item No. of registration items PC- FAX send log Yes
One-touch/ Group 999 items User authentication Yes
Max. number of registration items for one
group (500 items) K. Document filing function
Program 48 items
Memory box Total of bulletin board / confidential letter / (1) Basic function
relay and broadcast: 100 items
Sender registration FAX, Internet FAX: 1 item Number of files 38GB
that can be saved Monochrome (Text): 5,500 pages or 3,000 files (*1)
User list (Return address list) Scanner: 1,000 items
in the standard Full color data (Text and Photo): 2,500 pages (*2)
Transfer table list 50 items
folder/user folder
Sender number 18 items
Number of files 12GB
Item name 30 items that can be saved Monochrome (Text): 1,700 pages or 1,000 files (*1)
File name 30 items in temporary file Full color data (Text and Photo): 800 pages (*2)
Fixed phrase 30 items folders.
Meta data set list 10 items Number of folders Max. 1,000 folder
Receive rejection address Internet FAX: 50 items, Fax: 50 items that can be made
(In total 50 items) as user folders.
Polling allow number FAX: 10 items Number of users Same as that of account users of the main unit
which can be
J. PC-Fax, PC internet Fax functions registered
(1) Working environment (*1): When the standard document (A4 monochrome: test sheet C)
is used.
OS Windows 98
(*2): When the color document (A4, greg fruit) is used.
Windows Me
Windows NT4.0 Workstation
Original (Text, A4): Test Sheet C Original (Color, A4): Greg fruit
(Service Pack5, IE4.0 or more)
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows server 2003
Windows Vista
PC IBM PC/AT compatible machine
CPU Pentium II 300MHz or more
Monitor Screen resolution: 640 X 480 pixel or above
Number of colors: 256 colors or above
Memory 64 MB or more
HDD Empty capacity of 50MB or above
Interface USB 2.0
10/100BASE-TX
1000BASE-T
Communication protocol LPR / lp
Port9100 (RAW)
IPP
USB2.0
(2) Data operation by each function
Each folder in the

(2) Functions standard folder Temporary folder
/user folder
PC-FAX send Yes Job
Confi- Confi-
(When FAX is installed) Sharing Sharing
dential dential
storage storage
FAX number max. 64 digits storage storage
PC-Internet FAX send Yes (Internet FAX expansion kit is required) Copy
Yes Yes
Internet FAX address: max. 64 digits Printer
Resolution 200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi / Direct print (FTP pull)
400 x 400dpi /600 x 600dpi Direct print (FTP push) No
Send document size A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 / B5 / 11 x 17 / 8.5 x 14 / Direct print (USB pull)
8.5 x 11 / 5.5 x 8.5 / 8.5 x 13 Direct print (e-mail push) Yes No
Compression system MH / MMR / JBIG Direct print (Web push)
Broadcast send Yes (Max. 500 items) No Yes No
Direct print (SMB pull)
F-code send Yes Sub address Yes Scan to e-mail/FTP
(Max. 20 digits)
Scan to SMB Yes
Pass code Yes
FAX send
(Max. 20 digits) No
Internet FAX send Yes
Telephone book Yes
PC FAX / PC Internet
registration, Send function
FAX send Yes
Covering letter Yes
Scan to HDD No
attachment function
Covering letter making Yes
function
Sender print Prints always
Preview Yes
Delivery confirmation Yes
(Notification to PC by
NJR)
1 : '08 Oct 15
(3) Data operation contents L. Ambient conditions

Operation content Operation panel WEB
(1) Working environment
Reprint
Resend (Humidity)
Delete 85%
Shift
Attribute change (Common/ 60%
Yes
Confidential/Protection)
Confidential file setting
Confidental folder setting
File name change
Creation of a folder
20%
File transfer to Local PC No
Machine HDD occupying rate Yes
Yes 10 30 35
display
(Temperature)
Confirmation of save data Yes
image (Preview) (The print data displays only
the first page.) Standard environmental Temperature 20 25 C
conditions Humidity 65 5 %RH
Retrieval
Collective print Usage environmental Temperature 10 35 C
(When the user name and the conditions Humidity 20 85 %RH
password of target files in the Yes Atmospheric 590 1013 hPa
folder are the same) pressure (height: 0 2000m)
Delete with the time specified Quality Guarantee Period Toner and Developer: 24 months from the
Multi file selection (print only) production month (unopened)
Drum: 36 months from the production month
* During the above setting on the operation panel, web access is (keep packing) 1
disabled.
(4) Reprint / resend limitation items for each job
Reprint Resend
Job Data
Mode Mono- Mono-
kind save Color Color
chrome chrome
Copy Copy Color Yes Yes
Mono- Yes Yes
No
chrome
Printer Printer Color Yes No No
Mono- No
No
chrome
Image Scan Color Yes Yes
send send Mono-
chrome
FAX Mono-
send chrome No Yes No Yes
Internet Mono-
FAX chrome
send
Document Scan Color Yes Yes
filing save Mono-
No No
chrome
* "Color" includes "Color/BW Mixing."
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
MX-3100N
Service Manual
1. Supply system table

A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
No. Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 18K *1 MX-31NTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31NTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31NTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31NTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 100K MX-31NVBA
6 Developer Developer x1 60K MX-31NVSA
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow (3 colors / set))
(3 colors/set))
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 100K (Black) MX-31NRSA
60K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 100K (Black) MX-31NUSA
Color identification seal (B/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 60K (Color)
Charger cleaner x1
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
B. Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand

1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 18K *1 MX-31GTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31GTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31GTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31GTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 100K MX-31GVBA
6 Developer Developer x1 60K MX-31GVSA
(3 colors/set))
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 100K (Black) MX-31GRSA
60K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum x1 100K (Black) MX-31GUSA
Charger cleaner x1
C. Asia/Hong Kong
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 18K *1 MX-31ATBA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31ATCA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31ATMA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31ATYA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 100K MX-31AVBA
6 Developer Developer x1 60K MX-31AVSA
(3 colors/set))
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 100K (Black) MX-31ARSA
60K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included) x1 100K (Black) MX-31AUSA
Charger cleaner x1
MX-3100N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1

D. Middle East/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 18K *1 MX-31FTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31FTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31FTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31FTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 100K MX-31FVBA
6 Developer Developer x1 60K MX-31FVSA
(3 colors/set))
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 100K (Black) MX-31FRSA
60K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 100K (Black) MX-31FUSA
Charger cleaner x1
E. Brazil
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 18K *1 MX-31BTBA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31BTCA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31BTMA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 15K *1 MX-31BTYA * Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
5 Developer (Black) Developer (Black) x1 100K MX-31NVBA
6 Developer Developer x1 60K MX-31NVSA
(3 colors/set))
7 Drum OPC Drum x1 100K (Black) MX31NRSA
60K (Color)
8 Drum Unit Drum Unit (Process unit + OPC Drum) x1 100K (Black) MX-31NUSA
Charger cleaner x1

2. Maintenance parts list
A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Heat roller kit Upper heat roller unit x1 200K MX-310HK
Upper separation pawl x4
Upper separation pawl spring x4
Lower separation pawl x4
Lower separation pawl spring x4
Upper thermistor x1
Lower heat roller unit x1
Lower thermistor x1
2 Primary transfer kit Primary transfer belt x1 200K MX-310Y1
Transfer cleaning blade x1
PTC unit x1
Primary transfer roller x4
Belt drive gear x1
3 Secondary transfer kit Secondary transfer belt x1 300K MX-310Y2
Secondary transfer roller x1
Secondary transfer idle gear x1
Upper thermistor PA x1
4 Filter kit Ozone filter CJ x1 100K MX-310FL
Paper ejection filter x2
5 PS paper dust removing unit PS paper dust removing unit x1 100K MX-310PD
6 Waste toner box kit Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3) x1 50K MX-310HB 5% coverage for each
color; 25% color ratio
7 DV blade kit DV blade N kit x1 Black: 100K, MX-310DS
DV side seal F (three in one) x1 Color: 60K
DV side seal R (three in one) x1
Toner filter unit x3
8 Main charger kit Main charger unit x1 Black: 100K, MX-310MK
Drum cleaning blade x1 Color: 60K
Cleaning Gum P2 x1
9 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 2000 times x 3 AR-SC3 For saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FN10)
10 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 MX-SCX1 For finisher (MX-FNX9/
MX-FN10)
11 Stamp cartridge Stamp cartridge x2 AR-SV1
12 Primary transfer belt unit Primary transfer belt unit (For service purpose) x1 MX-310U1
13 Secondary transfer belt unit Secondary transfer belt unit (For service purpose) x1 MX-310U2
14 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 120V) x1 MX-310FU1
Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-310FU
15 Fuser cleaning roller kit Fuser cleaning roller x1 100K MX-310CR
Bearing x2
B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand
1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller unit x1 200K MX-310UH
Upper thermistor x1
2 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller unit x1 200K MX-310LH
Lower thermistor x1
3 Primary transfer belt kit Primary transfer belt x1 200K MX-310B1
PTC unit x1
4 Primary transfer roller kit Primary transfer roller x4 200K MX-310X1
Belt drive gear x1
5 Secondary transfer belt kit Secondary transfer belt x1 300K MX-310B2
6 Secondary transfer roller kit Secondary transfer roller x1 300K MX-310X2
8 Filter kit Ozone filter CJ x1 100K MX-310FL
Paper ejection filter x2

Cleaning Gum P2 x1
(MX-FN10)
13 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 MX-SCX1 For finisher
(MX-FNX9/MX-FN10)
17 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-310FU
Bearing x2
C. Hong Kong
Upper thermistor x1
Lower thermistor x1
PTC unit x1
Belt drive gear x1
4 Filter kit Ozone filter CJ x1 100K MX-310FLN
Cleaning Gum P2 x1
(MX-FN10)
10 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 MX-SCX1 For finisher
(MX-FNX9/MX-FN10)
14 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-310FU
Bearing x2

D. Asia/Middle East/Agency
Upper thermistor x1
Lower thermistor x1
PTC unit x1
Belt drive gear x1
4 Filter kit Ozone filter CJ x1 100K MX-310FLN
Cleaning Gum P2 x1
(MX-FN10)
10 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge x3 5000 times x 3 MX-SCX1 For finisher (MX-FNX9/
MX-FN10)
14 Fusing unit Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 120V) x1 MX-310FU1
Fusing unit (For service purpose: Heater lamp 230V) x1 MX-310FU
Bearing x2

3. Definition of developer/drum life end 4. Production number identification
When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level. A. Drum cartridge
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level.
When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged
as life end.
In an actual case, the ratio of monochrome output and color output

may differ greatly.
When data of mixed documents (monochrome and color) are out-
put, monochrome document data may be output in the color mode
in order to prevent against fall in the job efficiency. (ACS auto color
selection).
In addition, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be deter- The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as
mined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm follows.
reaches the specified level, it is judged as life end. The number is printed on the flange on the front side.
To check the drum life, use SIM22-1/22-13.
1: Number
(840K rotations = 7,916,813cm) For this model, this digit is 2.
2: Alphabet
Developer/drum counter Developer/drum rpm
Indicates the model conformity code.
B/W Full color B/W Full color
3: Number
Developer/ 100K 60K 840K 840K
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
drum rotations rotations
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
Black developer/drum Color developer/drum X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Single multi 56,000 44,000 5/6: Number
2 sheets multi 85,000 56,000 Indicates the day of the production date.
3 sheets multi 100,000 60,000 X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
4 sheets multi 107,000 64,000 7: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the packing date.
120,000
Black drum 10: Alphabet
Color drum Indicates the production factory.
100,000
B. Developer
80,000
BK
Printable counter
60,000
40,000 C. M .Y
20,000
0
Single multi 2 sheets multi 3 sheets multi 4 sheets multi

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol-
lows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
2: Number
Indicates the production year.
3/4: Number
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.

C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the
side of the toner cartridge.
Part name
Destination
Toner color Incompatibility
Production
place
Production
year/month/day
Version
Serial No. in production day
Example: 1st of production onJune 1, 2008

[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
MX-3100N
Service Manual
1. Identification of each section and functions

A. External view
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
When a finisher / saddle

stitch finisher is not installed
When a keyboard
(15)
is installed
When a finisher is installed
(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
No. Name function/Operation NOTE

1 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of 2-sided
originals can be automatically scanned.
2 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a
toner cartridge.
3 Paper pass unit* This transfers output to the saddle stitch finisher.
4 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
5 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as
USB memory to the machine. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
6 Exit tray unit (right tray)* When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
7 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
8 Keyboard* This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine. When not used, it can
be stored under the operation panel.
9 Saddle stitch finisher* This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for folding and
stapling output and the fold function for folding output in half are also available. A
punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
10 Tray 1 Up to 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)) can be loaded in each tray.
11 Tray 2
12 Tray 3 (when a stand/1 x 500 sheet This holds paper. Up to 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)) can be loaded.
paper drawer or a stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed)*
13 Tray 4 (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet This holds paper. Up to 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)) can be loaded.
paper drawer is installed)*
14 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is Up to 3500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2 (21 lbs.)) can be loaded.
installed)* When a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed, this is tray 4.
15 Finisher* This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to
punch holes in output.
* Peripheral device.
The peripheral devices are basically options. There are some destinations that peripheral device is provided as a standard unit.
MX-3100N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 1

B. Internal operation parts
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)
No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 Toner cartridges These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a cartridge, the
cartridge of the color that ran out must be replaced.
2 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper. Caution:
The fusing unit is hot. Take
care not to burn yourself
when removing a paper
misfeed.
3 Transfer belt During full color printing, the toner images of each of the four colors on each of Do not touch or damage the
the photoconductive drums are combined together on the transfer belt. During transfer belt. This may cause
black and white printing, only the black toner image is transferred onto the a defective image.
transfer belt.
4 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper misfeed.
5 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a
paper misfeed.
6 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x
11"R or A4R, be sure to pull out the bypass tray extension.
7 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax
functions, keep this switch in the "on" position.
8 Waste toner box This collects excess toner that remains after printing.
9 Waste toner box release button Press this button when you need to release the waste toner box lock to replace
the waste toner box or clean the laser unit.
10 Handle Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine.
11 Right cover of stand/1 x 500 sheet Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 3 or tray 4.
paper drawer Right cover of stand/2 x
500 sheet paper drawer (when a
stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or a
stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is
installed)
12 Paper tray right side cover Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1 or tray 2.
13 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side
cover.

C. AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER AND DOCUMENT GLASS
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(9)
(8)

1 Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
2 Document feeding area cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.
3 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the
width of the original.
4 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
5 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
8 Reversing tray During scanning of a 2-sided original, the original is temporarily output to this
tray in order to be turned over for scanning of the reverse side.
9 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the
automatic document feeder.

D. Connector
When the fax expansion kit is installed
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)

1 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). This is used to connect a USB device such as
USB memory to the machine. This connector is not initially available for use. If
you wish to use the connector, contact your service technician.
2 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a
network. For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
3 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). A computer can be connected to this connector to
use the machine as a printer. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
4 Service-only connector CAUTION: This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a
cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service
connector must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
5 Power plug
6 Extension phone socket When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be
connected to this socket.
7 Telephone line socket When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to
this socket.

E. Operation panel
(1) MX-2600N/3100N
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (9) (10) (17)
JOB STATUS PRINT

READY
DATA
SYSTEM
SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA
HOME
LOGOUT
(7) (8) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys
to perform a variety of operations. When a key is touched, a beep sounds and
the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you perform an
operation.
2 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings
are used to configure paper tray settings, store addresses for transmission
operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
3 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to
check information on jobs and to cancel jobs.
4 PRINT mode indicators
READY indicator Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
DATA indicator This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is
taking place.
5 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical
values. These keys are also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the
system settings).
6 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
7 [HOME] key Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be
registered in the home screen to enable quick and easy operation of the
machine.
8 IMAGE SEND mode indicators
LINE indicator This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also
lights during transmission of an image in scan mode.
DATA indicator This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a
problem such as out of paper. This lights up when there is a transmission job
that has not been sent.
9 [BLACK & WHITE START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and white. This key is also
used to send a fax in fax mode.
10 [COLOR START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in color. This key cannot be used for
fax or Internet fax.
11 [LOGOUT] key ( ) Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When
using the fax function, this key can also be pressed to send tone signals on a
pulse dial line.
12 [#/P] key ( ) When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using
the fax function, this key can be used when dialing.
13 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Use this key when you wish
to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial
state.
14 [STOP] key ( ) Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
15 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-
off mode.
16 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
17 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.

2 : '09/Sep
2
(2) MX-2301N/2600G/3100G
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (10) (11)
PRINT
DOCUMENT READY
FILING DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND
DATA
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
LOGOUT
(7) (8) (9)(12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18)

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This
provides confirmation as you perform an operation.
2 Mode select keys and indicators Use these keys to change the mode displayed in the touch panel.
The indicator of a key lights when the key is selected.
[DOCUMENT FILING] key Press this key to switch to document filing mode when you wish to store a
document as an image file on the hard drive or print or transmit an image stored
on the hard drive.
[IMAGE SEND] key Press this key to select network scanner / fax mode to use the scanner function
or fax function.
[COPY] key Press this key to select copy mode. Hold the [COPY] key down to view the
machine's total page use count and amount of toner remaining.
3 PRINT mode indicators
READY indicator Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
DATA indicator This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is
taking place.
4 IMAGE SEND mode indicators
LINE indicator This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also
lights during transmission of an image in scan mode.
DATA indicator This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a
problem such as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
5 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical
values. These keys are also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the
system settings).
6 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
7 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to
check information on jobs and to cancel jobs.
8 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings
are used to configure paper tray settings, store addresses for transmission
operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
9 Function key To use the SharpOSA function, press this key to switch to SharpOSA mode.
10 [BLACK & WHITE START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and white. This key is also
used to send a fax in fax mode.
11 [COLOUR START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in colour.
This key cannot be used for fax or Internet fax.
12 [LOGOUT] key ( ) Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When
using the fax function, this key can also be pressed to send tone signals on a
pulse dial line.
13 [#/P] key ( ) When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using
the fax function, this key can be used when dialling.
14 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and
start operation from the initial state.
15 [STOP] key ( ) Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
16 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-
off mode.
17 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
18 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.

F. Status display
Copies in progress from tray 1. Job Status Job Status

Interrupt
Ready to scan for next copy job. (1)
MFP Status MFP Status
Color Mode Special Modes
Full Color 020/015 Maintenance
2-Sided Copy Copying Information
Plain DC DC DC
8 x11
1. 1/2
Output 020/015 DC DC DC
Exposure 8 x11
2. 1/2
8 x11R DC DC DC
Auto 3. 1/2
8 x14 Waiting
File
4. 11x17
020/015
Quick File
Waiting
Copy Ratio Original Paper Select
100% Auto Auto
8x11
020/015
8x11 Plain Waiting
Example: Basic of copy mode (2) (3)

1 Display selection key The status display can be switched between Job Status and MFP Status.
If the job status screen is displayed, the status display automatically changes to
"MFP Status".
2 Job Status display This shows the first 4 print jobs in the print queue (the job in progress and jobs
waiting to be printed). The type of job, the set number of copies, the number of
copies completed, and the job status appear.
Jobs cannot be manipulated in this screen. Jobs can only be manipulated in the
job status screen.
3 MFP Status display This shows machine system information.
Maintenance Information:
This shows machine maintenance information by means of codes.

G. Sensor
SPLS2
SPPD1 SPLS1
SPED
SPPD2 SPWS
SPPD5
SPPD3
SOCD
SPPD4
MHPS OCSW
TFD2 TFD3
HPOS POD3
POD2 APPD1
POD1 DSW_ADU
HLPCD
TH_UM_IN
TH_US_IN
TH_LM_IN
1TUD_CL
1TUD_BK
REGS_F
REGS_R
DHPD_CL DHPD_K
APPD2
TCS_Y TCS_M TCS_C TCS_K PPD2 MPED
MTOP1 MPLD
MPWD MTOP2
MPFD
PPD1 TH_M/HUD_M
CLUD1 CPFD1
CPED1
CSS1 DSW_C
CSPD1
CLUD2 CPFD2
CPED2
CSS2
CSPD2
Signal
Name Function/Operation Type NOTE
name
1TUD_BK Transfer belt separation BK detection Detects the transfer belt separation BK.
1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL detection Detects the transfer belt separation CL.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass. Transmission type
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass. Transmission type
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Transmission type
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Transmission type
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects the tray 1 paper empty. Transmission type
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects the tray 2 paper empty. Transmission type
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection Detects tray 1 paper pass. Transmission type
(Paper entry detection)
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection Detects tray 2 paper pass. Transmission type
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Detects the tray 1 paper remaining quantity.
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Detects the tray 2 paper remaining quantity.
CSS1 Tray 1 installation detection Detects the tray 1.
CSS2 Tray 2 installation detection Detects the tray 2.
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase.
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BK phase.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close. Transmission type

Signal
Name Function/Operation Type NOTE
name
DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close.
detection
HLPCD Fusing pressure release sensor Detects pressure release of the fusing roller. Transmission type
HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position. Transmission type
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Detects the manual feed paper empty. Transmission type
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Detects the manual feed paper entry. Transmission type
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length. Manual paper
feed unit
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width. Volume resistor
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out Transmission type Manual paper
1 position (storing position). feed unit
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out Transmission type Manual paper
2 position (pull-out position). feed unit
OCSW Original cover SW Detects the trigger for document size. Transmission type
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from fusing. Transmission type
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the paper from paper exit. Transmission type
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit to right tray.
PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller. Transmission type
PPD2 Resist detection Detects the paper in rear of resist roller.
REGS_F Pro-reg sensor F Detects the registration shift of the machine front (F) Reflection type
side and detects color toner patch.
REGS_R Pro-reg sensor R Detects the registration shift of the machine rear (R) Reflection type
side and detects black toner patch.
SOCD SPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the RSPF. Transmission type
SPED SPF document empty sensor Detects document empty in the RSPF tray. Transmission type
SPLS1 SPF document length detection short sensor Detects the document length of the paper feed tray Transmission type
upper.
SPLS2 SPF document length detection long sensor Detects the document length of the paper feed tray Transmission type
upper.
SPPD1 SPF paper entry detection 1 sensor Detects paper entry and detects paper size in random Transmission type
(Also used for random detection) paper feeding.
SPPD2 SPF paper entry detection 2 sensor (PS front) Detects the paper in front of the PS roller. Transmission type
SPPD3 SPF scan front sensor Detects the paper in front of scan point. Transmission type
SPPD4 SPF reverse gate front sensor Detects the paper in front of reverse gate. Transmission type
SPPD5 SPF reverse rear sensor Detects reversed paper. Transmission type
SPWS SPF document width sensor Detects width of document on the tray. Volume resistor
STMPU SPF stamp unit installation detection Detects the finish stamp unit.
TCS_C Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (C). Magnetic sensor
TCS_K Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K). Magnetic sensor
TCS_M Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (M). Magnetic sensor
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (Y). Magnetic sensor
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face down paper exit tray full. Transmission type
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full.
TH_LM_IN Lower main thermister Detects the temperature.
TH_M/ Temperature/humidity detection Detects temperature and humidity.
HUD_M
TH_UM_IN Upper main thermister Detects the temperature.
TH_US_IN Upper sub thermister Detects the temperature.

H. Switch
SCOV
PWRSW
DSW-R
DSW-F
MSW
1TNFD
Signal
Name Type Function/Operation NOTE
name
1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Mechanical switch Detects the waste toner full.
DSW-F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/
OFF the power line of the fusing, motor and the LSU
laser.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/
OFF the power line of the fusing, motor and the LSU
laser.
MSW Main switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
PWRSW Operaton panel power supply switch Push switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power
source.
SCOV SPF cover switch Micro switch Detects the paper feed cover open/close.

I. Clutches and solenoids
MPUC
PCSS
MPFS
MPGS
STMPS
SPFC SRRC
SPFC
SGS
LSUSS_B
LSUSS1
1TURC
CPUC1
CPLC1
CPFC
CPUC2
CPLC2
Signal
name
1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Electromagnetic Controls the primary transfer separation mode.
clutch
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Electromagnetic Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the
clutch paper feed tray section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Electromagnetic Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 1
clutch section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Electromagnetic Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 2
clutch section.
LSUSS_B LSU shutter solenoid 1 Electromagnetic Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
solenoid
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed) Electromagnetic Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
solenoid
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Electromagnetic Controls the manual paper feed gate Open/Close.
solenoid
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Electromagnetic Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed
clutch roller ON/OFF.
PCSS Process control shutter solenoid Electromagnetic Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and
solenoid the registration sensor.
SGS SPF document exit gate solenoid Electromagnetic Reverses the paper exit guard by ON operation.
solenoid
SPFC SPF paper feed clutch Electromagnetic Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller.
clutch
SRRC SPF resist roller clutch Electromagnetic Controls ON/OFF of the PS roller.
clutch
STMPS Stamp solenoid - Drives the finish stamp.

J. Drive motor
PRM
OSM
POM
PGM FUM
WTNM
MIM SPFM
SPRM
TNM_Y
PFM TNM_M
TNM_C
TNM_K
ADUML
ADULM CLUM1
CPFM DVM_CL
DVM_K
CLUM2
RRM
Signal
name
ADUML ADU motor lower Stepping motor Drives the right door section.
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2) DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CPFM Paper feed motor Brush-less motor Drives the paper feed section.
DVM_CL Developing drive motor (CL) Brush-less motor Drives the OPC drum/developing section (CL).
DVM_K Developing drive motor (K) Brush-less motor Drives the OPC drum/developing section/transfer
section (K).
FUM Fusing drive motor Stepping motor Drives the fusing unit.
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Scanner (reading) section
OSM Shifter motor Stepping motor Performs offset of paper.
PFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives transport between the resist roller and the
paper feed section, transport between the resist roller
and the right door section.
PGM Polygon motor DC brush-less motor Scans the laser beam.
POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
PRM Fusing pressure release motor Stepping motor Adjusts the fusing roller pressure.
RRM Resist motor Stepping motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.
SPFM SPF transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller and the PS roller.
SPRM SPF paper feed reverse motor Stepping motor Drives the roller for paper feeding and drives the
SWB transport roller.
TNM_C Toner motor C Stepping motor Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the
developement unit.
TNM_K Toner motor K Stepping motor Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the
developement unit.
TNM_M Toner motor M Stepping motor Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the
developement unit.
TNM_Y Toner motor Y Stepping motor Transports toner of the toner cartridge to the
developement unit.
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Synchronous motor Stirs waste toner.

2 : '09/Sep
K. Lamps/Gates
CLI
CCFT
HL_U
HL_LM
DL_Y DL_M DL_C DL_K
Signal
name
CCFT LCD backlight Cold Cathode Backlight for LCD
Fluorescent Tube
CLI Scanner lamp Xenon lamp Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan
the document image.
DL_C Discharge lamp C LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_K Discharge lamp K LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp M LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
HL_U Heater lamp upper Heats the upper heat roller.
No. Name Type Function/Operation NOTE

2 1 RSPF reverse gate Guide paper which is switched back by the paper exit
roller to the transport roller when duplex scanning of a
document is performed.
2 ADU reverse gate Switches the paper route which is discharged to the
inner tray or the right tray.
3 ADU gate lower Switches the transport route by switchback when
paper is transported to the duplex (ADU) section.

L. Fans and filters
POFM_R
POFM_F RCFM
FUFM
3
CCFM
MFPFM
2
PSFM2
PSFM
OZFM
Signal
Name Function/Operation NOTE
name
CCFM Process air inlet fan motor Cools charger section of the process.
FUFM Fusing fan motor Cools the fusing unit and peripheral area.
MFPFM Controller cooling fan motor Cools the controller PWB.
OZFM Ozone fan motor Exhausts ozone.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit.
PSFM2 Power cooling fan motor2 Cools the power unit.
RCFM Rear cooling fan motor Cools rear (R) part of the machine.
NO Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.
3 Paper exit filter Deodorizes smell generated by the fusing unit.

M. PWB
8.5 inch 8.1 inch

14 13
15
15 16
16
14
33 10
13 32
31 12
9
11
26
2
25
24
23
27
30 34
8
17
35
18 21
6 22
33
5
7
19
28
29 20
3

1 RD I/F PWB Detects each sensor in the right door unit.
2 Tray installation detection PWB Detects the tray.
3 DC power PWB Outputs the secondary side voltage.
4 Driver main PWB Drives the transport motor and related sections.
5 MC PWB Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the
developing bias voltage.
6 Primary transfer PWB Generates the primary transfer voltage.
7 AC power PWB Controls the primary side power source.
8 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner section.

9 CCD PWB Scans document images.
10 CL inverter PWB Drives the xenon lamp.
11 Document detection light collector PWB Outputs the document size detection signal.
12 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits light for document size detection.
13 LCD INV PWB Generates the high voltage for the LCD backlight.
14 LVDS PWB Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
15 MFP OPE-P PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
16 Power SW PWB Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power
source.
17 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
18 Secondary transfer PWB Generates the secondary transfer voltage, the transfer
belt cleaning voltage and the pre-transfer voltage.
19 MFP cnt PWB Controls the image-related items and controls all over the
machine.
20 Mother PWB Interfaces the MFP cnt PWB and other PWB.
21 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
22 PCU Flash ROM PWB The ROM PWB that control the PCU PWB.
23 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
24 LSU PWB Controls the LSU.
25 LSU thermistor Measures the temperature in LSU.
26 DL PWB Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
27 LD PWB Controls laser lighting.
28 PROG1 ROM PWB Stores the program to boot the printer controller.
29 PROG2 ROM PWB Stores the program.
30 SCN Flash ROM PWB Stores the scanner control program.
31 USB connector PWB For connecting the USB
32 USB converter PWB Controls the USB keyboard. Only for the keyboard standard
equipment model
33 USB-HUB PWB Branches off the USB line.
34 RSPF drive PWB Drives the RSPF.
35 TM drive PWB Control the toner motor.

N. Fuses/Thermostats
15
8.1 inch
10
HLTS2
HLTS1
HLTS3
11
14
12
13
8 6
7
1 9
2
3
4
5
Signal name Name Specifications Section

HLTS1 Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
NO Signal name Name Specifications Section

1 F201 Fuse T6.3AH 250V DC power PWB
6 F1 Fuse 15A 250V (100V) / T10AH 250V(200V) AC power PWB
7 F2 Fuse T10AH250V (200V only) AC power PWB
8 F3 Fuse T2AH 250V AC power PWB
9 F4 Fuse T2AH 250V (200V only) AC power PWB
10 F1 Fuse 200mA 250V LCD INV PWB
11 F101 Fuse 12A 125V (100V) / T6.3AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
12 F102 Fuse T1AH 250V (100V) / T3.15AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
13 F103 Fuse T8AH 250V (100V) / T5AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
14 F301 Fuse T5AH 250V (100V) / T3.15AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
15 F1 Fuse 1.25A 250V CL inverter PWB

O. Roller
1
2 12
4 11
3 14
5 16
15
6 13
8
7
9
10
48
49
50 52
51 53
41
43
42
40
55
54
44
45
26
27 46
47
36
39 17
38
19
18
20 37
35
21 33
22
34
32
23 31
30
24 56
57
25
29
28
NO. Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 Pickup roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Paper feed roller Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
3 Separation roller Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
4 U-turn roller Guide roller to transport paper.
5 PS follower roller Applies a pressure to paper and the PS roller to give the
transport power of the PS roller to the paper.
6 PS roller Synchronizes the document lead edge and the scan start
position.
7 Transport follower roller Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to
give the transport power of the transport roller to the
paper.
8 Scan front roller Transports paper from the PS roller to the scan rear roller.
9 Scan rear roller Transports paper from the scan front roller to the SWB
roller or paper exit roller.
paper.
11 Transport roller in SWB pass section Transports paper from the SWB roller to the PS rear
roller.

paper.
13 Paper exit roller Discharges paper.
14 Paper exit follower roller Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to
give the transport power of the paper exit roller to the
paper.
15 SWB roller The transport direction is switched back to reverse paper.
paper.
17 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
18 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
19 Paper pickup roller Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
(Manual paper feed tray)
20 Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
21 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
22 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
24 Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
26 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the
paper transport timing to adjust relative relations between
images and paper.
27 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give
the transport power of the transport roller to the paper.
28 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to
paper.
29 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from No. 3 and No. 4 paper feed tray to
the transport roller 4.
30 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
paper.
32 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper
feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
33 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the
transport roller 7.
paper.
35 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
paper.
37 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to
the transport roller 8.
paper.
39 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports the paper to resist roller.
paper.
41 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport
roller 13.
paper.
43 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the
transport roller 11.
paper.
transport roller 12.
paper.
transport roller 8. / Transports the paper from the manual
paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.

transport roller 1. / Transport paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.
paper.
50 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to
paper.
51 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. Transports paper to the right paper exit
tray. Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
52 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to
paper.
53 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper.
54 Fusing roller (Heating) Heat and press toner onto paper to fuse images.
55 Fusing roller (Pressing) Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating).
56 Transport roller 14 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 to the
transport roller 4.
paper.

[6] ADJUSTMENTS
MX-3100N
Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing doctor gap
ADJ 2 Adjust the developing roller main pole
ADJ 3 Toner density control reference value setting
ADJ 4 Adjusting high voltage values 4A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
4B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
4C Transfer voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 5 Image density sensor (image registration sensor) 5A Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) 44-13
adjustment calibration
5B Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F), black 44-2
image density sensor (image registration sensor R) adjustment
ADJ 6 Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) 61-4
ADJ 7 OPC drum phase adjustment 7A OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment) 50-22
7B OPC drum phase adjustment (Manual adjustment) 44-31
ADJ 8 Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment) 50-10
ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10
ADJ 10 Image registration adjustment (Print engine section) 10A Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub 50-22
scanning direction) (Auto adjustment)
10B Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual 50-20
adjustment)
10C Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual 50-21
adjustment)
ADJ 11 Scan image distortion adjustment 11A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
11B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
11C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
11D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit)
ADJ 12 Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit position adjustment)
ADJ 13 RSPF parallelism adjustment (RSPF mode) 13A RSPF height adjustment (RSPF mode)
13B RSPF diagonal adjustment (RSPF mode)
ADJ 14 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment 14A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning 48-1
(Document table mode) direction) (Document table mode)
14B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning 48-1
direction) (Document table mode)
ADJ 15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main/sub scanning direction) (RSPF mode) 48-1
ADJ 16 Scan image off-center adjustment 16A Scan image off-center (Document table mode) 50-12
16B Scan image off-center (RSPF mode) 50-12
ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section) 50-10/50-1
ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment 18A Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table 50-1 (50-2)
mode)
18B Adjust the original scan start position (Adjust the scanner read
position in SPF-mode front face scan) (RSPF mode)
18C Copy image position, image loss adjustment (RSPF mode) 50-6 (50-7)
ADJ 19 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) (Print engine section) 50-5
MX-3100N ADJUSTMENTS 6 1
Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 20 Copy color balance/density adjustment 20A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Normal document 63-3 (63-5)
copy mode)
20B Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 46-24
20C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 46-21
20D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy mode) (Whole 46-1
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20E Copy density adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode) (Whole 46-2
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20F Copy color balance/gamma adjustment (Each color copy mode) 46-10
(Normally not required)
20G Monochrome copy density/gamma adjustment (Each 46-16
monochrome copy mode) (Normally not required)
20H Condition setting of document density reading operation 46-19
(exposure) in the monochrome auto copy mode
20I Document background density reproducibility adjustment in the 46-32
monochrome auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20J Copy density adjustment for low density section (Each copy 46-63
mode) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20K Color copy text, line image edge gamma, density adjustment/ 46-27
TextMap mode gamma, density adjustment
20L Color document reproducibility adjustment in the monochrome 46-37
copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20M Black ingredient amount adjustment in color copy mode (Normally 46-38
unnecessary to adjust)
20N Sharpness adjustment in the monochrome auto copy mode 46-60
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20O Copy high density part density correction setting (Prevents 46-23
against tone gap) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
20P Copy color balance adjustment (single color copy mode) 46-25
20Q Copy density adjustment in the RSPF mode (Normally 46-9
20R Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance 26-53
auto adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment)
ADJ 21 Printer color balance/density adjustment 21A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 67-24
21B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25
21C Printer density adjustment (low density part density adjustment) 67-36
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
21D Printer high density part desnsity correction setting (high density 67-34
part tone gap countermeasure) (Normally unnecessary to the
setting change)
21E Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Printer color balance 26-54
auto adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment)
21F Automatic copy/printer color balance and density adjustment 46-74
ADJ 22 Adjusting the fusing paper guide position
ADJ 23 Document size sensor adjustment 23A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-2
23B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
ADJ 24 Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
ADJ 25 RSPF tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment (RSPF mode) 53-7
ADJ 26 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 27 Image loss, void area, image off-center, image 27A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio 50-28
magnification ratio auto adjustment with SIM50-28 automatic adjustment
27B Image off-center automatic adjustment 50-28
27C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off- 50-28
center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
automatic adjustment
27D SPF mode image off-center, image lead edge position, sub
scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic
adjustment (RSPF mode)
3. Details of adjustment 4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing doctor
gap
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm - 70mm
from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.60 0.05mm.
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.
70mm
70mm 40mm
40mm
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
Note for use of a thickness gauge

Do not insert the gauge diagonally.
The gauge must pass freely.
The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG
roller oscillation.
* Marked point (A) on the follower side (right side) of the MG roller.
A
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.60mm in between 40mm - 70mm
from the edge of the developing doctor.
70mm
70mm 40mm
40mm
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
ADJ 2 Adjust the developing roller main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
ment plate with the fixing screw.
main pole
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
ADJ 3 Toner density control reference
* When the print image density is low. value setting
* When there is a blur on the print image. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When there is unevenness in the print image density. * When developer is replaced.
* The toner is excessively dispersed. NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop- replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
ing unit on a flat surface.
1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.
2) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.
3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing

6,08/$7,2112
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. It will not 7(67
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
&/26(
provide a correct position.) $7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the $7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
needle with the needle at 2 - 3mm from the developing roller

$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.) $7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
23mm $7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and posi- $7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
tion A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8 $7'(9($'-B0B.
0.5mm. $7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel- $7'(9($'-B0B<
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures. $7'(9(92B/B.

$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(
Abnormal end Adjustment completed

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
A $7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
37.8 + 0.5mm 37.8 + 0.5mm

$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(
6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing

screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.(((/
7&'B&
7&'B0(((/
7&'B<
7&9B.(((/
7&9B&(((/
7&9B0(((/
7&9B<(((/
. & 0 < (;(&87(
2) Close the front cabinet.

3) Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole
position comes to the specified range.
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The devel-
oping roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects toner
density, and the output value is displayed.
ADJ 4 Adjusting high voltage values
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the aver-
age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set 4-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage
(saved) as the reference toner density control value. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation * When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight. * U2 trouble has occurred.
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
completed or not.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
The above operation is executed each of the lower speed
1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
mode and the middle speed mode, and the reference toner
density control value is set for each of them.

NOTE: 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the adjustment 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
result is not reflected. $

$ 0,''/(63(('*%B.
% 0,''/(63(('*%B&

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the opera- & 0,''/(63(('*%B0
tion is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis- ' 0,''/(63(('*%B<
play.
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the ref-
erence toner density control value is not completed normally.
Error
Error name Detail of error
display
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level: 1.5V or below. If not, 0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
Control voltage: 8.0V or above.

EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level: 3.45V or above. If not,
10-key EXECUTE
Control voltage: 2.0V or below.
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level: other than 2.5V 0.2V
EXECUTE
5) Use SIM24-5 to clear the developer counter. or after 30 sec.
6) Use SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.

NOTE: 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
1) When replacing developer, always replace all the three colors $ 0,''/(63(('*%B.
of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan. $ % 0,''/(63(('*%B&
& 0,''/(63(('*%B0

If only one color is replaced, color balance may be adversely ' 0,''/(63(('*%B<
affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.
2) After replacement of developer or the photoconductor, be sure
to execute SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
If the above procedure is neglected, the half-tone correction
may not be performed correctly.
3) When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25-2.
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
2) Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and

the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
speed mode and press [OK] key.
Monitor (MC/DV high

Adjustment voltage PWB) Actual
Item Mode
range Monitor voltage Check voltage
(Specified value) pin
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED GB_K K Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) 150 - 850 17.8 1.1V GB-K -630V
B MIDDLE SPEED GB_C C Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) 150 - 850 17.8 1.1V GB-C -630V
C MIDDLE SPEED GB_M M Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) 150 - 850 17.8 1.1V GB-M -630V
D MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y Y Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) 150 - 850 17.8 1.1V GB-Y -630V
LOW A LOW SPEED GB_K K Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) 150 - 850 17.7 1.1V GB-K -620V
B LOW SPEED GB_C C Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) 150 - 850 17.7 1.1V GB-C -620V
C LOW SPEED GB_M M Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) 150 - 850 17.7 1.1V GB-M -620V
D LOW SPEED GB_Y Y Main charger grid voltage(Low speed mode) 150 - 850 17.7 1.1V GB-Y -620V
Remark: 6) Apply a digital multi-meter to between the check pin and GND
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is out- on the MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the
putted. adjusted mode.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.

When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec.
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto- If this procedure is executed for a long time, the OPC drum
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer- and the developing roller may be adversely affected. Use this
tain relationship. procedure as short as possible.
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed If possible, it is recommendable to use an unnecessary devel-
mode, and then adjust the other mode. oping unit and an unnecessary OPC drum for this adjustment.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the 8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
automatically changed. Use care for that. shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output volt- adjust. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
age, there is no need to check the output value. though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an may be defective.
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the MC/DV high voltage PWB
procedures below. PCU PWB
1) Remove the rear cover of the machine. Development unit
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode
2) Open the PWB holder.

the scroll key.
5) Check the relationship between the check pin on the MC/DV
high voltage PWB and each adjustment mode.
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-1.
4-B Adjust the developing bias voltage

* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
* U2 trouble has occurred. $ 0,''/(63((''9%B.

$ % 0,''/(63((''9%B&
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. & 0,''/(63((''9%B0
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. ' 0,''/(63((''9%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or
after 30 sec.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 0,''/(63((''9%B.
$ % 0,''/(63((''9%B&
& 0,''/(63((''9%B0

' 0,''/(63((''9%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.

the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
speed mode and press [OK] key.
Monitor (MC/DV high

Adjustment voltage PWB) Actual
Item Mode
range Monitor voltage Check voltage
(Specified value) pin
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) 0-600 19.2 1.2V BS-K -450V
B MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C C Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) 0-600 19.2 1.2V BS-C -450V
C MIDDLE SPEED M Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) 0-600 19.2 1.2V BS-M -450V
DVB_M
D MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y Y Developing bias voltage (Middle speed mode) 0-600 19.2 1.2V BS-Y -450V
LOW A LOW SPEED DVB_K K Developing bias voltage (Low speed mode) 0-600 19.2 1.2V BS-K -450V
B LOW SPEED DVB_C C Developing bias voltage (Low speed mode) 0-600 19.2 1.2V BS-C -450V
C LOW SPEED DVB_M M Developing bias voltage (Low speed mode) 0-600 19.2 1.2V BS-M -450V
D LOW SPEED DVB_Y Y Developing bias voltage (Low speed mode) 0-600 19.2 1.2V BS-Y -450V
Remark: 5) Check the relationship between the check pin on the MC/DV
Normally when the default value is set, the specified voltage is out- high voltage PWB and each adjustment mode.
putted.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX

When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed 6) Apply a digital multi-meter to between the check pin and GND
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto- on the MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer- adjusted mode.
tain relationship. 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed The main charger voltage is outputted for 30sec.
mode, and then adjust the other mode.
8) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
automatically changed. Use care for that.
adjust. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output volt- though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
age, there is no need to check the output value. may be defective.
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an MC/DV high voltage PWB
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
PCU PWB
procedures below.
Development unit
1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode
2) Open the PWB frame.

the scroll key.
4-C Transfer voltage adjustment
6,08/$7,2112
* When the primary transfer high voltage power PWB or Second- 7(67
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
&/26(
ary transfer high voltage power PWB is replaced. $ 7&/2:63(('&/.

$ % 7&0,''/(63(('&/.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
& 7&/2:63(('&/&
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. ' 7&0,''/(63(('&/&
( 7&/2:63(('&/0
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. ) 7&0,''/(63(('&/0
* 7&/2:63(('&/<
+ 7&0,''/(63(('&/<
, 7&/2:63(('%:.
- 7&0,''/(63(('%:.
. 7&3/$,1&/63;
/ 7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 7&/2:63(('&/.
$ % 7&0,''/(63(('&/.
& 7&/2:63(('&/&

' 7&0,''/(63(('&/&
( 7&/2:63(('&/0
) 7&0,''/(63(('&/0
* 7&/2:63(('&/<
+ 7&0,''/(63(('&/<
, 7&/2:63(('%:.
- 7&0,''/(63(('%:.
. 7&3/$,1&/63;
/ 7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.

3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK]
key.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified
voltage is outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is out-
putted.
Default value
Setting Default Actual output
Item/Display Content of actual
range value setting range
output value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transport Color K In low speed 51 - 255 80 2A 30A 6A
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K bias reference In middle speed 51 - 255 109 2A 30A 10A
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C value C In low speed 51 - 255 80 2A 30A 6A
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C In middle speed 51 - 255 109 2A 30A 10A
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M In low speed 51 - 255 80 2A 30A 6A
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M In middle speed 51 - 255 109 2A 30A 10A
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y In low speed 51 - 255 80 2A 30A 6A
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y In middle speed 51 - 255 109 2A 30A 10A
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/White K In low speed 51 - 255 80 2A 30A 6A
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K In middle speed 51 - 255 109 2A 30A 10A
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary Color Standard Front surface 51 - 255 130 2A 100A 40A
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX transport bias paper Back surface 51 - 255 120 2A 100A 35A
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX reference value Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 99 2A 100A 25A
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 99 2A 100A 25A
O TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color Heavy Front surface 51 - 255 78 2A 100A 15A
P TC2 HEAVY CL DPX paper Back surface 51 - 255 78 2A 100A 15A
Q TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 78 2A 100A 15A
R TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 68 2A 100A 10A
S TC2 OHP CL Secondary Color OHP 51 - 255 78 2A 100A 15A
T TC2 OHP BW transport bias Black/White 51 - 255 68 2A 100A 10A
U TC2 ENVELOPE CL reference value Color Envelope 51 - 255 78 2A 100A 15A
V TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White 51 - 255 78 2A 100A 15A
W TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 - 255 63 2A 100A 8A
X TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary In low speed print 0 - 255 0 0V -1500V 0V
Y TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD transport cleaning In middle speed print 0 - 255 0 0V -1500V 0V
Z TC2 CLEAN CLEANING bias reference Cleaning 0 - 255 85 0V -1500V -500V
value
Default value
output value
AA VPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied Color In low speed 0 - 255 100 0V 4KV 2.5KV
AB VPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage control In middle speed 0 - 255 100 0V 4KV 2.5KV
AC VPTC LOW SPEED BK (AC constant Black/White In low speed 0 - 255 100 0V 4KV 2.5KV
AD VPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK voltage setting) In middle speed 0 - 255 100 0V 4KV 2.5KV
AE FPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied Color In low speed 1 - 255 184 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz
AF FPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage control In middle speed 1 - 255 184 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz
AG FPTC LOW SPEED BK (frequency setting Black/White In low speed 1 - 255 184 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz
AH FPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK value) In middle speed 1 - 255 131 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz
AI DCPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied Color In low speed 0 - 255 93 0V 2KV -1.0KV
AJ DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage control In middle speed 0 - 255 149 0V 2KV -1.4KV
AK DCPTC LOW SPEED BK (DC constant Black/White In low speed 0 - 255 149 0V 2KV -1.4KV
AL DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED voltage setting In middle speed 0 - 255 149 0V 2KV -1.4KV
BK value)
AM PTC_HT PTC heater 0: OFF 0-6 1 Always ON
operating 1-6: Environment conditions
environment
setting
AN HT_DUTY Setting of the 0: OFF 0 - 10 5 0% 100% 50%
supply power in 10: Lighting-up fully
PTC heater
constant operation
(Duty ratio setting)
ADJ 5 Image density sensor (image 5-A Color image density sensor (image
registration sensor) adjustment registration sensor F) calibration
1) Open the front cabinet of the main unit, and remove the waste
There are some parts variations in the image density sensor sec-
toner box.
tion. Therefore, the absolute detection level differs in each
machine. To correct this, calibration is executed. 2) Remove the primary transfer unit fixing screw.

* When the image density sensor (image registration sensor) is
replaced.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
The targets of the adjustment are the color image density sensor
(image registration sensor F) and the black image density sensor
(image registration sensor R). There are following adjustment
methods.
* Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) calibra-
tion SIM44-13
* Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) cali-
3) Turn to the transfer belt tension release cam and release the
bration SIM44-2
primary transfer belt tension.
NOTE: The color image density sensor detects color image density
and image registration on front frame side, the black image
density sensor detects black image density and image reg-
istration on rear frame side. That is, two functions is
assigned to each one sensor.
Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the fol-
lowing items. UNLOCK
* Check to confirm that the color image density sensor (image reg-
istration sensor F) and the black image density sensor (image
registration sensor R) are clean.
* Check to confirm that the image density sensor calibration plate
is clean.
* Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from CAUTION: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer
scratches. unit is released manually, turn on the power again after
completion of the work. This procedure initializes the
transfer roller to return it to the home position.
4) Open the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
5) Open the process front cover, and pull out the primary transfer 8) Close the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
belt unit. 9) Install the waste toner bottle to the main unit.
10) Close the front cabinet.
11) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration is
automatically executed. When the operation is completed, the
adjustment result is displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display.
Adjustment
Display/Item Content Default
value range
A PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 - 255 108
CARB OUT LED current adjustment
target value
B PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 - 255 21
LED ADJ LED current adjustment
6) Install the color image density sensor (image registration sen- target value (PCS CL CARB
sor F) calibration jig (UKOG-0318FCZZ) to the sensor housing OUT) registered LED current
section. level
Engage the pawls (A) in the sensor housing groove, and slide If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
it to the rear frame side. In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the PTC terminal. abnormality is found, repair and execute calibration again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
Color image density sensor
PCU PWB
Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt,
A scratch, discoloration)
A Image density sensor calibration plate
NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low tempera-
ture, low humidity and dark place.
5-B Color image density sensor (image

registration sensor F), black image density
sensor (image registration sensor R)
adjustment
7) Turn on the power and enter SIM44-13 mode. NOTE: This adjustment executes automatically at the outset of
registration adjustment operation and process control oper-

ation as well as SIM44-2.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17
&/26(
1) Enter SIM44-2 mode.
3&6B&/&$5%287
3&6B&//('$'-

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
352&21*$,1$'-8670(17
3&6B&//('$'- 5(*B)*51'
3&6B./('$'- 5(*B5*51'
3&6B&/'$5. 5(*B)%(/70$;
3&6B.'$5. 5(*B)%(/70,1
3&6B.*51' 5(*B)%(/7',)
3&6B.%(/70$; 5(*B5%(/70$;
3&6B.%(/70,1 5(*B5%(/70,1
3&6B.%(/7',) 5(*B5%(/7',)
(;(&87(
5(*B)/('$'- 5(*B)3$7&+.
5(*B5/('$'- 5(*B)3$7&+&
EXECUTE 5(*B)'$5. 5(*B)3$7&+0
5(*B5'$5. 5(*B)3$7&+<

(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17 The color image density sensor (image registration sensor F),
the black image density sensor (image registration sensor R)
3&6B&/&$5%287
3&6B&//('$'-
are automatically adjusted.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is
displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
(;(&87(
2 : '09/Sep
De-
De- Mode Display/Item Content Range
Mode Display/Item Content Range fault
fault
Adjustment Y REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 55 0
Adjustment A PCS_CL Color image sensor 1 - 255 21
value for PATCH R for check (K)
value for LED ADJ light emitting quantity
image (K)
process adjustment value
registration Z REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
control B PCS_K Black image sensor 1 - 255 21
operation PATCH R for check (C)
operation LED ADJ light emitting quantity
mode (C)
mode adjustment value
AA REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
C PCS_CL Dark voltage of color 0 - 255 0
PATCH R for check (M)
DARK
(M)
D PCS_K Dark voltage of black 0 - 255 0
AB REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
DARK
PATCH R for check (Y)
E PCS_K Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
(Y)
GRND level when
completion of Item B If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-
adjustment played.
F PCS_K Maximum value of 0 - 255 0
BELT belt base detection Mode Error display Error content
MAX level Adjustment BK_SEN_ADJ Black image PCS_K LED ADJ error
G PCS_K Minimum value of 0 - 255 0 value for _ERR density (The target value is not
BELT MIN belt base detection process sensor obtained after retried
level control adjustment three times.)
H PCS_K Belt base detection 0 - 255 0 operation abnormality
BELT DIF level difference mode CL_SEN_ADJ Color image PCS_CL LED ADJ
(Item E - Item F) _ERR sensor error (The target value
Adjustment I REG_F Image registration 1 - 255 56 adjustment is not obtained after
value for LED ADJ sensor light emitting abnormality retried three times.)
image quantity adjustment BELT_READ Transfer belt PCS_K GRND error
registration value F _ERR surface (The surface detection
operation J REG_F Image registration 0 - 255 0 reading level is maximum or
2
mode DARK sensor dark voltage abnormality the minimum value
F difference is outside a
K REG_F Belt base detection 0 - 255 0 reference range. )
GRND level when Adjustment REG_SEN_F Registration REG_F LED ADJ error
completion of Item I value for _ADJ_ERR sensor F (The target value is not
adjustment image adjustment obtained after retried
L REG_R Image registration 1 - 255 56 registration abnormality three times.)
LED ADJ sensor light emitting operation REG_SEN_R Registration REG_R LED ADJ error
quantity adjustment mode _ADJ_ERR sensor R (The target value is not
value R adjustment obtained after retried
M REG_R Image registration 0 - 255 0 abnormality three times.)
DARK sensor dark voltage REG_BELT_F F side REG_F GRND error
R _READ_ERR transfer belt (The surface detection
N REG_R Belt base detection 0 - 256 0 surface level is maximum or
GRND level when reading the minimum value
completion of Item J abnormality difference is outside a
adjustment reference range. )
O REG_F Maximum value of 0 - 255 0 REG_BELT_R R side REG_R GRND error
BELT belt base detection _READ_ERR transfer belt (The surface detection
MAX level (F side) surface level is maximum or
P REG_F Minimum value of 0 - 255 0 reading the minimum value
BELT belt base detection abnormality difference is outside a
MIN level (F side) reference range. )
Q REG_F Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
BELT level difference When an error occurs, check the following sections for any
DIF (Item O - Item P) abnormality.
R REG_R Maximum value of 0 - 255 0 Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F)
BELT belt base detection Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R)
MAX level (R side)
PCU PWB
S REG_R Minimum value of 0 - 255 0
BELT belt base detection Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
MIN level (R side) Transfer belt cleaner
T REG_R Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
Color image sensor calibration plate
BELT level difference
DIF (Item R - Item S) If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
U REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0 If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
PATCH F for check (K)
(K)
V REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
PATCH F for check (C)
(C)
W REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
PATCH F for check (M)
(M)
X REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
PATCH F for check (Y)
(Y)
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by
ADJ 6 Image skew adjustment (LSU changing the value of set item B.
unit) The check pattern is printed out.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 4) Check the printed black image for any skew.
* When the color shift occurs. Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns
* When the LSU unit is replaced. printed in black.
* When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit. There are following two methods of checking the black image
* When a color image registration mistake occurs. for any skew (right angle).
* When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed. Method 1:
(Required depending on the cases.) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print
pattern. Check the difference in the length of the diagonal lines
* When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color
for judgment of good or no good
balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth).
Method 2:
* When the color phase is not matched by the color balance
Compare the right angle of vertical side/horizontal side of the
adjustment.
rectangle print pattern and the right angle sides of A3 or 11 x
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced. 8.5 paper for judgment of good or no good.
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced. (NOTE) In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be
NOTE: This adjustment can be executed efficiently by executing used may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of
the following procedures in advance. paper to be used in advance.
The black (K) image skew, however, must be properly (Method 1)
adjusted for that. a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle
1) Press [REGIST] button in SIM50-22 mode to execute the auto- print pattern.
matic image registration adjustment.
2) The current skew level is displayed on the SKEW display 4
menu.
3) Put down the displayed skew level value.
(Meaning of the skew level value)
* When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the Diagonal line D
skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the number of the
value.
* When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the
skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the number
of the value. Diagonal line C
At that time, the fractional part after the decimal point is rounded.
NOTE: The K (black) image skew level cannot be checked with
this adjustment.
To check and adjust the K (black) image skew, follow the (
procedures below and execute the adjustment.
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C
1) Enter SIM61-4 mode. and D of the diagonal lines.
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( the following range. C D = 0.8mm
/68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17
$ 08/7,&2817 If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
$ % 3$3(5&6
is no need to adjust.

(;(&87( 2.
key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17
$ 08/7,&2817
$ % 3$3(5&6

(;(&87( 2.
(Method 2) 10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color
a) Fit the side of A3 or 11x17 paper to the long side of the rect- image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjust-
angle print pattern. ment.
4
Comparison line
A3 or 11 x 17 paper
0.5mm or less 4
*B
Direction A
Direction B
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
*A
Direction A Direction B
*B
*A: Rough adjustment print pattern

*B: Fine adjustment print pattern
(
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the front
b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper frame direction and in the rear frame direction, note the same
and side of the rectangle print pattern. print color pattern and check to confirm that the difference in
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to the highest density sections is within 1 step.
adjust. (Compare the front and the rear frame positions of the same-
If not, execute the following procedures. color print color patterns. All the highest density sections of all
5) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box. the print color patterns may not be aligned on a line. Compare
only the same-color patterns.)
6) Loosen the LSU unit fixing screws (2 pcs.) and shift the skew
adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the LSU (writ- If the above condition is not met, do the following:
ing) unit skew. 11) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to
(When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any adjust.
skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance)
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of Y.
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the Y M C
adjustment screw in the direction of X.
(When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance)
If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, shift the
adjustment screw to X direction. If the image is skewed in the
arrow direction of B, shift the adjustment screw to Y direction.
When each adjustment screw is turned, it clicks. Turn it by

5 - 6 clicks and the check pattern is changed by 1 step (1
dot size).
Y X
When the image skew pattern on the front frame side is
skewed in the arrow direction of A (to the smaller number) from
the rear frame side, turn the adjustment screw counterclock-
wise. When the image is skewed in the arrow direction of B (to
the larger number), turn the adjustment screw clockwise.
12) Print the check pattern.
13) Check the color image skew pattern.
7) Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet.
8) Execute procedures 3) - 4). Repeat procedures 11) - 13) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
(Repeat procedures 5) - 8) until a satisfactory result is The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is executed by changing
obtained.) the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beam for the OPC drum.
9) If the adjustment result reaches the satisfactory level, tighten
the adjustment screw.
(The black image skew adjustment is completed with the
above.)
2) Press [ALL] key.
ADJ 7 OPC drum phase adjustment (The machine enters the OPC drum phase adjustment mode/
image registration adjustment (auto adjustment) mode, and
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: both adjustments are executed simultaneously in this mode.)
* When the color shift occurs. The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
* When the photoconductor drum is replaced. adjustment can be individually executed by [REGIST] button
* When the OPC drum is removed from the main unit. and [DRUM POS] button. Since, however, the image registra-
tion adjustment must be executed when the OPC drum phase
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
adjustment is completed, both adjustment are executed in this
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced. adjustment simultaneously.
* U2 trouble has occurred. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* When the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced. The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
* When EEPROM on the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced. adjustment are executed automatically.
* When the color image sensor (image registration sensor F) is * After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor stops and
replaced. [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and the adjust-
* When the color image sensor (image registration sensor R) is ment result is displayed.
replaced.
MAIN, SUB Image regist adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value.
7-A OPC drum phase adjustment Example This time 105.0, previous time 103.0 : 105.0 (+2)
(Auto adjustment) PHASE OPC drum phase adjustment value is displayed.
1) Enter SIM50-22 mode. ( ) is the previous adjustment value.
Example This time 90, previous time 45 : 3 (2)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
&/1*
0/1*

</1*
5(*,67 '580326 $// (;(&87(
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
12:(;(&87,1*
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
(55257211(5(037<
(;(&87(
7-B OPC drum phase adjustment The adjustment patterns (8 pages) are printed.
(Manual adjustment)
NOTE: The OPC drum phase adjustment by manual is not recom-

mended. Cause judgement of adjustment pattern differ in
individuals. Auto adjustment mode with SIM50-22 is rec-
ommended.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'580326,7,216(77,1*
$ 35,1702'(6(79$/8(
$ % &2/25

& 3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2. Each identification number ("1" - "8") is printed on each printed

page of 8 adjustment patterns.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
5) Check the deflection in 94mm pitch cycle of each C/M/Y print
or end of print pattern. Select a print pattern of the smallest deflection for
each color of C/M/Y, and use the pattern identification number
as the adjustment value, and enter it to set item B. Press [OK]
6,08/$7,2112
key.
7(67 &/26(
'580326,7,216(77,1*
$ 35,1702'(6(79$/8(
$ % &2/25

& 3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
When the deflection exceeds the range

between 2 lines in the printed result.
10-key
EXECUTE 94mm 94mm 94mm 94mm
OK
EXECUTE
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
NOTE: If there is a peculiar deflection other than the drum cycle
'580326,7,216(77,1* (94mm pitch), check the following conditions.
$ 35,1702'(GHJ
$ % &2/25 OPC drum drive section

& 3$3(5&6
Transfer belt drive section
Paper feed drive section
Each motor speed set value (Set value of SIM48-6)
(;(&87( 2.
2) Enter "1" with 10-key in the PRINT MODE of set item A, and
press [OK] key.
3) Select the paper feed stage with A3 (or 11 x 17) in it with
PAPER SELECT of set item C, and press [OK] key.
2 : '09/Sep
6) Change the set value of set item A.

ADJ 8 Print engine image When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
by 0.1mm.
magnification ratio adjustment When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
(BK) (Main scanning direction) ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
(Print engine section) (Manual value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
main scanning direction is decreased.
adjustment) Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred. ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. (Print engine section)
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the color shift occurs. * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-10. * When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
&/26( * When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main
$
$ %.0$* scanning direction) is performed.
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.

' 0$,1&6
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6 * When the duplex section is disassembled.
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8 * When the duplex section is installed or replaced.

, 68%0)7
- 68%&6
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
. 68%&6
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87( 2. * When the regist roller section is disassembled.
EXECUTE * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
EXECUTE
End of print * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
(Note)

Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the following
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
&/26( item.
$
$ %.0$* * Check that the print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
(BK) (main scanning direction) has been properly adjusted.

' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
, 68%0)7
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
- 68%&6
$ %.0$*
. 68%&6 $
% 0$,10)7
/ 68%/&& & 0$,1&6
2.
(;(&87(
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray. ) 0$,1&6
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll * 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
key. , 68%0)7
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. - 68%&6

. 68%&6
The check pattern is printed out. / 68%/&&

(;(&87( 2.
2 5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
0.5mm.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*
$
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6

' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
2 240 0.5mm ) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
- 68%&6
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
2) Select set item J with the scroll key and enter the value corre- 5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
sponding to the paper feed tray to be adjusted. rect position.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
Setting De-
Display/Item Content rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
range fault
all the following conditions are satisfied.
A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 100
magnification ratio BK
RV
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 2.0mm 2.0mm
value (Manual paper feed)
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value
(Tray 1)
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value
(Tray 2)
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value
(Tray 3)
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value
(Tray 4)
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value
(LCC)
H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (ADU)
FV
NOTE: Before execution of 2.0mm 2.0mm
this adjustment,
RV: REAR VOID AREA
check to insure that
FV: FRONT VOID AREA
the adjustment
items A - G have RV + FV 4.0mm
been properly RV = 2.0 2.0mm
adjusted. If not, this FV = 2.0 2.0mm
adjustment cannot
be made properly.
I SUB-MFT Registration Manual 1 - 99 50 6) Select the paper feed mode adjustment item (B - H) to be
motor ON paper feed adjusted with the scroll key.
J SUB-CS12 Timing Standard 1 - 99 50 7) Change the adjustment value.
adjustment tray Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
K SUB-CS34 DESK 1 - 99 50 [EXECUTE] key.
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
printed.
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
O PAPER MFT Tray Manual paper 1-6 1 2 When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
selection feed (CS1) tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
CS1 Tray 1 2 adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
CS2 Tray 2 3 When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
CS3 Tray 3 4 changed by about 0.1mm.
CS4 Tray 4 5 Repeat procedures 3) - 7) until the conditions of procedure 5)
LCC LCC 6 are satisfied.
P DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
NO print No 1 (NO)
the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
selection
3) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
cedure 2).
The adjustment pattern is printed.
8) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray, 10-A Image registration adjustment (Main
and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direc- scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
(Auto adjustment)
In this adjustment, the image registration adjustment in the main
scanning direction and that in the sub scanning direction are exe-
cuted simultaneously and automatically.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
&/1*

0/1*
</1*
5(*,67 '580326 $// (;(&87(
E X ECUTE Adjustment completed

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
12:(;(&87,1*
ADJ 10 Image registration adjustment

(Print engine section)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: (;(&87(
* When the color shift occurs. Abnormal end

* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.

* When the color image registration mistake in the main scanning 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
direction occurs.
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
* When the color image registration mistake in the sub scanning (55257211(5(037<
direction occurs
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed.
* When maintenance work is performed. (Replacement of the
OPC drum, the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt,
etc.)
* When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main
scanning direction) is performed. (;(&87(

* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 2) Press [REGIST] key to select the image registration adjust-
ment auto adjustment mode.
Note before adjustment
(Before execution of this adjustment, all the following adjustments
must have been completed.) [EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto
adjustment is started. After completion of the adjustment,
* Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit)
[EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjust-
* [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main scan- ment result is displayed.
ning direction) (print engine section)
It takes about 40 sec to complete the adjustment.
To check the auto adjustment result, use the manual image
Display/ Dis- De-
Content NOTE registration adjustment mode below.
Item play fault
MAIN C Registration 1.0 - 100 * Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual
F adjustment value 199.0 adjustment) (SIM50-20)
(Main scanning * Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual
direction) (Position adjustment) (SIM50-21)
of writing by cyan
laser is F side)
M Registration 1.0 - 100
10-B Image registration adjustment (Main
adjustment value 199.0 scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
(Main scanning
NOTE: If item "AR_AUTO" in SIM44-1 is 0 (Allows) and process
direction) (Position
of writing by control is executed, the image registration adjustment is
magenta laser is F executed automatically and updates the result in each
side) case.
Y Registration 1.0 - 100 In case of retaining the manual adjustment result, 1 must be set to
adjustment value 199.0 item "AR_AUTO" of SIM44-1 (inhibits).
(Main scanning
of writing by yellow
laser is F side)
MAIN C Registration 1.0 - 100 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
R adjustment value 199.0 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21

$ &<$1)5217
(Main scanning $ % &<$15($5
direction) (Position & 0$*(17$)5217
of writing by cyan ' 0$*(17$5($5
laser is R side) ( <(//2:)5217

) <(//2:5($5
M Registration 1.0 - 100
* 08/7,&2817
adjustment value 199.0
+ 3$3(5&6
(Main scanning , '83/(;12
of writing by
magenta laser is R
side) (;(&87( 2.
Y Registration 1.0 - 100

adjustment value 199.0 EXECUTE
10-key
(Main scanning
EXECUTE End of print
of writing by yellow
laser is R side)
SUB C Registration 1.0 - 100

adjustment value 199.0 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(Sub scanning 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21
direction) (Cyan $ &<$1)5217

$ % &<$15($5
drum to black drum)
& 0$*(17$)5217
M Registration 1.0 - 100 ' 0$*(17$5($5
adjustment value 199.0 ( <(//2:)5217
(Sub scanning ) <(//2:5($5
direction) (Magenta * 08/7,&2817
drum to cyan drum) + 3$3(5&6
, '83/(;12
Y Registration 1.0 - 100
adjustment value 199.0
(Sub scanning
direction) (Yellow (;(&87( 2.
drum to magenta
drum) 2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by
SKEW C Calculated result of -99.9 - If the value is plus, changing the value of set item H.
print skew amount 99.9 - R is displayed to 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(Cyan) left side of The image registration adjustment pattern in the main scan-
M Calculated result of -99.9 - numerical value. If
ning direction is printed.
print skew amount 99.9 - the value is minus,
(magenta) L is displayed to left
Y Calculated result of -99.9 - side of numerical
print skew amount 99.9 value. When the
(yellow) value is in the -4 to
+4 range, "OK" is
displayed to right
-
side of numerical
value. If not, "NG"
is displayed to right
side of numerical
value.
MAIN, SUB: The entered value after adjustment is displayed.

( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value.
Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2)
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
A A A
C C C
C C C
A A A
A: Rough adjustment pattern

B: Fine adjustment pattern
C: Adjustment range (0 1)
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat- Adjustment
tern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear Display/Item Content Default
value range
frame sides. C MAGENTA Image registration 1 - 199 100
Use the visually highest color density section as the center, (FRONT) adjustment value
and measure the shift amount. (Main scanning direction)
(Magenta) (F side)
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are
D MAGENTA Image registration 1 - 199 100
adjusted independently. (REAR) adjustment value
To check the image registration, therefore, check the front (Main scanning direction)
frame side and the rear frame side individually. (Magenta) (R side)
E YELLOW Image registration 1 - 199 100
Rough adjustment print Check that the rough adjustment print pattern (FRONT) adjustment value
pattern check is at the center for the rough adjustment (Main scanning direction)
reference pattern. (Yellow) (F side)
Fine adjustment print Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is F YELLOW Image registration 1 - 199 100
pattern check at the center for the fine adjustment reference (REAR) adjustment value
pattern. (Main scanning direction)
(Yellow) (R side)
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0
1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the adjust- Repeat procedures 3) - 4) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
ment is not required.) For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode adjustment value, refer to the following.
adjustment item A - F to be adjusted with the scroll key and
change the adjustment value to adjust. (Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of
the adjustment value)
Adjustment
Display/Item Content Default a) Measurement of the shift amount
value range
A CYAN Image registration 1 - 199 100 * Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
(FRONT) adjustment value Use the visually highest color density section as the
(Main scanning direction) center, and measure the shift amount.
(Cyan) (F side)
(Example)
B CYAN Image registration 1 - 199 100
(REAR) adjustment value The measurement value of the figure is "14.
(Main scanning direction)
(Cyan) (R side)
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern Measurement value: -54 (= -40 - 14)
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direc-
tion or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from -18 22
that.
-16 24
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark
as 40, the second line mark as 80, the third line mark as -14 26
120. The interval between the rough adjustment marks -40 -12 28
corresponds to 40.
(Example) -10 30
In the case of the figure, it is between 40 - 80 of the plus -8 32
polarity, and the measurement is "40.
-6 34
* The actual shift amount is the sum of the rough adjust-
ment reference shift amount and the fine adjustment -4 36
shift amount. -2 38
Shift amount (correction value) = Rough adjustment
0 0
shift amount + Fine adjustment shift amount.
When calculating, be careful of the plus polarity and the -38 2
minus polarity. -36 4
(Example)
-34 6
In the case of the figure, the total shift amount is 54.
Measurement value: 54 (= 40 + 14) -32 8
120 -120 -30 10
-28 12
-18 22
-26 14
-16 24
-24 16
-14 26
40 -12
-22 18
28
-10 30 The shift amount from the adjustment reference position
-8 32 is calculated for each of six kinds of adjustment items A
- F.
-6 34
b) Adjustment value calculation
-4 36 Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or
-2 38 from the current adjustment value, and the result value is
used as the new adjustment value.
0 0
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
-38 2 Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift
-36 4 amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)
-34 6
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value - Shift
-32 8 amount (correction value)
120 -120 -30 10
-28 12
-26 14
-24 16
-22 18
Yellow -18 22 -18 22
E -16 24 F -16 24
-14 26 -14 26
-12 28 -12 28
-10 30 -10 30
-8 32 -8 32
-6 34 -6 34
-4 36 -4 36
-2 38 -2 38
0 0 0 0
-38 2 -38 2
-36 4 -36 4
-34 6 -34 6
-32 8 -32 8
120 -120 -30 10 120 -120 -30 10
-28 12 -28 12
-26 14 -26 14
-24 16 -24 16
-22 18 -22 18
Magenta -18 22 -18 22
C -16 24 D -16 24
-14 26 -14 26
-12 28 -12 28
-10 30 -10 30
-8 32 -8 32
-6 34 -6 34
-4 36 -4 36
-2 38 -2 38
0 0 0 0
-38 2 -38 2
-36 4 -36 4
-34 6 -34 6
-32 8 -32 8
120 -120 -30 10 120 -120 -30 10
-28 12 -28 12
-26 14 -26 14
-24 16 -24 16
-22 18 -22 18
Cyan -18 22 -18 22
A -16 24 B -16 24
-14 26 -14 26
-12 28 -12 28
-10 30 -10 30
-8 32 -8 32
-6 34 -6 34
-4 36 -4 36
-2 38 -2 38
0 0 0 0
-38 2 -38 2
-36 4 -36 4
-34 6 -34 6
-32 8 -32 8
120 -120 -30 10 120 -120 -30 10
-28 12 -28 12
-26 14 -26 14
-24 16 -24 16
-22 18 -22 18
(Example) 1) Enter SIM50-21 mode.
Previous value before

New adjustment value
adjustment 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(176&$11,1*',5(&7,21
A: 100 A: 86 (=100-14) $ &<$1
B: 112 B: 88 (=112-24) $ % 0$*(17$
C: 95 C: 97 (=95+2) & <(//2:

' 08/7,&2817
D: 98 D: 120 (=98+22)
( 3$3(5&6
E: 102 E: 116 (=102+14) ) '83/(;12
F: 96 F: 140 (=96+44)
NOTE: If either of front or rear adjustment value is changed, the

other adjustment print pattern position may be varied. Be
careful of that.
(;(&87( 2.
10-C Image registration adjustment (Sub

scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 10-key EXECUTE
NOTE: If item "AR_AUTO" in SIM44-1 is 0 (Allows) and process EXECUTE or end of print
control is executed, the image registration adjustment is
executed automatically and updates the result in each
case.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
In case of retaining the manual adjustment result, 1 (inhib- 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(176&$11,1*',5(&7,21

$ &<$1
its) must be set to item "AR_AUTO" of SIM44-1. $ % 0$*(17$
& <(//2:

' 08/7,&2817
( 3$3(5&6
) '83/(;12
(;(&87( 2.
2) Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) or A3 (11 x 17)
paper in it by changing the value of set item H.
The sub scanning direction image registration adjustment pat-
tern is printed.
C B
A: Rough adjustment pattern B: Fine adjustment pattern C: Adjustment range
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat- Measurement value: -54 (= -40 - 14)
tern positions of each color.
A
Use the visually highest color density section as the center,
and measure the shift amount. -40 -120
Rough adjustment print pattern Check that the rough adjustment
check print pattern is at the center for the
rough adjustment reference
B
120
pattern.
Fine adjustment print pattern check Check that the fine adjustment -18 22
print pattern is at the center for the
fine adjustment reference pattern. -16 24
-14 26
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0
1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the adjust- -12 28
ment is not required.)
-10 30
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode
-8 32
adjustment item A - C to be adjusted with the scroll key, and
change the adjustment value to adjust. -6 34
-4 36
Adjustment
value range -2 38
A CYAN Image registration 1 - 199 100
adjustment value C 0 0
(Sub scanning direction) -38 2
(Cyan)
B MAGENTA Image registration 1 - 199 100 -36 4
adjustment value -34 6
(Sub scanning direction)
(Magenta) -32 8
C YELLOW Image registration 1 - 199 100 -30 10
adjustment value
(Sub scanning direction) -28 12
(Yellow)
-26 14
Repeat procedures 3) - 4) until a satisfactory result is obtained. -24 16
For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the
-22 18
adjustment value, refer to the following.
(Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of Measurement value: 54 (= 40 + 14)
the adjustment value)
A
a) Measurement of the shift amount
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern 40
-120
Use the visually highest color density section as the
center, and measure the shift amount.
(Example)
B
120
The measurement value of the figure is "14.
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern -18 22
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direc- -16 24
tion or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
-14 26
that.
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark -12 28
as 40, the second line mark as 80, the third line mark as -10 30
120. The interval between the rough adjustment marks
-8 32
corresponds to 40.
(Example) -6 34
In the case of the figure, it is between 40 - 80 of the plus -4 36
polarity, and the measurement is "40.
-2 38
A: Rough adjustment pattern
B: Fine adjustment pattern C 0 0
C: Adjustment range -38 2
The shift amount is calculated from the adjustment ref- -36 4
erence position for each of the three adjustment items A
-34 6
- C.
-32 8
-30 10
-28 12
-26 14
-24 16
-22 18
b) Adjustment value calculation
Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or
from the current adjustment value, and the result value is
used as the new adjustment value.
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift
amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value - Shift
amount (correction value)
A B C
-120 -120 -120
120 120 120

-18 22 -18 22 -18 22
-16 24 -16 24 -16 24
-14 26 -14 26 -14 26
-12 28 -12 28 -12 28
-10 30 -10 30 -10 30
-8 32 -8 32 -8 32
-6 34 -6 34 -6 34
-4 36 -4 36 -4 36
-2 38 -2 38 -2 38
0 0 0 0 0 0
-38 2 -38 2 -38 2
-36 4 -36 3 -36 4
-34 6 -34 6 -34 6
-32 8 -32 8 -32 8
-30 10 -30 10 -30 10
-28 12 -28 12 -28 12
-26 14 -26 14 -26 14
-24 16 -24 16 -24 16
-22 18 -22 18 -22 18
Previous value before

New adjustment value
adjustment
A: 100 A: 46 (=100-54)
B: 112 B: 126 (=112+14)
C: 95 C: 125 (=95+30)
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
ADJ 11 Scan image distortion of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.
adjustment 5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: B.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce-
dures, perform the following procedures.
* When the copy image is distorted.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
11-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
adjustment unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
glass. (For details, refer to [C]-3.) frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
1) Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire. unit drive pulley fixing screw.
6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper. fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit B.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
11-B Scan image (sub scanning direction) pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
distortion adjustment do.)
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L L
L = 10mm
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-

ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference 5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
position as shown below.) With the document cover open, scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan-
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)

is satisfied.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform "ADJ 11D Scan image distortion
adjustment (whole scanner unit).
11-C Scan image (main scanning direction)

distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L
3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.
If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
La Lb
L L
L = 10mm
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform 2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
the following procedures. ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction. 7) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-
If the four angles of the rectangle on the copy are right angles, ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
there is no distortion and therefore no further steps are that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
needed. specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted
with the above procedures, perform ADJ 11D Scan image dis-
tortion adjustment (whole scanner unit).
11-D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole

scanner unit)
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
adjusted with ADJ 11A, ADJ 11B, and ADJ 11C related to the scan
image distortion adjustment.
Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the
the following procedure. scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
and right-hand side images distortions. 1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
Lc Lc
Copy A Copy B
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left
Lc Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.

(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6). A A
A A
If not, perform the following procedures.
5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side.
ADJ 12 Scan image focus adjustment

(CCD unit position adjustment)
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the * When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
ning direction is not properly adjusted.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
1) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode. 9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1
$ % &&'68%
& 63)0$,1
' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%
2.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).

Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
replaced.
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
* Never loosen the screws marked with X.

4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper. If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
copy mode, and make a copy. problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
length in terms of length. 11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main direction) to change the installing position.
scanning direction from the following formula. When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100% than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
(Example) One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
copy image. scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction * Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1 in procedure 9).
100mm scale
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110 A
1.0mm
Copy image
(1mm (1%)
10 20 90 100 110
shorter than 12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
the original) If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
following procedures.
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 1.0%)
7) Remove the document table glass. and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
8) Remove the dark box cover. cal system structure.
ADJ 13 RSPF parallelism adjustment 13-A RSPF height adjustment (RSPF mode)
1) Make an RSPF height adjustment sheet
(RSPF mode) Cut copy paper in the longitudinal direction.
20mm
A4/Letter size
2) Perform the adjustment according to the flowchart below.
<Flow chart> <Work procedure>

a) Check section A.
Start of the
adjustment Place the RSPF height adjustment sheet between section A
and the SPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a), and
close the RSPF unit.
Slowly pull out the RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out
the RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check section A.
* Be careful not to cover the convex section of the glass
holding resin surface with the height adjustment sheet.
A
Is No The section
there a resist- A is lowered
ance? too much. a
Yes
b) If it cannot be pulled out, turn the section D clockwise and

adjust in order to lift the RSPF unit.
Adjust hinge D
until there is a If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the section D
resistance in counterclockwise and adjust in order to move down the RSPF
section A.
(Counter-
unit.
clockwise)
Turn the hinge

D to lift the
RSPF so that
there is a
resistance in D
the section A.
(Clockwise)
c) Adjust the section F.
Use a clearance gauge to check to confirm that the clearance
in the section F is 4.9mm - 5.5mm.
If not, turn the section E to adjust.
Adjust the
* Insert a clearance gauge in the range of 20mm from the
section F so that
the clearance is edge (a) of the right lower cover of the base.
4.9mm - 5.5mm.
No
4.9 - 5.5mm
Is there a
resistance in the
section B?
Yes F
Increase the a
clearance in
the section F
until there is a
resistance in 20mm
the section B.
However, the
max. is 5.5mm.
* Turn section E clockwise to lift the RSPF unit. Turn it

counterclockwise to move down the RSPF unit.
d) Check section B.
Place the RSPF height adjustment sheet between section B
and the SPF glass height adjustment resin surface (a), and
close the RSPF unit.
Slowly pull out the RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check section B.
Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out
the RSPF height adjustment sheet. (If the boss in section B is
in contact, it is O.K.)
* Be careful not to put the book sensor (b) on the height
adjustment sheet.
Is b
there a re- No
sistance?
Yes
e) If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the hinge in

section E clockwise to adjust.
f) Check section C.
Adjust hinge
E until the
separation in
section C is
Check section C. deleted.
(Counter-
clockwise)
* The bosses in section A

Is there No and B are excessively b
a separating
section.
pressed. (The right C
side is separating.)
Yes
End of the
adjustment
C
b
5) Close the RSPF unit, and loosen the hex nut of the RSPF
13-B RSPF diagonal adjustment (RSPF mode) diagonal adjustment screw section.
1) Set a test chart (A3) on the RSPF document tray, and make a Turn the hex wrench of the RSPF skew adjustment screw to
copy. adjust the skew.
2) Measure (a) and (b) on the copied test chart. If (a) - (b) =
1mm or more, perform the diagonal adjustment.
a 1
TEST CHART 2
A3 size
* In the case of (A), turn the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw

b counterclockwise.
In the case of (B), turn the RSPF diagonal adjustment screw
clockwise.
3) Remove the hex nut cover in the RSPF diagonal adjustment
screw section.
A B
4) Raise the RSPF unit upright, and loosen the fixing screw of the
hinge.
6) Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test
2
chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a)-
(b)=1mm or less) is satisfied.
2
1 7) Tighten the hinge section fixing screw which was loosened in
the procedure 4) to tighten the hinge section.
ADJ 14 Scan image magnification ratio 14-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scanning direction) (Document table
adjustment (Document table mode)
mode) 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: below.
* When the copy image magnification ratio in the sub scanning
direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced. 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
* When a U2 trouble occurs.

* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
14-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(Main scanning direction) (Document table
mode)
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
2) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.

10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1
$ % &&'68%
& 63)0$,1
' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%
2.
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17 py magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)
$ &&'0$,1 tion ratio 100%
$
Original dimension
% &&'68%
& 63)0$,1
' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1 (Example 1)

) 63)%68% Copy A
10 20 90 100 110
(Shorter than
the original)
2.
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
(Example 2)
1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
Copy B
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following (Longer than 10 20 90 100 110
procedure. the original)
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
tion ratio is increased.
range (100 1.0%).
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
is within the specified range (100 1.0%). procedure.
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. 11) Change the mode to "F: SPFB (SUB)." The current magnifica-
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio correction value in the back surface sub scanning
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased. direction is displayed in 2 digits on the display section.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi- 12) Enter a set value and press [OK] key. The correction value is
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%. saved and a copy is made.
<Adjustment specifications>
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
Specifi Setting
within the specified range (100 1.0%). Mode
cations
SIM Set value
range
Magnifi- Normal SIM.48-1 Add 1: 1 - 99
cation ratio 1.0% <Main scanning 0.1% enlarged.
ADJ 15 Scan image magnification ratio correction direction> Subtract 1:
adjustment C: Front surface 0.1% reduced.
adjustment (Main/sub scanning E: Back surface Default: 50
direction) (RSPF mode) <Sub scanning
direction>
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, the CCD unit must have been D: Front surface
properly installed. To execute this adjustment, the OC F: Back surface
mode adjustment when copying must have been com-
pleted.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below, and make a normal copy to make a test chart.
ADJ 16 Scan image off-center
adjustment
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the RSPF section is disassembled.
* When the RSPF unit is installed.
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
NOTE: Since the copied scale is used as a test chart,
place the scale in parallel to the sides.
2) Set the test chart on the RSPF, and make a normal copy.
16-A Scan image off-center (Document table
3) Compare the outputted copy with the test chart. If it is judged
mode)
from comparison that an adjustment is required, perform the
following procedures. 1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by your self) in the
adjustment mode (document table or RSPF).
4) Execute SIM48-1.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1
$ % &&'68% A
& 63)0$,1
' 63)68%

( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%
A=B
B
2.
5) Change the mode to "C: SPF (MAIN)." The current magnifica-

tion ratio correction value is displayed in 2 digits on the display
section.
6) Enter a set value and press [OK] key. The correction value is
saved and a copy is made.
7) Change the mode to "E: SPFB (MAIN)." The current magnifi-
cation ratio correction value is displayed in 2 digits on the dis-
play section.
9) Change the mode to "D: SPF (SUB)." The current magnifica-
tion ratio correction value is displayed in 2 digits on the display
section.
2) Check the copy image center position.
If A - B = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required. 16-B Scan image off-center (RSPF mode)
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, the paper off-center must have
been adjusted properly.
1) Set the test chart for center position adjustment (which is
made by yourself) on the RSPF.
A' <Adjustment specifications>
Draw a straight line on paper in the scanning direction.
2) Make a normal copy from the manual paper feed tray. Com-
pare the printed copy and the test chart. If an adjustment is
A' - B' = 1.0mm required, perform the following procedures.
(100%) 3) Execute SIM50-12.
B'

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 2&
$ % 63)6,'(
& 63)6,'(
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedures.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 2& 2.
$ % 63)6,'(
& 63)6,'(

4) Change the mode to "B: SPF (SIDE1)." The current off-center
adjustment value is displayed in 2 digits on the display section.
5) Enter a set value and press [START] key. The correction value
is saved and a copy is made.
6) Change the mode to "C: SPF (SIDE2)." The current back sur-
face off-center adjustment value is displayed in 2 digits on the
display section.
2. 7) Enter a set value and press [OK] key. The correction value is
4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key. <Adjustment specifications>
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set. Specifi- Setting
Mode SIM Set value
cations range
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
Document Center SIM50-12 Add 1: 1 - 99
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm. off-center position B: Front surface Shift to R side
6) Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the adjustment (Default): C: Back surface by 0.1mm.
copy mode and make a copy. 3750 pixel Subtract 1:
Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until the above condition is Shift to F side by
0.1mm.
satisfied.
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below
ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) are in the range of the standard values.
adjustment (Print engine Content

Standard adjustment
value
section) X Lead edge void area 3.0 1.0mm
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 2.0mm
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled. Z1
2.0 2.0mm
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
X
* When the regist roller section is disassembled. 3.0 1.0mm Y
* U2 trouble has occurred. 2.0 - 5.0mm
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 8
Print image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main
scanning direction) (Print engine section) in advance.
Z2

2.0 2.0mm
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired
$
% 0$,10)7 condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
& 0$,1&6

' 0$,1&6
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
( 0$,1&6 5) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-1.
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
- 68%&6
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
. 68%&6
$ 55&$
/ 68%/&& $ % 55&%&6
(;(&87( 2.
& 55&%&6
' 55&%/&&
( 55&%0)7
EXECUTE ) 55&%$'8
EXECUTE * /($'
+ 6,'(
End of print
, '(1$
- '(1%
. )52175($5

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
2.
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*
$
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
10-key

' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
OK
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8

, 68%0)7 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
- 68%&6 /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(

$ 55&$
. 68%&6
$ % 55&%&6
/ 68%/&&
& 55&%&6
(;(&87( 2.
' 55&%/&&
( 55&%0)7
2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper to all the trays, and select the set item ) 55&%$'8
J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the * /($'
adjustment target paper feed tray. + 6,'(
, '(1$
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. - '(1%
The adjustment pattern is printed. . )52175($5
2.
2 : '09/Sep
6) Select the adjustment item I, J, K with the scroll key, and enter
the adjustment value and press [OK] key. ADJ 18 Copy image position, image
Setting De- loss adjustment
Display/Item Content
range fault
A Lead RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50 18-A Copy image position, image loss
edge reference position
adjust- (OC)
adjustment (Document table mode)
B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
value motor ON Tray * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
C RRCB-CS34 timing Desk 1 - 99 50
D RRCB-LCC adjust- LCC 1 - 99 50
ment * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
E RRCB-MFT Manual 1 - 99 50
paper * When the regist roller section is disassembled.
feed * U2 trouble has occurred.
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
loss area loss area setting * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
H setting SIDE Side image loss area 0 - 99 20 * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
value adjustment * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
I Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjust- adjustment NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that
J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 the ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine
2
adjustment section) has been completed normally.
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
REAR area adjustment below.
L Off-center OFSET_OC OC document off- 1 - 99 50 Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
adjus- center adjustment
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
tment
plate.
M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
ratio adjustment (CCD) edge can be seen.
correction
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
scanning correction value
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50

value value
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value
S DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
T DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.
NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related
as follows:
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item
N, O, P, Q, R, S, T (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
The adjustment item J (DENB) have a effect on the paper
of all paper feed tray.
That is, adjustment value of item N, O, P, Q, R, S, T
(DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to adjustment item J (DENB) for
each paper tray.
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to check
that the void area is within the specified range.
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if the
lead edge void area is not within the specified range, change the
adjustment value of RRCB-XXX (item B, C, D, E, F) of SIM 50-1.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
2 : '09/Sep
2) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-1. Setting De-

range fault
Sub DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 50

R 1 - 99
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( scanning value
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( S direction DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
$
$ 55&$
print area DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50
% 55&%&6
T correction
& 55&%&6
' 55&%/&&
value
( 55&%0)7
) 55&%$'8
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
* /($'
Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the
+ 6,'(
, '(1$
copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200%
- '(1% mode.
. )52175($5
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
2.
image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
copy scale.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied
OK in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is

obtained.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
Scale image 3.0mm position
$ 55&$
$ Paper lead
% 55&%&6
edge
& 55&%&6
' 55&%/&&
( 55&%0)7
) 55&%$'8
* /($'
+ 6,'(
100%
, '(1$ 5mm 10mm
- '(1%
. )52175($5
2.
200%
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values. 5mm 10mm
Setting De-
range fault
A Lead RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50 5) Image loss adjustment
edge reference position
adjust- (OC)
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
B ment RRCB-CS12 Standard 1 - 99 50
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in
value Tray the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value,
C RRCB-CS34 Resist Desk 1 - 99 50 change these adjustment items.
motor ON
D RRCB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
timing Paper lead edge
RRCB-MFT adjust- Manual 1 - 99 50
E paper
ment
feed
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50 Copy area
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30 Maginification ratio : 400%
loss area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss area 0 - 99 20
value adjustment 1 2 3 4
I Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30 5mm 10mm
adjust- adjustment
2 J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment Adjust De- Standard
Display
L Off-center OFSET_OC OC document off- 1 - 99 Content ment fault adjustment
/Item
adjust- center adjustment 50 range value
ment LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 30 3.0
M Magnifica SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 adjustment image loss 1.0mm
tion ratio SPEED_OC magnification ratio adjustment
correction adjustment (CCD) SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0
Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50 loss adjustment 1.0mm
N
direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
O 1 - 99 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
print area value
correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 50 image loss is decreased.
P value 1 - 99
value When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 50 changed by 0.1mm.
Q 1 - 99
value
2 : '09/Sep
[Note]
18-B Adjust the original scan start position
After completion of the RSPF scan position adjustment, exe-
(Adjust the scanner read position in RSPF- cute the RSPF lead edge adjustment (for both sides).
mode front face scan) (RSPF mode) Repeat the above adjustments until an acceptable result is
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: obtained.
* The scan control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. 18-C Copy image position, image loss
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled. adjustment (RSPF mode)
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced. 1) Place a scale on the OC table as shown in the figure below.
* The RSPF section has been disassembled.
* The RSPF unit has been replaced.
This adjustment is intended to adjust the scanner read position in
RSPF-mode front face scan.
An incorrect adjustment would deviate the scanner stop position
from the required position, thus possibly causing a shadow of the
original table to appear at the leading edge of an image generated
by RSPF (front-face) mode scan.
1) Make a copy in RSPF (front-face) mode, and make sure that
the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image is
NOTE: Since the copied scale is used as a test chart,
free from shadows. place the scale in parallel to the sides.
2) Make a copy. Use the output copy as the original document,

and make a copy of it from the RSPF.
3) Check the output result. If an adjustment is required, perform
Papar lead edge the following procedures.
4) Execute SIM50-6.
Image area

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
$ 6,'(
$
% 6,'(
Shadow image of RSPF & /($'B('*(6,'(
' )5217B5($56,'(

( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
) /($'B('*(6,'(

* )5217B5($56,'(
If the printed image at the leading edge of the copied image + 75$,/B('*(6,'(
contains a shadow of the original table, then do the following , 2)6(7B63)
steps. - 2)6(7B63)

. 6&$1B63(('B63)
2) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 53-8. Press the / 6&$1B63(('B63)
[MANUAL] key. 2.
5) Set the RSPF lead edge position set value so that an image

similar to the image adjusted in the previous OC image lead
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
edge position is outputted.
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
$872 0$18$/ <Set range and default value of each set value>
De-
Setting
Item Display Item Descriptions fault
range
value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
start position
adjustment (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
start position
3) Enter the adjustment value and press the Start key. adjustment (CCD)
<<Description of adjustment display>> C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
Set Default quantity quantity setting
Item Display item Description D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
range value
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss
2 A ADJUST VALUE RSPF scan position 1 - 99 25
adjustment quantity setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 20 30
When the set value is increased by 1, the distance from the (SIDE1) edge image loss
home position to the RSPF scan position is increased. quantity setting
When the set value is changed by 1, the position is shifted
by 0.1mm.
* Since the RSPF scan position distance are changed, RRCA
is not changed by the adjustment value.
2 : '09/Sep
De- 2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value
Setting corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
Item Display Item Descriptions fault
range
value in it.
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss Setting
quantity quantity setting range
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20 A DEN-C Printer lead edge 1 - 99 30
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss image position
quantity setting adjustment
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 20 30 B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
(SIDE2) edge image loss adjustment
quantity setting C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
area adjustment
A, B: D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge 1 - 99 50
The greater the value is, the slower the scanning timing is. void area adjustment
C - H: correction value
The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the image loss is. E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
A - H:
correction value
1STEP=0.1mm
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
The SPF rear edge image loss is provided against the shade.
area adjustment
The default value is 0. correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
ADJ 19 Print lead edge image position correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
adjustment (Printer mode) area adjustment
(Print engine section) correction value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void 1 - 99 50
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: area adjustment
* When the regist roller section is disassembled. correction value
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void 1 - 99 50 2
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
area adjustment
* U2 trouble has occurred. correction value
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
selection paper feed
NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the CS1 Tray 1 2
lead edge void area to greater than the standard value CS2 Tray 2 3
(3mm) in the printer mode. CS3 Tray 3 4
1) Enter the simulation 50-5 mode. CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6

M DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( NO print No 1
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5 selection
$ '(1&
$ % '(1%
& )52175($5
' '(1%0)7 The adjustment pattern is printed.
( '(1%&6
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
) '(1%&6
* '(1%&6
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
+ '(1%&6 in the standard adjustment value range.
, '(1%/&&
- '(1%$'8
Standard adjustment value: 3.0 2.0mm
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
3.0 2.0mm

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$ '(1&
$ % '(1%
& )52175($5

' '(1%0)7
( '(1%&6
) '(1%&6
* '(1%&6
+ '(1%&6
, '(1%/&&
- '(1%$'8
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
2 : '09/Sep
5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust- (The following items affect the copy color balance/density
ment item DENC with the scroll key. adjustment, but it is not required to adjust them frequently.
6) Change the adjustment value. When, however, a trouble occurs, check and adjust them.)
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the 1) The following items must be adjusted properly.
[EXECUTE] key.
Job
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is Adjustment item list Simulation
No
printed. ADJ Adjust the developing doctor gap
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the 1
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When ADJ Adjust the developing roller main pole position
the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased. 2
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed ADJ Adjusting high ADJ Adjust the main charger 8-2
4 voltage values 4A grid voltage
by about 0.1mm.
ADJ Adjust the developing 8-1
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied. 4B bias voltage
ADJ Transfer voltage 8-6
4C adjustment
ADJ 20 Copy color balance/density ADJ Scan image focus adjustment
12 (CCD unit position adjustment)
adjustment ADJ CCD gamma adjustment 63-3
20A (CCD calibration)
(1) Note before execution of the copy color balance/density (Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy
adjustment color balance/density adjustment)
* After completion of this adjustment, the printer color balance/ Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy color
density adjustment must be executed. balance/density adjustment depend on the machine status and the
* Requisite conditions before execution of the copy color balance/ servicing conditions.
density adjustment Follow the flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment
Before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment, procedures depending on the actual conditions.
check to insure that the adjustments which affect the copy color There are following four, major cases.
balance/density adjustment have been completed.
1) When installing
The importance levels of them are shown below.
2) When a periodic maintenance is performed.
(The following items affect the copy color balance/density
3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
adjustment, and must be checked and adjusted before execu-
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
tion of the image quality adjustments.)
4) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
1) The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly.
(Without replacement of a consumable part)
Job Simulation (2) Copy color balance and density check
Adjustment Item List
No (Note)
ADJ Image density ADJ Color image sensor 44-13 Before checking the copy color balance and density, be sure to
5 sensor, image 5A calibration
execute the following jobs.
registration sensor ADJ Color image density 44-2
adjustment 5B sensor, black image * Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
density sensor, image forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
registration sensor * Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
adjustment
(Method)
ADJ Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) 64-1/61-4
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy
6
of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
ADJ OPC drum phase ADJ OPC drum phase 50-22
0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11), and check that 2
7 adjustment 7A adjustment
(Auto adjustment) they are proper.
ADJ OPC drum phase 44-31 a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the
7B adjustment color copy mode
(Manual adjustment) To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
ADJ Image registration ADJ Image registration 50-22 chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart
10 adjustment (Print 10A adjustment
(UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/ 2
engine section) (Main scanning
UKOG-0326FC11). Set the copy density level to "3" in the Text/
direction, sub
scanning direction) Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make a copy.
(Auto adjustment) At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjust-
ADJ Image registration 50-20 ment mode must be set to the default (center).
10B adjustment In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color.
(Main scanning
direction) b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
(Manual adjustment) To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ).
ADJ Image registration 50-21 Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo
10C adjustment mode (Manual).
(Sub scanning
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjust-
direction)
ment mode must be set to the default (center).
(Manual adjustment)
2 : '09/Sep
[Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)]

20-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
the following conditions. (Normal document copy mode)
NOTE: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326 * When the CCD unit is replaced.
2
FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check. * When a U2 trouble is occurred.
(Color copy) * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Patch 1 is
slightly copied.
SHARP gray chart (1) Note before adjustment
SHARP GRAY CHART 1) Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
surface are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
Patch 2 is copied.
free from dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
(Black-and-white copy) If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
Patch 2 is
slightly copied.
SHARP gray chart (2) Adjustment procedures
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
ment table.
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
Patch 3 is copied.
the left side.
Patch 1 is not copied.
[Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/

2 UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)]
In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
check to insure the following conditions.
(Color copy)
Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
The densities of patches 1 - 6 of Patch 7 is slightly

each color are properly balanced. copied or not copied.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
table.
UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment, 20-B Copy color balance adjustment
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment, (Auto adjustment)
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( * The CCD unit has been replaced.
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&8$872$'-8670(17
2& * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.

&&&555
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
000***
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
<<<%%%
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
a. General
% * 5 (;(&87(
2&
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the copy density of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black with SIM 46-
NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC 24 or the user program automatically.
Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet (When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such of all the copy modes are revised.)
as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature
and low humidity.
There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
is used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the copy color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto

adjustment)
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop-
erly.
3) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
2 : '09/Sep
c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-24) procedure flowchart
Start
Execute ADJ20B Copy color balance and density adjustment

(automatic density).
Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A3 (11 x 17) paper.

(Automatic selection)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory
target or the service target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automati-
cally performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the half tone image correction
is automatically performed. Automatic color balance target change
Cancel SIM46-24 Change the factory color balance and

density target which is available in 3
kinds. (SIM63-11)
Check the color balance and density adjustment result. NO
2 Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326

FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, Though the factory
color balance and
and check the copy color balance and density.
density target (available
in 3 kinds) is changed,
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the satisfactory color balance
patch color balance and density in the process gray. (If the color bal- and density are not obtain-
ed (SIM63-11), or the
ance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.) service target is
selected.
Are the color balance and den- NO YES

sity at the satisfactory level?
Execute ADJ20C (Manual copy color balance

YES and density adjustment). (SIM46-21/44-21).
(*2)
Check that the initial setting of the half tone image correction was properly
performed. (*3) *1:
When the copy color balance and density are
Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction. customized and registered as the service
(SIM44-21) target, select the service target.
*2:
If satisfactory color balance and density are
Execute the half tone image correction. (SIM44-26) not obtained with ADJ20C (Manual copy
color balance and density adjustment)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 (SIM46-21/44-21), check the print engine for
2 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in any problems.
the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the color balance *3:
and density. If the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is not properly made, satisfactory
color balance and density cannot be
obtained. In this case, check the print engine
NO Are the color balance and den- for any problems.
sity at the satisfactory level? *4:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the
printed check pattern, check the print engine
YES for any problems.
End
1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. Remark:
(Descriptions on [FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key in the
color balance auto adjustment menu.)

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
7(67
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
[FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key are used to select one of
)257+,6$'-8670(17 the above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
63-11.)
Service target color balance: The color balance can be cus-
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable)
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
(;(&87(
target gamma data are the same.
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
selected.) can be registered with SIM 63-7.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the
procedure 2) on the document table. half tone image correction is performed.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed

6,08/$7,2112
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper. 7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
played. This operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
4) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
[EXECUTE] key.
MODE" is displayed.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
balance, select the service target. &203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(
The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed

to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
2 : '09/Sep
6) Check the color balance and density.

There are following three methods in the color balance and
density check.
Low density High density
(Method 1)
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch Y
image is within the following specifications.
M
C
Y Bk
CMY
M blend
Q
(Max)
C A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Bk
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C,
Q and BK is very slightly copied.
(Max)
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Patch A of each of Y, M, C,
and BK are not copied.
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK

2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
and BK is very slightly copied. The patch density is changed gradually.
Patch A of each of Y, M, C, If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
and BK are not copied.
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
1) The max. density section is not blurred. adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. converted into the natural gray color balance by the color cor-
The patch density is changed gradually. rection table in an actual copy mode.
(When the color balance target is DEF 1.)
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed. (Method 3)
The density level of each color must be almost at the same Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
level. 0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/ 2
Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance and
Patch B may not be copied.
density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance and den-
Patch A must not be copied. sity check.)
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
(Method 2) from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21 procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance 63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
checked more precisely. dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
7) Use SIM44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution)
Enter the SIM44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
(;(&87(
2 : '09/Sep
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-

pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. 20-C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
(Normal end (Auto transition)) This adjustment is needed in the following situations:

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( replaced.
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7
&203/(7(
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
5(68/7 (;(&87(
a. General
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
(Abnormal end (Auto transition))
adjust the copy density (15 point for each color) of CMYK. This is
used at the following situation. When the result of auto adjustment

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
described above is not existing within the range of reference. When
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 a fine adjustment is required. When there is request from the user
(55256(1625$'-8670(17
for changing (customizing) the color balance.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)

(;(&87(
1) The print engine section must have been properly adjusted.
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. 2) The CCD gamma must have been properly adjusted.
8) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG- 3) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
2 0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/
Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance and
sity check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
form the following procedures.
9) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
10) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
2 0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/
Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance/
sity check.)
Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy
color balance and density are not in the specified range, there may
be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments,
and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the
beginning.
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results of the
copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ 20C) (Manual
adjustment).
2 : '09/Sep
Start
Execute ADJ21B (Copy color balance and density adjustment)

(Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM46-21 mode, and select A3 (11 " x 17 ") paper.
(Automatic selection)
Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Refer to the printed adjustment check pattern, and select a

target adjustment color with the color keys (C, M, Y, K).
Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key.
Enter the adjustment value with 10 key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Check the patch color balance and density in the process

gray of the color balance check pattern. (If the gray color is
slightly shifted to Magenta, the color balance is properly
adjusted.)
Are the color balance NO

and density at the sati-
sfactory level?
YES
Cancel the SIM46-21 mode.
Perform the initial setting of the half tone image correction.

(SIM44-21)
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the
test chart. (*1)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11
2 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in
the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the color balance
and density.

sfactory level?
YES
Check to confirm that the initial setting of the half tone image correction is
properly set. (*2)
Perform the initial setting of the half tone image correction.

(SIM44-21)
Perform the half tone image correction. (SIM44-26)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11

2 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in
the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the color balance
and density. *1:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print
engine for any problems.
NO Are the color balance *2:
and density at the sati- If the initial setting of the half tone image
sfactory level? correction is not properly adjusted, satisfactory
color balance and density cannot be obtained. In
YES this case, check the print engine for any problems.
Set the service target for the automatic copy color balance
adjustment. (SIM63-7)
End
2 : '09/Sep
1) Enter the SIM46-21 mode. Patch B may not be copied.

Patch A must not be copied.

When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@ request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
$ 32,17 color balance stated above.
$ % 32,17
& 32,17

If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
' 32,17 mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
( 32,17
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17 converted into the natural gray color balance by the color cor-
, 32,17
rection table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance
- 32,17
. 32,17
target is DEF 1.)
/ 32,17 4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
C 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 - 755 (1 - 999).
10-key EXECUTE When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance
EXECUTE End of print and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To

decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17
& 32,17

' 32,17
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
( 32,17 and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
) 32,17
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
* 32,17
+ 32,17 Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
, 32,17 way of adjustment.
- 32,17
. 32,17 Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
/ 32,17 cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically 6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
selected.) 0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG- 2
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. 0326FC11) and a user's document according to necessity in
the normal copy mode, the text/Printed Photo mode (Manual)
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
to check the adjustment result.
balance is satisfactory.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)
If not, execute the following procedures.
7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)


6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
; 728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
$M
CMY
(;(&87(
Blend
3 It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(Normal end (Auto transition))
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3) Patch A of each of Y, M, C, +$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
and BK are not copied. 5(68/7

&203/(7(
4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK

The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually.

not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level. 5(68/7 (;(&87(
2 : '09/Sep
(Abnormal end (Auto transition)) (Abnormal end (Auto transition))

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7 (55256(1625$'-8670(17
(5525.&0<
(;(&87(
5(68/7 (;(&87(
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment 9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
data as the reference data for the half tone correction. 0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG- 2
Immediately after execution of ADJ 20C (Color balance adjust- 0326FC11) and a user's document according to necessity in
ment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this proce- the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and check the adjust-
dure. ment result again. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/
density check.)
When ADJ 20B (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed
with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed. If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
specified level, there may be another cause.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the
operation is started. Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.
from the beginning.
(Forcible execution)
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. NOTE: If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register
the color balance as the service target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.

If the customized color balance is registered as the service
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be
7(67
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 made in the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service tar-
get color balance in the automatic color balance adjust-
ment mode to make an adjustment to the similar color
balance as the registered color balance.
(Gamma setting of auto color balance adjustment service color bal-
ance target)
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
(;(&87(
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com- There are following three kinds of the target.
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. Factory color balance (gamma) target
(Normal end (Auto transition)) Service color balance (gamma) target
User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
to a desired level.
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust-
&203/(7(
ment) is executed with SIM 46-21).
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
5(68/7 (;(&87(
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as

improper.
Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
Type Descriptions
Type Descriptions
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
balance (gamma) (gamma) target When the service color balance
balance (gamma) and each of them is specified according to the
target target is changed, this color balance target is also
target machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
changed accordingly.
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
balance (gamma) customize the color balance to user's desired
target level. In advance, the user's unique color balance
must be registered as the service color balance
target. The above registration (setting) is made
by the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to adjust the
color balance and with SIM 63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment. When,
therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the user's
color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance
is set to the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11. The default setting (factory setting) of
the color balance is same as the factory color
balance target. (Emphasized on color
reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
color balance to the factory color balance target
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Factory color balance

Use SIM 63-11 to select one of the three target (DEF1) = Service color balance
target Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 63-7 to register it.
target (DEF2)
target (DEF3) Factory color balance Execute SIM 63-8.
target
(one of DEF1 - 3)
= Service color balance
target (The service color balance target is the
same as the factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target
Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
+b* Direction of Yellow SIM63-8

Factory color balance target
Factory color balance target (DEF1) = Service color balance
Hue (DEF1) target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default
DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
(A) operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction
of Red DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target is
selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color correction
table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue
SIM63-8
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
ment (SIM 46-24). judges as follows.
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. the service color balance target in SIM 46-24 is unsatisfactory or
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to abnormal.
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
SIM 63-11. adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore, target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
changed accordingly. made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
purpose of registration) b. Setting procedure
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is (Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the
customized with SIM 46-21. If the color balance is not customized, service color balance target)
this procedure is not required.
1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man- adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7 (adjustment pattern).
to register the service color balance target data by using adjust-
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
ment pattern that was printed in this mode.
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with adjustment.
SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the 2) Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
6,08/$7,2112
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it 7(67
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
&/26(
from discoloration and dirt. %&'()
*+,-.
The service color balance target data are basically registered 012
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
46-21.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
. & 0 < 6(783
3) Press [SETUP] key. * When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly be sure to execute this procedure.
adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment 1) Enter the SIM 63-8 mode.
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 20C) on the document
table.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(77,1*6(59,&(
64-7 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the
printed pattern is normal.
(When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
SIM 64-7, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press
[EXECUTE] key to print.)
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
(adjustment pattern). 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.

If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with 3) Press [YES] key.
SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe- The service color balance target and the color balance target for
cute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data. the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. ance as the factory color balance target.
20-D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
&/26(
mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally
6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
copy by each the copy mode individually.
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
copy mode individually.
(;(&87( * U2 trouble has occurred.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again. The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
from the user, execute this adjustment.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 1) Enter the SIM 46-1 mode.
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@
$ $872
$ % 7(;7
& 7(;735,17('3+272

' 7(;73+272
( 35,17('3+272
) 3+272*5$3+
* 0$3
+ /,*+7
, 7(;7&23<72&23<
(;(&87( - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color / 7(;7&2/25721((1+$1&(0(17
(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.

/2: +,*+ 2.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q

(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
judged as abnormal. OK
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
7) Press [OK] key.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust- (;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar- $

$ $872
% 7(;7
get. & 7(;735,17('3+272
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the color ' 7(;73+272
( 35,17('3+272
balance target for the user color balance adjustment to the same ) 3+272*5$3+
color balance as the factory color balance target) * 0$3
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance + /,*+7
, 7(;7&23<72&23<

was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar- . 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
get with SIM 63-7. / 7(;7&2/25721((1+$1&(0(17

/2: +,*+ 2.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor-
mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result
Setting
Display/Item Content Default Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter-
range
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
HIGH 1 - 99 50 checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 obtained.
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 20-E Copy density adjustment (Each
HIGH 1 - 99 50 monochrome copy mode) (Whole
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to
HIGH 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 adjust)
HIGH 1 - 99 50 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 * When there is necessity to change copy density of the low den-
HIGH 1 - 99 50 sity and high density part at each copy mode individually.
I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
(COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
copy by each the copy mode individually.
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo (Copy * When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) document) copy mode individually.
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 * U2 trouble has occurred.
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
L TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 from the user, execute this adjustment.
(COLOR TONE (Color tone 1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50

6,08/$7,2112
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) 7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 $ $872
(COLOR TONE (Color tone $

HIGH 1 - 99 50 % $872
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) & 7(;7

' 7(;735,17('3+272
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
( 7(;73+272
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 ) 35,17('3+272
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) * 3+272*5$3+
Q MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 + 0$3
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 , 7(;7&23<72&23<

- 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
R SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50 / /,*+7
HIGH 1 - 99 50 /2: +,*+ 2.
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50

(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
T TWO COLOR Two-color LOW 1 - 99 50
(Red/Black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 OK
U TWO COLOR Two-color LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Red/Black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50

(Copy document) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. $ $872
$ % $872
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
& 7(;7
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust- ' 7(;735,17('3+272
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" ( 7(;73+272
mode and change the adjustment value. ) 35,17('3+272
* 3+272*5$3+
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is + 0$3
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy , 7(;7&23<72&23<
density is decreased. - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
/ /,*+7
/2: +,*+ 2.
2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode.
Setting
range

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
7(67
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
HIGH 1 - 99 50 7(;7 7(;73573+272 35,17('3+272 3+2727(;73+272
0$3 /,*+7 &23<25*

B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 (;(&87(
HIGH 1 - 99 50 TEXT
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50

G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 6,08/$7,2112
7(67
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
&/26(
HIGH 1 - 99 50 $ 32,17

$ % 32,17
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 & 32,17
HIGH 1 - 99 50 ' 32,17
( 32,17
I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50 ) 32,17
(COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50

* 32,17
+ 32,17
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 , 32,17

- 32,17
PHOTO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 . 32,17
(COPY TO COPY) document) / 32,17
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50

. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) C

HIGH 1 - 99 50
L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 10-key
HIGH 1 - 99 50 OK
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
$ 32,17
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust- $ % 32,17
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" & 32,17
' 32,17
mode and change the adjustment value. ( 32,17
) 32,17
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is * 32,17
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy + 32,17
, 32,17
density is decreased. - 32,17
. 32,17
4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor- / 32,17
mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter- [SYSTEM
SETTINGS] key
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. EXECUTE
EXECUTE
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the or end of print
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and

checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
obtained. (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
$ 32,17
$
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To % 32,17
& 32,17
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. ' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
20-F Copy color balance adjustment (Color * 32,17
+ 32,17
balance adjustment at each density level in , 32,17

- 32,17
each color copy mode) . 32,17
/ 32,17
(Normally not required) . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
* When there is necessity to change the color balance and gamma 3) Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color
by each the copy mode individually. key.
* U2 trouble has occurred. 4) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. key.
Density level Adjustment
This is to adjust the color balance at each density level in each Item/Display Default
(Point) value range
color copy mode. Normally individual adjustments are not required. A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
This adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user. B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
Density level Adjustment 2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
Item/Display Default key.
(Point) value range
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500 Density level Adjustment
Item/Display Default
(Point) value range
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
A POINT1 Point 1 373 - 627 500
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
B POINT2 Point 2 373 - 627 500
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 373 - 627 500
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
D POINT4 Point 4 373 - 627 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
E POINT5 Point 5 373 - 627 500
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. F POINT6 Point 6 373 - 627 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is G POINT7 Point 7 373 - 627 500
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den- H POINT8 Point 8 373 - 627 500
sity is decreased. I POINT9 Point 9 373 - 627 500
J POINT10 Point 10 373 - 627 500
When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected
K POINT11 Point 11 373 - 627 500
with the color keys are collectively adjusted.
L POINT12 Point 12 373 - 627 500
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
M POINT13 Point 13 373 - 627 500
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
N POINT14 Point 14 373 - 627 500
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is O POINT15 Point 15 373 - 627 500
printed out. P POINT16 Point 16 373 - 627 500
The color balance at each density level (point) and the density Q POINT17 Point 17 373 - 627 500
can be checked by referring to this printed adjustment pattern.
However, it is more practically to make a copy and check it. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
20-G Monochrome copy density/gamma increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
sity is decreased.
adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode)
When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
(Normally not required) adjusted.
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
* When there is necessity to change the gamma in monochrome to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
mode.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
* U2 trouble has occurred. printed out.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
This is to adjust each density level in each monochrome copy practically to make a copy and check it.
mode. Normally individual adjustments are not required. This
adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user. 20-H Condition setting of document density
1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode. reading operation (exposure) in the
monochrome auto copy mode

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17 ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
& 32,17
When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
' 32,17
( 32,17
ment, change the setting.
) 32,17 This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* 32,17
+ 32,17
* When a copy with correct density is not obtained in monochrome
, 32,17 auto mode.
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
(;(&87( 2.
10-key 1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE or end of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(

$(B02'( 02'( 02'(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$(B6723B&23< 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
$(B6723B)$; 2)) 21
$ 32,17
$(B6723B6&$1 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$ % 32,17
$(B),/7(5 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
& 32,17
$(B:,'7+ )8// 3$57
' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17

. 32,17
/ 32,17
(;(&87( 2.
2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE
STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below. Document table/DSPF mode
Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or
"PART", in some cases. 3 to 7mm
Display/Item Content Set value Default

AE_MODE Auto exposure MODE1, MODE1
mode MODE2
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for copy) STOP/
PRESCAN
AE WIDTH = FULL
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON
ON/OFF
Stop (for FAX)
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for scanner) STOP/
PRESCAN
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
SHARP Document table mode
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
PART
3 to 7mm
NOTE: MODE1:
High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
MODE2: 100mm
Normal gamma
STOP:
Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of AE WIDTH = PART
document, decides the output image density according to
the density of that part. (The output image density is con-
stant at whole area.)
REALTIME:
Reads the density of width of the document one by one,
decides the output image density according to the density
of each part of the document. (The output image density
DSPF mode
may be not constant at whole area.)
PRESCAN:
The densities of the all surface of document are once 3 to 7mm
scanned, and the output image density is determined

according to the average of the scanned densities. (The
output image density is even for all the surface.)
AE WIDTH FULL:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode
is 3 - 7 mm (leading edge of document) x Document width.
100mm AE WIDTH = PART
No relationship to PRESCAN MODE
AE WIDTH PART:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode
is 3 - 7 mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width).
No relationship to PRESCAN MODE
Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
When the density of the document of the read area is light,
Document density detection area
output image density is increased by control. When the
density of the document of the read area is dark, output
image density is decreased by control.
20-I Document background density 20-J Copy density adjustment for low density
reproducibility adjustment in the section (Each copy mode)
monochrome auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) Use to adjust image density low density area in copy mode.
When there is a desire to no reproducing the document back-
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
ground or reproducing the low density image, adjust this.
density in monochrome auto copy mode.
When there is a desire to no reproducing the document back-
ground or reproducing the low density image, adjust this. * When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document. * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred. * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. * When there is request from the user.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. 1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode.
* When there is request from the user.

1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17
$ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272

$ % &2/25&23<7(;7
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( & &2/25&23<35,17('3+272
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1* ' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
$ &23<2& ( &2/25&23<7(;73+272
$ % &23<563) ) &2/25&23<0$3
& 6&$12& * &2/25&23</,*+7
' 6&$1563) + &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
( )$;2& , &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
) )$;563) - &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/ &2/25386+7(;7
2.
10-key
2. OK
10-key

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17
OK $ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
$ % &2/25&23<7(;7
& &2/25&23<35,17('3+272

' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( ( &2/25&23<7(;73+272
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1* ) &2/25&23<0$3
$ &23<2& * &2/25&23</,*+7

$ % &23<563) + &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
& 6&$12& , &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
- &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<

' 6&$1563)
. &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
( )$;2&
/ &2/25386+7(;7
) )$;563)
2.
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Set
value
2.
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
2) Select the adjusting mode "COPY: OC", "COPY: RSPF" with B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
the scroll key. C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
background and the low density image is increased. When the
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
ground and the low density image is decreased. F COLOR COPY : MAP map (color copy) 1-9 5
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
Set
Display/Item Content Default (color copy)
value
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
A COPY : FOC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text print
B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 (COPY TO COPY) Text
E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 (color copy)
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
Set 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
value
K COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3 Adjust
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH) Display/Item (Copy mode) Content ment Default
range
L COLOR PUSH:TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
M COLOR PUSH:PRINTED Printed photo 1-9 5
(SLOPE) gamma skew
PHOTO (color PUSH)
adjustment
N COLOR Photograph 1-9 5
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
PUSH:PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
(INTERCEPT) density adjustment
O COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text/Photograph 1-9 3
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (color PUSH)
(SLOPE) gamma skew
P COLOR PUSH:MAP map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
adjustment
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. D COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
E ED TEXT Text/Map mode 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) gamma adjustment
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- (Text/Map mode)
ground and the low density image is decreased. F ED TEXT Text/Map mode 1 - 99 50
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, adjust by ADJ20D and (INTERCEPT) density adjustment
ADJ20E. (Text/Map mode)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

20-K Color copy text, line image edge gamma,
When the adjustment values of item A and C are changed, the
density adjustment / Text Map mode gamma at the line edge section is changed.
gamma, density adjustment When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
(Adjustment 1) character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjust-
By changing Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, automatic copy ment value is decreased, the image contrast of character and
mode Text, line image edge section gamma and the density, the line edge is decreased.
reproducibility of text and line profile can be varied optionally. When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B and D are
With this adjustment, the density and the thickness of fine text and increased, the image density at the line edge section is
lines can be varied. increased, and vice versa.
Check the result of this adjustment by text/printed photo copy mode 4) Press [OK] key.
(manual). 5) Press [Close] key to exit the simulation.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. 6) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode
* When the reproducibility of text and line copy image is changed. (manual), check the copy.
* U2 trouble has occurred. When checking, use a copy of the document with a thin char-
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. acter and line image.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27
mode and change the adjustment value.
obtained.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(
$ % %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
& &2/257(;76/23(

' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
( ('7(;76/23(

) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
2.
10-key
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(
$ % %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
& &2/257(;76/23(

' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
( ('7(;76/23(

) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
2.
(Adjustment 2) If a satisfactory result is not obtained, use SIM46-27 to change the
This adjustment is used to change the gamma and the density in adjustment value.
the Text/Map copy mode. Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
* To change the contrast and the density of the Text/Map copy 20-L Color document reproducibility adjustment
mode images. in the monochrome copy mode
* U2 trouble has occurred. (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. image when printing color document that included the red/yellow
1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode. image in monochrome copy mode.
6,08/$7,2112
* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783 image in case of making a color copy of the color document in
$
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(
% %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
monochrome copy mode.
& &2/257(;76/23(
' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
( ('7(;76/23( * When the MFP PWB is replaced.

) ('7(;7,17(5&(37

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
2. % :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$ 5*
$
10-key
% %*

OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(
$ % %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
& &2/257(;76/23(
' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37
( ('7(;76/23( 10-key

) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
DEFAULT
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$ 5*
2.
$ % %*

Adjust
Display/Item (Copy mode) Content ment Default
range
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) gamma skew
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
adjustment
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50 EXECUTE NO
C COLOR Color character edge 1 - 99 50
TEXT(SLOPE) gamma skew
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
adjustment $ 5*
$ % %*
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50

E ED TEXT (SLOPE) Text/Map mode 1 - 99 50
gamma adjustment
(Text/Map mode)
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) adjustment
(Text/Map mode) '()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. YES
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item E is

changed, the gamma (contrast) is changed.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
When the adjustment value is increased, the contrast is % :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17

$ 5*
increased, and vice versa. $ % %*

When the adjustment value of the adjustment item F is

increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Press [CLOSE] key to cancel the simulation mode.
6) Make a copy in the Text/Map copy mode (manual), and check
the output print. '()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 2) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
key.
Adjust
Display/Item 3) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Content ment Default
(Copy mode)
range
Display/Item (Copy Select Content Default
A R/G Gray making setting (R/G) 0 - 99 21 mode) button
B B/G Gray making setting (B/G) 0 - 99 0 MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print (+) LUT1
(-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,
(+) LUT1
copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
(+) LUT2
value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) (+) LUT1
When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased, (-) LUT1
copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment NOMAL
value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased. (+) LUT1
4) Press [OK] key. (+) LUT2
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed phto copy mode PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo (+) LUT1
(manual), check the copy. PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37
(+) LUT1
mode and change the adjustment value.
(+) LUT2
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph NORMAL
obtained. (Manual)
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
20-M Black ingredient amount adjustment in (+) LUT1
color copy mode (+) LUT2
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/ NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 Photograph
Use to adjust the black ingredient amount in the color copy mode. (Manual)
NOMAL
(except character and line image)
(+) LUT1
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part (+) LUT2
changes. MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) (+) LUT1
This adjustment is required in the following cases. (-) LUT1
* When reproduction as solid of black image is required. NOMAL
* To make the black background and the dark area darker (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
* When change of gradation of the shade part is required.
CP ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy (+) LUT1
* U2 trouble has occurred. TEXT PRT (-) LUT1 document/
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. NOMAL Text printed
(Manual)
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. (+) LUT1
1) Enter the SIM 46-38 mode. (+) LUT2
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy (+) LUT1
TEXT (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Text (Manual)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(+) LUT1
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
7(;7357 /87 /87 120$/ (+) LUT2
/87 /87 COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy (+) LUT1
7(;7 /87 /87 120$/
PHOTO (-) LUT1 document/
/87 /87
NOMAL Printed photo
35,17('3+272 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87 (+) LUT1 (Manual)

3+272 /87 /87 120$/
(+) LUT2
/87 /87
7(;73+272
LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light (+) LUT1
/87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 document
0$3 /87 /87 120$/ NOMAL (Manual)
/87 /87
(+) LUT1
0$18$/ $872
(+) LUT2
(-)LUT2

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
7(;7357 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
7(;7 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
35,17('3+272 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
3+272 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
7(;73+272 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
0$3 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
0$18$/ $872
Display/Item (Copy Select Content Default
mode) button 20-N Sharpness adjustment in the monochrome
AUTO AUTO0 (-) LUT2 Auto mode (+) LUT1 auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to
(-) LUT1 judgment 0
adjust)
NOMAL
Use for sharpness adjustment of the high density image in color
(+) LUT1
auto copy mode.
(+) LUT2
AUTO1 (-) LUT2 Auto mode (+) LUT1 This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image
(-) LUT1 judgment 1 shade part.
NOMAL This adjustment is required in the following cases.
(+) LUT1 * When changing the sharpness of copy image in auto copy mode.
(+) LUT2 (obtain crispy image)(decreases moire)
AUTO2 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
* When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image
(-) LUT1 judgment 2
shade part (for decrease of asperity)
NOMAL
* To make the black background and the dark area darker.
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 * To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.
AUTO3 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL * U2 trouble has occurred.
(-) LUT1 judgment 3 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
AUTO4 (-) LUT2 Auto mode (+) LUT1
(-) LUT1 judgment 4

6,08/$7,2112
NOMAL 7(67 &/26(
&2/25$87202'(),/7(5$'-8670(17
(+) LUT1 $ 6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872
$
(+) LUT2 % $87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
& &2/25&23<&0<21
' &2/25&23<.21
(-) LUT1 judgment 5 ( 6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
NOMAL ) &2/25&23<&0<21
(+) LUT1 * &2/25&23<.21
+ %:&23<21
(+) LUT2
, &2/25386+5*%21
AUTO6 (-) LUT2 Auto mode (+) LUT1 - %:386+21
(-) LUT1 judgment 6

NOMAL
2.
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
10-key
4) Press the black ingredient amount select button.
When reproduction as solid of black image is required: OK
Selects + button
When there is desire to darken copy of black image:

6,08/$7,2112
Selects + button 7(67
&2/25$87202'(),/7(5$'-8670(17
&/26(
When a dark color image is reproduced in the black: $

$ 6&5((1),/7(5/(9(//
% $87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
Selects - button & &2/25&23<&0<21
5) Make a copy in color copy mode and check the copy. ' &2/25&23<.21
( 6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-38 mode ) &2/25&23<&0<21
and change the adjustment value. * &2/25&23<.21
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained. + %:&23<21
, &2/25386+5*%21
- %:386+21
2.
Setting
Display/Item Content Default NOTE
range
A SCREEN H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern Strong 1 3 (Auto) Apply to auto copy mode only
FILTER LEVEL image in auto copy mode emphasis
L Soft 2
emphasis
AUTO Auto 3
B AUTOMODE SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
FILTER LEVEL CENTER copy mode CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
C COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) Available for the high density image
COPY:CMY ON in color copy mode ON 1 except text and line image
D COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
COPY:K ON color copy mode ON 1
E SINGLE OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) When setting ON, smoothness in the
COLOR:CMY ON in sigle color copy mode ON 1 image shade part improves by
F 2 COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) applying soft filter.
COPY:CMY ON in 2-color copy mode ON 1 (asperity decreases)
2 COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
G
COPY:K ON color copy mode ON 1
B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
H
ON copy mode ON 1
COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
I
PUSH:RGB ON scan color mode ON 1
B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1(ON)
ON scan monochrome mode ON 1
J
3) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter

process mode).
Adjustment item A:
When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pat-
tern state automatically and adjusts sharpness.
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
numeric value to decrease moire.
Adjustment item B:
Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce
moire.
Adjustment item C - J:
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part
improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy and check the copy image.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-60 mode
and change the adjustment value.
Setting
20-O Copy high density part density correction range
setting (Prevents against tone gap) E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET YELLOW maximum
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) density correction
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in color mode, or if there F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density, TARGET BLACK maximum density
change the setting. correction
This setting normally not required. When, however, there are case
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
of following, change the setting.
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.
gap is better.
* When there is necessity to increase the density of the part of
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
high density.
to item A and B.
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
NOTE: Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If
these values is changed, density of the high density part is
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. changed.
a. Adjustment procedure If these values is changed, be sure to execute the copy color bal-
1) Enter the SIM 46-23 mode. ance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
20-P Copy color balance adjustment (Single
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(
color copy mode) (Normally not required)
$ % .(1$%/(',6$%/(
This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
& &<$10$;7$5*(7
' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7 the single color copy mode to the user's request.
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
The adjustment is made by changing Y, M, C components of each
color.
This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there
is a request from the user.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
2.
required in the following cases.
10-key
OK * When the MFP PWB is replaced.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( a. Adjustment procedure
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(
$ % .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7

' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
$ 5('
$ % *5((1
& %/8(

' &<$1
( 0$*(17$
) <(//2:
2.
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
Setting
range & 0 < 2.
A CMY 0 CMY engine

(0:ENABLE maximum density 10-key
1:DISABLE) correction mode
Enable OK
0-1 0
1 CMY engine
maximum density

correction mode 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Disable 6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
$ 5('
B K 0 K engine maximum $ % *5((1
(0: ENABLE density correction & %/8(
1: DISABLE) mode Enable ' &<$1
0-1 1 ( 0$*(17$

1 K engine maximum ) <(//2:
density correction
mode DIsable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET CYAN maximum density
correction
D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 & 0 < 2.
TARGET MAGENTA maximum 2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.
density correction 3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY
Adjustmen Default
Display/Item LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D
t range C M Y
(COPY HIGH)".
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255 Setting De-
Item/Display Content
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 200 0 range fault
D YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255 A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0 adjustment (Low density side)
F CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0 B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposre 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
5) Press [OK] key. C FAX : LOW PSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
6) Press [Close] key to exit the simulation. adjustment (Low density side)
7) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy copy mcde 1 - 99 53
exposure adjustment
copy.
(High density side)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposre 1 - 99 53
and change the adjustment value. adjustment (Low density side)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained. F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment
(High density side)
20-Q Copy density adjustment in the RSPF mode
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
This setting normally not required. When, however, there are case In case of increase of image density, input large numeric
of following, change the setting. value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small
* When copy in RSPF mode differs from copy in document table numeric value.
mode. 4) Press [OK] key.
* When copy density in RSPF mode is low or too high. 5) Press [Close] key to exit the simulation.
* When the RSPF unit is replaced. 6) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
* When the RSPF unit is disassembled. copy.
* The CCD unit has been replaced. If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode
and change the adjustment value.
20-R Auto color balance adjustment by the user
a. Adjustment procedure
(Copy color balance auto adjustment
enable setting and adjustment)
a. General

In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763) ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
$ &23</2:
$ This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
% 6&$1/2:
C )$;/2: tion with SIM 26-53.

D &23<+,*+
( 6&$1+,*+
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
F )$;+,*+ understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.
2. This adjustment is required in the following cases.
10-key * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
OK
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM of the PCU PWB is replaced.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$ &23</2:
$ % 6&$1/2:
C )$;/2:

D &23<+,*+
( 6&$1+,*+
F )$;+,*+
2.
b. Setting procedure 5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode. cedure 4) on the document table.
Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left
side.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21
patch image (adjustment pattern).
$ <(612
$
Thin line

2.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
10-key the display returns to the original operation screen.
OK
ADJ 21 Printer color balance/density

6,08/$7,2112

&/26(
adjustment
7(67
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21
$ <(612
$ (1) Note before execution of the printer color balance/density
adjustment
(Requisite condition before execution of the printer color balance/
density adjustment)
Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been com-
pleted properly.
(This adjustment is required in the following cases.)
* Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjust-
2.
ment is required. Refer to the page of the ADJ 20 print color bal-
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key. ance/density adjustment.
When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1" * After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
(Yes). (2) Printer color balance/density check
3) Press [OK] key. (Note)
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to
(automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density) is not dis- execute the following procedures in advance.
played in the user program mode. * Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjustment)) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
Remark: * The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26)
This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set
with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above settings are
not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made properly.
1) Enter the system setting mode.
2) Enter the copy setting mode.
3) Press the auto color calibration key.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
(Procedure) The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
a. When the PCL mode is supported: to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed. Patch B may not be copied.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed
color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray
color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is
DEF 1.)
21-A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto

adjustment)
a. General
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) auto-
matically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the print modes are revised.)
There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24
is used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
not work effectively.
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
same level. serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
b. When the PCL mode is not supported: (In the case of GDI
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
model)
the normal color balance.
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
understood.
black patch to check the color balance.
*1 b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto

adjustment)
Low density High density 1) The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed
properly.
;
2) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
/
$M
CMY
Blend
3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and

BK is very slightly copied.
Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and

BK are not copied.

*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section are not printed.
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure

flowchart (SIM67-24)
Start
Execute ADJ21A (Printer color balance and density adjust-

ment) (Automatic adjustment).
Enter the SIM67-24 mode, and select A3

(11" x 17" ) paper.

(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

Select the factory target or the service target, and
press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is
scanned, and the adjustment is automatically per-
Automatic adjustment color balance target change
formed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Change the factory color balance and density
target which is available in 3 kinds.(SIM67-26)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or
unclear copy. (*4) NO
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the half tone

image correction is automatically performed.) Though the factory color
balance and density target
(available in 3 kinds) is cha-
Cancel SIM67-24. nged, satisfactory color bal-
ance and density are not
obtained (SIM67-26), or the
service target is selected.
NO
PCL printer?
YES
YES
Execute ADJ21B (Printer color balance and density
adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25) (*3)
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and density
adjustment. (*2) *1:
When the color balance and density are customized and
Use SIM67-25 to print the color bala- Use SIM64-5 to print the self print registered as the service target, select the service target.
nce check pattern, and check the pri- check pattern, and check the printer *2:
nter color balance and density. color balance and density. If the initial setting of the half tone image correction is not
properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
any problems.
*3:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
Are the color balance and NO with ADJ21B (Printer color balance and density adjustment)
density at the satisfactory (Manual adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the print engine for
level? any problems.
*4:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
YES pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
End
1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode. Remark:
(Descriptions on [FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key in the
color balance auto adjustment menu.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5 [FACTORY] key and [SERVICE] key are used to select one of
)257+,6$'-8670(17
the above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
67-27.)
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable) When ship-
ping, the service target gamma data and the factory target
(;(&87(
gamma data are the same.
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
selected.) can be registered with SIM 67-28.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
procedure 2) on the document table.

Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed &21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
PRINTER CALIBRATION *1 *1
2.
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
4) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press
[EXECUTE] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
When the color balance is customized with the manual color 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- 3/($6(48,77+,602'(
balance, select the service target.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7(6735,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(

and prints the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed.
6) Check the color balance and density. If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
There are two methods to check the color balance and density. mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted
(Method 1)
into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch the color balance target is DEF 1.)
image is within the following specifications.
(Method 3)
*1 Only for the machine which support the PCL mode. (For the
machine which supports only the GDI mode, this procedure
Low density High density cannot be used.)
; Use SIM64-5 to print the print test pattern, and check the color
balance and density.
/ Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
% Use SIM64-5 to print the print test pattern, and check the color
balance and density. (Refer to the item of the printer color bal-
$M ance and density check.)
3 When the factory target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
/CZ auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 obtained on the color balance and the density, use SIM 67-26
to change the factory color balance target and repeat the pro-
cedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and When the service target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
BK are not copied.
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
1) The max. density section is not blurred. obtained, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK 21C).
Cancel SIM 67-25.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must adjustment is completed.
not be reversed. If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is
The density level of each color must be almost at the same not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
level. adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21B).
21-B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
(Method 2)
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment is required.
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 67-25
Refer to the page of the ADJ print color balance/density adjust-
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
ment.
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely. * After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
a. General
*1 The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the printer density (17 pts for each color) of C, M, Y and K.
This is used at the following situation. When the result of auto
; adjustment described above is not existing within the range of ref-
erence. When a fine adjustment is required. When there is request
/ from the user for changing (customizing) the color balance.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
% not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
$M ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
CMY
Blend b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
3 1) After execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment.
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 2) Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.

BK are not copied.
The max. density section is not blurred.

Printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure

flowchart (SIM67-25)
Start
Execute ADJ21C (Printer color balance and density

adjustment (Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A3

(11 " x 17 ") paper. (Automatic selection.)

Check the printed adjustment check pattern,

and select a target adjustment color with the
color keys (C,M,Y,K).
Select a target adjustment density level with the

scroll key.
Enter the adjustment value with 10 key.

Check the patch color balance and density in the

process gray of the color balance check pattern.
(If the gray color is slightly shifted to Magenta,
the color balance is properly adjusted.)
Are the color balance

NO
sfactory level?
YES
Cancel the SIM67-25 mode.
NO
PCL printer?
YES
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and density
adjustment result. (*2)
Use SIM67-25 to print the color Use SIM64-5 to print the self print
balance check pattern, and check the check pattern, and check the printer
printer color balance and density. color balance and density.
Are the color balance and NO

density at the satisfactory
level?
*1:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
YES obtained with the adjustment, check the print
engine for any problems.
Set the service target for the automatic *2:
printer color balance adjustment. If the initial setting of the half tone image correction
(SIM67-27) is not properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance
and density cannot be obtained. In this case, check
the print engine for any problems.
End
1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode. 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
balance is satisfactory.
If not, execute the following procedures.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$ 32,17 *1
$ % 32,17
& 32,17 Low density High density

' 32,17
( 32,17
;
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17 /
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17 %
/ 32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

$M
10-key CMY
Blend
OK 3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and
$ 32,17 BK is very slightly copied.
$ % 32,17
& 32,17 Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and

' 32,17 BK are not copied.
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17 3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
+ 32,17 The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
, 32,17 The patch density is changed gradually.
- 32,17
. 32,17 *1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section are not printed.
/ 32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
not be reversed.
EXECUTE EXECUTE The density level of each color must be almost at the same
or end of print level.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
$ 32,17 request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
$ % 32,17
color balance stated above.
& 32,17
' 32,17 If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted
+ 32,17 into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When
, 32,17 the color balance target is DEF 1.)
- 32,17
. 32,17
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
/ 32,17 select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically The adjustment value is set in the range of 0 - 255 (1 - 99).
selected.) When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance
and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 50.
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
6) Cancel SIM 67-25. (Gamma setting of auto color balance adjustment service
For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the color balance target)
adjustment is completed. a. General
7) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
color balance and the density. tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
NOTE: Only for the machine which support the PCL mode. (For There are following three kinds of the target.
the machine which supports only the GDI mode, this proce- Factory color balance (gamma) target
dure cannot be used.) Service color balance (gamma) target
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] User color balance (gamma) target
key. The print test pattern is printed.
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
8) If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register to a desired level.
the color balance as the service target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust-
required.
ment) is executed with SIM 67-25.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment. * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode * When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the reg- * When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
istered color balance. improper.
NOTE: If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to regis- Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
ter the color balance as the service target. If the color bal-
Type Descriptions
ance is not customized, this procedure is not required.
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance
If the customized color balance is registered as the service balance target, and each of them is specified according
target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be (gamma) to the machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select
made in the next color balance adjustment. target one of them as the factory target. The default
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service tar- setting (factory setting) is the color balance
get color balance in the automatic color balance adjust- (DEF1) which emphasizes color reproduction.
ment mode to make an adjustment to the similar color B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
balance customize the color balance to user's desired
balance as the registered color balance.
(gamma) level. In advance, the user's unique color
target balance must be registered as the service color
balance target. The above registration (setting)
is made by the serviceman with SIM 67-25 to
adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to
register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment. When,
therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the user's
color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the
color balance is set to the factory color balance
target set with SIM 67-26. The default setting
(factory setting) of the color balance is same as
the factory color balance target. (Emphasized
on color reproduIf the user does not request for
customizing the color balance, be sure to use
SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the factory
color balance targetction (DEF1))
C User color Same color balance as the service color
balance balance (gamma) target When the service color
(gamma) balance target is changed, this color balance
target target is also changed accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Use SIM 67-26 to select one of the three

target (DEF1)
= Service color balance
target
Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 67-27 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Execute SIM 67-28.
target (DEF3) Factory color balance
target (one of DEF1 - 3) = Service color balance
target
(The service color balance target is
the same as the factory color balance
target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target
Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)

By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28
+b* Direction of Yellow

SIM67-28
Factory color balance target (DEF1)
Factory color balance target = Service color balance target/Color
(DEF1) balance target for theuser color balance
Hue adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default

The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance

operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color table
in an actual printer mode and print is made. (Factory setting)
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target is
selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
Direction actual copy mode and print is made.
of Red
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the color
table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

(DEF3) SIM67-28 target for the user color balance adjustment
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- (Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
ment (SIM 67-28). purpose of registration)
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. customized with SIM 67-25. If the color balance is not customized,
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set this procedure is not required.
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
SIM 67-26. ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment to register the service color balance target data by use of the
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in printed adjustment pattern.
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24). When, therefore, By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
changed accordingly. SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from
discoloration and dirt.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
The service color balance target data are basically registered 6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*
67-25.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judges as follows.
(;(&87(
When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
the service color balance target in SIM 67-24 is unsatisfactory or The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
abnormal. 6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance (adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
adjustment (Auto) may be improper.

This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance 6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%$6(
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27. %&'()
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was *+,-.
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with

/012
SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
b. Setting procedure
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the
service color balance target)
1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual . & 0 < 5(3($7 2.
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C,
(adjustment pattern). M and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an (MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an judged as abnormal.
adjustment. In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
2) Enter the SIM 67-27 mode. 7) Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
get.
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the color
*+,-.
/012
balance target for the user color balance adjustment to the same
color balance as the factory color balance target)
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
get with SIM 67-27.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 67-
26, be sure to execute this procedure.
. & 0 < 6(783
3) Press [SETUP] key.
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
6,08/$7,2112
adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment 7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&(
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21C) on the document

table.
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color bal-
ance (manual) was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
balance requested by the user and it was registered as the
service color balance target with SIM 67-27. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
ance as the factory color balance target.
21-C Printer density adjustment (low density part
density adjustment) (Normally unnecessary
to adjust)
This procedure is to adjust image density of low density area in
a. Adjustment procedure
printer mode.
Adjust to reproduction (not reproduction) setting of the low density
image.

This adjustment is required in the following cases. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
* When reproduction of low density image is required. When repro-

(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(
duction of low density image is not required, conversely. $ % .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7

* U2 trouble has occurred. ' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. ( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
* When there is request from the user.
2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
&/26(
10-key
$ $3$7&+,1387
$ OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(
$ % .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7
' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
2.
10-key
OK 2.
2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
Setting
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( range
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
A CMY 0 CMY engine 0-1 0
$ $3$7&+,1387
$ (0: ENABLE maximum density

1:DISABLE) correction mode
Enable
1 CMY engine
maximum density
correction mode
Disable
B K 0 K engine maximum 0-1 1
(0:ENABLE density correction
1: DISABLE) mode Enable
2.
1 K engine maximum
density correction
2) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key. mode Disable
In case of increase of the image density on low density part, C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
increase the adjustment value. In case of increase of the TARGET CYAN maximum density
image density on low density part, increase the adjustment correction
value. For diluting the image density on low density part, D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
decrease the adjustment value. TARGET MAGENTA maximum
density correction
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
21-D Printer high density part desnsity TARGET YELLOW maximum
correction setting (high density part tone density correction
gap countermeasure) (Normally F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET BLACK maximum density
unnecessary to the setting change)
correction
This procedure is to adjust image density of low density area in
printer mode. * If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
This setting normally not required. When, however, there are case The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
of following, change the setting. gap is better.
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. * In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
* When there is necessity to increase the density of the part of to item A and B.
high density. The tone gap may occur in high density part.
(NOTE) If the setting values of item C, D, E and F are changed, (Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjustment))
density of the high density part is changed. Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color bal-
When these values are changed, be sure to perform the printer ance set with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the above set-
color balance and density adjustment. (Automatic adjustment) tings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
properly.
21-E Auto color balance adjustment by the user 1) Enter the system setting mode.
(Printer color balance auto adjustment 2) Enter the printer setting mode.
ENABLE setting and adjustment) 3) Press the auto color calibration key.
a. General 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
tion with SIM 26-54.
CAUTION: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the
user's understanding on the automatic adjustment of
the copy color balance and density and the user's oper-
ational ability are judged enough to execute the adjust-
ment.
5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
cedure 4) on the document table.
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the
user. Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left
side.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. Thin line
b. Setting procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,212)35,17(5
$ <(612
$

6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
21-F Copy/Printer color balance and density

adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
2.
replaced.
OK * When the CCD unit is replaced.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,212)35,17(5
$ <(612
$
a. General
SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and
density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color bal-
2.
ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key. Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment
(automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance
When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
(Yes).
this mode.
3) Press [OK] key.
This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration matic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
(automatic adjustment of printer color balance and density) is not the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
displayed in the user program mode. 24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
each of the auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjust-
ment individually.
2 : '09/Sep
b. Adjustment procedures
Copy/printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)

(SIM46-74) procedure flowchart
Start
Execute ADJ21F Copy color balance and density/Printer color balance and density
adjustment (automatic density). (SIM46-74)
(Copy color balance and density adjustment (automatic adjustment)
Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A3 (11" x 17") paper. (Automatic selection)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory target or the
service target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
(Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory target or the
service target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1) Automatic adjustment color balance target change
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Change the factory color balance and density target
which is available in 3 kinds. (SIM63-11)
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the half tone image correction is automatically
NO
performed.) (*3)
Cancel SIM46-74.
Though the factory color
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result. balance and density target
(available in 3 kinds) is
2 Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG- changed, satisfactory color
0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color balance and density are
balance and density. not obtained (SIM63-11),
or the service target is
selected.
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color
balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to
Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
YES
Are the color balance and density NO

at the specified level? Execute ADJ20C (Copy color balance and density
adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM46-21/44-21)
YES (*3)
*1:
When the color balance and
Check that the initial setting of the half tone image correction was properly
density are customized and
performed. (*2) Execute ADJ21A (Printer color balance and registered as the service
density adjustment) target, select the service
Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction. (*2)
(Automatic adjustment). (SIM67-24) target.
Execute the half tone image correction. (SIM44-26) *2:

If the initial setting of the half
Automatic color balance target change
2 Use the test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/ tone image correction is not
UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check properly adjusted, satisfactory
Change the factory color balance and density
the color balance and density. color balance and density
(available in 3 kinds). (SIM67-26)
cannot be obtained. In this
NO case, check the print engine
for any problems.
NO Are the color balance and density
*3:
at the specified level?
If satisfactory color balance and
Though the factory color density are not obtained with
YES balance and density target ADJ20C (Copy color balance
(available in 3 kinds) is and density adjustment) (Manual
changed, satisfactory color
adjustment) (SIM46-21/44-21),
balance and density are
NO not obtained (SIM67-26), check the print engine for any
PCL printer? problems.
or the service target is
YES selected.
*4:
Check the printer color balance and density adjustment result with the self print If there is any streak or unclear
check pattern. copy on the printed check
YES pattern, check the print engine
Use SIM67-25 to print the self print Use SIM64-5 to print the self print check for any problems.
check pattern, and check the printer pattern, and check the printer color balance Execute ADJ21C (Printer color balance
color balance and density. and density. and density adjustment)
(Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25)

and density at the
specified level?
YES
End
1) Enter the SIM46-74 mode. 4) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
When the color balance is customized by the manual color bal-

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
ance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's request,
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( and the color balance is registered with SIM63-7 as the service
target, if the color balance is required to be adjusted, select the
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+

3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5 [SERVICE] target.
)257+,6$'-8670(17

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
(;(&87(

The high density process control is performed, and the copy
color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. (A3 or
11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.)
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
and prints the color balance check patch image.
352&21(;(&87,1*
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
tern, check the print engine for any problems.
/
(;(&87(
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in %

Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the $M
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch 3
/CZ
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
Remark:
(Descriptions on the factory service key button in the color bal-
ance automatic adjustment menu)
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
automatic adjustment: the factory target and the service target.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance
(The color balance can be selected from the three kinds of
fixed ones with SIM63-11.)
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable)
When shipping from the factory, the service target gamma data
and the factory target gamma data are the same.
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping from
the factory. For the service target, a customized color balance
gamma can be registered with SIM63-7.
2 : '09/Sep

The printer color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed *1
out. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.

;
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
&21),507+($'-3$7&+$1'35(66>(;(&87(@72$'-2)5(*,675$7,21(;(
/
$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17 %
$M
3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
(;(&87(
6) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the

*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section is not printed.
8) The initial setting menu of the half tone image correction is dis-
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
played. Press [OK] key.
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time, The initial setting of the half tone image correction is per-
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image formed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
PRINTER CALIBRATION *1 *1 &21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
9) When "COMPLETE THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the

adjustment operation is completed. Cancel SIM46-74.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section are not printed. &203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
7) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press 3/($6(48,77+,602'(

[EXECUTE] key.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
balance, select the service target.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( NOTE: The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both
3/($6(:$,7
adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are
12:5(*,67(5,1*7+(1(:7$5*(72)+$/)721(352&2167 completed.
For example, if the copy color balance adjustment (auto-
matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is can-
celed, the adjustment result is invalid.
10) Check the copy color balance and density.
There are two methods to check the color balance and density.
(Method 1)
2. Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/ 2
The printer color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance
performed and the color balance check patch image is printed and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance and
out. density check.)
If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
tern, check the print engine for any problems.
2 : '09/Sep
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce- 0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/ 2
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance
20C). and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance and
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe- density check.)
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ form the following procedures.
20C).
13) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(Method 2) (SIM 44-21)
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21 14) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution)
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance (SIM44-26)
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/ 2
Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance/
density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density
check.)
Low density High density Though the procedures 13) - 15) are performed, the copy color
balance and density are not in the specified range, there may
;
be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treat-
/
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
%
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results
of the copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ
$M 20C) (Manual adjustment).
CMY 16) Check the printer color balance and density.
Blend There are two methods to check the color balance and density.
3
/CZ (Method 1)
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
Incase that the PCL mode is supported (for the machines
where only the GDI mode is supported, this method cannot be
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and used)
BK is very slightly copied. Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and color balance and the density.
BK are not copied.
Set each setting value to the default and press [EXECUTE]
1) The max. density section is not blurred. key, and the print test pattern is printed.
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK (Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. check.)

adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table
in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance target is DEF
1.)
11) Use SIM 44-26 to perform the half tone image correction.
(Compulsory execution)
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
(;(&87(
(Method 2)
Use SIM67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and ADJ 22 Adjusting the fusing paper
compare the black patch color balance of each process (CMY)
with the black patch. This procedure allows checking the color guide position
balance adjustment result correctly. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the fusing section is disassembled.
*1
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
Low density High density * When a wrinkle is made on paper in the fusing section.
; * When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper rear
edge section.
/ 1) Loosen the fixing screw C.
2) Shift the fusing paper guide in the arrow direction A or B (up
% and down direction).
$M
CMY
Blend
3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and


BK are not copied.

A
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK A C C
*1: In the case of the GDI printer, this section are not printed. B
B
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the The standard fixing position is the center of the marking scale.
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment Change the position depending on the situation.
pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is * When a wrinkle is formed on paper, change the position
converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table upward (in the arrow direction A).
in an actual printer mode. (When the color balance target is * When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper
DEF 1.) rear edge section, shift the position downward (in the arrow
If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the den- direction A).
sity is not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the
manual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21B).
ADJ 23 Document size sensor
adjustment
* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
* When U2 trouble has occurred.
23-A Document size sensor detection point

adjustment

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6: 3' 3' 3'
3' 3' 3' 3'

Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw
and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is 23-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit sensor
top from the table glass is 32 0.5mm by slowly tilting the doc-
1) Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
ument detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust.
(If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the doc-
ument detection function may malfunction.) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
=':'%76'?
(;(&87(
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
32+
#

-0.5mm =':'%76'?
Adjustment
failed
(;(&87(
Adjustment completed
EXECUTE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783

2&
(;(&87(
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.

With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO
SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
ADJ 24 Manual paper feed tray paper tion.
size (width) sensor adjustment

* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
(;(&87( 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
EXECUTE
display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
feed guide is recognized.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
(;(&87,1*
display.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3$326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
EXECUTE 9) Press [EXECUTE] key.

Repeat the above procedure to adjust display.
the A4R width MIN POSITION.
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is

displayed.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&/26(
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
&203/(7(
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(;(&87(
ADJ 25 RSPF tray paper size (width) ADJ 26 Touch panel coordinate setting
sensor adjustment (RSPF This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
mode) * The operation panel has been replaced.

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
2) Set the tray document guide to the max. width position, and 2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
press [EXECUTE] key. The button is highlighted and the tray When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
size volume maximum value adjustment is started. and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
* During the adjustment, "EXECUTING..." is displayed. pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
* After completion of the tray size volume maximum value play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
adjustment, the set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
and the display is shifted to the tray volume A4R size adjust- again.
ment value start screen. (Each set value is saved to Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
EEPROM and RAM at each setting.) frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
3) Set the tray document guide to A4R width position and press pressed.
[EXECUTE] button. The pressed button is highlighted and the * When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
tray A4R size adjustment is started. as a needle or a pin).
4) Adjust the tray volume A5R size and the tray size volume min-
imum value according to the above procedures.
5) Completion of the adjustment, "COMPLETE" is displayed. If ADJ 27 Image loss, void area, image
the adjustment is not completed normally for any reason,
"ERROR" is displayed. In that case, the adjustment must be
off-center, image magnification
executed again. ratio auto adjustment with
<Adjustment item and content> SIM50-28
NO. Display Content The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value SIM50-28.
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value * ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section)
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value * ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
When one of 1-4 in the above table is selected, the guide plate is * ADJ 14/15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
shifted to each position of the four widths of the guide plate shown * ADJ 16 Scan image off-center adjustment
in the table below. The value of the document width sensor * ADJ 17 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
(RSPF_WIDTH) A/D value is saved to EEPROM. * ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
<Guide plate positions and widths on the mechanism and A/D val- (Menu in SIM50-28 mode)
ues to be saved>
Widths on the mechanism A/D
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction
Guide value,
Code in image magnification ratio adjustment
NO plate AB INCH code in Remark
the figure (Document table mode)
position series series the figure
below BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification
below
ratio adjustment
1 Maximum 299 299 WIDTH AD_MAX
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction
position _MAX
image magnification ratio adjustment
2 Middle 210 215.9 WITH_P1 AD_P1 A4R OR
(RSPF mode)
position (L) LTR
SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center
3 Middle 148.5 139.7 WITH_P2 AD_P2 A5R OR
(each paper feed tray, duplex mode)
position (S) INVR
adjustment
4 Minimum 118 118 WITH_MIN AD_MIN
RESULT Adjustment result display
position
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is
executed
27-A Print image main scanning direction image
magnification ratio automatic adjustment

1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7

12:(;(&87,1*
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'- %.0$*$'-
63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7 '$7$
5(35,17 (;(&87(
The following item is automatically adjustment.

* Print image main scanning direction image magnification

ratio
2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key button. 7) Press [OK] key.
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button. The adjustment result becomes valid.
(Any paper size will do.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(386+&$.(<
0)7 &6 &6

(;(&87(
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 27-B Image off-center automatic adjustment

The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
tion)

NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
guide. 2&$'- %.0$*$'-
63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

2) Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key button.

3) Select [ALL] with the key button.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
/($' 2))6(7
$//

(Note)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items 27-C Copy lead edge image reference position
can be executed individually. adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment direction image magnification ratio
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment automatic adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
executed simultaneously.
4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(

2&$'- %.0$*$'-
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
5(68/7 '$7$
0)7 &6 &6 $'8
&6 &6 /&&

(;(&87(
2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key button.
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (Any paper size will do.)
6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
tion) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document 0)7 &6 &6
guide.
(;(&87(

5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
(Any direction)
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.

The following item is automatically adjustment.
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* Print image off-center adjustment
8) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press the [SPF ADJ] button.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7 6,'( 6,'(
$//
12:(;(&87,1*
5(35,17 (;(&87(
The following item is automatically adjustment. 3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette
* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image used to print SPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corre-
off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio sponding button:
automatic adjustment SIDE1: SPF adjustment for the front side
7) Press [OK] key. SIDE2: SPF adjustment for the back side
The adjustment result becomes valid. ALL: SPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
4) Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print SPF
adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 5) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts self-print
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
of SPF adjustment patterns.
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
3/($6(386+&$.(< * The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is

self-printing SPF adjustment patterns.
When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you
can start SPF adjustments.
6) SPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the SPF.

27-D SPF mode image off-center, image lead

edge position, sub scanning direction
image magnification ratio automatic
adjustment (RSPF mode)
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'- %.0$*$'-
63)$'- 6(78335,17$'- * By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the
cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print
5(68/7 '$7$
SPF adjustment patterns again.

7) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts reading
SPF adjustment patterns (for the front side).
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
reading and calculating SPF adjustment patterns (for the
front side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the front side, the next screen appears where
you can have the machine start reading SPF adjustment
patterns (for the back side).
<Adjustment Item List>
SPF original leading edge adjustment (front side)
SPF original off-center adjustment (front side)
SPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment (front side)
8) SPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the SPF.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the

SPF adjustment patterns again.
9) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts loading
SPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
reading SPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the back side, the next screen appears where
you can view the results of the adjustments.
<Adjustment Item List>
SPF original leading edge adjustment (back side)
SPF original off-center adjustment (back side)
SPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment (back side)
10) The adjustment result screen appears.
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the
SPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides)
again.
* To have the machine start re-reading the SPF adjustment
patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] button.
* To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-
ues into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] button.
* To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]
button.
11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and
return to the top menu, press the [OK] button.
* To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] button.
[7] SIMULATION
MX-3100N
Service Manual
1. General (Including basic operations)

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes in
an earlier stage, and make various setups and adjustments speedily
for improving the serviceability of the machine.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data check,
clear.
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of the
operation panel of the machine.
A. Basic operation
(1) Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON Program key ON Asterisk (*) key ON
CLEAR key ON Asterisk (*) key ON Ready for input of a
main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key START key ON.
Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key START key ON.
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected item.
Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simulation
operation.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1) Press [CA] key.
(Note for the simulation mode)

Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the
machine is in the simulation mode. If the power switch should be
turned OFF in the simulation mode, a malfunction may be resulted. In
this case, turn OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-3100N SIMULATION 7 1
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.
Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO
Press the START button.

YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit message is
simulation mode Press the SYSTEM displayed by the
NO before entering into SETTINGS key SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with
this mode for self YES
SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START button. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE button
Operation check ?
and OK button.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Operating conditions
check ? and OK button.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Data clear ?
and OK button.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE button

adjustment values. and OK button.
2. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the auto document feed unit and the control circuit. RSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the document feed unit section and the RSPF
control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the auto document feed unit and the control circuit. RSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray, and the control Desk/Large capacity tray
circuit of those. (LCC)
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and the control circuit of Desk/Large capacity tray
those. (LCC)
5 Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) and the LCC paper Paper feed desk/Large
transport clutch (LTRC). capacity tray (LCC)
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the related circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the control Paper transport/Paper exit
circuits. section
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the primary transport unit and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
6 Used to check the operation of the fusing separation. Fusing
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
9 Color setting in the color copy test mode (Used to check the copy operation and the image quality for each
color).
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) RSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control circuit. Process (Developing)
*When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the control Process (Charging)
circuit. *When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and Duplex
its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control circuit. Duplex
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Process (Developing)
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/U2/LCC/PF troubles.
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large capacity paper feed tray) trouble. LCC
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB /
SCU PWB
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position. * Presumption of the faulty point by
this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version, and
the counter list.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU, LCC
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX
12 Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the number RSPF
of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge). Process
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of troubles of misfeed is
considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the
counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit. (After
completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After replacement of the OPC drum, clear the counter.)
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
30 Used to initialize the administrator password.
31 Used to initialize the service mode password.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing
section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process
(Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
26 1 Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1). Paper exit
2 Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size is changed, this simulation Paper feed
must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor .(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.) Auditor
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start to
drive the fusing heater lamp)
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There
are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center binding
mode.
49 Used to set the copy speed mode of postcards.
50 Used to set functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting (copy mode)
54 User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting (printer mode)
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Poster, enlargement continuous shoot, card scan, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity)
adjustment
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) (FSS Communication (RIC/
function) MODEM)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry
number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history.
(FSS function)
12 Used to check the high-density, half-tone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history.
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
33 1 Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control circuit.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
22 Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
23 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-4.
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process
(Photoconductor/
Cleaning)
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor). Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process
(Photoconductor/
Cleaning)
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor Image process
(registration sensor). (Photoconductor/
Developing)
13 Used to perform the color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration.
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum,
development)/Fusing/LSU
16 Used to display the toner density control data. Developing system
21 Used to set the half tone process control target. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the half tone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the half tone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the half tone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the half tone process control compulsorily. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the half tone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
31 Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Manual adjustment) Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
46 1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
10 Used to adjust the copy color balance and the gamma (for each color copy mode).
16 Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome copy mode).
19 Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode
documents.
21 Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported).
24 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
25 Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode)
26 Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
27 Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy images, texts, and line image edges.
30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
36 Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the color document reproducibility in the monochrome copy mode.
38 Used to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode.
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
46 45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode.
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(The set values of SIM46-51 are set to the default values.)
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and
the auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
2 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (This simulation is a simplified version of SIM
50-1).
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF mode) RSPF
7 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (RSPF mode). (This simulation is a simplified RSPF
version of SIM 50-6.)
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position. (The adjustment is made
separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment. (The adjustment is made separately for each
scan mode.)
20 Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
21 Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
22 Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto adjustment)/OPC drum
phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
24 Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20, 21, and 22.
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF resist
roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position on the
paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the RSPF document size width sensor.
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document scan position.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SRAM, and HDD (including user authentication data and address
data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
60 1 Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB image memory (SDRAM).
2 Used to set the MFP PWB onboard SDRAM.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power.
4 Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)
62 1 Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area).
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation manual area)
10 Used to delete the job log data.
11 Used to delete the document filing data.
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual area)
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
6 Used to display the scan level and the density level of the copy color balance adjustment patch.
7 Used to register the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
8 Used to set the default of the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
11 Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
64 1 Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print) (256 gradations)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
7 Used to print the adjustment pattern of the test print .(Self print). (The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is
printed.)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
67 17 Printer reset Printer
24 Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Printer
25 Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Printer
26 Used to set the target color balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
27 Used to set the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
28 Used to set the default of the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
30 Used to set YES/NO of sending the machine calibration data and the half tone correction data to a client PC. Printer
(For GDI printer)
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. (for PCL/PS) Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. (for GDI) Printer
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. (Support for the high density section Printer
tone gap)
36 Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Printer
52 Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. (for PCL/PS) Printer
52 Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. (GDI) Printer
70 MFP PWB SRAM data clear MFP PWB
3. Details of simulation 1-5
Purpose Operation test/check
1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
1-1 Section Scanner (reading)
Purpose Operation test/check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
(reading) unit and the control circuit. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Scanner (reading) Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan
Operation/Procedure resolution (operation speed).
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
scan resolution (operation speed). (346.0mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI
Item/Display Operation mode Default value (259.5mm/s)
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI 600DPI 600DPI
(346.0mm/s) (346.0mm/s) (173.0mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI 1200DPI 1200DPI
(259.5mm/s) (86.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(173.0mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI
(86.5mm/s)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&+(&.
2&6&$1 300DPI '3, '3,
'3,

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&+(&.
2&6&$1 300DPI '3, '3,
'3,
(;(&87(
2
(;(&87(
1-2 2-1
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto
(reading) section and the related circuits. document feed unit and the control circuit.
Section Scanner (reading) Section RSPF
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. 1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi- key.
tion. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( ation speed).
6&$11(56(1625&+(&.
MHPS
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Item/Display Operation mode Default value

(SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(259.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI
(259.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(173.0 mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(259.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)

400DPI 400DPI
(259.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(173.0 mm/s)
2-3

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)$*,1* Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
300DPI
in the auto document feed unit and the con-
63)6&$1 '3, '3,
trol circuit.
Section RSPF
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel
key.
The selected load performs the operation.
SINGLE '28%/( (;(&87( When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
SPFM RSPF transport motor

2-2 SPRM_F RSPF paper feed reverse motor (normal rotation)
SPRM_R RSPF paper feed reverse motor (reverse rotation)
SPFC RSPF paper feed clutch
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- SRRC SPF resist roller clutch
sors and the detectors in the document SGS RSPF document exit gate solenoid
feed unit section and the control circuits. STMPS Finish stamp solenoid
Section RSPF
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
6,08/$7,2112

7(67 &/26(
played. 63)287387&+(&.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active 63)0 6350B)
63 50B5 63)&
are highlighted. 655& 6*6
67036
SSET RSPF installation detection

SOCD RSPF open/close detector
SCOV RSPF cover open/close detector
SPED RSPF document empty detector
SPPD1 RSPF document pass detector 1
(Paper enter detection)
SPPD2 RSPF document pass detector 2 (;(&87(
(Resist roller front document transport detection)
SPPD3 RSPF document pass detector 3 (Document scanning
front document transport detection)
(Reverse gate front document transport detection) 3
(Document reverse rear document transport detection)
3-2
SPLS1 RSPF document length detector 1 (Short)
SPLS2 RSPF document length detector 2 (Long) Purpose Operation test/check
STMPU SPF stamp unit installation detector Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
SWD_LEN RSPF guide plate position sors and the detectors in the finisher and
SWD_AD RSPF document width sensor (volume) output level the control circuit.
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display. Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure

played.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)6(1625&+(&.6:'B/(1 6('B$' The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
66(7 62&' 6&29 63('
633' 633' 633' 633'
are highlighted.
633' 63/6 63/6 67038
<Inner finisher>
FED Entry port paper detection (Status detection "1")
FBED Tray paper detection
FULD Tray upper limit detection
FMLLD Tray intermediate lower limit detection
FLLD Tray lower limit detection
FSLD1 Paper surface detection 1

FSLD2 Paper surface detection 2
FRLD Roller up/down detection
FBRD Belt separation detection
FFJHPD Alignment HP detection front
FRJHPD Alignment HP detection rear
FJPD Alignment guide position detection
FSTPD Staple tray paper detection
FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
FSD Staple empty detection
FSTD Staple lead edge position detection

FDSW Door open detection 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
FFANLK Fan motor lock detection ),16(1625&+(&.

3'33' 3'33' 3'&6 )33'
FPRPD Punch rear position detection (Status detection "1") )3$3+6B) )3$3+6B5 )$73' )*+36
FPUC Punch unit connection detection )'73' )3/' )33' )63+6

)673' )6056 )78/' )7//'
FPHPD Punch HP detection )7/056 )6+6 )66+36 )6('
FPSHPD Punch side resist HP detection )6/6 )736 )&' )&'

)66: )&' )666: ))/
FPPD1 Punch paper surface detection 1 )'5+6 )33' )666:
)6$73'
FPPD2 Punch paper surface detection 2 )3++' )6$3+6 )63*+6 )65+6
FPPD3 Punch paper surface detection 3 )3'' )66+6 )66(6 )66&6
)666+6
FPPD4 Punch paper surface detection 4
FPDD Punch dust detection

FPPEND Punch paper rear edge detection
FPDES1 Punch destination detection 1 3-3
FPDES2 Punch destination detection 2 Purpose Operation test/check
<Saddle stitch finisher> Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
the finisher and the control circuit.
FATPD Paper alignment tray paper detector
FPMRS Punch motor rotation sensor Section Finisher
PDPPD1 Paper pass paper transport detector 1 Operation/Procedure
PDPPD2 Paper pass paper transport detector 2 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
PDCS Paper pass cover Open/Close sensor key.
FTULD Tray upper limit detector
FTLLD Tray lower limit detector
FTLMRS Tray lift motor rotation sensor
FPLD Paper surface detector When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
FPPD1 Paper delivery detector 1 <Inner finisher>
FSHS Staple home position sensor
FINRPS Entry port reverse pass solenoid
FSLS Staple lead edge sensor
FSLS Paper surface detection solenoid
FSSSW1 Staple safety switch
FPDS Paddle solenoid
FSED Staple empty detector
FBRS Belt separation solenoid
FPDFS Punch dust sensor
FRM Registration motor
FDTPD Delivery tray paper detector
FSWM Oscillation motor
FPD Punch unit detection (connector)
FAM Bundle exit paper exit motor
FPCHPS Punch home position sensor
FFJM Alignment motor front
FPHPS Punch unit home position sensor
FRJM Alignment motor rear
FTPS Tray position sensor
FSM Staple shift motor
FFL Fan lock signal
FFSM Staple motor
FSSHPS Stapler shift home position sensor
FTLM Tray lift motor
FPAPHS_F Paper alignment plate home position sensor F
FFANM Fan motor
FPAPHS_R Paper alignment plate home position sensor R
FPNM Punch motor
FPTS Punch timing sensor
FPSM Punch side resist motor
FPES1 Punch paper edge sensor 1
<Saddle stitch finisher>
FPES4 Punch paper edge sensor 4 FPTM1 Paper transport motor 1
FSMRS Saddle motor rotation sensor FPAM-F Paper alignment motor F
FPPD2 Paper transport detector 2 FSSM Stapler shift motor
FSPHS Saddle plate home position sensor FTLM Tray lift motor
FSTPD Saddle exit tray paper detector FSM Staple motor
FSSW1 Safety switch 1 FPM Punch motor
FCD1 Cover detector 1 FPSM Punch shift motor
FCD2 Cover detector 2 FPAM-R Paper alignment motor R
FDRHS Delivery roller home position sensor PDPGS Paper pass paper gate solenoid
FPPD3 Paper transport detector 3 PDPTM Paper pass paper transport motor
FSATPD Saddle paper alignment tray paper detector PDCF Paper pass cooling fan
FSSSW2 Stapler safety switch 2 FPTM2 Paper transport motor 2
FPHHD Paper hold home position sensor FDRLM Finisher paper exit roller lift motor
FGHPS Gripper home position sensor FSDM Saddle motor
FSAPHS Saddle alignment plate home position sensor FGM Gripper motor
FSPGHS Saddle paper guide home position sensor FSPTM Saddle paper transport motor
FSRHS Saddle roller home position sensor FSPAM Saddle paper alignment motor
FPDD Delivery detector FSPM Saddle positioning motor
FSSHS Saddle staple home position sensor FSDSM Saddle staple motor
FSSES Saddle staple sensor FPHS1 Paper holding solenoid 1
FSSCS Saddle staple cover sensor FPHS2 Paper holding solenoid 2
FPPS Punch paper position sensor
FCD Finisher connection detector
FSSSHS Finisher saddle stapler shift home position sensor
Setting Default

6,08/$7,2112
range value
7(67 &/26(
),1/2$'&+(&. I STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 45 - 55 50
3'3*6 3'370 3'&) )370 adjustment (two positions at
)'5/0 )*0 )3$0) )3$05 the center)
J STAPLE Staple binding position 35 - 62 50
)660 )60 )7/0 )370
PITCH adjustment (two positions in
)6'0 )6370 )63$0 )630
pitch)
)6'60 )3+6 )3+6 K PUNCH Punch center adjustment 35 - 65 50
CENTER
L PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 30 - 60 50
adjustment
M SADDLE_ADJ Saddle alignment position 35 - 65 50
(;(&87( UST_POS adjustment
N GRIPPER_PO Gripper exit position 35 - 65 50
S adjustment
3-10
NOTE: "A: SADDLE POSITION (Saddle binding position adjust-
Purpose Adjustment
ment)" and "B: FOLDING POSITION (Saddle folding posi-
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher. tion adjustment"
Section Finisher The saddle binding position adjustment and the saddle
Operation/Procedure folding position adjustment can be executed in the system
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch setting menu. However, the adjustments in the system set-
panel. ting are based on the adjustment value of this simulation.
If, therefore, the adjustment value of this simulation is set
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
to an extreme level, the adjustment range in the system
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) setting may be narrowed. (Adjustment range in the system
<Inner finisher> setting 5.0mm)
Setting Default
In general, when the saddle binding position and the sad-
Item/Display Content dle folding positions are adjusted to the center by this simu-
range value
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 lation, the above trouble will not occur.
ADJUST adjustment (front)
B REAR ADJUST Alignment position 2 - 18 10
6,08/$7,2112
adjustment (rear) 7(67
),1,6+(5$'-8670(17
&/26(
C STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 $ 6$''/(326,7,21
adjustment $ % )2/',1*326,7,21
(one position at the rear) & )5217$'-867
' 5($5$'-867
D STAPLE Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 ( 67$3/(5($5
FRONT adjustment ) 67$3/(5($55
(one position in front) * 67$3/()5217
E STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 + 67$3/()52175
adjustment (center position , 67$3/(%27+
- 67$3/(3,7&+
of two positions binding)
. 381&+&(17(5
F STAPLE Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 / 381&++2/(
PITCH adjustment (staple pitch of 2.
two positions binding)
G PUNCH Punch center positioning 37 - 63 50
CENTER sensor
H PUNCH HOLE Punch hole adjustment 42 - 58 50 4
(paper transport direction)
<Saddle stitch finisher> 4-2

Setting Default Purpose Operation test/check
range value Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
A SADDLE Saddle stitch position 25 - 75 50 sors and detectors in the desk/large capac-
POSITION adjustment ity tray, and the control circuit of those.
B FOLDING Saddle folding position 25 - 75 50
POSITION adjustment Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
C FRONT Paper alignment position 35 - 65 50 Operation/Procedure
ADJUST adjustment (Front) The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
D REAR ADJUST Paper alignment position 35 - 65 50 played.
adjustment (Rear)
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
E STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 25 - 75 50
are highlighted.
adjustment
(one position at the rear) <Desk>
F STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 45 - 75 50
DCSI1 Desk 1 installation detection
R adjustment (one position at
the rear) DPFD1 Desk 1 transport detection
G STAPLE Staple binding position 25 - 75 50 DLUD1 Desk 1 upper limit detection
FRONT adjustment DPED1 Desk 1 paper empty detection
(one position in front) DCSPD1 Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detection
H STAPLE Staple binding position 25 - 55 50 DCSS11 Desk 1 rear edge detection 1
FRONT R adjustment (one position in DCSS12 Desk 1 rear edge detection 2
front) DCSS13 Desk 1 rear edge detection 3
DCSS14 Desk 1 rear edge detection 4
DCSI2 Desk 2 installation detection
DPFD2 Desk 2 transport detection

6,08/$7,2112
DLUD2 Desk 2 upper limit detection 7(67 &/26(

'6./&&/2$'&+(&.
DPED2 Desk 2 paper empty detection '3)0 '/80 '38& '/80
DCSPD2 Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detection '38& '75&

DSW_DSK Desk transport cover open/close detection
<A4 LCC>
LPFD LCC transport sensor
(;(&87(
LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor
LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor
LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor
4-5
LCD LCC tray insertion detection
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW Purpose Operation test/check
LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
L24VM LCC24V power monitor feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC)
LLSW LCC upper limit SW and the LCC paper transport clutch
LTOD LCC main unit connection detection (LTRC).
Section Paper feed desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
[Check the ON operation]
'6./&&6(1625&+(&.
'&6, '3)' '/8' '3('
Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
'&63' '&66 '&66 '&66 Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
'&66 '&6, '3)' '/8'
'3(' '&63' '&66 '&66
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
'&66 '&66 '6:B'6. highlighted.
[Check the OFF operation]
Press the highlighted button which is ON.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'(6./&&6<1&521,=,1*6,*1$/&+(&.

'75& '75&2))
/75& /75&2))
4-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the desk/large capacity tray (LCC), and
the control circuit of those.
Section Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Operation/Procedure
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
touch panel key. display is maintained.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. 5
<Desk>
DPFM Desk main motor 5-1
DLUM1 Desk 1 lift-up motor Purpose Operation test/check
DPUC1 Desk 1 paper feed clutch Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
DLUM2 Desk 2 lift-up motor LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
DPUC2 Desk 2 paper feed clutch cuit.
DTRC Desk transport clutch
Section Operation panel
<A4 LCC> Operation/Procedure
LPFM LCC transport motor The LCD is changed as shown below.
LLM LCC lift motor The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX
LPFC LCC paper feed clutch MIN the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
LTRC LCC transport clutch checked.
5-3
NO.05-01
SIMULATION
7(67 Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(

&23</$03&+(&.
2&&23</$03
(;(&87(
5-2
Purpose Operation test/check 5-4
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater Purpose Operation test/check
lamp and the control circuit. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis-
Section Fusing charge lamp and the control circuit.
Operation/Procedure Section Process
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel Operation/Procedure
key. 1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec.
Heater lamp operation check method: When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Remove the rear cabinet, open the PWB holder, and the heater
lamp lighting status can be checked from the clearance between DL_K Discharge lamp K
the frames. DL_C Discharge lamp C
DL_M Discharge lamp M
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub
HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
HL_UW Heater lamp upper main (For warm-up)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
',6&+$5*(/$03&+(&.
'/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B<

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+($7(5/$03/2$'6(783
+/B80 +/B/0
+/B86 +/B8:
$// (;(&87(
(;(&87(
6 6-2
6-1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
Purpose Operation test/check motor and its control circuit.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in Section Others
the paper transport system (clutches and Operation/Procedure
solenoids) and the control circuits. 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
Section Paper transport/Paper exit section key.
Operation/Procedure 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel The selected load performs the operation.
key. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
The selected load performs the operation. Load operation check method:
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
Load operation check method:
sound.
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation Item/Display Content
sound. POFM Paper exit cooling fan motor
(POFM_F and POFM_R are simultaneously ON.)
Section Item/Display Content
OZFM Ozone fan motor
Transport/ PFM Transport motor
PSFM Power cooling fan motor
process RRM Registration motor
(PSFM, PSFM2 are simultaneously ON.)
POMF Paper exit motor (normal rotation)
CCFM Process cooling fan motor
POMR Paper exit motor (reverse rotation) RCFM Rear cooling fan motor
FUM Fusing motor
FUFM Fusing fan motor
CPFM Tray paper feed motor
MFPFAN Controller fan motor
OSM Shifter motor
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch
1TURC Primary transport separation clutch

PCSS Process control shutter solenoid 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
WTNM Waste toner drive motor

)$1/2$'6(783
32)0 2=)0
PTCHT PTC heater 36)0 &&)0
Paper feed CLUM1 Tray 1 lift-up motor 5&)0 )8)0

0)3)$1
CPUC1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch
CLUM2 Tray 2 lift-up motor
CPUC2 Tray 2 paper feed clutch
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch
MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid
LSU LSUSS LSU shutter solenoid $// (;(&87(
6-3
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
)(('287387&+(&.
&/26(
3)0 550 320) 3205
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the primary
)80 &3)0 260 &3)& transport unit and the control circuit.
785& 3&66 :710 37&+7 Section Process (Transport)
&/80 &38& &/80 &38& Operation/Procedure
038& 03)6 03*6 /6866 1) Press [TC1] key to highlight it.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start the load operation. (Separation
operation is repeated in the sequence of BLACK COLOR
FREE,)
(;(&87( During this operation, the transport belt status (the operation mode
position) is displayed.
BLACK Monochrome mode Monochrome mode position Color

position mode position Non-transport
COLOR Color mode position position (Monochrome mode
FREE Non-transport position) The operation is repeated.
position

6,08/$7,2112 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7(67 &/26(
75$16)(5/2$'&+(&. $*,1*7(676(77,1*
326,7,21 $*,1* ,17(59$/
0,6)(('',6$%/( )86,1*',6$%/(
:$5083',6$%/( '9&+(&.',6$%/(
6+$',1*',6$%/( &&'*$,1)5((
7& (;(&87(
(;(&87(
6-6 7-6
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging
separation. cycle.
Section Fusing Section
1) Press [FUSER] key to highlight it. 1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
2) Press [EXCUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fusing key.
pressure release are repeated. 2) Press [OK] key.
During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is dis- The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
played.
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
PRINT Fusing pressure Fusing pressure applying Fusing The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
applying pressure release (Fusing pressure after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
FREE Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated.
release

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
,17(59$/$*,1*&<&/(7,0(6(783
$ &<&/(7,0(6(&
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( $
)86(5/2$'&+(&.

326,7,21
2.
)86(5 (;(&87(
7-8
Purpose Operation display
7 Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
Section
7-1
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Setting Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
aging. warm-up is displayed
Section Others * Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the target to be set with the touch panel key.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. :$50837,0(',63/$<6(77,1*
6(&21'6
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
AGING Aging operation setup

INTERVAL Intermittent setup
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection enable/disable setup
FUSING DISABLE Fusing operation enable/disable setup
WARMUP DISABLE Warm-up skip setup
DV CHECK DISABLE DV unit detection enable/disable setup (;(&87(
SHADING DISABLE Shading disable setup

CCD GAIN FREE No setting of the CCD gain adjustment
7-9
8
Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode
8-1
(Used to check the copy operation and the
image quality for each color). Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Section Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print mode
Operation/Procedure
and the control circuit.
1) Select the copy color with the touch panel key. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the
(Two or more colors can be selected.) low speed are also adjusted simulta-
The key of the selected color is highlighted. neously.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section Process (Developing)
Copying is performed with the selected color. Operation/Procedure
When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy oper- 1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
ation menu in the simulation mode. panel.
K Setup/cancel of black
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons.
C Setup/cancel of cyan 3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
M Setup/cancel of magenta label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
Y Setup/cancel of yellow * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
6,08/$7,2112
output for 30 sec.
7(67 &/26(
35,17,1*&2/256(/(&7&2/2502'(
. & 0 <
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Setting
Key Item/Display Content
range
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED K developing bias 0-600
DVB_K set value at middle
speed
B MIDDLE SPEED C developing bias 0-600
DVB_C set value at middle
speed
(;(&87( C MIDDLE SPEED M developing bias 0-600
DVB_M set value at middle
speed
7-12 D MIDDLE SPEED Y developing bias 0-600
DVB_Y set value at middle
speed
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets LOW A LOW SPEED K developing bias 0-600
setting (for aging operation) DVB_K set value at low
speed
Section RSPF
B LOW SPEED C developing bias 0-600
Operation/Procedure DVB_C set value at low
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key. speed
(Setting range:0 - 255) C LOW SPEED M developing bias 0-600
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved. DVB_M set value at low
speed
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
D LOW SPEED Y developing bias 0-600
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. DVB_Y set value at low
speed

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/66(77,1*

$ 25,*,1$/6
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$ '96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 0,''/(63((''9%B.
$ % 0,''/(63((''9%B&
& 0,''/(63((''9%B0
' 0,''/(63((''9%B<
2.
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
8-2
Adjust
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment Key Item/Display Content ment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of range
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED K charging/grid bias set 150 -
the main charger grid voltage in each
GB_K value at middle speed 850
printer mode and the control circuit. *When
B MIDDLE SPEED C charging/grid bias set 150 -
the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed
GB_C value at middle speed 850
are also adjusted simultaneously.
C MIDDLE SPEED M charging/grid bias set 150 -
Section Process (Charging) GB_M value at middle speed 850
Operation/Procedure D MIDDLE SPEED Y charging/grid bias set 150 -
GB_Y value at middle speed 850
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
LOW/ A LOW SPEED K charging/grid bias set 150 -
panel.
HIGH GB_K value at low speed 850
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] keys. B LOW SPEED C charging/grid bias set 150 -
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified GB_C value at low speed 850
on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.) C LOW SPEED M charging/grid bias set 150 -
GB_M value at low speed 850
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. D LOW SPEED Y charging/grid bias set 150 -
GB_Y value at low speed 850
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated. 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387

$ 0,''/(63(('*%B.
$ % 0,''/(63(('*%B&
& 0,''/(63(('*%B0
' 0,''/(63(('*%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
8-6
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Section Process (Transport)
Operation/Procedure
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Default value
output value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transport Color K In low speed 51 - 255 80 2A 30A 6A
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K bias reference In middle speed 51 - 255 109 2A 30A 10A
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C value C In low speed 51 - 255 80 2A 30A 6A
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C In middle speed 51 - 255 109 2A 30A 10A
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M In low speed 51 - 255 80 2A 30A 6A
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M In middle speed 51 - 255 109 2A 30A 10A
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y In low speed 51 - 255 80 2A 30A 6A
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y In middle speed 51 - 255 109 2A 30A 10A
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/White K In low speed 51 - 255 80 2A 30A 6A
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K In middle speed 51 - 255 109 2A 30A 10A
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary Color Standard Front surface 51 - 255 130 2A 100A 40A
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX transport bias paper Back surface 51 - 255 120 2A 100A 35A
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX reference value Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 99 2A 100A 25A
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 99 2A 100A 25A
O TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color Heavy Front surface 51 - 255 78 2A 100A 15A
P TC2 HEAVY CL DPX paper Back surface 51 - 255 78 2A 100A 15A
Q TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 78 2A 100A 15A
R TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 68 2A 100A 10A
Default value
output value
S TC2 OHP CL Secondary Color OHP 51 - 255 78 2A 100A 15A
T TC2 OHP BW transport bias Black/White 51 - 255 68 2A 100A 10A
U TC2 ENVELOPE CL reference value Color Envelope 51 - 255 78 2A 100A 15A
V TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White 51 - 255 78 2A 100A 15A
W TC2 CLEANING Cleaning process 51 - 255 63 2A 100A 8A
X TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary In low speed print 0 - 255 0 0V -1500V 0V
Y TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD transport cleaning In middle speed print 0 - 255 0 0V -1500V 0V
Z TC2 CLEAN CLEANING bias reference Cleaning 0 - 255 85 0V -1500V -500V
value
AA VPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied Color In low speed 0 - 255 100 0V 4KV 2.5KV
AB VPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage control In middle speed 0 - 255 100 0V 4KV 2.5KV
AC VPTC LOW SPEED BK (AC constant Black/White In low speed 0 - 255 100 0V 4KV 2.5KV
AD VPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK voltage setting) In middle speed 0 - 255 100 0V 4KV 2.5KV
AE FPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied Color In low speed 1 - 255 184 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz
AF FPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage control In middle speed 1 - 255 184 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz
AG FPTC LOW SPEED BK (frequency setting Black/White In low speed 1 - 255 184 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz
AH FPTC MIDDLE SPEED BK value) In middle speed 1 - 255 131 0.5KHz 2KHz 0.5KHz
AI DCPTC LOW SPEED CL PTC applied Color In low speed 0 - 255 93 0V 2KV -1.0KV
AJ DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED CL voltage control In middle speed 0 - 255 149 0V 2KV -1.4KV
AK DCPTC LOW SPEED BK (DC constant Black/White In low speed 0 - 255 149 0V 2KV -1.4KV
AL DCPTC MIDDLE SPEED voltage setting In middle speed 0 - 255 149 0V 2KV -1.4KV
BK value)
AM PTC_HT PTC heater 0: OFF 0-6 1 Always ON
operating 1-6: Environment conditions
environment
setting
AN HT_DUTY Setting of the 0: OFF 0 - 10 5 0% 100% 50%
supply power in 10: Lighting-up fully
PTC heater
constant operation
(Duty ratio setting)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
9
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 7&/2:63(('&/.
$ % 7&0,''/(63(('&/.
9-2
& 7&/2:63(('&/&
' 7&0,''/(63(('&/& Purpose Operation test/check
( 7&/2:63(('&/0
) 7&0,''/(63(('&/0 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
* 7&/2:63(('&/<
sors and detectors in the paper reverse
+ 7&0,''/(63(('&/<
, 7&/2:63(('%:.
section (duplex section) and its control cir-
- 7&0,''/(63(('%:. cuit.
. 7&3/$,1&/63;
/ 7&3/$,1&/'3; Section Duplex

(;(&87( 2.
Operation/Procedure
played.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
are highlighted.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection

APPD1 ADU transport detection 1
APPD2 ADU transport detection 2

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$'86(1625&+(&.
'6:B$'8 $33' $33'

9-3

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
721(502725$&7,9$7,21
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in 710B. 710B& 710B0 710B<
the paper reverse section (duplex section)

and its control circuit.
Section Duplex
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
(;(&87(
ADUM_L ADU motor lower

13
13--
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(

$'8/2$'&+(&. Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
$'80B/ Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
(;(&87(
10
10-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
supply mechanism (toner motor) and the

related circuit.
Section Process (Developing) 14
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
14--
When [ALL ] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec. Function (Purpose) Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/
U2/LCC/PF troubles.
Section
NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
Operation/Procedure
toner cartridges.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing 2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
unit, resulting in overtoner.
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner car-

tridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by mak- 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
ing a few black background copy in the single color copy 7528%/(&$1&(//$7,2127+(5
mode of the target color.
TNM_K Toner motor K

TNM_C Toner motor C
TNM_M Toner motor M
TNM_Y Toner motor Y
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
15 17
15--
17--
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
capacity paper feed tray) trouble.
Section
Section LCC
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 3)7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
/&&7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
16 21
21-1
16--
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Section
Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean-
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not
clarify.

1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( panel.
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 100K
COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
(TOTAL) (Total) 999 : Free
B MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 60K
COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( (COLOR) (Color) 999 : Free

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$,17(1$1&(&<&/(6(783
$ 0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5727$/
$ % 0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5&2/25

2.
TC2 BELT RANGE Secondary transport unit
22 accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
TC2 BELT DAY Use day of secondary
22-1 transport unit (Day)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/ FUSER UNIT Fusing unit print counter
Check FUSER ACUM Use day of fusing unit
DAY (Day)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each
DRUM LIFE (K) Accumulated number of
section and each operation mode.
drum rotations K (%)
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
DRUM LIFE (C) Accumulated number of
Section drum rotations C (%)
Operation/Procedure DRUM LIFE (M) Accumulated number of
drum rotations M (%)
Change the display page with [] [] key on the touch panel.
DRUM LIFE (Y) Accumulated number of
TOTAL OUT (BW) Total output quantity of All prints including drum rotations Y (%)
black and white jams DEVE LIFE (K) Accumulated number of
TOTAL OUT (COL) Total output quantity of All prints including developer rotations K (%)
color jams DEVE LIFE (C) Accumulated number of
TOTAL (BW) Total use quantity of black Effective paper developer rotations C (%)
and white (including self print, DEVE LIFE (M) Accumulated number of
excluding jams) developer rotations M (%)
TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity of full Effective paper DEVE LIFE (Y) Accumulated number of
color (including self print, developer rotations Y (%)
excluding jams) PTC PTC counter
TOTAL (2COL) Total use quantity of 2- Effective paper
color (including self print,
excluding jams)

TOTAL (3COL) Total use quantity of 3- Effective paper 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
color (including self print, &2817(5',63/$<

727$/287%: 35,17&2/
excluding jams) 727$/287&2/ 35,17&2/
TOTAL Total use quantity of single Effective paper 727$/%: 35,176&/B&2/
(SGL_COL) color (including self print, 727$/&2/ '2&),/%:
excluding jams) 727$/&2/ '2&),/&2/
727$/&2/ '2&),/&2/

COPY (BW) Black and white copy Billing target 727$/6*/B&2/ '2&),/6*/&2/
counter (excluding self print) &23<%: 27+(5%:
COPY (COL) Full color copy counter Billing target &23<&2/ 27+(5&2/
(excluding self print) &23<&2/ 0$,17(1$1&($//

&23<6*/B&2/ 0$,17(1$1&(&2/
COPY (2COL) 2-color copy counter Billing target
35,17%: 7&%(/7
(excluding self print) 35,17&2/ 7&%(/75$1*(

COPY (SGL_COL) Single color copy counter Billing target
(excluding self print)
PRINT (BW) Black and white print Billing target
counter (excluding self print) 22-2
PRINT (COL) Full color print counter Billing target Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total numbers of misfeed
PRINT (2COL) 2-color print counter Billing target
and troubles. (When the number of total
jam is considerably great, it is judged as
PRINT (3COL) 3-color print counter Billing target
necessary for repair.)
PRINT (SGL_COL) Single color print counter Billing target Section
(excluding self print) Operation/Procedure
DOC FIL (BW) Black and white document Billing target
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
filing print counter (excluding self print)
DOC FIL (COL) Color document filing print Billing target
counter (excluding self print)

DOC FIL (2COL) 2-color document filing Billing target 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
print counter (excluding self print) -$07528%/(&2817(5',63/$<
0$&+,1(-$0
DOC FIL Single color document filing Billing target 563)'63)-$0
(SGL COL) print counter (excluding self print) 7528%/(
OTHER (BW) Black and white other Self print quantity

counter
OTHER (COL) Color other counter Self print quantity
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter
ALL (Total)
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter
COL (Color)
TC1 BELT Primary transport unit print
counter
TC1 BELT RANGE Primary transport unit

accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
TC1 BELT DAY Use day of primary
transport unit (Day)
TC2 BELT Secondary transport unit
print counter
22-3
22-5
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each
misfeed count of each position. unit (section).
* Presumption of the faulty point by this
data is possible. Section Firmware
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary.
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
*For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12] S/N Serial No.
OTHERS. ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)
ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
LANGUAGE Language support data version

GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$< IMG DATA ROM MFP ASIC Flash ROM data
33'B1&3)'B60)775$<
COLOR PROFILE Color profile
33'B1&3)'B633'B1'3)'B1
/&&33'B35,'3)'B1/&&
PCU PCU
32'B633'B35,75$<)3''B6 SCU SCU
)'230)7
FAX (MAIN) FAX (main section)
FAX2 (MAIN) FAX 2-Line (Main section) (Japan only)
DESK Desk unit
LCC Side LCC
FINISHER Finisher
PUNCH Punch unit

NIC NIC
POWER-CON Power controller
E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
22-4 ESCP ESCP font ROM
PDL PDL font ROM
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
tory.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Section 61
,&80$,1 381&+
Operation/Procedure ,&8%227 1,&

/$1*8$*( 32:(5&21
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items. *5$3+,& (0$18$/
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.) ,0*'$7$520 (6&3
&2/25352),/( 3'/
* For the list of the trouble codes: Refer to "2. Trouble code list" in 3&8
tht "[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE". 6&8
)$;0$,1121(

)$;0$,1121(
'(6.121(

6,08/$7,2112 /&&
7(67 &/26(
),1,6+(5
7528%/(&2'('$7$',63/$<
())/
)/))
)/))
))+( 22-6
8)/(
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the
firmware version, and the counter list.
Section
Operation/Procedure
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
Print list
Item/Display Print content
mode
A DATA 1 Firmware version,
PATTERN counter data, etc.
2 SIM50-24 data
3 Data related to the process
control
2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step

1) .
2 : '09/Sep

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'$7$35,1702'(
3$3(5)(('&2817(5',63/$<
$ '$7$3$77(51 75$<
$ 75$<

75$<
75$<
0)7727$/
0)7+($9<
0)72+3
0)7(19
/&&
$'8
(;(&87( 2.

22-8
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 22-10
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
(counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration
and the scan (reading) unit. (option, internal hardware).
Section Section
The counter values of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scanner The system configuration is displayed.
related counters are displayed.
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
SPF Document feed quantity played.)
SCAN Number of times of scan
MACHINE MX-2301N Main unit 2
STAPLER Staple counter
MX-2600G
PUNCHER Puncher counter
MX-3100G
STAMP Stamp counter
MX-2600N
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
MX-3100N
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
SPF MX-RPX2 Automatic document
COVER Cover open/close counter
STANDARD feeder
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section
DESK MX-DEX6 Desk unit
(* hour * minutes)
MX-DEX7
LCC MX-LCX1 Large capacity tray
(LCC)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( PUNCHER MX-PNX1A Punch unit
25*67$3/(&2817(5',63/$<
MX-PNX5A
63)
6&$1 FINISHER MX-FNX9 Finisher

67$3/(5 MX-FN10
381&+(5
67$03
FAX MX-FXX2 FAX kit
6$''/(67$3/(5 NETWORK SCANNER MX-NSX1/ Network scanner
6$''/(9)2/' STANDARD expansion kit
&29(5
PRINTER MX-PBX3/ Printer expansion kit
+3B21
2&/$037,0(
STANDARD
PS MX-PKX1 PS expansion kit
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit

SECURITY MX-FR10U Security kit (DSK)
commercial version
MX-FR10 Security kit (DSK)
22-9
authentication version
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check AIM MX-AMX1 Application
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print integration module
quantity) of each paper feed section. SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
Section Paper feed, ADU, LCC
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
Operation/Procedure BARCODE AR-PF1 Bar code font
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed. INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 I-Fax expansion kit
ACM MX-AMX2 Application
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter communication
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter module
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter EAM MX-AMX3 External account
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter module
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
ADU ADU paper feed counter
(Paper reverse section)
2 : '09/Sep

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$&+,1(6<67(0 63)-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$<
0$&+,1(0;* 360;3.;

63)0;53; ;360;38;
67$03$568 6(&85,7<0;)58
'(6.0;'(; $,00;$0;

/&&0;/&; 6'5$06<60%
381&+(50;31;$ 6'5$0,&80%

),1,6+(50;)1; +''0%
)$;0;);; 1,&67$1'$5'
)$;0;)/; %$5&2'($53)
)$;0(025<$500 )217$53)

+$1'6(70;+1; ,17(51(7)$;0;):;
1(7:25.6&$11(50;16; 9(1'25&96+
35,17(50;3%;
22-11 22-13
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/ Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
receive) of FAX. process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
(Only when FAX is installed) cartridge).
Section FAX Section Process
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
are displayed. displayed.
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1) DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K)
FAX OUTPUT_L2 FAX print quantity counter (for line 2) DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge print counter (C)
(Japan only) DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge print counter (M)
FAX SEND FAX send counter DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1) (cm) (K)
SEND IMAGES_L2 FAX send quantity counter (for line 2) DRUM RANGE C Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(Japan only) (cm) (C)
SEND TIME FAX send time DRUM RANGE M Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time (cm) (M)
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding DRUM RANGE Y Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
communications (cm) (Y)
DRUM TURN K Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time K 2
DRUM TURN C Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time C

DRUM TURN M Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time M
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( DRUM TURN Y Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time Y
)$;&2817(5',63/$<
)$;287387 DRUM DAY K Number of day that used drum (Day) K
)$;287387B/ DRUM DAY C Number of day that used drum (Day) C
)$;6(1'
DRUM DAY M Number of day that used drum (Day) M
)$;5(&(,9('
6(1',0$*(6
DRUM DAY Y Number of day that used drum (Day) Y
6(1',0$*(6B/ DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
6(1'7,0(
DEVE CTRG C Developer cartridge print counter (C)
5(&(,9('7,0(
$&56(1'
DEVE CTRG M Developer cartridge print counter (M)
DEVE CTRG Y Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling
distance (cm) (K)

DEVE RANGE C Developer cartridge accumulated traveling
distance (cm) (C)
DEVE RANGE M Developer cartridge accumulated traveling
22-12 distance (cm) (M)
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check DEVE RANGE Y Developer cartridge accumulated traveling
distance (cm) (Y)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions DEVE TURN K Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time K 2
and the number of misfeed at each posi- DEVE TURN C Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time C
tion. (When the number of misfeed is con- DEVE TURN M Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time M
siderably great, it can be judged as DEVE TURN Y Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time Y
necessary for repair.) DEVE DAY K Number of day that used developer (Day) K
Section RSPF DEVE DAY C Number of day that used developer (Day) C
Operation/Procedure DEVE DAY M Number of day that used developer (Day) M
DEVE DAY Y Number of day that used developer (Day) Y
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K)
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
TONER MOTOR C Toner motor print counter (C)
*For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "2. Paper jam codes" in [12]
TONER MOTOR M Toner motor print counter (M)
OTHERS.
TONER MOTOR Y Toner motor print counter (Y)
TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (K)
TONER TURN C Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (C)
TONER TURN M Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (M)
TONER TURN Y Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (Y) 22-90
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
352&(66&$575,'*(',63/$< Section
'580&75*. '(9(&75*.
'580&75*& '(9(&75*&
Operation/Procedure
'580&75*0 '(9(&75*0 1) Change the display with [] [] key.
'580&75*< '(9(&75*<
'5805$1*(. '(9(5$1*(.
2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
'5805$1*(& '(9(5$1*(& 3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
'5805$1*(0 '(9(5$1*(0
'5805$1*(< '(9(5$1*(<
All setting list ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
'580'$<. '(9('$<.
'580'$<& '(9('$<&
Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
'580'$<0 '(9('$<0 PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
'580'$<< '(9('$<< PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST

PS FONT LIST
PS KANJI FONT LIST
22-19 PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
NIC PAGE
Address registration INDIVIDUAL LIST
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters list (*) GROUP LIST
related to the scan - image send. PROGRAM LIST
Section MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
Operation/Procedure
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner Document filing list DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
Change the display with [] [] key. System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
counter (B/W scan job) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
counter (Color scan job) ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read quantity ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
counter (2-Color scan job) Receive rejection ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read quantity number table
counter (Single-color scan job) Receive rejection/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output allow address
OUTPUT domain table
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX sending page To Email INBOUND ROUTING LIST
OUTPUT Transfer table list
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive To administrator DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
RECEIVE Transfer list
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Number of SMB send * When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage model, this setting is invalid.
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)

SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-COLOR) /,6735,17
SCAN TO HDD_SGL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (SINGLE $//&867206(77,1*/,67 3&/6<0%2/6(7/,67

3&/,17(51$/)217/,67 3&/(;7(1'(')217/,67
color) 36)217/,67 36.$1-,)217/,67
36(;7(1'(')217/,67 1,&3$*(
,1',9,'8$//,67 *5283/,67
352*5$0/,67 0(025<%2;/,67

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( $//6(1',1*$''5(66/,67 '2&80(17),/,1*)2/'(5/,67
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5',63/$< $'0,16(77,1*6/,67&23< $'0,16(77,1*6/,6735,17

1(76&125*B%: $'0,16(77,1*6/,67,0$*(6(1' $'0,16(77,1*6/,67'2&),/,1*
1(76&125*B&/ $'0,16(77,1*6/,676(&85,7< $'0,16(77,1*6/,67&20021
1(76&125*B&/ $//$'0,1,675$7256(77,1*6/,67 $17,-81.)$;180%(5/,67
1(76&125*B6*/ $17,-81.0$,/'20$,11$0(/,67 ,1%281'5287,1*/,67
,17(51(7)$;287387
(;(&87(
,17(51(7)$;6(1'287387
,17(51(7)$;5(&(,9(
,17(51(7)$;6(1'
0$,/&2817(5
)73&2817(5
60%6(1'
86%&17
75,$/02'(B% &
23 6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
'$7$35,1702'(3$3(5)(('
3$3(5)(('7,0(/,67
23-2
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
troubles of misfeed is considerably great,
the judgment is made that repair is
required.)
Section
(;(&87(
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.
24

24-1
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
-$07528%/('$7$35,1702'( Purpose Data clear
35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(-$07528%/(35,17
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
ble counter. (After completion of mainte-
nance, clear the counters.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
3) Press [YES] key.
(;(&87(
The target counter is cleared.
MACHINE Machine JAM counter

23-80 RSPF RSPF JAM counter
Purpose Operation test/check TROUBLE Trouble counter
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed
and paper transport in the paper feed sec-

tion and the paper transport section. Used
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
-$07528%/(&2817(5'$7$&/($5
to output the list of the operation status of 0$&+,1( 563) 7528%/(
the sensor and the detectors in the paper

feed section and the paper transport sec-
tion.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
paper transport is outputted.
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
in the paper feed and transport section.

The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the 24-2
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed. Purpose Data clear
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen- ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.
Section
SECTION Operation content (Trigger name - Detection Operation/Procedure
operation or load operation name) 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
STANDARD Reference value (ms)
CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the
final paper 3) Press [YES] key.
PREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job The target counter is cleared.
on the final paper
MAXIMUM (*1) Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
MINIMUM (*1) Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the market. MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
ADU ADU paper feed counter
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color)
3$3(5)(('&2817(5&/($5
TC1 BELT Primary transport unit print counter
75$< 75$< 75$< 75$<
TC1 BELT RANGE Primary transport unit accumulated traveling
0)7727$/ 0)7+($9< 0)72+3 0)72+3
distance (cm)
/&& $'8 TC1 BELT DAY Use day of primary transport unit (Day)
TC2 BELT Secondary transport unit print counter
TC2 BELT RANGE Secondary transport unit accumulated
traveling distance (cm)
TC2 BELT DAY Use day of secondary transport unit (Day)
FUSER UNIT Fusing unit print counter
FUSER ACUM DAY Use day of fusing unit (Day)
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( PTC PTC counter
24-3

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Data clear 0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5&/($5

0$,17(1$1&($// 0$,17(1$1&(&2/ 7&%(/7 7&%(/75$1*(
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the 7&%(/7'$< 7&%(/7 7&%(/75$1*( 7&%(/7'$<
scan (reading) unit counter.
)86(581,7 )86(5$&80'$< 37&
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
SPF RSPF document feed counter

SCAN Scan counter 24-5
STAPLER Staple counter
Purpose Data clear
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter replacement of developer, clear the
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter counter.)
COVER Cover open/close counter Section
HP_ON HP detection count Operation/Procedure
OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time
3) Press [YES] key.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( The target counter is cleared.
25*287387&2817(5'$7$&/($5
63) 6&$1 67$3/(5 381&+(5 NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared
67$03 6$''/(67$3/(5 6$''/(9)2/' &29(5
automatically.
+3B21 2&/$037,0(
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Number of day that used developer (Day) K
Developer cartridge print counter (C)
C Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Number of day that used developer (Day) C
Developer cartridge print counter (M)
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
M Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Number of day that used developer (Day) M
Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
24-4 Y Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
Purpose Data clear Number of day that used developer (Day) Y
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
printer counters of the transport unit and
the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte- 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
nance, clear the counters.) '(9(/23(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5

. & 0 <
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
24-6
24-9
Purpose Data clear
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter
Section and the self print mode print counter.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
3) Press [YES] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The target counter is cleared. 3) Press [YES] key.
COPY BW Copy counter (B/W)
COPY COL Copy counter (COLOR)
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W)
SINGLE COLOR Single color
PRINT COL Print counter (COLOR)
2COLOR 2-color
PRINT (2COL) Print counter (2-colors)
PRINT (3COL) Print counter (3-colors)
PRINT (SGL_COL) Print counter (Single color)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
OTHER BW Other counter (B/W)
&23<&2817(5'$7$&/($5
&23<%: &23<&2/ 6,1*/(&2/25 &2/25 OTHER COL Other counter (COLOR)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,1727+(5&2817(5&/($5
35,17%: 35,17&2/ 35,17&2/ 35,17&2/
35,176&/B&2/ 27+(5%: 27+(5&2/
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
24-7
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
replacement of the OPC drum, clear the

counter.)
Section 24-10
Operation/Procedure Purpose Data clear
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (Only when FAX is installed)
3) Press [YES] key. Section
The target counter is cleared. Operation/Procedure
Drum cartridge print counter (K)
K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Number of day that used drum (Day) K 3) Press [YES] key.
Drum cartridge print counter (C) The target counter is cleared.
C Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Number of day that used drum (Day) C FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter (for line 1)
Drum cartridge print counter (M) FAX OUTPUT_L2 FAX Print quantity counter (for line 2)
(Japan only)
M Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
FAX SEND FAX send counter
Number of day that used drum (Day) M
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
Y Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
SEND IMAGES_L2 FAX send quantity counter (for line 2)
Number of day that used drum (Day) Y
(Japan only)
SEND TIME FAX send time
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
'580&75*&2817(5&(/$5
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding
. & 0 < communications
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
24-30

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Data clear
)$;&2817(5'$7$&/($5
)$;287387 )$;287387B/ )$;6(1' )$;5(&(,9('
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator pass-
word.
6(1',0$*(6 6(1',0$*(6B/ 6(1'7,0( 5(&(,9('7,0(
$&56(1'
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The administrator password is initialized.
If the administrator password of system setting and Web page is
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
forgotten, execute this simulation to set the password to "admin"
(default).
24-15
Purpose Data clear 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$'0,13$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the

scan mode and the image send.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity

counter (B/W scan job)
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity 24-31
counter (COLOR scan job)
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read quantity
Purpose Data clear
counter (2-color scan job) Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode pass-
NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read quantity word.
counter (single color scan job)
Section
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
OUTPUT Operation/Procedure
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
SEND OUTPUT 2) Press [YES] key.
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
The service mode password is initialized.
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send If the password of Web page is forgotten, execute this simulation to
SEND set the password to "service" (default).
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send

SMB SEND Number of SMB send 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage 6(59,&(3$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD_SGL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (SINGLE
color)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5
1(76&125*B%: 1(76&125*B&/
1(76&125*B&/ 1(76&125*B6*/
,17(51(7)$;287387 ,17(51(7)$;6(1'287387
,17(51(7)$;5(&(,9( ,17(51(7)$;6(1'
0$,/&2817(5 )73&2817(5
60%6(1' 86%&17
75,$/02'(B% & 6&$172+''B%:
6&$172+''B&/ 6&$172+''B&/
6&$172+''B6*/
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_L_K
25 adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_L_C
low speed process mode AT DEVE ADJ_L_M
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y
25-1
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_M_K
Purpose Operation test/check adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_M_C
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel- medium speed process AT DEVE ADJ_M_M
oping section. mode AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y
Section Process (Developing section) Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_L_K
control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_L_C
Operation/Procedure the low speed process AT DEVE VO_L_M
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys. mode AT DEVE VO_L_Y
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_M_K
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3 control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_M_C
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis- the medium speed AT DEVE VO_M_M
process mode
played. AT DEVE VO_M_Y
TCD_K Toner density sensor K

TCD_C Toner density sensor C

TCD_M Toner density sensor M 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
TCD_Y Toner density sensor Y $8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
TCV_K Toner density sensor control voltage level K
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
TCV_C Toner density sensor control voltage level C $7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0
TCV_M Toner density sensor control voltage level M $7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
TCV_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level Y $7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
NOTE: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this $7'(9($'-B0B0
simulation. $7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge $7'(9(92B/B&
installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing $7'(9(92B/B0
unit, resulting in overtoner and a trouble. $7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
721(56(1625287387021,725
26
7&'B.
7&'B&
7&'B0
7&'B<
7&9B. 26-1
7&9B&
7&9B0 Purpose Setting
7&9B<
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1).
Section Paper exit
Operation/Procedure
/2: 0,''/( (;(&87(
25-2 This setting is required to use the paper exit tray unit (MX-TRX1).
Purpose Setting Item/Display Content

Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner A 0 YES Paper exit tray : YES
density when replacing developer. (Auto- 1 NO Paper exit tray : NO
matic adjustment)
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure 5,*+775$<6(783
$ <(612
1) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel. $
The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner density
sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is
displayed.
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
trol level.
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the 2.
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when

error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-
erence toner density level is not set normally.
Do not execute this simulation except when new developer is sup-
plied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or overtone may
occur, causing a trouble.
Default
26-2 Item/Display Content
value
Purpose Setting PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper size of the large performed in the duplex
capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size print mode.
If the remaining money
is changed, this simulation must be exe-
expires during continuous
cuted to change the paper size in software.)
printing, the sheets in the
Section Paper feed machine are discharged
Operation/Procedure without being printed on the
back surfaces.
Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel.
OFF Continuous printing is not
performed in the duplex
LCC 0 8.5 x 11
print mode. (The remaining
1 A4 amount is checked for
2 B5 printing every surface in all
G/LBS SET 0 GRAM the printing process.)
1 LBS If the remaining money
expires during printing, the
sheet is discharged without
printing on the back

6,08/$7,2112
surface.
7(67 &/26(
6,=(6(783 VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
/&& h $ % MODE (*) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
*/%66(7 *5$0 /%6
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
COUNTUP FUSER_IN When the paper lead edge EXIT_
TIMING passes the fusing rear OUT
sensor.
FUSER_OUT When the paper rear edge
passes the fusing rear
sensor.
EXIT_OUT When the paper rear edge
passes the paper exit
sensor in the main unit, the
right tray, and the after
process unit.
26-3
(*) Details of the vendor mode
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor Completion Insufficient money during Completion
.(Setting must be made according to the of the copy job of the
specified specified
auditor use conditions.) BW/Color Color
quantity. quantity.
Section Auditor (no money (Money
(Money (No money
remaining) remaining)
Operation/Procedure remaining) remaining)
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
Default MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
Item/Display Content MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
value
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation. Operation 1:
EC1 EC1 mode operation Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE which can be changed in the system setting.
AUDITOR vendor is used. Operation 2:
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode Auto clear is not made.
(Only the copy mode can Operation 3:
be controlled.)
The display is shifted to the initial screen.
P VENDOR2 Vendor mode
communicating with the
parallel I/F (for DocuLyzer)
(Japan only) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
P OTHER NOT USED $8',7256(783

%8,/7,1 3 (&
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode
2876,'($8',725 121( 39(1'25 39(1'25
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF 327+(5 6B9(1'25
document filing print '2&$'- 21 2))
OFF No support for the auditor in 3)$'- 21 2))

9(1'2502'(
document filing print 02'( 02'( 02'(
&2817837,0,1* )86(5B,1 )86(5B287 (;,7B287

26-5

Purpose Setting 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'(67,1$7,216(783
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total 86$ &$1$'$ ,1&+ -$3$1
counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/ $%B% (8523( 8. $86
11x17 size)
$%B$ &+,1$
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
3) Press [OK] key. (;(&87(

The set value in step 2) is saved.
Default
Item/Display Content 26-10
value
A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 1 Purpose Setting
B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (Color) (Japan)
2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
(Except scanner.
Japan) Section
C MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2 Operation/Procedure
D MAINTE (COL) Maintenance counter
(Color)
E DEV (B/W) Developer counter 2) Press [OK] key.
(B/W) The set value in step 1) is saved.
F DEV (COL) Developer counter
(Color) TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting
( 0 : YES 1 : NO ) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default)

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67

$h&281783
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$ 727$/%:
1(7:25.6&$11(575,$/02'(6(783
$ % 727$/&2/
$ 75,$/02'(<(612
& 0$,17(%: $
' 0$,17(&2/

( '(9%:
) '(9&2/
2.
2.
26-6
Purpose Setting 26-18
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed Purpose Setting
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
Section save mode operation.
(For the Japan and the UK versions.)
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
Operation/Procedure
The selected set content is saved.
U.S.A. United States of America 3) Press [OK] key.
CANADA Canada
INCH Inch series, other destinations
JAPAN Japan Default
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations Item Display Content
value
EUROPE Europe A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited.
0
U.K. United Kingdom 1 Copy toner save mode is allowed
AUS. Australia B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations inhibited.
0
CHINA China 1 Printer toner save mode is
allowed.

6,08/$7,2112 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7(67 &/26(
721(56$9(02'(6(783 7528%/(0(025<02'(6(783
$ &23<<(612 $ 21&($1<

$ $
% 35,17(5<(612

2. 2.
26-30 26-38
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre- Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the
sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety maintenance life is reached.
standards). (For slow start to drive the fus- Section
ing heater lamp)
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key.
0 Control allowed
Default
1 Control inhibited Item/Display Content
value
2) Press [OK] key. A MAINTENANCE 0 Print continue 0
LIFE OVER 1 Print stop
* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
to the power frequency, etc.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported) (1*,1(/,)(29(56(77,1*

$ 0$,17(1$1&(/,)(29(5&217,18(6723
CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported) $
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)

AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&(0$5.&21752/6(77,1*
$ <(612
$
2.

26-41
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
in the center binding mode.
2.
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-35 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Setting
0 AMS Disable
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
1 AMS Enable
trouble history when a same trouble
occurred repeatedly. There are two display 2) Press [OK] key.
modes: display as one trouble and display The set value in step 1) is saved.
as several series of troubles.
<Default value of each destination>
Section
U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
Operation/Procedure
CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
0 Only once display.
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)
1 Any time display.
2) Press [OK] key.

Destination Item A Item B Item D
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( USA 1 0 2
3$03+/(702'($066(77,1*
$ <(612
CANADA 1 0 2
$ INCH 1 0 2
JAPAN 1 7 2
AB_B 1 0 2
EUROPE 1 0 2
UK 0 0 2
AUS 1 0 2
AB_A 1 0 2
CHINA 1 0 2
2. (*2) Item B: COLOR MODE set value (OFF: Displayed/ON: Not dis-
played)
26-49 Mode 2-Color/Single

Set value
Purpose Setting Single 2-color Counter
0 OFF OFF OFF
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
1 OFF ON OFF
mode.
2 ON OFF OFF
Section 3 ON ON OFF
Operation/Procedure 4 OFF OFF ON
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW) 5 OFF ON ON
6 ON OFF ON

7 ON ON ON
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&23<63(('02'(6(783 (*3) Target paper (postcard, envelope, label sheet, tab sheet, OHP)
3267&$5' /2: +,*+
If it is set to "0," the operation is stopped when 30 sheets of a same
kind are discharged continuously. When, however, different kinds
of sheets are mixed and discharged and less than 30 sheets of a
kind are continuously discharged, the operation is performed simi-
larly to that of setting value "1".
If it is set to "1," the operation is stopped when the paper exit tray is
full or when 500 sheets (94mm thick) are discharged.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)81&7,216(77,1*
$ %:5(9(56(<(6
26-50 $ % &2/2502'(
& ),1,6+(5)81&7,21<(6

Purpose Setting ' &2/2502'(35,17(5
Function (Purpose) Used to set functions. ( )(('75$<&2/25<(6
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2.
Default 26-52
value
Purpose Setting
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer
1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1 Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single color copy mode Refer (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
Enable/Disable setting to *1/*2 or not.
C FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0 Section
FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer
Operation/Procedure
limited. to *3
1 Finisher special paper 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The number of paper exit is
not limited. 0 Count up
D COLOR MODE 0 All colors and monochrome Refer 1 No count up
(PRINTER) counters are displayed. to *1
2) Press [OK] key.
1 All are displayed except for
the 3-color print counter. The set value in step 1) is saved.
2 Monochrome and full color
print counters are displayed. Destination Default
E FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0 U.S.A 0 (Counted)
COLOR ON during paper feed CANADA 0 (Counted)
1 Paper feed tray color display INCH 0 (Counted)
OFF during paper feed JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
AB_B 0 (Counted)
(*1) Default values for each destination of item A/B/D
Destination Default
EUROPE 0 (Counted)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
U.K. 0 (Counted) (1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,212)35,17(5
AUS. 1 (Not counted) $ <(612

$
AB_A 0 (Counted)

CHINA 0 (Counted)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$%/$1.3$3(5&281702'(6(783
$ <(612
$

2.
26-65
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
Section
2. Operation/Procedure
Use the touch key to set.
26-53 Set Setting Default

Item Content
Purpose Setting value range value
LIMIT 30 Number of sheets of 30 or 50 50
Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance SHEETS stapling: Max. 30
adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting 50 Number of sheets of
(copy mode) stapling: Max. 50
Section LIMIT ON Number of sets of stapling: ON or ON
Operation/Procedure COPIES Max. 50 sets OFF
OFF Number of sets of stapling:
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Not Limited
LIMIT 25 Number of sheets of 25 or 30 25
0 Inhibit
SHEETS(L) stapling: Max. 25
1 Allow (Default)
30 Number of sheets of
2) Press [OK] key. stapling: Max. 30
SADDLE ON Number of sets loaded in ON or ON
The set value in step 1) is saved. COPIES the saddle staple: Limited OFF
(*1)
OFF Number of sets loaded in
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( the saddle staple: Not
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21
Limited
$ <(612
$

*1: 1-5 sheets (20 sets) / 6-10 sheets (15 sets)/10-15 sheets (10
sets)
LIMIT SHEETS (L) is applicable only for Saddle Finisher.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),1,6+(5$/$5002'(6(78367$3/(/,0,7
/,0,76+((76
/,0,7&23,(6 21 2))
2.
/,0,76+((76/
6$''/(&23,(6 21 2))
26-54
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance
adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting
(printer mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
0 Inhibit
1 Allow (Default)
2) Press [OK] key.

2 : '09/Sep
D: Setting of the allowable quantity of copy/print/FAX after display-

26-69 ing the message when item B is set to "0" (the message is dis-
Purpose Setting played at toner near end). (Range: 0 - 200 sheets)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the
toner near end. assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 5%.
(The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
Section size and the print ratio.)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Set values of Item D and the number of output print allowed
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1: Print Disable after toner near end
3) Press [OK] key. 2: 25 sheets print Enable after toner near end
The set value in step 2 is saved. 3: 50 sheets print Enable after toner near end
Setting Default 4: 100 sheets print Enable after toner near end
range value 5: 200 sheets print Enable after toner near end
A TONER 0 The toner preparation 0-1
NOTE: When item B is set to "0" and item D to a desired number,
PREPARATION message is
printing can be made after toner near end. However, insuf-
(0 : YES 1 : NO) displayed.
ficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may
1 The toner preparation
message is not be resulted depending on the using conditions. When item
displayed. D is set to "1" printing is disabled after toner near end. this
B TONER NEAR 0 The toner near end 0-1 case, toner end display is made in the toner near end sta-
END message is tus, and copy/print/FAX outputs are disabled.
(0 : YES 1 : NO) displayed.
1 The toner near end
message is not
6,08/$7,2112
displayed. 7(67 &/26(
721(51($5(1'6(77,1*
C TONER END 1 Operation Enable in 1-3 2 $ 721(535(3$5$7,21<(612
2 TONER END $ % 721(51($5(1'<(612
2 Operation STOP in & 721(5(1'
' 721(5(1'&2817
TONER END
( 721(5(0$,/$/$57
3 Operation STOP in
TONER END
D TONER END Setting of the number of 1-5 1
COUNT copy/print/FAX outputs
Enable after TONER
NEAR END.
E TONER E-MAIL 0 Condition for Low 0-1 1
2 2.
ALART status send of E-mail

alert
When the toner 26-73
preparation message
is displayed (in near Purpose Setting
near toner end) Function (Purpose) Poster, enlargement continuous shoot,
1 Condition for Low card scan, A3 wide copy mode image loss
status send of E-mail (shade delete quantity) adjustment
alert
When near toner end Section
Operation/Procedure
<List of Default values and set values for each destination>
Set value 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Destination Toner preparation
Toner near end message 3) Press [OK] key.
message
U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) (shade delete quantity) is increased.
INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
Setting
JAPAN 0 (Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed) Item/Display Content Default value
range
AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
U.K. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) (M) (shade delete amount:
AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
(S) delete quantity) amount:
(Contents of set items) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
when the toner remaining quantity reaches 25%.
B: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
when the toner near end status is reached.
C: Enable/Disable setting of the machine operation when the toner
end status is reached.
For except Japan, performs operation of set value "3" regardless of
the setting value.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
27
'(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-8670(17
$ '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-0
$ % '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-6 27-1

Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica-
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
2.
0 Not detection
1 Detection
26-74
2) Press [OK] key.
Purpose Setting The set value in step 1) is saved.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
Section

Operation/Procedure 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
',6$%/,1*2)87528%/(
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. $ ',6$%/(<(6
$
2) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
range value
A OSA TRIAL 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
MODE OSA trial mode.
(0 : YES 1 : NO) 1 OSA trial mode is
canceled.
2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
26$75$,$/02'(6(77,1*
$ 26$75,$/02'(<(612 27-2
$

Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
ber and the HOST server telephone num-
ber. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
2.
[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
26-78 3) Press [SET] key.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote USER Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
operation panel. FAX_NO.
Section SERVA Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
TEL_NO. If the connection process is not completed normally
Operation/Procedure when registering the FSS, calling to the HOST may
1) Enter a password with 10 key. (5 - 8 digits) be continuously made every time when the power is
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW. turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key HOST.
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2) Press [SET] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783,1387
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 35(6(17
523(3$66:25'6(77,1* 1(: 6(7
35(6(17
1(: 86(5)$;B12 6(59$7(/B12
6(7
3$86(
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default value Remarks
range
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for 0-3 0 1
send in NE-B
mode
NEB2 Send/Receive 1
in NE-B mode
NFB1 Exclusive for 2
send in NE-F
mode
NFB2 Send/Receive 3
in NE-F mode
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 * 0: No retry
C TIMER (MINUTE) _BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when 1 - 15 3
busy
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 * 0: No retry
E TIMER (MINUTE) _ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when 1 - 15 1
error
F TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (K) 74% - 50% send timing setting 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% (K) 49% - 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0
G TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (C) 74% - 50% send timing setting 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% (C) 49% - 25% 3
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0
H TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (M) 74% - 50% send timing setting 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% (M) 49% - 25% 3
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0
I TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (Y) 74% - 50% send timing setting 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% (Y) 49% - 25% 3
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783
$ )6602'(1(%
$ % 5(75<B%86<
& 7,0(50,187(B%86<

' 5(75<B(5525
( 7,0(50,187(B(5525

) 721(525'(57,0,1*.
* 721(525'(57,0,1*&
+ 721(525'(57,0,1*0

, 721(525'(57,0,1*<
2.
A FSS 0 FSS function enable
27-5
FUNCTION 1 FSS function disable (*1) (Default)
Purpose Setting B ALERT 0 Alert call enable (*2) (Default)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func- 1 Alert call disable
tion allows the host computer to check the
machine tag No.) (FSS function) *1 The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to
Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.)
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM)
*2 Alert send timing
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key. No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW. Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
Service call When pressing Service call.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached.
2) Press [SET] key. Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
a new product)
Alert resend
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7$*6(77,1*
35(6(17
1(: 6(7

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783)81&7,21
$ )81&7,21<(612
$ % $/(57<(612

27-6 2.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call. 27-9
(FSS function) Purpose Setting
Section Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
Operation/Procedure ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. gain adjustment retry number.
(FSS function)
0 Allow (Default) Section
1 Inhibit Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key. 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
The set value in step 1) is saved. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$18$/6(59,&(&$//6(783
$ <(612 A FEED TIME 1 0- Threshold value of the paper
$ 100 transport time between sensors
(Main unit) (50: Default)
B FEED TIME 2 0- Threshold value of the paper
100 transport time between sensors
(RSPF) (50: Default)
C GAIN 1 - 20 Threshold value of the gain
ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number
RETRY (11: Default)
D JAM ALERT 1- Alert judgment threshold value
2.
100 for occurrence of continuous
jams
Alert judgment threshold value
for occurrence of continuous
27-7 jams (Setting of the number of
Purpose Setting times of continuous jams as the
alert for continuous jams)
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout.
(Default: 10 times)
(FSS function)
Section * Item A: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;
Operation/Procedure 100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. * Item C: Setting of 20 is invalid.
3) Press [OK] key.
Display Item

Occurrence Retry Content
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Item name
)66)81&7,21$'-8670(17 date (Display) number
$ )(('7,0(
$ SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits Scanner gain
% )(('7,0(
& *$,1$'-8670(175(75<

ADJ1 99:99:99 adjustment retry history
' -$0$/(57 SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
ADJ2 99:99:99
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
ADJ3 99:99:99
ADJ4 99:99:99
2. ADJ5 99:99:99
27-10

Purpose Data clear 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history '$7(5(75<
information. (FSS function) /68
/68
Section '(6.
'(6.
Operation/Procedure ),1,6+(5
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. ),1,6+(5

6&$1*$,1$'-
2) Press [YES] key. 6&$1*$,1$'-
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared. 6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
Target history Serial communication retry number history
High density process control error history
Half tone process control error history

Automatic registration adjustment error history 27-12
Gain adjustment retry history
Paper transport time between sensors
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high-density, half-tone
process control and the automatic registra-

tion adjustment error history.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,21+,6725<&/($5
&/26(
(FSS Function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The high density, the half tone, and the automatic registration
adjustment error history are displayed.
HV_ERR1 High density error history 1

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( HV_ERR4 High density error history 4
H_TONE ERR1 Half tone error history 1
27-11 H_TONE ERR2 Half tone error history 2
Purpose Others H_TONE ERR3 Half tone error history 3
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1
ment retry number history. (FSS function)
AUTO REG ADJ2 Automatic registration adjustment error history 2
Section AUTO REG ADJ3 Automatic registration adjustment error history 3
Operation/Procedure AUTO REG ADJ4 Automatic registration adjustment error history 4
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner AUTO REG ADJ5 Automatic registration adjustment error history 5
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
Display Item

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Occurrence Retry Content 7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7$'-8670(17B(5525
Item name
date (Display) number '$7((5525&2'(
+9B(55
LSU1 99/99/99 8 digits Serial communication +9B(55
+9B(55
99:99:99 retry number history +9B(55
+9B(55
LSU2 99/99/99 8 digits display +B721((55
+B721((55
99:99:99 +B721((55
+B721((55
DESK1 99/99/99 8 digits +B721((55
99:99:99 $8725(*$'-
$8725(*$'-
DESK2 99/99/99 8 digits $8725(*$'-
$8725(*$'-
99:99:99 $8725(*$'-
FINISHER1 99/99/99 8 digits

99:99:99
FINISHER2 99/99/99 8 digits

99:99:99
27-13
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with [] [] key.
Code
Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date between Passing time
passing time
sensors
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
RSPF FEED TIME1(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 1
FEED TIME2(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 2
sensors 3
sensors 4
sensors 5
sensors 6
sensors 7
sensors 8
sensors 9
sensors 10

27-14
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Setting
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7)(('7,0(
'$7(6(1625&2'(3$667,0(67$1'$5'7,0(
)(('7,0(
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
test mode.
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0( Section
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0( Operation/Procedure
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63) 0 Disable (Default)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63) 1 Enable
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
2) Press [OK] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)667(6702'(6(783
$ &211(&7,217(6702'(212))
$

2.
2 : '09/Sep
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining detection

30 CSS2 Tray 2 installation detection
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection
MPLD Manual feed paper length detection
30-1
MTOP1 Manual feed tray retraction detection
Purpose Operation test/check MTOP2 Manual feed tray extension detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- MPED Manual feed paper empty detection
sors and the detectors in other than the
paper feed section and the control circuits.

Section 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure 75$<6(1625&+(&.0$,1

&3)' &/8' &3(' &63'
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- &66 &3)' &/8' &3('
&63' &66 03)' 03/'
played. 0723 0723 03('
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.
PPD1 Resist pre-detection

PPD2 Resist detection
POD1 Fusing rear detection
POD2 Main unit paper exit detection
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection

TFD2 Paper exit full detection
TFD3 Main unit right tray paper exit full detection
HPOS Shifter home detection 33
DSW_R Right door open/close detection
DSW_C Tray 1 transport cover open/close detection
33-1
DSW_F Front cover open/close detection
DHPD_K K phase detection Purpose Operation test/check
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card
1TNFD Waste toner full detection reader sensor and the control circuit.
2 HLPCD Fusing pressure release sensor Section
1TUD_CL Primary transport belt separation CL detection
Operation/Procedure
1TUD_K Primary transport belt separation BK detection
played.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( lighted.
0$,181,76(1625&+(&.
33' 33' 32' 32'
32' 7)' 7)' +326
CARD Card Yes/No detection
'6:B5 '6:B& '6:B) '+3'B. DATA Card number signal detection
71)' 78'B&/
'+3'B&/ 78'B.
CLOCK Reference clock signal detection

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&$5'5($'(56(1625&+(&.
&$5' '$7$ &/2&.

30-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in the paper feed
section and the control circuits.
Section
Operation/Procedure
played.
lighted.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection

CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
CSS1 Tray 1 installation detection
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection
CPED2 Tray 2 paper YES/NO detection

40 6,08/$7,2112
7(67
%<3$6675$<9$/8(6(77,1*
&/26(
$ 0$;326,7,21
$
40-2 % 3326,7,21
& 3326,7,21
Purpose Adjustment/Setup ' 0,1326,7,21
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor

adjustment.
Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2.
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.

3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4).
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 41
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R). 41-1
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. Purpose Operation test/check
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN). ment size sensor and the control circuit.
8) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized. Operation/Procedure
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. played.
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width
lighted.
P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R) OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width Close: Highlighted
PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
sensor status Document present: Highlighted

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17

0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6: 3' 3' 3'
3' 3' 3' 3'
(;(&87(

40-7
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 41-2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the Purpose Adjustment
manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
Section Paper feed detection level.
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
3) Press [OK] key. place a document on the document table.
The set value in step 2) is saved. The sensor level without document is recognized.
2) Set A3 (11 x 17") paper on the document table, and press
Default
Item/Display Content [EXECUTE] key.
value
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241 The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
B P1(A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width 231 When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
(A4)
C P2(A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140
(A4R)
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
41-3

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Purpose Operation test/check
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
Item/Display Content Detection level range

(;(&87( OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625',63/$<
2&6:
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @

43
43-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
range
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 230 170 180 175 185 175 185
B HL_LM READY Ready standby TH_LM set value 30 - 200 105 105 105 105 105 110
C HL_US READY Ready standby TH_US set value 70 - 230 150 160 155 165 155 165
D HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 165 175 170 180 170 180
E HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
F HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 180 180 185 180 185
G HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 165 175 170 180 170 180
H HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
I HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 180 180 185 180 185
J WARMUP FUMON HL Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_UM set value 30 - 200 155 155 155 155 155 155
_UM T (Temperature when the fusing roller starts rotation in
warm-up)
(when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 50C or less)
K WARMUP FUMOFF HL Fusing motor pre-rotation end TH_LM set value 30 - 200 75 75 75 75 75 75
_LM T (Time (sec) from completion of warm-up to stop of rotation
of the fusing roller) (when the fusing temperature in warm-
up is 50C or less)
Default value
Setting
range
L WARMUP END TIME Warm-up complete time (warm-up time (sec)) 30 - 255 53 68 56 73 55 73
(when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 50C or less)
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 170 170 170 170 170 170
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
O HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 175 175 175 175 175
P HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 230 165 165 165 165 165 165
Q HL_LM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_LM set value 30 - 200 135 135 135 135 135 135
R HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 230 165 165 165 165 165 165
S HL_UM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180 180 180 180 180 180
T HL_LM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_LM set value 30 - 200 145 145 145 145 145 145
U HL_US ENV PAPER Envelope TH_US set value 70 - 230 180 180 180 180 180 180
V HL_UM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180 180 180 180 180 180
W HL_LM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
X HL_US GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 160 160 160 160 160 160
Y HL_UM E-STAR preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 145 145 145 145 145 145
Z HL_US E-STAR preheating TH_US set value 30 - 200 130 130 130 130 130 130
AA PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 160 160 160 160 160 160
(Job Ready temperature)
AB HL_LM E-STAR preheating TH_LM set value 30 - 200 50 50 50 50 50 50
AC HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2TH_UM set value 0 - 255 170 170 170 170 170 170
AD HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2TH_LM set value 0 - 255 140 140 140 140 140 140
AE HL_US HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2TH_US set value 0 - 255 175 175 175 175 175 175
AF HL_UM WARMUP_120L Warm-up TH_UM set value 70 - 230 170 180 170 180 170 180
(when the fusing temperature is 120C or less)
AG HL_LM WARMUP_120L Warm-up TH_LM set value 30 - 200 105 105 105 105 105 105
AH HL_US WARMUP_120L Warm-up TH_US set value 70 - 230 165 175 165 175 165 175
AI LO_WARMUP_TIME AF-AH applying time 0 - 255 90 90 90 90 90 90
(Time (sec) for shifting from the control temperature in
warm-up to the normal control temperature)
AJ HL_UM WARMUP_120H Warm-up TH_UM set value 70 - 230 170 180 175 185 175 185
(when the fusing temperature is 120C or above)
AK HL_LM WARMUP_120H Warm-up TH_LM set value 30 - 200 105 105 105 105 105 105
AL HL_US WARMUP_120H Warm-up TH_US set value 70 - 230 150 160 155 165 155 165
AM HI_WARMUP_TIME AJ-AL applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) 0 - 255 10 10 10 10 10 10
AN HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP Fusing roller rotation start TH_UM (when the fusing 30 - `200 125 125 125 125 125 125
temperature in warm-up is alpha C or above)
AO HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing 0 - 255 40 40 40 40 40 40
AP HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP Job Ready TH_UM temperature (when the fusing 70 - 230 140 140 140 140 140 140
AQ HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value applied to Sim43-1-AN-AP 1 - 119 50 50 50 50 50 50
Destination link item (When the destination setting is changed with SIM26-6, the set value is changed linking with the destination.)
Group 1 Japan China AB_B

Group 2 U.S.A. Canada Inch
Group 3 Europe U.K. AUS AB_A
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
NOTE: When the destination is changed with SIM26-6 after changing this set value, the set values of the destination link items are reset to the default.
<Code descriptions>
TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main center HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main HL_LM Heater lamp lower main
TH_US Fusing upper thermister sub edge HL_US Heater lamp upper sub

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(036(783)253$3(5
$ +/B805($'<
$ % +/B/05($'<
& +/B865($'<
' +/B803/$,13$3(5%:
( +/B/03/$,13$3(5%:
) +/B863/$,13$3(5%:
* +/B803/$,13$3(5&/
+ +/B/03/$,13$3(5&/
, +/B863/$,13$3(5&/
- :$5083)8021+/B807
. :$5083)802))+/B/07
/ :$5083(1'7,0(
2.
43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Default value
Setting
range
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 165 175 170 175 170 180
DUP
B HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 100 100 100 100 100 100
DUP
C HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper duplex TH_US set value 70 - 230 165 180 165 180 170 180
DUP
D PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex mode fusing temperature 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0
APP CNT applying start image (*1)
E HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 165 175 170 175 170 180
DUP
F HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 100 100 100 100 100 100
DUP
G HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper duplex TH_US set value 70 - 230 165 180 165 180 170 180
DUP
H PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex applying number of sheets 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0
APP CNT
I HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 170 170 170 170 170 170
DUP
J HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 100 100 100 100 100 100
DUP
K HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 175 175 175 175 175
DUP
L HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex mode fusing temperature 0 - 60 1 1 1 1 1 1
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER CL Color Heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 170 170 170 170 170 170
DUP
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER CL Color Heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 100 100 100 100 100 100
DUP
O HL_US HEAVY PAPER CL Color Heavy paper duplex TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 175 175 175 175 175
DUP
P HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color Heavy paper duplex mode fusing temperature 0 - 60 1 1 1 1 1 1
Q HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 170 170 170 170 170 170
BW DUP
R HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 100 100 100 100 100 100
BW DUP
S HL_US HEAVY2 PAPER Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 175 175 175 175 175
BW DUP
Default value
Setting
range
T HEAVY2 PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing 0 - 60 1 1 1 1 1 1
APP CNT temperature applying start image (*1)
U HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER Color Heavy paper 2 duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 170 170 170 170 170 170
CL DUP
V HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER CL Color Heavy paper 2 duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 100 100 100 100 100 100
DUP
W HL_US HEAVY2 PAPER CL Color Heavy paper 2 duplex TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 175 175 175 175 175
DUP
X HEAVY2 PAPER CL DUP Color Heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing temperature 0 - 60 1 1 1 1 1 1

SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
<Code descriptions>

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(036(783)253$3(5
$ +/B803/$,13$3(5%:'83
$ % +/B/03/$,13$3(5%:'83
& +/B863/$,13$3(5%:'83
' 3/$,13$3(5%:'83$33&17
( +/B803/$,13$3(5&/'83
) +/B/03/$,13$3(5&/'83
* +/B863/$,13$3(5&/'83
+ 3/$,13$3(5&/'83$33&17
, +/B80+($9<3$3(5%:'83
- +/B/0+($9<3$3(5%:'83
. +/B(+($9<3$3(5%:'83
/ +($9<3$3(5%:'83$33&17
2.
43-20
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C Change
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
3) Press [OK] key. value
The set value in step 2) is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Setting Default value

Item/Display ContentSetting
range Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
A HL_UM READY LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Ready standby under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
B HL_LM READY LL Correction value for TH_LM set value in Ready standby under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
C HL_US READY LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Ready standby under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
D HL_UM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
E HL_LM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
F HL_US PLAIN BW LL Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_US set value under 1 - 99 55 55 55
LL environment
G HL_UM PLAIN CL LL Correction value for Color plain paper TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
H HL_LM PLAIN CL LL Correction value for Color plain paper TH_LM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
I HL_US PLAIN CL LL Correction value for Color plain paper TH_US set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55 55
environment
J WARMUP FUMON HL_UM Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_UM set value 1 - 99 60
T LL (temperature when the fusing roller starts rotation in warm-up) under
LL environment
K WARMUP FUMOFF HL_LM Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_LM set value 1 - 99 55
T LL (temperature when the fusing roller starts rotation in warm-up) under
LL environment
L WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 80
(*1) (Under LL environment, the warm-up complete time does not depends
on this set value. When the temperature reaches the specified level,
warm-up is completed.)
M HL_UM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 60
environment
N HL_LM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_LM set value under LL 1 - 99 60
environment
O HL_US HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under LL 1 - 99 60
environment
P HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 60
Q HL_LM OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_LM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 60
R HL_US OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 60
S HL_UM ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 60
T HL_LM ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_LM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 60
U HL_US ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 60
V HL_UM GLOSS LL Correction value for glossy paper TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
W HL_LM GLOSS LL Correction value for glossy paper TH_LM set value under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
X HL_US GLOSS LL Correction value for glossy paper TH_US set value under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
Y HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 60
environment
Z HL_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL 1 - 99 60
environment
AA PRE-JOB LL Correction value for resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job 1 - 99 60
Ready temperature) under LL environment
AB HL_LM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
AC HL UM HEAVY2 CL LL Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
AD HL LM HEAVY2 CL LL Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
AE HL US HEAVY2 CL LL Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_US set value under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
AF HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in warm-up under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
(when the fusing temperature is 120C or below)
AG HL_LM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_LM set value in warm-up under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
AH HL_US WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_US set value in warm-up under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
AI LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value for AF-AH applying time (timer from Ready complete) 1 - 99 50
under LL environment
AJ HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in warm-up under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
AK HL_LM WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_LM set value in warm-up under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
AL HL_US WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_US set value in warm-up under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
AM HI_WU_TIME_LL Correction value for AJ-AL applying time (timer from Ready complete) 1 - 99 50
(*1) under LL environment
AN HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL Correction value for fusing roller rotation start TH_UM under LL 1 - 99 50
environment (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C or
above)
AO HI_WU_END_TIME_LL Correction value for warm-up complete time (sec) under LL 1 - 99 60
(*1) environment (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C or
above)
AP HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job Ready TH_UM temperature under LL 1 - 99 55
environment (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C or
above)
AQ HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL Correction value for the threshold value alpha applied to SIM43-1-AN- 1 - 99 50
AP under LL environment
*1: 1 Count = 1sec Change

<Code descriptions>

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17//
$ +/B805($'<//
$ % +/B/05($'<//
& +/B865($'<//
' +/B803/$,1%://
( +/B/03/$,1%://
) +/B863/$,1%://
* +/B803/$,1&///
+ +/B/03/$,1&///
, +/B863/$,1&///
- :$5083)8021+/B807//
. :$5083)802))+/B/07//
/ :$5083(1'7,0(//
2.
43-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C Change
The set value in step 2 is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99

A HL_UM READY HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in Ready standby under HH 1 - 99 45 45 45
environment
B HL_LM READY HH Correction value for TH_LM set value in Ready standby under HH 1 - 99 45 45 45
environment
C HL_US READY HH Correction value for TH_US set value in Ready standby under HH 1 - 99 45 45 45
environment
D HL_UM PLAIN BW HH Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 45 45 45
under HH environment
E HL_LM PLAIN BW HH Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 45 45 45
HH environment
F HL_US PLAIN BW HH Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_US set value under 1 - 99 45 45 45
HH environment
G HL_UM PLAIN CL HH Correction value for Color plain paper TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 45 45 45
environment
H HL_LM PLAIN CL HH Correction value for Color plain paper TH_LM set value under HH 1 - 99 45 45 45
environment
I HL_US PLAIN CL HH Correction value for Color plain paper TH_US set value under HH 1 - 99 45 45 45
environment
J WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
HH (temperature when the fusing roller starts rotation in warm-up) under
HH environment
K WARMUP FUMOFF HL_LM T Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
HH (temperature when the fusing roller starts rotation in warm-up) under
HH environment
L WARMUP END TIME HH Correction value for warm-up complete time under HH environment 1 - 99 50
(*1)
M HL_UM HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
N HL_LM HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_LM set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
O HL_US HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
P HL_UM OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
Q HL_LM OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_LM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
R HL_US OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
S HL_UM ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
T HL_LM ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_LM set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
U HL_US ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
V HL_UM GLOSS HH Correction value for glossy paper TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
W HL_LM GLOSS HH Correction value for glossy paper TH_LM set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
X HL_US GLOSS HH Correction value for glossy paper TH_US set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
Y HL_UM E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
Z HL_US E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
AA PRE-JOB HH Correction value for resetting from preheating TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
(Job Ready temperature) under HH environment
AB HL_LM E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
AC HL UM HEAVY2 CL HH Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
AD HL LM HEAVY2 CL HH Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
AE HL US HEAVY2 CL HH Correction value for heavy paper 2 TH_US set value under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
AF HL_UM WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in warm-up under HH 1 - 99 45
environment
AG HL_LM WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_LM set value in warm-up under HH 1 - 99 45
environment
AH HL_US WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_US set value in warm-up under HH 1 - 99 45
environment
AI LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH Correction value for AF-AH applying time (timer from Ready 1 - 99 50
complete) under HH environment
AJ HL_UM WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in warm-up under HH 1 - 99 45
environment
AK HL_LM WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_LM set value in warm-up under HH 1 - 99 45
environment
AL HL_US WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_US set value in warm-up under HH 1 - 99 45
environment
AM HI_WU_TIME_HH Correction value for AJ-AL applying time (timer from Ready 1 - 99 50
complete) under HH environment
AN HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_HH Correction value for fusing roller rotation start TH_UM under HH 1 - 99 50
environment (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is alpha C
or above)
AO HI_WU_END_TIME_HH Correction value for warm-up complete time (sec) under HH 1 - 99 50
or above)
AP HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_HH Correction value for Job Ready TH_UM temperature under HH 1 - 99 50
or above)
AQ HI_WARMUP_BORDER_HH Correction value for the threshold value alpha applied to SIM43-1- 1 - 99 50
AN-AP under HH environment

<Code descriptions>

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++
$ +/B805($'<++
$ % +/B/05($'<++
& +/B865($'<++
' +/B803/$,1%:++
( +/B/03/$,1%:++
) +/B863/$,1%:++
* +/B803/$,1&/++
+ +/B/03/$,1&/++
, +/B863/$,1&/++
- :$5083)8021+/B807++
. :$5083)802))+/B/07++
/ :$5083(1'7,0(++
2.
43-22
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C Change
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Correction -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. value
3) Press [OK] key. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
The set value in step 2 is saved.

A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL Upper TH_UM under LL environment 1 - 99 60 60 60
Correction value for Black-White plain paper duplex
B HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP LL Lower TH_LM under LL environment 1 - 99 60 60 60
C HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL Upper TH_US under LL environment 1 - 99 60 60 60
D PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT Black-White plain paper under LL environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
LL Correction value for duplex mode fusing temperature applying start
image (*1)
E HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP LL Upper TH_UM color under LL environment 1 - 99 60 60 60
Correction value for plain paper duplex
F HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP LL Lower TH_LM color under LL environment 1 - 99 60 60 60
G HL_US PLAIN CL DUP LL Upper TH_US color under LL environment 1 - 99 60 60 60
H PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT Color plain paper under LL environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
LL Correction value for duplex mode fusing temperature applying start
image (*1)
I HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Black-White heavy paper 1 - 99 60
duplex under LL environment
J HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_LM set value in Black-White heavy paper 1 - 99 60
K HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Black-White heavy paper 1 - 99 60
L HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode fusing 1 - 99 50
LL temperature applying start image under LL environment (*1)
M HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for color heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 60
LL environment
N HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for color heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value under 1 - 99 60
LL environment
O HL_US HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for color heavy paper duplex TH_US set value under 1 - 99 60
LL environment
P HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode fusing 1 - 99 50
Q HL_UM HEAVY2 BW DUP Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_UM 1 - 99 60
LL set value under LL environment
R HL_LM HEAVY2 BW DUP Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_LM 1 - 99 60
S HL_US HEAVY2 BW DUP Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_US 1 - 99 60
T HEAVY2 BW DUP APP Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing 1 - 99 50
CNT LL temperature applying start image under LL environment (*1)
U HL_UM HEAVY2 CL DUP Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_UM set 1 - 99 60
LL value under LL environment
V HL_LM HEAVY2 CL DUP Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_LM set 1 - 99 60
W HL_US HEAVY2 CL DUP Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_US set 1 - 99 60
X HEAVY2 CL DUP APP CNT Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing 1 - 99 50

<Code descriptions>

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17//'83
$ +/B803/$,1%:'83//
$ % +/B/03/$,1%:'83//
& +/B863/$,1%:'83//
' 3/$,1%:'83$33&17//
( +/B803/$,1&/'83//
) +/B/03/$,1&/'83//
* +/B863/$,1&/'83//
+ 3/$,1&/'83$33&17//
, +/B80+($9<%:'83//
- +/B/0+($9<%:'83//
. +/B86+($9<%:'83//
/ +($9<%:'83$33&17//
2.
43-23
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C Change
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Correction -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. value
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
3) Press [OK] key.

A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM Black-White plain paper duplex mode 1 - 99 45 45 45
B HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_LM Black-White plain paper duplex mode 1 - 99 50 50 50
C HL_US PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_US Black-White plain paper duplex mode 1 - 99 45 45 45
D PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT Correction value for Black-White plain paper duplex mode fusing 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH temperature applying start image under HH environment (*1)
E HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM Color plain paper duplex mode under HH 1 - 99 45 45 45
environment
F HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_LM Color plain paper duplex mode under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
environment
G HL_US PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_US Color plain paper duplex mode under HH 1 - 99 45 45 45
environment
H PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT Correction value for Color plain paper duplex mode fusing temperature 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH applying start image under HH environment (*1)
I HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_UM 1 - 99 50
HH set value under HH environment
J HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_LM set 1 - 99 50
HH value under HH environment
K HL_US HEAVY BW DUP Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_US set 1 - 99 50
L HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode fusing 1 - 99 50
M HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
N HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
O HL_US HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_US set value 1 - 99 50
P HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode fusing 1 - 99 50
Q HL_UM HEAVY2 BW DUP Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_UM 1 - 99 50
R HL_LM HEAVY2 BW DUP Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_LM 1 - 99 50
S HL_US HEAVY2 BW DUP Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_US 1 - 99 50
T HEAVY2 BW DUP APP Correction value for Black-White heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing 1 - 99 50
CNT HH temperature applying start image under HH environment (*1)
U HL_UM HEAVY2 CL DUP Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_UM set 1 - 99 50
V HL_LM HEAVY2 CL DUP Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_LM set 1 - 99 50
W HL_US HEAVY2 CL DUP Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode TH_US set 1 - 99 50
X HEAVY2 CL DUP APP CNT Correction value for Color heavy paper 2 duplex mode fusing 1 - 99 50

<Code descriptions>

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++'83
$ +/B803/$,1%:'83++
$ % +/B/03/$,1%:'83++
& +/B863/$,1%:'83++
' 3/$,1%:'83$33&17++
( +/B803/$,1&/'83++
) +/B/03/$,1&/'83++
* +/B863/$,1&/'83++
+ 3/$,1&/'83$33&17++
, +/B80+($9<%:'83++
- +/B/0+($9<%:'83++
. +/B86+($9<%:'83++
/ +($9<%:'83$33&17++
2.
43-24
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-
4.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C Change
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Setting Default
range value
A NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US Correction value for duplex mode HL_UM, HL_US immediately after warm-up under NN 1 - 99 55
environment
(when the fusing temperature is less than 120C)
B NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction value for duplex mode HL_LM immediately after warm-up under NN 1 - 99 50
environment
C LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US Correction value for duplex mode HL_UM, HL_US immediately after warm-up under LL 1 - 99 60
environment
D LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction value for duplex mode HL_LM immediately after warm-up under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
E HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US Correction value for duplex mode HL_UM, HL_US immediately after warm-up under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
F HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction value for duplex mode HL_LM immediately after warm-up under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
G NN_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Item A, B applying start screen under NN environment 1 - 60 5
(*2)
H LL_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Item A, B applying start screen under LL environment 1 - 60 10
(*2)
I HH_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Item A, B applying start screen under HH environment 1 - 60 5
(*2)
J COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool down time heavy mode 1 - 60 15
(*1) (The time for turning and keeping OFF the heater lamp when the heavy paper mode
fusing temperature is returned to the normal temperature.)
K COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool down time OHP mode 1 - 60 30
(*1) (The time for turning and keeping OFF the heater lamp when the OHP mode fusing
temperature is returned to the normal temperature.)
L COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP Cool down time envelope mode 1 - 60 40
(*1) (The time for turning and keeping OFF the heater lamp when the envelope mode fusing
temperature is returned to the normal temperature.)
M HL UM THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_UM 100 - 190 150
2 : '09/Sep
Setting Default
range value
N HL LM THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_LM 100 - 190 130
O HL US THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_US 100 - 190 160
P HL UM THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_UM 100 - 190 150
Q HL LM THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_LM 100 - 190 130
R HL US THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_US 100 - 190 160
S HL UM THIN PAPER READY Thin paper Ready-TH_UM 100 - 190 165
T HL UM REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_UM 100 - 190 165
U HL LM REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_LM 100 - 190 130
V HL US REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_US 100 - 190 175
W HL UM REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_UM 100 - 190 165
X HL LM REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_LM 100 - 190 130
Y HL US REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_US 100 - 190 175
Z HL UM REC PAPER READY Recycled paper Ready-TH_UM 100 - 190 170

*2: 1 Count = 1 sheet Change
<Code descriptions>

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(035(6(7
$ 11BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86
$ % 11BB)86B'83B+/B/0
& //BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86
' //BB)86B'83B+/B/0
( ++BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86
) ++BB)86B'83B+/B/0
* 11BB)86B'83B&17
+ //BB)86B'83B&17
, ++BB)86B'83B&17
- &22/B'2:1B+($9<
. &22/B'2:1B2+3
/ &22/B'2:1B'(9(/23
2.
Setting Default
44 Item/Display Content
range value
NOTE
MD LD Membrane laser power Normal Disable 2

voltage correction (Disable
44-1 Enable/Disable setting : 0 : NO)
Purpose Setting MD EV Membrane decrease Reverse Enable
environment grid (Enable :
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
voltage correction 1 : YES)
tion in the image forming (process) section.
Enable/Disable setting
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- MD DL Membrane decrease Enable
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) discharge light quantity
Operation/Procedure correction
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
MD DL EV Membrane decrease Disable
(The selected item is highlighted.) environment discharge
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.) light quantity
correction
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.
TN_HUM Toner density humidity Enable
correction
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE Enable/Disable setting
range value
TN_AREA Toner density area Enable
HV Normal operation high Normal Enable
correction
density process control (Disable
2 Enable/Disable setting : 0 : NO)
TN_LIFE Toner density life Enable
HT Normal operation half Reverse Enable
correction
tone process control (Enable :
Enable/Disable setting 1 : YES)
TN_COV Toner density print Enable
TC Transfer output Enable
ratio correction
correction
MD VG Membrane decrease Enable
grid voltage correction
2 : '09/Sep
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
range value
TN_PROCON Toner density process Normal Enable
A PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21
control correction (Disable
emitting quantity
Enable/Disable setting : 1 : NO)
adjustment value
TN_ENV Toner density Reverse Enable
B PCS_K LED ADJ Black sensor light 1 - 255 21
environment correction (Enable :
emitting quantity
Enable/Disable setting 0 : YES)
adjustment value
TN_DRIP Toner density Enable
C PCS_CL DARK Dark voltage of color 0 - 255 0
correction
D PCS_K DARK Dark voltage of black 0 - 255 0
unconditional supply
Enable/Disable setting E PCS_K GRND Belt substrate when 0 - 255 0
the item B
TN_SPEND Toner forcible Disable
adjustment is
consumption mode
completed.
F PCS_K BELT MAX Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
PHT 1pixel half tone Disable
max. value
process control
correction G PCS_K BELT MIN Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
Enable/Disable setting min. value
AR_AUTO Auto registration Enable H PCS_K BELT DIF Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
adjustment difference
Enable/Disable setting (Item E - Item F)
AR_ERROR Auto registration Enable I REG_F LED ADJ Registration sensor 1 - 255 56
adjustment execution light emitting
error check quantity adjustment
Enable/Disable setting value F
DM_PHASE Drum phase fitting Enable J REG_F DARK Registration sensor 0 - 255 0
2
Enable/Disable setting dark voltage F
SENSITIVITY Toner density Disable K REG_F GRND Belt substrate when 0 - 255 0
correction the item I adjustment
Enable/Disable setting is completed.
PRT_HT Half tone process Enable L REG_R LED ADJ Registration sensor 1 - 255 56
control printer light emitting
correction feedback quantity adjustment
Enable/Disable setting value R
PTC_ENV PTC environment Enable Enable: M REG_R DARK Registration sensor 0 - 255 0
correction Correc- dark voltage R
Enable/Disable setting tion ON N REG_R GRND Belt substrate when 0 - 256 0
PTC_LIFE PTC life correction Enable Enable: the item J adjust-
Enable/Disable setting Correc- ment is completed.
tion ON O REG_F BELT MAX Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
max. value (F side)
P REG_F BELT MIN Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0

min. value (F side)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Q REG_F BELT DIF Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
02'(6(77,1*
+9 +7 7& 0'9*
difference
(Item O - Item P)
0'/' 0'(9 0''/ 0''/(9
R REG_R BELT MAX Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
71B+80 71B$5($ 71B/,)( 71B&29
max. value (R side)
71B352&21 71B(19 71B'5,3 71B63(1' S REG_R BELT MIN Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
3+7 $5B$872 $5B(5525 '0B3+$6( min. value (R side)
6(16,7,9,7< 357B+7 37&B(19 37&B(19
T REG_R BELT DIF Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
difference
(Item R - Item S)
U REG_F PATCH (K) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
(;(&87(
potential F(K)
V REG_F PATCH (C) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
potential F(C)
44-2
W REG_F PATCH (M) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup potential F(M)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image X REG_F PATCH (Y) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
density sensor (registration sensor). potential F(Y)
Y REG_R PATCH (K) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
Section Process potential R(K)
Operation/Procedure Z REG_R PATCH (C) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- potential R(C)
matically. AA REG_R PATCH (M) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
potential R(M)
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
AB REG_R PATCH (Y) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
played.
potential R(Y)
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
2 : '09/Sep
Setting Default
Error name Error content Item/Display Content
range value
Black sensor adjustment PCS_K LED ADJ error
G BIAS_CL Bias (for color) 0 - 255 60
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
STANDARD DIF reference calculation
retry.
difference
Color sensor adjustment PCS_CL LED ADJ error
H BIAS_BK Bias (for black) 0 - 255 0
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
STANDARD DIF reference calculation
retry.
difference
Substrate scan abnormality PCS_K GRND error
I BIAS PATCH Patch bias output 1 - 255 60
Effective difference between the upper
INTERVAL interval
and lower values of the belt substrate
circuit, outside the range J Y_PAT TARGET ID Patch density 1 - 255 122
standard value
Registration sensor F REG_F LED ADJ error
(yellow)
adjustment abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
retry. K M_PAT TARGET ID Patch density 1 - 255 129
standard value
Registration sensor R REG_R LED ADJ error
(magenta)
adjustment abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
retry. L C_PAT TARGET ID Patch density 1 - 255 115
standard value
Registration substrate F REG_F GRND error
(cyan)
scan abnormality Effective difference between the upper
and lower values of the belt substrate M K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density 1 - 255 5
circuit, outside the range standard value
(black)
Registration substrate R REG_R GRND error
scan abnormality Effective difference between the upper N HV BK_GROUND Patch position 1 - 255 60
2
and lower values of the belt substrate LIMIT substrate light
circuit, outside the range receiving effective
range value

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(

352&21*$,1$'-8670(17 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3&6B&//('$'- 5(*B)*51'
352&21,1,7,$/'(16,7<6(783
3&6B./('$'- 5(*B5*51' $ 3&6B&/7$5*(7
3&6B&/'$5. 5(*B)%(/70$; $ % 3&6B.7$5*(7
3&6B.'$5. 5(*B)%(/70,1 & /('B&/287387
3&6B.*51' 5(*B)%(/7',) ' /('B.287387
3&6B.%(/70$; 5(*B5%(/70$; ( 3&6$'-670(17/,0,7
3&6B.%(/70,1 5(*B5%(/70,1 ) %(/7*5281'',)
3&6B.%(/7',) 5(*B5%(/7',) * %,$6B&/67$1'$5'',)
5(*B)/('$'- 5(*B)3$7&+. + %,$6B%.67$1'$5'',)
5(*B5/('$'- 5(*B)3$7&+& , %,$63$7&+,17(59$/
5(*B)'$5. 5(*B)3$7&+0 - <B3$77$5*(7,'
5(*B5'$5. 5(*B)3$7&+< . 0B3$77$5*(7,'
(;(&87( / &B3$77$5*(7,'
2.
44-4
Purpose Setting 44-6
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den- Purpose Adjustment
sity process control operation. Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
Section Process control forcibly.
Operation/Procedure Section Process
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [OK] key. In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe- In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
cially required. (Refer to the table below.)
In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
Setting Default
range value Result display Content description
A PCS_CL TARGET Color sensor target 1 - 255 98 COMPLETE Normal complete
set value ERROR Abnormal end
B PCS_K TARGET Black sensor target 1 - 255 208 INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
set value
C LED_CL OUTPUT Color sensor light 1 - 255 21
Details of error display Content description
emitting quantity set
value CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment abnormality
D LED_K OUTPUT Black sensor light 1 - 255 21 BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment abnormality
emitting quantity set K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
value C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality
E PCS ADJSTMENT Sensor adjustment 1 - 255 4 M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality
LIMIT target limit value Y_HV _ERR Y high density process control abnormality
F BELT GROUND DIF Effective difference 1 - 255 1 TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
between the belt 1
circuit substrate
upper and lower limit
values

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
352&21&2038/625<(;(&87,21
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN],[OTHER] keys.
Display range Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content
value
CPY/PRN P (PROCON) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control GB/DV data GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** level)
N(M) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (Medium speed GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
(NORMAL (MIDDLE)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** display) GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 430
N(L) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (Low speed display) GB: 230 - 850 GB: 600
(NORMAL (LOW)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 400
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner control display humidity area 1 - 14 9
TN HUD DATA Toner control display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer display temperature area 1-9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer display temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC HUD AREA Transfer display humidity area 1-9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease display humidity area 1 - 14 9
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease display humidity AD 0 - 1023 0
value
DRUM MD K STEP Drum membrane decrease correction STEP 0-4 0
MD C STEP display (KCMY)
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER Membrane decrease drum traveling 0 - 20 0
MD C DRUM COUNTER distance area (KCMY)
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
VG MD K REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease grid voltage 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease laser power 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** voltage correction (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
HV MD K REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** High density membrane decrease 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** environment GB correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
Display range Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content
value
OTHER CP MD K REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease environment 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** grid voltage correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
DL MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease discharge light 0 - 100 50
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease environment -100 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** discharge light quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
CRUM DESTINATION Machine side management CRUM - -
destination (Main unit data)
MODEL TYPE Machine model type 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination (CRUM data) - -
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control number of 0 - 99999999 0
executions
PROCON COUNT HT Half tone process control number of 0 - 99999999 0
executions
Display Default

Mode Item/Display Content
range value
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
352&21'$7$',63352&211250$/01250$//
TARGET CARB DATA Calibration plate 0 - 255 108
%/$&.B3*%B'9B (1 page) detection level
&<$1B3*%B'9B
SEAL ADJ Jig patch seal 1 - 255 108
0$*(17$B3*%B'9B
DATA detection level when
<(//2:B3*%B'9B
%/$&.B0*%B'9B%/$&.B/*%B'9B
executing SIM 44-13
&<$1B0*%B'9B&<$1B/*%B'9B ADK_SL (K) Development -9.99 - 0
0$*(17$B0*%B'9B0$*(17$B/*%B'9B characteristics 9.99
<(//2:B0*%B'9B<(//2:B/*%B'9B gradient coefficient
(High density process
control operation)
ADK_INT(K) Development -999.9 - 0
&3<351 27+(5 characteristics 999.9
intercept level (High
density process
44-12 control operation 0V)
TARGET (K) High density process 0.00 - 0
control target density 255.00
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the level (K)
high density process control and the image TARGET High density process 0.00 - 0
density sensor (registration sensor). (C/M/Y) control target density 255.00
level (C/M/Y)
PATCH n-1 High density process 0 - 255 0
ing)
1-5 control nth time patch
Operation/Procedure (Page 1-2) density level 1 (n=1-
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys. 5)
n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
patch 2 (n=1-5)
patch 3 (n=1-5)
patch 4 (n=1-5)
BK only
patch 5 (n=1-5)
BK only
PATCH n-1 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
6-10 patch 1 (n=6-10)
(Page 1-2) n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
patch 2 (n=6-10)
patch 3 (n=6-10)
patch 4 (n=6-10)
BK only
patch 5 (n=6-10)
BK only
Item/Display Content Display range

6,08/$7,2112
TH_LM Fusing lower thermister main A/D Temperature:
7(67 &/26(
3$7&+7$5*(7'$7$',63/$< value (temperature C) 0 - 255C(1C)
&$5%'$7$ AD value: 0-1023
6($/$'-'$7$
TH_US Fusing upper thermister sub A/D Temperature:
$'.B6/.
$'.B,17.
value (temperature C) 0 - 255C(1C)
7$5*(7.
AD value: 0-1023
7$5*(7& TEMPRATURE Temperature thermister Temperature:
7$5*(70 -40.0 - 60.0C
7$5*(7<
(0.1C)
AD value: 0-1023
HUMIDITY Humidity sensor Humidity:
5.0-90.0% (0.1%),
7$5*(7 3$7&+ 3$7&+ AD value: 0-1023
TH1_LSU LSU thermister 1 A/D value Temperature:
(temperature C) 5.0-60.0C
44-13
(0.1C)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup AD value: 0-255
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the color image sensor
(image registration sensor F) calibration.

Section 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure 6(1625'$7$',63/$<021,725
7+B80GHJ;;;
1) Attach the calibration jig. 7+B80B$'GHJ;;;

7+B80B$';;;
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 7+B/0GHJ;;;
Calibration is performed, and the data are displayed. 7+B86GHJ;;;
7(035$785(GHJ;;;
+80,',7<;;;
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 7+B/68GHJ;;
range value
A PCS_CL CARB OUT Calibration plate 1 - 255 108
sensor value
B PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21
emitting quantity
adjustment value
44-16
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17
&/26(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 3&6B&/&$5%287 &/26(
3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17
3&6B&/'$5.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density control
3&6B&/&$5%287
3&6B&//('$'- data.
3&6B&//('$'-
Section Developing system

Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
The toner density control data are displayed.
Item/ Setting Default

Content
(;(&87( Display range value
(;(&87( TONER The current toner density sensor 1 - 255 129
DEN_LT (M) output value (final value) at the
medium speed
44-14 TONER The current toner density reference 128
Purpose Operation data display DEN_ST (M) value display (including all the
correction values) at the medium
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem- speed
perature and humidity sensor. TONER The current toner density sensor 129
Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/ DEN_LT (L) output value (final value) at the low
LSU speed
TONER The current toner density reference 128
Operation/Procedure
DEN_ST (L) value display (including all the
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine correction values) at the low speed
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
Item/Display Content Display range

TH_UM Fusing upper thermister main Temperature:
detection temperature (C) 0 - 255C(1C)
Difference AD input value (AD AD value: 0-1023
value)
TH_UM_AD1 Fusing upper thermister main Temperature:
compensation temperature (C) 0.0-255.0C
AD value (AD value) (0.2C)
AD value: 0-1023
TH_UM_AD2 Fusing upper thermister main AD value:0-1023
detection sensor AD value (AD
value)
Setting Default
Setting Default Item/Display Content
Item/Display Content range value
range value
AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor control 1 - 255 128
AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor output value 1 - 255 128
VO (M) development voltage value after
(M) development after completion of
adjustment completion of
adjustment SIM25-02
control SIM25-02
value (at the medium
voltage (at the medium
(At the speed)
(at the speed)
medium
medium
speed)
speed)
ALL (M) All the Correction reference
ALL VO (M) All the Control voltage
correction value which
correction reference value
reference calculated all the
reference which calculated all
values correction values for
control the correction values
(At the the auto
voltages for the auto
medium development
(at the development
speed) adjustment value
medium adjustment value
(at the medium
speed) (at the medium
speed)
speed)
AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor output value
AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor control
(L) development after completion of
VO (L) development voltage value after
adjustment SIM25-02
adjustment completion of
value (at the low speed)
control SIM25-02
(At the low
voltage (at the low speed)
speed)
(at the low
ALL (L) All the Correction reference
speed)
correction value which
ALL VO (L) All the Control voltage
reference calculated all the
correction reference value
values correction values for
reference which calculated all
(At the low the auto
control the correction values
speed) development
voltages for the auto
adjustment value
(at the low development
(at the low speed)
speed) adjustment value
AREA Area Correction value for -127 - 0
(at the low speed)
correction the environment 127
AREA VO Area Control voltage -127 - 0
value area
correction correction value for 127
HUD Humidity Correction value for
control the environment
correction change in humidity
voltage area
value
HUD VO Humidity Control voltage
PRINT RATE Print ratio Correction value for
correction correction value for
correction document print ratio
control change in humidity
value
voltage
PROCON Process Correction value for
PRINT RATE Print ratio Control voltage
control high density process
VO correction correction value for
correction control result
control the document print
value
voltage ratio
LIFE Life Correction value for
PROCON VO Process Control voltage
correction the developer life
control correction value for
value
correction the high density
SENSITIVITY Sensitivity Correction for the 1 - 999 500 control process control
correction toner density voltage result
value sensitivity
LIFE VO Life Control voltage
correction correction value for
value control the developer life
voltage
SENSITIVITY Sensitivity Control voltage 1 - 999 500
VO correction correction value for
control the toner density
voltage sensor
ENV VO Environment Control voltage -127 - 0
correction correction value for 127
control the high humidity
voltage environment
Setting Default
range value
AUTO DEVE Area in the Humidity area 1 - 14 8
AREA auto display in the
development automatic developer
adjustment adjustment
AREA Current area Current humidity
area display

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( +$/)721(&255(&75(68/7
721(5&21752/'$7$',63/$< 37.37&37037< 37.37&37037<
721(5'(1B/70
%$6( ,'
721(5'(1B670
,' ,'
721(5'(1B/7/
,' ,'
721(5'(1B67/
,' ,'
,' ,'
,' ,'
,' %$6(
,'
,'
,'
,'

. & 0 < 1(;7
44-24
44-21
Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
Function (Purpose) Used to set the half tone process control the correction level in the half tone process
target. control operation.
Section Process Section Process
Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
The half tone process control target is set and the operation data 2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
are displayed.
Category Item/Display Content
Display Content Coefficient [EX-LOW] Coefficient of the
COMPLETE Normal complete approximation formula of
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor the minimum density
ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error [LOW] Coefficient of the
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor approximation formula of
ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error the low density
[YMCK] High density process control error [CONNECT] Coefficient of the
[YMCK] approximation formula of
OTHER Other errors when connecting the low
density and the medium
density
[MID] Coefficient of the

6,08/$7,2112
approximation formula of
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 the medium density
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
[HIGH] Coefficient of the
approximation formula of
the high density
[CONNECT POINT] Each density section
connection output ratio
Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Half tone process control
value reference value
Correction [S_VALUE] Half tone process control
value correction value
For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer half tone process
(;(&87( control correction value
[PRINTER_BASE_DITHER Printer half tone process
_VALUE] control reference dither
44-22 value
Purpose Operation data display [PRINTER_AUTO_HT Printer auto density
_VALUE] adjustment correction value
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous half tone process
level in the half tone process control opera- correction control value
tion. value
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the display mode with [1ST STEP],[2ND STEP] key.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&215(68/7',63/$<
The toner patch density level made in the half tone process >(;/2:@$%
control operation is displayed. >/2:@$%&

>&211(&7@$%
>0,'@$%&
Item/Display Content >+,*+@$%
ID_n Patch data display (n=1-16) >&211(&732,17@
BASE1 Belt substrate data (START)

BASE5 Belt substrate data (LAST)
. & 0 < 1(;7
44-25

Purpose Setting 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21

728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
correction value for the half tone process
control.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the
touch panel.
(;(&87(
4) Press [OK] key.
cially required. 44-27
Purpose Data clear
Item/Display Content Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half
range K CMY
A LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 98 2 tone process control.
LOWER LIMIT approximate Section Process
expression data
Operation/Procedure
lower limit value
B LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 60 40
UPPER LIMIT approximate 2) Press [YES] key.
expression data The correction data of the half tone process control are
upper limit value cleared.
C MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 90 15
LOWER LIMIT approximate
expression data
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
lower limit value +$/)721(352&21$'-8670(17'$7$&/($5
D MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 6 144

UPPER LIMIT approximate
expression data
upper limit value
E HIGHLIGHT Reference point of 1-8 7 7
POINT the highlight
correction amount

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
+$/)721(352&21,1,7,$/9$/8(',63/$<
$ /2:),(/'/2:(5/,0,7
$ % /2:),(/'833(5/,0,7
& 0,'),(/'/2:(5/,0,7
' 0,'),(/'833(5/,0,7
( +,*+/,*+732,17
. & 0 < 2.
44-26
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process con-
trol compulsorily.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The half tone process control is performed and the operation data
are displayed.
COMPLETE Normal complete

INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color image density sensor sensitivity
adjustment error
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image density sensor sensitivity
adjustment error
[YMCK] High density process control error [YMCK]
CONNECTION_ERR Communication abnormality
44-28
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
panel.
cially required.
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO counter of the OPC drum and the Disable 1
setting developer unit
B SW ON When supplying the power (when Color process 0-3 0 3

clearing shut-off.) control Enable
Process control 1
Disable
BK process control 2
Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
(Judgement is
based on the setting
value of item K, L.)
C TIME After passing the specified time from Color process 0-3 0 3
leaving READY continuously (Time control Enable
can be changed by INTERVAL TIME) Process control 1
Disable
Enable
Pixel count 3
judgment
(Judgement is
based on the setting
value of item K, L.)
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning Color process 0-2 0 0
ON the power and after passing control Enable
TIME. Process control 1
Disable
Enable
E HUM The temperature and humidity in side Color process 0-2 0 0
the machine are monitored only control Enable
during a job for every 2hours (set by Process control 1
item N). When the changes in the Disable
temperature and the humidity are BK process control 2
greater than the specified level (the Enable
set value of item O) in comparison
with the previous process control.
F REV1 YES The accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of BK or M position OPC unit Inhibit 1
reaches the specified level after
turning the power.
G REV2_BK YES The accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0

NO of BK position OPC drum unit Inhibit 1
reaches the specified level from
execution of the previous density
correction.
H REV2_CL YES The accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of M position OPC drum unit reaches Inhibit 1
the specified level from execution of
the previous density correction.
I REFRESH YES Select of YES/NO of the manual Key operation 0-1 0 1
MODE(*1) process control key with key display
NO operation Key operation NO 1
display
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control J DAY When the next warm-up if there is no Disable of the 0 - 999 0 1
conditions color job after a color job after specified days
setting passing the specified days from judgment
execution of the previous color 1 - 999 days passing 1-
process control 999
K PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified 1 - 999 10
value entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
L PIX_RATIO_CL Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner count 1 - 999 10
specified value entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
M INTERVAL TIME Passing time setting of "TIME"(h: hour) 1-255 12
(1-255: 1-255h passed)
N HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring 1 - 24 2
time of "HUM" (h: hour)
O HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the 1-9 2
execution of the previous process control of "HUM
P BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the 1-999 15
BK position OPC drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
Q M_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the M position OPC drum 1-999 15
traveling distance of "REV2_CL (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
R COLOR BORDER Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK process control 0 - 999 0 20
M position OPC drum traveling is executed without
distance when executing the BK judgment of ratio of
process control the M OPC drum
traveling distance.
(Addition)
1 - 999(%) 1-
999
S BK ONLY Disable/Enable setting and setting of Enable 5 time 0-6 0 5
the number of repetition of the BK Disable 1-5 times 1-5
process control when monochrome Inhibit 6
print is continued.
T HT_DIF Bias change difference value used for judgment of HT 1 - 255 40
process control
Registration U RG_ON_SYNC CL Select of synchronous/asynchronous of the power ON 0-2 0 0
adjustment ALL process control 1
setting CL/BK 2
V RG_TEMP_TIMER Execution timing setting after turning ON the power 0 - 240 (MINUTE) 60
W RG_PERM_TIMER Span setting from execution Disable to Enable 0 - 15 (HOUR) 1
X RG_HOUR_TIMER Span setting of timer execution 0-15 (Above)+(HOUR) 5
Secondary Y 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME1 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment 1 - 999 200
transfer threshold value 1
cleaning setting Z 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME2 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment 1 - 999 300
threshold value 2
AA 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME3 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment 1 - 999 500
threshold value 3
*1: When REFRESH MODE setting is enabled (0), the menu of the
user process control execution button is displayed on the user sys-
tem setting menu.
When the color balance or the density change is not within the
allowable range, the user can perform the process control manually
and forcibly. However, toner is consumed grater than as usual.
This point must be explained to the user clearly.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
352&217,0,1*$'-8670(17
$ ,1,7,$/<(6
$ % 6:21

& 7,0(
' +80B/,0,7
( +80
) 5(9<(6
* 5(9B%.<(6
+ 5(9B&/<(6
, 5()5(6+02'(12
- '$<
. 3,;B5$7,2B%.
/ 3,;B5$7,2B&/
2.
44-29
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Setting +$/)721(6(77,1*

$ &23<+93+7+7
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the $ % 35,17(5+93+7+7
process control during a job.

& )$;+93+7+7
' 6(/)35,17+93+7+7
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
panel.
3) Press [OK] key. 2.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range 44-31
value
A COPY During copy 0-4 0 No 4 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
job execution
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Man-
B PRINTER During print job 1 HV only 4
ual adjustment)
C FAX During FAX 2 HV PHT 4
print job Section Process
D SELF During self 3 HV HT 4 Operation/Procedure
PRINT print 4 HV PHT
HT NOTE: For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simu-
lation, but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
HV: High density process control 1) Select item A with [] [] key.
HT: Half tone process control 2) Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment pattern with
PHT: Not operate 10 key.
3) Press [EXCUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed out.)
4) Select an adjustment pattern whose deflection is within two
scale lines on the adjustment pattern of C,M, Y colors.
5) Select item B with [] [] key.
6) Enter the adjustment pattern sheet number selected in proce-
dure 4).
8) The adjusted adjustment pattern is printed.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A PRINT MODE 45deg Print mode 45 Deflection check pattern print for every 45 degrees (8-sheet 1 1-3 3
degrees print) (SET
(1)0 (2)45 (3)90(4)135 (5)180 (6)225 (7)270 (8)315 VALUE)
* The number in () is printed on the output pattern.
90deg 90 Deflection check pattern print for every 90 degrees (4-sheet 2
degrees print)
(1)0 (2)90 (3)180 (4)270
* The number in () is printed on the output pattern.
SET SET Deflection check pattern print at the set value (1-sheet print) 3
VALUE VALUE
B COLOR Phase adjustment value Angle step 0 (1) 45 (2) 90 (3) 135 (4) 180 (5) 1-8 1
BKCL 225 (6) 270 (7) 315 (8)
C PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1 1-6 3

CS1 Main unit 1 stage 2 (CS2)
CS2 Main unit 2 stage 3
CS3 Option paper feed desk 1 stage 4
CS4 Option paper feed desk 2 stage 5
LCC LCC 6

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'580326,7,216(77,1*
$ 35,1702'(6(79$/8(
$ % &2/25
& 3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
2 : '09/Sep
44-37
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc-
tion level in the continuous printing opera-
tion.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel.
2) Select a target item with [] [] buttons.
NOTE:
When the print density is varied in the continuous printing opera-
tion, this simulation is used.
Item/Display Default value

Black CMY Black CMY Variable range
Current DV Bias Low speed mode less than 300[v] A A 0 0 0-5
voltage Heavy paper mode 300[v] or more, less than 450[v] B B 0 0 (*1)
450[v] or more C C 0 0
Middle speed mode less than 300[v] D D 0 0
300[v] or more, less than 450[v] E E 0 0
450[v] or more F F 0 0
High speed mode less than 300[v] G - 0 -
Monochrome mode 300[v] or more, less than 450[v] H - 0 -
450[v] or more I - 0 -
Time (T) from Low speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB J G 4 4 1-12
termination of Heavy paper mode 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] K H 3 3
continuous outputs 60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] L I 1 1
to start of the next 240 [sec] or more M J 1 1
output operation
Middle speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB N K 4 4
10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] O L 3 3
60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] P M 1 1
240 [sec] or more Q N 1 1
2 High speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB R - 4 -
Monochrome mode 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] S - 3 -
60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] T - 1 -
240 [sec] or more U - 1 -
<Use example>
(*1) 44-43
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is greater Purpose Data display
than that of the first sheet, decrease the set value. Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa-
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is smaller tion of the developing unit.
than that of the first sheet, increase the set value. Section Developing system
When the set value is 0 (Default), the correction level does not Operation/Procedure
work.
The identification number and the identification signal level of the
developing unit are displayed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Item/Display Content Display
,0$*('(16,7<'9%$'-8670(176(77,1*
range
$ '9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B
$ % '9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B
A DVCH KIND K K color development unit 1-9

& '9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B identification number
' '9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B B DVCH KIND C C color development unit 1-9
( '9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B
identification number
) '9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B
* '9B$'-B%.B+B'$7$B
C DVCH KIND M M color development unit 1-9
+ '9B$'-B%.B+B'$7$B
identification number
, '9B$'-B%.B+B'$7$B D DVCH KIND Y Y color development unit 1-9
- '9B$'-B67$57B&/B.B/B identification number
. '9B$'-B67$57B&/B.B/B
E DVCH_AD_K K color developing unit identification 0 - 255
/ '9B$'-B67$57B&/B.B/B
number AD value
. & 0 < 2.
F DVCH_AD_C C color developing unit identification 0 - 255
number AD value
G DVCH_AD_M M color developing unit 0 - 255
identification number AD value
H DVCH_AD_Y Y color developing unit identification 0 - 255
number AD value
Setting Default
range value

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
'(9(/23(581,7$'021,725 PHOTO (COLOR Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
'9&+.,1'.
TONE (Color tone
'9&+.,1'&
'9&+.,1'0
'9&+.,1'< N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
'9&+B$'B. (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
'9&+B$'B& ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
'9&+B$'B0
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
'9&+B$'B<
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50

Q MAP (COLOR Map LOW 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
46 R SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
46-1 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode) document)
T TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
mode.
U TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
Section (COPY TO COPY) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure (copy document)
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch

panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each $ $872
$
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. % 7(;7
& 7(;735,17('3+272

3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) ' 7(;73+272
( 35,17('3+272
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the ) 3+272*5$3+
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy * 0$3
density in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and + /,*+7
, 7(;7&23<72&23<
change the adjustment value. - 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is . 35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
/ 7(;7&2/25721((1+$1&(0(17

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den- /2: +,*+ 2.
sity is decreased.
Setting Default 46-2

range value
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 mode.
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Section
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
panel.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
HIGH 1 - 99 50 * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
HIGH 1 - 99 50 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the
HIGH 1 - 99 50
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 density in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and
HIGH 1 - 99 50 change the adjustment value.
I TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
COPY) document)
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
HIGH 1 - 99 50
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy
sity is decreased.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY) document)
Setting Default
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content
range value
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
document) A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone LOW 1 - 99 50 HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50 B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) HIGH 1 - 99 50
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Setting Default
range value

D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 (;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>6&$11(5@
$ $872
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50 $ % 7(;7
Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50 & 7(;735,17('3+272
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 ' 7(;73+272
( 35,17('3+272
HIGH 1 - 99 50
) 3+272*5$3+
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 * 0$3
HIGH 1 - 99 50
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 2.

PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
COPY) document) 46-5
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
document) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
L LIGHT Light LOW 1 - 99 50 send mode.
document HIGH 1 - 99 50 Section
Operation/Procedure
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( panel.
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
$ $872 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
$ % $872
& 7(;7

' 7(;735,17('3+272 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
( 7(;73+272
) 35,17('3+272
* 3+272*5$3+ When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
+ 0$3
, 7(;7&23<72&23<
increased, and vice versa.
- 7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
. 35,17('3+272&23<72&23< Setting Default

/ /,*+7 range value
/2: +,*+ 2.
A AUTO TEXT Automatic/Text 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
46-4 C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
send mode. F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
Section
Operation/Procedure

panel. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>6&$11(5@
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. $ $8727(;7
$
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each % 7(;7
& 7(;735,17('3+272

item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. ' 7(;73+272
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) ( 35,17('3+272
) 3+272*5$3+
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is * 0$3
Setting Default
range value
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 2.
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
Setting Default
range value
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color (Low density side)
balance RGB. D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy copy mode 1 - 99 53
Section exposure adjustment
(High density side)
Operation/Procedure
E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 53
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch exposre adjustment
panel. (Low density side)
2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
panel. adjustment (high density)

6,08/$7,2112
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density 7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
area and the high density area. $ &23</2:
$ % 6&$1/2:
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the )$;/2:
target color is increased, and vice versa. &23<+,*+
( 6&$1+,*+
Default )$;+,*+

value
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction 50
amount
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction 50
amount
2.

46-10
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($'-8670(17&2/256&$11(502'( Purpose Adjustment
$ /2:'(16,7<32,17
$ % +,*+'(16,7<32,17
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and
the gamma (for each color copy mode).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
touch panel.
% * 5 2.
panel.
46-9 * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
Purpose Adjustment (RSPF mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Section increased, and vice versa.
Operation/Procedure
TEXT Text
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [OC] and [RSPF] keys
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
on the touch panel.
PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo
2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch PHOTO + TEXT/PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
panel. MAP Map
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. LIGHT Light document
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each COPY ORG Copy document
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Density level Default
Item/Display Setting range
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy (Point) value
mode, and the fax mode. A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
Setting Default E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
Item/Display Content F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
range value
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48 G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
adjustment H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
(Low density side) I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 48 J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
exposure adjustment K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
(Low density side) L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
Density level Default
Item/Display Setting range 46-19
(Point) value
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500 Purpose Setting
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500 Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500 density scanning (exposure) of mono-
chrome auto copy mode documents.
Section
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
Operation/Procedure
7(67
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
7(;7 7(;73573+272 35,17('3+272 3+2727(;73+272
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
0$3 /,*+7 &23<25*
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is
saved.
Default
Item/Display Content Set value
value
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE1
MODE2
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
(;(&87(
Stop (for copy) STOP/

PRESCAN
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
46-16 Stop (for FAX)
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Purpose Adjustment Stop (for scanner) STOP/
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den- PRESCAN
sity and the gamma (for each monochrome AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
copy mode). setting NORMAL
SHARP
Section
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
Operation/Procedure
panel.

6,08/$7,2112
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 7(67
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(
&/26(
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each $(B02'( 02'( 02'(

$(B6723B&23< 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$(B6723B)$; 2)) 21
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) $(B6723B6&$1 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$(B),/7(5 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is $(B:,'7+ )8// 3$57
Density level Default

(Point) value
A POINT1 Point 1 373 - 627 500
B POINT2 Point 2 373 - 627 500
C POINT3 Point 3 373 - 627 500

NOTE:
D POINT4 Point 4 373 - 627 500
E POINT5 Point 5 373 - 627 500 MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)
F POINT6 Point 6 373 - 627 500 MODE 2 Normal gamma
G POINT7 Point 7 373 - 627 500 STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is
H POINT8 Point 8 373 - 627 500 scanned, and the output image density is determined
I POINT9 Point 9 373 - 627 500 according to the scanned density. (The output image
J POINT10 Point 10 373 - 627 500 density is even for all the surface.)
K POINT11 Point 11 373 - 627 500 REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned
L POINT12 Point 12 373 - 627 500 sequentially, and the output image density is
M POINT13 Point 13 373 - 627 500 determined according to the density in each area of
N POINT14 Point 14 373 - 627 500 document. (The output image density may not be
even for all the surface.)
O POINT15 Point 15 373 - 627 500
PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are
P POINT16 Point 16 373 - 627 500
scanned sequentially, and the output image density is
Q POINT17 Point 17 373 - 627 500
determined according to the average of the scanned
densities. (The output image density is even for all the
surface.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( AE WIDTH FULL The document density scan area in the monochrome
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3* auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
$ 32,17
$
the document width. This is not related to the prescan
% 32,17
mode.
& 32,17
' 32,17 AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome
( 32,17 PART auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
) 32,17 100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN
* 32,17
mode.
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
(;(&87( 2.
2 : '09/Sep
46-21
46-23
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
adjustment)
high density section (High density tone gap
Section supported).
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the Operation/Procedure
touch panel.
panel. 0 Enable
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1 Inhibit
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Item/Display Content
Setting Default
range value
A CMY 0 CMY engine 0-1 0
(0 : ENABLE highest density
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in 1 : DISABLE) correction mode :
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment Enable
value. 1 CMY engine
highest density
Density level Default correction mode :
(Point) value Disable
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500 B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500 (0 : ENABLE density correction
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500 1 : DISABLE) mode : Enable
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500 1 K engine highest
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500 density correction
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500 mode : Disable
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500 C CYAN MAX Scanner target value 0 - 999 500 2
TARGET for CYAN maximum
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
density correction
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value 0 - 999 500
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
TARGET for MAGENTA
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500 maximum density
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500 correction
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500 E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value 0 - 999 500
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500 TARGET for YELLOW maximum
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500 density correction
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500 F BLACK MAX Scanner target value 0 - 999 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500 TARGET for BLACK maximum
density correction
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
and B to "0.
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//&2/25@
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17
gap is better.
& 32,17 * To increase the density in the high density area further, set items
' 32,17
( 32,17
A and B to "1.
) 32,17 The tone gap may occur in high density part.
* 32,17
+ 32,17 NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these
, 32,17 values are changed, the density in the high density area is
- 32,17
changed.
. 32,17
/ 32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(
$ % .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7
' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
2.
2 : '09/Sep
46-24
Purpose Adjustment 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment $ 5('

$
(Auto adjustment) % *5((1
& %/8(
Section ' &<$1

( 0$*(17$
Operation/Procedure ) <(//2:

2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. & 0 < 2.
The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed,

then the adjustment result pattern is printed.
46-26
4) Press [OK] key.
The half tone correction target registration is processed. Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color

balance set value to the default.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&/26(
Section
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
Operation/Procedure
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.

2) Press [YES] key.
The color balance value of the single color mode is reset to the
default value.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(67$1'$5'5$7(6(783
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
46-27
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87( Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy
images, texts, and line image edges.
46-25 Section
Purpose Adjustment Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Sin- 1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
gle color copy mode) panel.
Section 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
1) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the
Item/Display Setting Default
touch panel. Content
(Copy mode) range value
2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
panel. (SLOPE) gamma skew
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. adjustment
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
target color is increased, and vice versa. (SLOPE) gamma skew
adjustment
Item/Display D COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
range C M Y (INTERCEPT) density adjustment
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200 E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255 (SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 200 0 mode)
2 D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0 F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0 (INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map
2 F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255 mode)
When the adjustment values of items A, C, and E are changed, the
46-32
gamma of text and line edge image density section is changed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of Purpose Adjustment/Setup
character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background
value is decreased, the image contrast of character and line edge density reproducibility in the monochrome
is decreased. auto copy mode.
When the adjustment values of items B, D, and F are increased, Section
the image density of text and line edge section is decreased, and Operation/Procedure
vice versa.
panel.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
&/26(
$ %/$&.7(;76/23(
$ % %/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
& &2/257(;76/23(

' &2/257(;7,17(5&(37 adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
( ('7(;76/23( and the low density image is decreased.
) ('7(;7,17(5&(37
Setting Default
range value
A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
2.
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(for RSPF)
E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
46-30
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub
scanning direction in the copy mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Section /,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
$ &23<2&
Operation/Procedure $ % &23<563)
1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre- & 6&$12&
' 6&$1563)
sponding to the resolution mode with 10 key. ( )$;2&
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) ) )$;563)
Setting Default
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode1 0-1 0 0
RESOLUTION selection Mode2 1
SW (COPY: 2.
COLOR)
Resolution in the sub scanning direction

46-36
(DPI) Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Mode Scan mode 25-99% 100-200% 201-400% Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color
[Magnifica- [Magnifica- [Magnifica-
copy mode.
tion ratio] tion ratio] tion ratio]
Mode1 OC 600 600 1200 Section
RSPF 600 600 1200 Operation/Procedure
Mode2 OC 300 600 1200 1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
RSPF 400 600 1200 panel.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in
6&$15(62/87,216(77,1* the 2-color copy mode can be performed.
$ 6&$15(62/87,216:
$
range C M Y
A RED R output color 0 - 255 0 255 200
B GREEN G output color 0 - 255 255 0 255
C BLUE B output color 0 - 255 255 200 0
D CYAN C output color 0 - 255 255 0 0
E MAGENTA M output color 0 - 255 0 255 0
F YELLOW Y output color 0 - 255 0 0 255
2.

46-38
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
5('%/$&.&2/25&23<$'-8670(17 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
$ 5('
$ % *5((1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black component
& %/8( amount in the color copy mode.
&<$1
0$*(17$
Section
<(//2: Operation/Procedure
1) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
key.
3) Press the black component amount select key.
2.
This adjusts black ingredient amount in the color copy mode.
& 0 <
(except character and line image)

46-37 As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part
changes.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the color document repro- Item/Display (Copy mode)
Select
Content
Default
ducibility in the monochrome copy mode. button value
MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print (+) LUT1
Section
(-) LUT1 (Manual)
Operation/Procedure NOMAL
1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel. (+) LUT1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. (+) LUT2
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) (+) LUT1
(-) LUT1
4) Press [YES] key.
NOMAL
This simulation is used to adjust the reproducibility of red and yel- (+) LUT1
low images when copy a color document of red and yellow images (+) LUT2
in the monochrome mode. PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo (+) LUT1
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
Default
Item/Display Content NOMAL
value
(+) LUT1
A R/G Gray making setting (R/G) 21
(+) LUT2
B B/G Gray making setting (B/G) 0
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photographic NORMAL
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, it is set to the default value. (-) LUT1 paper
NOMAL (Manual)
When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased, copy
density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment value is (+) LUT1
decreased, copy density of red image is increased. (+) LUT2
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/ NORMAL
When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased, copy
PHOTO (-) LUT1 Photograph
density of red image is increased. When the adjustment value is (Manual)
NOMAL
decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) (+) LUT1
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( (-) LUT1
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
NOMAL
$ 5*
$ % %* (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
CP ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy (+) LUT1
TEXT PRT (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Text printed
(+) LUT1 (Manual)
(+) LUT2
TEXT (-) LUT1 document/
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
NOMAL Text (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
PHOTO (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Printed photo
(+) LUT1 (Manual)
(+) LUT2
LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light (+) LUT1
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 document
NOMAL (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Select Default Setting Default
Item/Display (Copy mode) Content Item/Display Content
button value range value
AUTO AUTO0 (-) LUT2 Auto mode (+) LUT1 B 200 x 200 [DPI] 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
(-) LUT1 judgment 0 OFF half tone OFF
NOMAL C 200 x 200 [DPI] 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT1 ON half tone ON
(+) LUT2 D 200 x 400 [DPI] 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
AUTO1 (-) LUT2 Auto mode (+) LUT1 OFF half tone OFF
(-) LUT1 judgment 1 E 200 x 400 [DPI] 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
ON half tone ON
NOMAL
F 400 x 400 [DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT1
OFF half tone OFF
(+) LUT2
G 400 x 400 [DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
ON half tone ON
(-) LUT1 judgment 2
H 600 x 600 [DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
NOMAL OFF half tone OFF
(+) LUT1 I 600 x 600 [DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT2 ON half tone ON
(-) LUT1 judgment 3
NOMAL

(+) LUT1 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(+) LUT2 ,0$*(6(1'6+$531(66$'-8670(17

$ h>'3,@2))
AUTO4 (-) LUT2 Auto mode (+) LUT1 $ % h>'3,@2))
(-) LUT1 judgment 4 & h>'3,@21
' h>'3,@2))
NOMAL
( h>'3,@21
(+) LUT1 ) h>'3,@2))
(+) LUT2 * h>'3,@21
AUTO5 (-) LUT2 Auto mode (+) LUT1 + h>'3,@2))

, h>'3,@21
(-) LUT1 judgment 5
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 2.

(-) LUT1 judgment 6
46-40
NOMAL
(+) LUT1 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
(+) LUT2 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image den-
sity. (Collective adjustment of all the
modes)
Section
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 Operation/Procedure
7(;7357 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
1) Set the original on the original table.
7(;7 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87
35,17('3+272 /87 /87 120$/ 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
3+272
/87
/87
/87
/87 120$/
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
/87 /87 and the scanned document image is outputted.
7(;73+272 /87 /87 120$/
/87 /87 Setting Default
0$3 Item/Display Content
/87 /87 120$/
range value
/87 /87
0$18$/ $872
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX 1 - 99 50

LEVEL(ALL) send image density.
(Collective adjustment of all
the modes)
46-39

Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
images. (;32685($'-8670(17)$;$//
$ (;32685(/(9(/$//
Section $
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel.

Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
numeric value to decrease moire.
Setting Default (;(&87( 2.

range value
A 200 x 100 [DPI] 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
OFF half tone OFF
Setting Default
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image den- Half tone
sity. (Normal) J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
Half tone
Section
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure Half tone
1) Set the original on the original table. L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Half tone
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key MODE mode Fine/ 12 (AUTO)
EXP1 2
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set Exposure 1
and the scanned document image is outputted. EXP2 Fine/ 3
Exposure 2
Setting Default EXP3 Fine/ 4
range value Exposure 3
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 EXP4 Fine/ 5
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Exposure 4
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 EXP5 Fine/ 6
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 Exposure 5
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 AUTO Fine/ 7
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 H_TONE Automatic/
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1 halftone
MODE EXP1 mode Exposure 1 2 (AUTO) EXP1 Fine/ 8
EXP2 Exposure 2 3 H_TONE Exposure 1
/Half tone
EXP3 Exposure 3 4
EXP2 Fine/ 9
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
H_TONE Exposure 2
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
/Half tone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu- EXP3 Fine/ 10
H_TONE Exposure 3
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,
/Half tone
and press [EXECUTE] key.
EXP4 Fine/ 11
H_ONE Exposure 4

/Half tone
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( EXP5 Fine/ 12
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;1250$/
$ $872
H_TONE Exposure 5
$ (;32685( /Half tone
(;32685(
(;32685( To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
(;32685( ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
(;32685(
(;(&87(02'($872

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;),1(
$ $872
(;(&87( 2. $ (;32685(
& (;32685(
' (;32685(
46-42 ( (;32685(
) (;32685(
Purpose Adjustment/Setup $872+B721(
+ (;32685(+B721(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image den- , (;32685(+B721(
sity. (Fine) - (;32685(+B721(
. (;32685(+B721(
Section / (;32685(+B721(
(;(&87(
Operation/Procedure
2.

3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
and the scanned document image is outputted.
Setting Default
range value
A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50
Half tone
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
Half tone
46-43

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Adjustment/Setup (;(32685($'-8670(17)$;683(5),1(

$ $872
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image den- $ (;32685(
sity. (Super Fine) & (;32685(
' (;32685(
Section ( (;32685(
) (;32685(
Operation/Procedure $872+B721(
1) Set the original on the original table. + (;32685(+B721(

, (;32685(+B721(
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. - (;32685(+B721(
. (;32685(+B721(
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key / (;32685(+B721(
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set (;(&87( 2.

range value
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image den-
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 sity. (Ultra fine)
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 Section
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine 1 - 99 50
/Auto/Half tone 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
H EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
H_TONE /Half tone When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
I EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 and the scanned document image is outputted.
H_TONE /Half tone
J EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
H_TONE /Half tone Item/Display Content
range value
K EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
H_TONE /Half tone B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 1
H_TONE /Half tone C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine 1- 1 1 2
MODE mode /Auto 12 (AUTO D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP1 Super Fine 2 ) 3
/Exposure 1 E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP2 Super Fine 3 4
/Exposure 2 F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP3 Super Fine 4 5
/Exposure 3 G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/Half 1 - 99 50
EXP4 Super Fine 5 tone
/Exposure 4 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP5 Super Fine 6 1/Half tone
/Exposure 5 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
AUTO Super Fine 7 2/Half tone
H_TON /Auto J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
E /Half tone 3/Half tone
EXP1 Super Fine 8 K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
H_TON /Exposure 1 4/Half tone
E /Half tone
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP2 Super Fine 9 5/Half tone
H_TON /Exposure 2
E /Half tone
EXP3 Super Fine 10
H_TON /Exposure 3
E /Half tone
EXP4 Super Fine 11
H_TON /Exposure 4
E /Half tone
EXP5 Super Fine 12
H_TON /Exposure 5
E /Half tone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
Setting Default Setting Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1 G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto 1 - 99 50
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO) /Half tone 1
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
Exposure 1 /Half tone
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4 J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5 K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6 L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7 M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/Auto 1- 1 1
H_TONE Auto/Half MODE EXP1 mode 600dpi/ 12 2 (AUTO)
tone Exposure 1
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8 EXP2 600dpi/ 3
H_TONE Exposure Exposure 2
1/Half tone EXP3 600dpi/ 4
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9 Exposure 3
H_TONE Exposure 2 EXP4 600dpi/ 5
/Half tone Exposure 4
EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10 EXP5 600dpi/ 6
H_TONE Exposure 3 Exposure 5
/Half tone AUTO 600dpi/Auto/ 7
EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 11 H_TONE Half tone
/Half tone H_TONE Exposure 1
EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12 /Half tone
/Half tone H_TONE Exposure 2
/Half tone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
EXP3 600dpi/ 10
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
H_TONE Exposure 3
/Half tone
EXP4 600dpi/ 11

H_TONE Exposure 4
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( /Half tone
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;8/75$),1(
EXP5 600dpi/ 12
$ $872
$ (;32685(
H_TONE Exposure 5
& (;32685( /Half tone
' (;32685(
( (;32685( To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
) (;32685( ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
$872+B721(
+ (;32685(+B721(
, (;32685(+B721(
- (;32685(+B721(
. (;32685(+B721(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/ (;32685(+B721(
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;'3,
(;(&87( 2. $ $872
$ (;32685(
& (;32685(
46-45 ' (;32685(

( (;32685(
Purpose Adjustment/Setup ) (;32685(
$872+B721(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image den- + (;32685(+B721(
sity. (600dpi). , (;32685(+B721(
- (;32685(+B721(
Section . (;32685(+B721(
Operation/Procedure / (;32685(+B721(
(;(&87( 2.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
Setting Default
range value
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
Operation Setting Default
mode range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup PUSH SCAN D SCA MIDDLE Medium 0 0
(GRAY) N(G) 1 compres (MID
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy (Scanner (*1) sion DLE1)
and scan images (JPEG). (Monochrome mode 1
Section half-tone Low
mode)) compres
Operation/Procedure
sion
1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel. MIDDLE Medium 1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2 compres
sion
3) Press [OK] key.
mode 2
The set value is saved. Medium
compres
Operation Setting Default sion
mode range value MIDDLE Medium 2
COPY A COPY LOW Low 0 0 3 compres
(COLOR) (C) compres (LOW) sion
(COPY sion mode 3
(COLOR (Color) High
mode)) MIDDLE Medium 1 compres
compres sion
sion
(Color) *1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image com-
HIGH High 2 pression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
compres NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity
sion in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other hand, how-
(Color)
ever, the image quality of some documents may be remarkably
LOWER Super 3
reduced.
low
compres
sion

(Color) 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
COPY B COPY LOW Low 0 0 &23<6&$10)335,17&2035(665$7($'-8670(17
(GRAY) (G) compres (LOW) $ &23<&/2:

$ % &23<*/2:
(COPY sion
& 6&$1&0,''/(
(Monochrome (Gray) ' 6&$1*0,''/(
half-tone MIDDLE Medium 1
mode)) compres
sion
(Gray)
HIGH High 2
compres
sion
(Gray) 2.
LOWER Super 3
low
compres 46-51
sion
(Gray) Purpose Adjustment/Setup
PUSH SCAN C SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 0 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy
(COLOR) (C) 1 compres (MID mode heavy paper mode and the image
(Scanner (*1) sion DLE1) process mode.
(Color mode)) mode 1
Low Section
compres Operation/Procedure
sion 1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key
MIDDLE Medium 1 [PAPER/DITHER].
2 compres
sion Select the gamma adjustment of PAPER (heavy paper mode)
mode 2 or DITHER (image process mode).
Medium When DITHER (image process mode) is selected, the detailed
compres select menu is displayed. Select an item for the gamma adjust-
sion ment on that menu.
MIDDLE Medium 2
3 compres
sion touch panel.
mode 3 3) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the
High touch panel.
compres
sion
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out-
putted.
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust
the image density.
Item/Display Content Color
46-52
HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma KCMY
DITH1 Black edge K
DITH2 Color edge KCMY Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy
DITH3 Color error diffusion KCMY mode heavy paper and the image process
DITH4 Monochrome error diffusion K mode. (The set values of SIM46-51 are set
to the default values.)
Density level Default Section
(Point) value Operation/Procedure
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500 3) Press [YES] key.
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500 &23<&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(5
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500 +($9<3$3(5 %/$&.('*( &2/25('*( &2/25('
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500 %:
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500

N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&23,(5+($9<3$3(5*$00$$'-8670(17+($9<
$
$ 32,17
46-60
% 32,17
& 32,17 Purpose Adjustment/Setup

' 32,17
( 32,17
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
) 32,17 auto copy mode.
* 32,17
+ 32,17
Section
, 32,17 Operation/Procedure
- 32,17
. 32,17 1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel.
/ 32,17
2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
process mode).
. & 0 < 3$3(5',7+(5 (;(&87( 2.
3) Press [OK] key.

Use to sharpness adjustment of the high density image in color
auto copy mode.
This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image
shade part.
Setting
range
A SCREEN FILTER H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern Strong 1 3 (Auto) Applied to the auto copy
LEVEL image in auto copy mode emphasis mode only.
L Soft 2
emphasis
AUTO Auto 3
B AUTOMODE SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto SOFT 1 2 (CENTER) Applied to the auto copy
FILTER LEVEL CENTER copy mode CENTER 2 mode only.
HIGH HIGH 3
C COLOR COPY : OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) Available for the high
CMY ON in color copy mode ON 1 density image except text
and line image
D COLOR COPY : K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in color OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON copy mode ON 1
E SINGLE COLOR : OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) When it is set to ON, the
CMY ON in sigle color copy mode ON 1 soft filter is applied and the
smoothness in the dark
image area is improved.
(Roughness is reduced.)
F 2 COLOR COPY : OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter OFF 0 1 (ON)
CMY ON to C/M/Y images of the 2-color copy mode ON 1
G 2 COLOR COPY : K OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON to K images of the 2-color copy mode ON 1
Setting
range
H B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON copy mode ON 1
I COLOR PUSH : OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
RGB ON scan color mode ON 1
J B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON scan monochrome mode ON 1

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&2/25$87202'(),/7(5$'-8670(17
$ 6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872
$ % $87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
& &2/25&23<&0<21
' &2/25&23<.21
( 6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
) &2/25&23<&0<21
* &2/25&23<.21
+ %:&23<21
, &2/25386+5*%21
- %:386+21
2.
46-61

Purpose Adjustment/Setup 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6(*0(17/(9(/$'-8670(17
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- $ 6(*0(176:,7&+>7;7216&5@
$
tion level. % 6(*0(176:,7&+>/,1(6&5@
& 6(*0(176:,7&+>60$//6&5@

Section ' 6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7@
( 6(*0(17$'-867>&/7;7@
Operation/Procedure ) 6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7&/7;7@
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch * 6(*0(17$'-867>%.&/@
panel. + 6(*0(17$'-867>7;721%*@

, 6(*0(17$'-867>6&5@
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.

3) Press [OK] key.
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- 2.
cially required.
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from 46-62
the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
ments.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
Setting Default ACS, the area separation, the background
range value image process, and the auto exposure
A SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 mode.
SWITCH [TXT ON Text on dot Section
SCR]
B SEGMENT: etection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
Operation/Procedure
SWITCH [LINE SCR] line screen 1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
C SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 panel.
SWITCH [SMALL Dot in a small area 2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
SCR]
3) Press [OK] key.
D SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
ADJUST [BK TXT 1] adjustment: NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
Black text 1 cially required.
E SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from
ADJUST [CL TXT 1] adjustment:
the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu-
Color text 1
ments.
F SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
ADJUST [BK TXT 2 , adjustment:
Setting Default
CL TXT 2] Black text 2, Color Item/Display Content
range value
text 2
A SW_ACS ACS judgment 0-1 1
G SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
reference area
ADJUST [BK/CL] adjustment:
adjustment
Chroma/Achroma
judgment B TEXT_IMAGE SIM display item: 0-6 3
Text/Image judgment
H SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
priority level select
ADJUST [TXT ON adjustment:
BG] Text on background C TEXT_BLANK SIM display item: 0-4 2
Text/Blank judgment
I SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
priority level select
ADJUST [SCR] adjustment:
Dot
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
range value
D AE_AREA_LV SIM display item: 0-6 3
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3
Color AE judgment
TEXT/PRINTED (color copy)
target area adjustment
PHOTO
value
B COLOR COPY : Text 1-9 3
E AE_LV_CC AE background 0-8 4
TEXT (color copy)
detection division result
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
adjustment:
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
For color copy
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 7
F AE_LV_MC AE background 0-8 4
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
detection division result
adjustment: E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
For monochrome copy TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
G AE_LV_CS AE background 0-8 4 F COLOR COPY : Map 1-9 5
detection division result MAP (color copy)
adjustment: G COLOR COPY : Light document 1-9 6
For color scan LIGHT (color density)
H AE_LV_MS AE background 0-8 4 H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
detection division result TEXT/PRINTED Character print
adjustment: PHOTO (color copy)
For monochrome scan (COPY TO COPY)
I AE_JUDGE SIM display item: 0-4 2 I COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
_LV_L Color AE background TEXT Character
density threshold value (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
J AE_JUDGE SIM display item: 0 - 10 5 J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
_LV_C Color AE background PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
density threshold value (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
K AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 3
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 TEXT/PRINTED (color PUSH)
_CC For color copy PHOTO
L AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) L COLOR PUSH : Text 1-9 3
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 TEXT (color PUSH)
_MC For mono- M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
chrome copy PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
M AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
_CS For color scan O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
N AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1 P COLOR PUSH : Map 1-9 5
_MS For mono- MAP color PUSH)
chrome scan

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17
09,(:-8'*(0(17/(9(/$'-8670(17
$ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
$ 6:B$&6
$ % &2/25&23<7(;7
$ % 7(;7B,0$*(
& &2/25&23<35,17('3+272
& 7(;7B%/$1.
' &2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
' $(B$5($B/9
( &2/25&23<7(;73+272
( $(B/9B&&
) &2/25&23<0$3
) $(B/9B0&
* &2/25&23</,*+7
* $(B/9B&6
+ &2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
+ $(B/9B06
, &2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23<
, $(B-8'*(B/9B/
- &2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
- $(B-8'*(B/9B&
. &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
. $(B212))B&&21
/ &2/25386+7(;7
/ $(B212))B0&21
2.
2.
46-63 46-74
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto
density section. adjustment)/Printer color balance adjust-
ment (Auto adjustment)
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
panel. This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin-
uously.
To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic
3) Press [OK] key.
adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is
and the low density image is decreased.
printed.
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, Setting Default
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. Item/Display Content
range value
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed. surface magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
ment pattern is printed.
surface magnification ratio
5) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, (Main scan)
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust- surface magnification ratio
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment (Sub scan)
result pattern is printed.
7) Press [OK] key, and the half tone correction target is regis-

6,08/$7,2112
tered. 7(67
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
&/26(
$ &&'0$,1

NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the $ % &&'68%
adjustment operations in the both modes are completed all & 63)0$,1
the way. For example, when the copy color balance adjust- ' 63)68%
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the simula- ( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%

tion is canceled, the adjustment result is not effective.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+ 2.

3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
48-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi-
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction).
Section Scanner section
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(
panel.
48 3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved.
48-1 When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is
Purpose Adjustment adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
this adjustment.
tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
and the sub scanning direction). When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
Section
is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
Operation/Procedure the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
panel. Setting Default
range value
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
3) Press [OK] key. B MR(MID) Scanner motor 1 - 99 50
The set value is saved. (Reference speed)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
ratio is increased. D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(High speed)
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
(Reference speed)
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-
sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 0272563(('$'-8670(17
range value $ 05+,
$
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50 % 050,'
magnification ratio & 05/2
' 63)+,
adjustment (CCD)
( 63)0,'
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
(Main scan)
2.
48-6 49
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each 49-1
motor. Purpose
Section Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [COLOR] [MONO]
Operation/Procedure
[HEAVY] keys on the touch panel.
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.
panel. 2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
operation panel section.)
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.
4) Press [OK] key.
4) Select a target firmware.
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed. 6) Press [YES] key.
The selected firmware is updated.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Mode Select When the operation normally completed, "COMPLETE" is dis-
range value
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
A RRM Resist Color COLOR 1 - 99 50
motor Mono MONO
correction chrome
CONFIG Configuration data
value Heavy HEAVY 47
ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section former half
paper
ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main
B DVM_K Developing Color COLOR 1 - 99 46
ICU (BOOTS) ICU Boot section sub
K motor Mono MONO
correction chrome LANGUAGE Language support data program
value (General term)
Heavy HEAVY
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD
paper
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
C FSM Fusing Color COLOR 1 - 99 37
motor Mono MONO PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section
correction chrome PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section
value Heavy HEAVY 46 DESK (BOOT) Desk unit BOOT section
paper DESK (MAIN) Desk unit MAIN section
D DVM_CL Developing Color COLOR 1 - 99 46 A4LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A4) Boot section
CL motor Heavy HEAVY A4LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A4) main section
correction paper FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher BOOT section
value FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher MAIN section
E PFM Paper transport motor COLOR 1 - 99 50 1KFIN (BOOT) 1K finisher Boot section
correction value. 1KFIN (MAIN) 1K finisher Main section
F POM Paper exit motor COLOR 1 - 99 50 1KPUNCH (BOOT) Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher
correction value 1KPUNCH (MAIN) Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher
E FUSER Fusing speed select HEAVY 1 - 99 50 SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section
SETTING timing
SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section
F RRM RRM speed HEAVY 1 - 255 0
FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section
START increasing start timing
FAX(MAIN) FAX1 Main section
G RRM END RRM speed HEAVY 1 - 255 30
FAX OPTION(BOOT) FAX2 Boot section (Japan only)
increasing end timing
FAX OPTION(MAIN) FAX2 Main section (Japan only)
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe- ESCP_FONT ESC/P font
cially required. PDL_FONT PDL font
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ- ANIMATION Animation data
ent from the default value, a jam, paper wrinkle, or image IMAGE_DATA MFP ASIC data
quality trouble may occur. COLOR PROFILE Color profile
WEB HELP WEB help
UNICODE UNICODE table

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
9(/2&,7<$'-8670(17
&/26(
List of error displays in case of abnormal end
$ 550
$ % '90B. Item/Display Content
& )60

CONF Configuration data
' '90B&/
( 3)0 ICUM ICU Main section former half
) 320 ICUBM ICU Boot section main
ICUBS ICU Boot section sub
LANG Language support data program
(General term)
GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD
&2/25 0212 +($9< 2.
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
PCUB PCU Boot section
PCUM PCU Main section
DESKB Desk unit BOOT section
DESKM Desk unit MAIN section
LCC4B Side LCC (A4) Boot section

LCC4M Side LCC (A4) main section 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(0$18$/83'$7(XVEEG
FINB Inner finisher BOOT section ',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
FINM Inner finisher MAIN section ),/( ',5!)2/'(5
FIN1B 1K finisher Boot section

FIN1M 1K finisher Main section
1PUNB Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher
1PUNM Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher
SCUB SCU Boot section
SCUM SCU Main section
FAXB FAX1 Boot section
FAXM FAX1 Main section

FXOPB FAX2 Boot section (Japan only)
FXOPM FAX2 Main section (Japan only) (Folder select display 1)

ESCP ESC/P font
PDL PDL font
ANIME
IMGDT
Animation data
Image ASIC data
50
CORP Color profile
WEBHP WEB help 50-1
UNICD UNICODE table Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
ment
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(XVEEG Section
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
Operation/Procedure
),/( ',5!)2/'(5

panel.
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
default.
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment

SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
49-3
Setting Default
Purpose range value
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
HDD. edge edge reference
adjust- position (OC)
Section B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standar 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure value motor d Tray
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. C RRCB-CS34 ON Desk 1 - 99 50
D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 - 99 50
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E- adjust- Manual
E RRCB-MFT 1 - 99 50
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is ment paper
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. feed
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis- F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
The current version and the update version are displayed. loss area loss area setting
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30
active from gray out. adjust- area adjustment
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is J ment DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30
updated. area adjustment
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis- K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR 1 - 99 20
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. REAR void area
adjustment
L Off- OFSET_OC OC document off- 1 - 99 50
center center adjustment
adjust-
ment
M Magnifica SCAN SCAN sub 1 - 99 50
tion ratio _SPEED scanning
correc- _OC magnification ratio
tion adjustment (CCD)
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 50-2
range value
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment
direction Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
O DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
the image loss. (This simulation is a simpli-
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50 fied version of SIM 50-1).
value value Section
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
value
1) Set item A (L1) and item B (L2) to 0.
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value 2) Place a rule on the left edge of the document table, and make
S DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50 a copy at a magnification ratio of 400%.
value 3) Measure the length of L1 and L2 on the copied image in the
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 50 unit of 0.1mm (referring to the figure below). Enter the adjust-
value ment values of L1 x 10 and L2 x 10. Be sure to enter the both
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying adjustment values of L1 and L2.
the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step) L1: Distance from the lead edge of the copied image to 10mm
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When scale.
the value is increased, the timing is delayed. L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image lead
B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (resist roller ON) for the image posi- edge.
tion on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
value is increased, the timing is advanced. L1
G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step) Paper lead
edge
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
(0.1mm/step)
I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ L2
step) 400% enlargement copy
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) Fig. 1
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
5) Make a copy at the magnification ratio of 100%, and adjust the
7(67
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( rear edge void.
$ 55&$
$ % 55&%&6
Setting Default
& 55&%&6 Item/Display Description
range value
' 55&%/&&
( 55&%0)7 A Actual L1 Distance from the 0 - 999 -
) 55&%$'8 measurem image lead edge to
* /($' ent value the scale of 10mm.
+ 6,'(
(Platen 400%,
, '(1$
0.1mm increment)
- '(1%
. )52175($5 B L2 Distance from the 0 - 999 0

paper lead edge to
2. the image lead edge
(0.1mm increment)
C Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
area loss amount setting
setting (When the
value adjustment value is
increased, the image
loss is increased.)
D SIDE Side edge image 0 - 99 20
loss amount setting
(When the
adjustment value is
increased, the image
loss is increased.)
Setting Default Same as the adjusted items of SIM50-01 except for A and B.
Item/Display Description
range value The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the document
E Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30 lead edge reference position (RRC-A) of SIM50-01 and all the
adjustment adjustment (When paper lead edge positions (RRCB-**).
the adjustment value
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
is increased, the void
is increased.)
F DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30

adjustment (When 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
the adjustment value /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(&$/&

$ /
is increased, the void $ % /
is increased.) & /($'
G FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20 ' 6,'(
REAR amount adjustment ( '(1$
(When the ) '(1%
* )52175($5
adjustment value is
increased, the void is
increased.)
(;(&87(
50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with [] [] key on the
touch panel.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 3.02.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the printer. When the
lead edge image adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the printer print start position
position. in the paper transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
(PRINTER MODE)
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment value
adjustment of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in the
sub scanning direction for the paper transport direction is decreased by
0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and right edges of
adjustment paper. When the adjustment value is increased, the void amount is
increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge 1 - 99 50 Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the adjustment value of
void area adjustment DEN-B
correction value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction
value
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction
value
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
selection paper feed
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
M DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO print No 1
selection
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the Setting Default
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the Item/Display Content
range value
adjustment value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
edge to the image lead edge is decreased. loss (SIDE1) image loss
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by amount amount setting
E setting TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
about 0.1mm.
SIDE1 (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount setting

F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$ '(1&
amount amount setting
$ % '(1% G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
& )52175($5 SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss
' '(1%0)7 amount setting
( '(1%&6
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 30
) '(1%&6
* '(1%&6
(SIDE2) edge image loss
+ '(1%&6
amount setting
, '(1%/&& I OFSET_SPF1 SPF front surface 1 - 99 50
- '(1%$'8 document off-
. 08/7,&2817
center adjustment
/ 3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
J OFSET_SPF2 SPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
50-6 front surface
magnification
Purpose Adjustment ratio (Sub scan)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
the image loss. (RSPF mode) back surface
magnification
Section RSPF ratio (Sub scan)
Operation/Procedure
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing
is delayed.
panel.
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
is increased.
Item E - H: When appearing the shadow image on the rear edge
Setting Default part, increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow image.
range value All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan

position 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
adjustment /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
(CCD) $
$ 6,'(
% 6,'(
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 & /($'B('*(6,'(
document scan ' )5217B5($56,'(
position ( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
adjustment ) /($'B('*(6,'(

* )5217B5($56,'(
(CCD)
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'(
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 20 , 2)6(7B63)
loss (SIDE1) lead edge image - 2)6(7B63)
amount loss amount . 6&$1B63(('B63)
setting setting / 6&$1B63(('B63)
2.
SIDE1
50-7
Purpose Adjustment Setting Default
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
A L4 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
the image loss (RSPF mode). (This simula-
0.1mm unit) from the front
tion is a simplified version of SIM 50-6.) surface image lead edge to
Section RSPF the scale of 10mm.
Operation/Procedure B L5 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
0.1mm unit) from the back
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch surface image lead edge to
panel. the scale of 10mm.
2) Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0. C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
3) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and make a copy in the (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
RSPF duplex mode. D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) loss amount setting
4) Measure the size of the printed image. Enter the actual mea-
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 30
surement value of distance a (RSPF) to L4 and L5 in the unit of (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
0.1mm. F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
(Adjustment value "1" for 0.1mm) (SIDE2) image loss amount setting
L4: Distance a (RSPF front surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm) G FRONT_REAR Back surface side image 0 - 99 20
L5: Distance a (RSPF back surface: 200%) (unit: 0.1mm) (SIDE2) loss amount setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 30
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss

is increased.
Items C - H are linked with items C - H of SIM50-06.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)&$/&
$ /
$ % /
& /($'B('*(6,'(
' )5217B5($56,'(

( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
) /($'B('*(6,'(
* )5217B5($56,'(
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'(
Distance "a"
(;(&87(
50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range NOTE
value
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 100 Adjustment Item List
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value 1 - 99 50
(Manual paper feed)
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 50
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment value 1 - 99 50
(Large capacity tray)
Default
value
H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (Duplex) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment Item List
(NOTE) If the adjustment items A - G are
not properly adjusted, this adjustment
cannot be executed properly.
I SUB-MFT Resist motor ON Manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
J SUB-CS12 timing adjustment Standard cassette 1 - 99 50
K SUB-CS34 DESK 1 - 99 50
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
P DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is
decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
Item B - H: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*
$
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6

' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
- 68%&6
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
50-12

Purpose Adjustment 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center $ 2&
position adjustment. (The adjustment is $ % 63)6,'(
made separately for each scan mode.) & 63)6,'(
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 2.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is

shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
Setting Default
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
50-20
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Main scan-
ning direction) (Manual adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Default
value
A CYAN (FRONT) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Cyan) 1 - 199 100 Adjustment Item
(F side) List
B CYAN (REAR) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Cyan) 1 - 199 100
(R side)
C MAGENTA (FRONT) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Magenta) 1 - 199 100
(F side)
D MAGENTA (REAR) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Magenta) 1 - 199 100
(R side)
E YELLOW (FRONT) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Yellow) 1 - 199 100
(F side)
F YELLOW (REAR) Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning direction) (Yellow) 1 - 199 100
(R side)
H PAPER MFT Tray selection 1 Manual 3 Adjustment
paper feed pattern print
CS1 2 Tray 1 conditions setting
CS2 3 Tray 2
CS3 4 Tray 3
CS4 5 Tray 4
LCC 6 LCC
I DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection 0 Select 1
NO 1 Not select

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21
$ &<$1)5217
$ % &<$15($5 50-21
& 0$*(17$)5217
Purpose Adjustment
' 0$*(17$5($5
( <(//2:)5217 Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Sub scan-
) <(//2:5($5
* 08/7,&2817
ning direction) (Manual adjustment)
+ 3$3(5&6 Section
, '83/(;12
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87( 2.
panel.
Default
value
A CYAN Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Cyan) 1 - 199 100 Adjustment Item
B MAGENTA Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Magenta) 1 - 199 100 List
C YELLOW Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning direction) (Yellow) 1 - 199 100
D MULTICOUNT Number of print 1 Adjustment
E PAPER MFT Tray selection 1 Manual 2 pattern print
paper feed conditions
CS1 2 Tray 1 setting
CS2 3 Tray 2
CS3 4 Tray 3
CS4 5 Tray 4
LCC 6 LCC
F DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection 0 Yes 1
NO 1 No

50-22
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(176&$11,1*',5(&7,21
&/26(
Purpose Adjustment
$
$ &<$1
% 0$*(17$
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main
& <(//2: scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto
' 08/7,&2817 adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
( 3$3(5&6
) '83/(;12
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with [REGIST] or [DRUM POS]
or [ALL] key.
(;(&87( 2.
ALL The image resist adjustment (in the main scanning

direction and the sub scanning direction) and the OPC
drum phase adjustment are automatically performed.
REGIST The image resist adjustment (in the main scanning
direction and the sub scanning direction) is automatically
performed.
DRUM POS The OPC drum phase adjustment (automatic adjustment)
is automatically performed.

The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjust-
ment data are displayed.
NOTE: The contents of the following list are mainly used by the
technical division, and are not necessary for the market.
Default
Item/Display Content Display NOTE
value
ALL REGIST MAIN F C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
Image (Auto image direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is F side) 199.0
registration registration M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
adjustment/ adjustment) direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is F side) 199.0
OPC drum Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
phase direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is F side) 199.0
adjustment MAIN R C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is R side) 199.0
M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is R side) 199.0
Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is R side) 199.0
SUB C Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Cyan drum to black drum) 199.0
M Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Magenta drum to cyan drum) 199.0
Y Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Yellow drum to magenta drum) 199.0
SKEW C Calculated result of print skew amount (Cyan) -99.9 - - If the value is plus, R is
99.9 displayed to left side of
M Calculated result of print skew amount (magenta) -99.9 - - numerical value. If the
99.9 value is minus, L is
Y Calculated result of print skew amount (yellow) -99.9 - - displayed to left side of
99.9 numerical value.
When the value is -4 -
+4, "(OK)" is place at
the back of the value.
For the other cases,
"(NG)" is displayed. *1
DRUM POS PHASE Phase Angle step 1-8 2 Same item as SIM44-
(Auto OPC adjustment 0(1) 45(2) 90(3) 135(4) 180(5) 225(6) 31.
drum phase value BK 270(7) 315(8)
adjustment) CL
*1: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the value.
When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the value.
At that time, the values under the decimal point are rounded.
<Error displays in case of abnormal end > Error
Error display Error content Description
Error code
Error display Error content Description Sub 31 SUB Pitch error sub The pitch data are
code
Forcible - SUSPENDED Door open end Door open during scanning MAGENTA scanning color not within the
end error operation adjust- FRONT 31 (Magenta) F allowable range.
ment 32 SUB Adjustment The calculation
- SUSPENDED CA end CA button pressed
error MAGENTA value number result value is not
during operation
FRONT 32 error sub within the
- - OFF end Unconfirmed
scanning color allowable range.
operation during
(Magenta) F
operation
(Power OFF) 33 SUB Result value The variation in the
MAGENTA error sub calculation result
Basic 1 TONNER Toner Empty BK or ALL Color
FRONT 33 scanning color value is above the
error EMPTY 01 toner EMPTY
(Magenta) F allowable range.
detection
35 SUB Number of The pitch data
2 BEFORE Other Other condition
MAGENTA lines error sub number are not the
BEHAVIOR condition
REAR 35 scanning color specified value.
02
(Magenta) R
4 SENSOR Calibration The target is not
36 SUB Pitch error sub The pitch data are
CALIBRATIO error reached by 3 times
MAGENTA scanning color not within the
N 04 of retry of F or R
REAR 36 (Magenta) R allowable range.
5 TIME OVER Time error No data are
37 SUB Adjustment The calculation
05 obtained for 90sec
MAGENTA value number result value is not
from data
REAR 37 error sub within the
acquisition
7 PROCESS Process Process control
(Magenta) R
CONTROL 07 control error error detection
38 SUB Result value The variation in the
Sub 10 SUB BLACK Number of line The pitch data
MAGENTA error sub calculation result
scanning FRONT 10 error sub number are not the
REAR 38 scanning color value is above the
adjust- scanning color specified value.
(Magenta) R allowable range.
ment (Black) F
error 11 SUB BLACK Pitch error sub The pitch data are
YELLOW lines error sub number are not the
FRONT 11 scanning color not within the
FRONT 40 scanning color specified value.
(Black) F allowable range.
(Yellow) F
15 SUB BLACK Number of line The pitch data are
REAR 15 error sub not within the
YELLOW scanning color not within the
scanning color specified range.
FRONT 41 (Yellow) F allowable range.
(Black) R
16 SUB BLACK Pitch error sub The pitch data are
YELLOW value number result value is not
REAR 16 scanning color not within the
FRONT 42 error sub within the
(Black) R allowable range.
20 SUB CYAN Number of line The pitch data (Yellow) F
FRONT 20 error sub number are not the
scanning color specified value.
YELLOW error sub calculation result
(Cyan) F
21 SUB CYAN Pitch error sub The pitch data are (Yellow) F allowable range.
FRONT 21 scanning color not within the
(Cyan) F allowable range.
YELLOW lines error sub number are not the
22 SUB CYAN Adjustment The calculation REAR 45 scanning color specified value.
FRONT 22 value number result value is not (Yellow) R
error sub within the
YELLOW scanning color not within the
(Cyan) F
REAR 46 (Yellow) R allowable range.
23 SUB CYAN Result value The variation in the
FRONT 23 error sub calculation result
YELLOW value number result value is not
scanning color value is above the
REAR 47 error sub within the
(Cyan) F allowable range.
25 SUB CYAN Number of The pitch data (Yellow) R
REAR 25 lines error sub number are not the
scanning color specified value.
YELLOW error sub calculation result
(Cyan) R
REAR 48 scanning color value is above the
26 SUB CYAN Pitch error sub The pitch data are (Yellow) R allowable range.
REAR 26 scanning color not within the
(Cyan) R allowable range.
27 SUB CYAN Adjustment The calculation
REAR 27 value number result value is not
error sub within the
(Cyan) R
28 SUB CYAN Result value The variation in the
REAR 28 error sub calculation result
scanning color value is above the
(Cyan) R allowable range.
MAGENTA lines error sub number are not the
FRONT 30 scanning color specified value.
(Magenta) F
Error Error
Error display Error content Description Error display Error content Description
code code
Main 50 MAIN BLACK Number of The pitch data Main 77 MAIN Adjustment The calculation
scanning FRONT 50 lines error number are not the scanning MAGENTA value error result value is not
adjustme main scanning specified value. adjustme REAR 77 main scanning within the
nt error color (Black) F nt error color allowable range.
51 MAIN BLACK Pitch error The pitch data are (Magenta) R
FRONT 51 main scanning not within the 78 MAIN Result value The variation in the
color (Black) F allowable range. MAGENTA error main calculation result
55 MAIN BLACK Number of The pitch data are REAR 78 scanning color value is above the
REAR 55 lines error not within the (Magenta) R allowable range.
main scanning specified range. 80 MAIN Number of The pitch data
color (Black) R YELLOW lines error number are not the
56 MAIN BLACK Pitch error The pitch data are FRONT 80 main scanning specified value.
REAR 56 main scanning not within the color (Yellow)
color (Black) R allowable range. F
60 MAIN CYAN Number of The pitch data 81 MAIN Pitch error The pitch data are
FRONT 60 lines error number are not the YELLOW main scanning not within the
main scanning specified value. FRONT 81 color (Yellow) allowable range.
color (Cyan) F F
61 MAIN CYAN Pitch error The pitch data are 82 MAIN Adjustment The calculation
FRONT 61 main scanning not within the YELLOW value error result value is not
color (Cyan) F allowable range. FRONT 82 main scanning within the
62 MAIN CYAN Adjustment The calculation color (Yellow) allowable range.
FRONT 62 value number result value is not F
error main within the 83 MAIN Result value The variation in the
scanning color allowable range. YELLOW error main calculation result
(Cyan) F FRONT 83 scanning color value is above the
63 MAIN CYAN Result value The variation in the (Yellow) F allowable range.
FRONT 63 error main calculation result 85 MAIN Number of The pitch data
scanning color value is above the YELLOW lines error number are not the
(Cyan) F allowable range. REAR 85 main scanning specified value.
65 MAIN CYAN Number of The pitch data color (Yellow)
REAR 65 lines error number are not the R
main scanning specified value. 86 MAIN Pitch error The pitch data are
color (Cyan) R YELLOW main scanning not within the
66 MAIN CYAN Pitch error The pitch data are REAR 86 color (Yellow) allowable range.
REAR 66 main scanning not within the R
color (Cyan) R allowable range. 87 MAIN Adjustment The calculation
67 MAIN CYAN Adjustment The calculation YELLOW value error result value is not
REAR 67 value error result value is not REAR 87 main scanning within the
main scanning within the color (Yellow) allowable range.
color (Cyan) R allowable range. R
68 MAIN CYAN Result value The variation in the 88 MAIN Result value The variation in the
REAR 68 error main calculation result YELLOW error main calculation result
scanning color value is above the REAR 88 scanning color value is above the
(Cyan) R allowable range. (Yellow) R allowable range.
70 MAIN Number of The pitch data Others 99 OTHER 99 Other errors Other errors
MAGENTA lines error number are not the
FRONT 70 main scanning specified value.
color

6,08/$7,2112
(Magenta) F 7(67
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
&/26(
71 MAIN Pitch error The pitch data are 0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
MAGENTA main scanning not within the &/1*
0/1*
FRONT 71 color allowable range. </1*
(Magenta) F 3+$6(
72 MAIN Adjustment The calculation
MAGENTA value number result value is not

FRONT 72 error main within the
(Magenta) F
73 MAIN Result value The variation in the
MAGENTA error main calculation result 5(*,67 '580326 $// (;(&87(

(Magenta) F allowable range.
75 MAIN Number of The pitch data
MAGENTA lines error number are not the
REAR 75 main scanning specified value.
color
(Magenta) R
76 MAIN Pitch error The pitch data are
MAGENTA main scanning not within the
REAR 76 color allowable range.
(Magenta) R
Item
50-24 Setting Related
classific Display Item content
range SIM
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the ation
market.) Phase PHASE_ADJ Phase 1-8 50-22
adjust- adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, ment (1: This time
50-20, 21 and 22. status value,
Section check 2: Previous
time value)
Operation/Procedure
PHASE_STATE Phase state 1-8 50-22
NOTE: This simulation is mainly used by the technical division, and (1: This time
is not necessary for the market. value,
2: Previous
Item time value)
Setting Related
classific Display Item content PHASE_LEVEL Phase 0-99.9 50-22
range SIM
ation deflection level (0.1 unit)
Regist- REG_EXE_CNT Number of 0 - 99999999 50-22 (before
ration executions of weighting)
adjust- the registration PHASE Phase 0-99.9 50-22
ment adjustment _WEIGHT deflection level (0.1 unit)
status (Auto (after
check execution) weighting)
REG_SUC_CNT Number of 0 - 99999999 50-22 (1: This time
success of the value,
registration 2: Previous
adjustment time value)
(Auto Sensor REG_LED (F) Registration 1 - 255 44-02,
execution) calibra- sensor current 70-11,
REG_CNT Registration 0 - 99999999 - tion light emitting 50-22
adjustment status value F
registration check REG_LED (R) Registration 1 - 255 44-02,
counter sensor current 70-11,
REG_M_F Calculated 1.0 - 199.0 50-22 light emitting 50-22
(VALUE) correction (0.1 unit) value R
amount in the REG_V (F) Registration 0 - 255 44-02,
main scan sensor current 70-11,
direction F in light receiving 50-22
the auto value F
registration REG_V (R) Registration 0 - 255 44-02,
adjustment sensor current 70-11,
REG_M_R Calculated 1.0 - 199.0 50-22 light receiving 50-22
(VALUE) correction (0.1 unit) value R
amount in the REG_DARK (F) Registration 0 - 255 44-02,
main scan sensor dark 70-11,
direction R in potential F 50-22
the auto REG_DARK (R) Registration 0 - 255 44-02,
registration sensor dark 70-11,
adjustment potential R 50-22
REG_SUB Calculated 1.0 - 199.0 50-22 Sampling START_SUB Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22
(VALUE) correction (0.1 unit) status (F)_U value Sub scan 300.00
amount in the check (1) F (Rising) (0.01 unit)
sub scan
START_SUB Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22
direction in the
(F)_D value Sub scan 300.00
automatic
F (Falling) (0.01 unit)
registration
adjustment
(R)_U value Sub scan 300.00
REG_M_F (DIF) Registration -199.0 - 50-20,
R (Rising) (0.01 unit)
value 199.0 (0.1 22
correction unit)
(R)_D value Sub scan 300.00
amount from
R (Falling) (0.01 unit)
the previous
time, main START_MAIN Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22
scan F (F)_U value Main 300.00
scan F (Rising) (0.01 unit)
REG_M_R (DIF) Registration -199.0 - 50-20,
value 199.0 (0.1 22 START_MAIN Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22
correction unit) (F)_D value Main 300.00
amount from scan F (Falling) (0.01 unit)
the previous START_MAIN Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22
time, main (R)_U value Main 300.00
scan R scan R (Rising) (0.01 unit)
REG_SUB (DIF) Registration -199.0 - 50-21, START_MAIN Sampling start -300.00 - 50-22
value 199.0 (0.1 22 (R)_D value Main 300.00
correction unit) scan R (0.01 unit)
amount from (Falling)
the previous STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22
time, sub scan _SUB (F)_U reference pitch (0.01unit)
Sub scan F
(Rising)
Item Item
Setting Related Setting Related
classific Display Item content classific Display Item content
range SIM range SIM
ation ation
Sampling STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 Sampling TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22
status _SUB (F)_D reference pitch (0.01unit) status _MAIN (R)_D reference pitch (0.01unit)
check (1) Sub scan F check (1) all-color
(Falling) average value
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 Main scan R
_SUB (R)_U reference pitch (0.01unit) (Falling)
Sub scan R Sampling LINEAR_SUB Sampling -100.00- 50-22
(Rising) status _F_U linearity Sub 100.00
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 check (2) scan F (Rising) (0.01unit)
_SUB (R)_D reference pitch (0.01unit) LINEAR_SUB Sampling -100.00- 50-22
Sub scan R _F_D linearity Sub 100.00
(Falling) scan F (Falling) (0.01unit)
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 LINEAR_SUB Sampling -100.00- 50-22
_MAIN (F)_U reference pitch (0.01unit) _R_U linearity Sub 100.00
Main scan F scan R (Rising) (0.01unit)
(Rising) LINEAR_SUB Sampling -100.00- 50-22
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 _R_D linearity Sub 100.00
_MAIN (F)_D reference pitch (0.01unit) scan R (0.01unit)
Main scan F (Falling)
(Falling) LINEAR_MAIN Sampling -100.00- 50-22
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 _F_U linearity Main 100.00
_MAIN (R)_U reference pitch (0.01unit) scan F (Rising) (0.01unit)
Main scan R LINEAR_MAIN Sampling -100.00- 50-22
(Rising) _F_D linearity Main 100.00
STD_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 scan F (Falling) (0.01unit)
_MAIN (R)_D reference pitch (0.01unit) LINEAR_MAIN Sampling -100.00- 50-22
Main scan R _R_U linearity Main 100.00
(Falling) scan R (Rising) (0.01unit)
TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 LINEAR_MAIN Sampling -100.00- 50-22
_SUB (F)_U reference pitch (0.01unit) _R_D linearity Main 100.00
all-color scan R (0.01unit)
average value (Falling)
Sub scan F Sampling PITCH_SUB_F Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
(Rising) status _U calculation (0.01unit)
TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 check (3) value Sub scan
_SUB (F)_D reference pitch (0.01unit) F (Rising)
all-color PITCH_SUB_F Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
average value _D calculation (0.01unit)
Sub scan F value Sub scan
(Falling) F (Falling)
TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 PITCH_SUB_R Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
_SUB (R)_U reference pitch (0.01unit) _U calculation (0.01unit)
all-color value Sub scan
average value R (Rising)
Sub scan R PITCH_SUB_R Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
(Rising) _D calculation (0.01unit)
TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 value Sub scan
_SUB (R)_D reference pitch (0.01unit) R (Falling)
all-color PITCH_MAIN_F Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
average value _U calculation (0.01unit)
Sub scan R value Main
(Falling) scan F (Rising)
TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 PITCH_MAIN_F Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
_MAIN (F)_U reference pitch (0.01unit) _D calculation (0.01unit)
all-color value Main
average value scan F (Falling)
Main scan F
PITCH_MAIN_R Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
(Rising)
_U calculation (0.01unit)
TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 value Main
_MAIN (F)_D reference pitch (0.01unit) scan R (Rising)
all-color
PITCH_MAIN_R Sampling pitch -50.00-50.00 50-22
average value
_D calculation (0.01unit)
Main scan F
value Main
(Falling)
scan R
TOTAL_PITCH Sampling -50.00-50.00 50-22 (Falling)
_MAIN (R)_U reference pitch (0.01unit)
Sampling ADJ_LINEAR Sampling -100.00 - 50-22
all-color
status linearity after 100.00
average value
check (4) correction (0.01unit)
Main scan R
(Rising)
Item Item
range SIM range SIM
ation ation
Sampling LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22 Sampling VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(1unit) 50-22
status _S_F_U linearity 100.00 status _MAX_S_F_U linearity
check (5) average value (0.01unit) check (7) difference in
Sub scan F the effective
(Rising) line after
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22 removing the
_S_F_D linearity 100.00 sampling noise
average value (0.01unit) Line No. at
Sub scan F MAX Sub
(Falling) scanning F
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22 (Rising)
_S_R_U linearity 100.00 VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(1unit) 50-22
average value (0.01unit) _MAX_S_F_D linearity
Sub scan R difference in
(Rising) the effective
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22 line after
_S_R_D linearity 100.00 removing the
average value (0.01unit) sampling noise
Sub scan R Line No. at
(Falling) MAX Sub
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22 scanning F
_M_F_U linearity 100.00 (Falling)
average value (0.01unit) VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(1unit) 50-22
Main scan F _MAX_S_R_U linearity
(Rising) difference in
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22 the effective
_M_F_D linearity 100.00 line after
average value (0.01unit) removing the
Main scan F sampling noise
(Falling) Line No. at
MAX Sub
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22
scanning R
_M_R_U linearity 100.00
(Rising)
average value (0.01unit)
Main scan R VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(1unit) 50-22
(Rising) _MAX_S_R_D linearity
difference in
LINEAR_AVE Sampling -100.00- 50-22
the effective
_M_R_D linearity 100.00
line after
average value (0.01unit)
removing the
Main scan R
sampling noise
(Falling)
Line No. at
Sampling NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(1unit) 50-22
MAX Sub
status _S_F_U removal line
scanning R
check (6) number Sub
(Falling)
scan F (Rising)
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(1unit) 50-22
NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(1unit) 50-22
_MAX_M_F_U linearity
_S_F_D removal line
difference in
number Sub
the effective
scan F (Falling)
line after
NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(1unit) 50-22 removing the
_S_R_U removal line sampling noise
number Sub Line No. at
scan R (Rising) MAX Main
NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(1unit) 50-22 scanning F
_S_R_D removal line (Rising)
number Sub VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(1unit) 50-22
scan R _MAX_M_F_D linearity
(Falling) difference in
NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(1unit) 50-22 the effective
_M_F_U removal line line after
number Main removing the
scan F (Rising) sampling noise
NOISE_LINE Sampling noise 1-17(1unit) 50-22 Line No. at
_M_F_D removal line MAX Main
number Main scanning F
scan F (Falling) (Falling)
_M_R_U removal line
number Main
scan R (Rising)
_M_R_D removal line
number Main
scan R
(Falling)
Item Item
range SIM range SIM
ation ation
Sampling VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(1unit) 50-22 Sampling VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(1unit) 50-22
status _MAX_M_R_U linearity status _MIN_M_F_D linearity
check (7) difference in check (7) difference in
the effective the effective
line after line after
removing the removing the
sampling noise sampling noise
Line No. at Line No. at MIN
MAX Main Main scanning
scanning R F (Falling)
(Rising) VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(1unit) 50-22
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(1unit) 50-22 _MIN_M_R_U linearity
_MAX_M_R_D linearity difference in
difference in the effective
the effective line after
line after removing the
removing the sampling noise
sampling noise Line No. at MIN
Line No. at Main scanning
MAX Main R (Rising)
scanning R VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(1unit) 50-22
(Falling) _MIN_M_R_D linearity
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(1unit) 50-22 difference in
_MIN_S_F_U linearity the effective
difference in line after
the effective removing the
line after sampling noise
removing the Line No. at MIN
sampling noise Main scanning
Line No. at MIN R (Falling)
Sub scanning Tempera TEMP_ADJ_M1 Temperature -99.9-99.9 -
F (Rising) -ture correction (0.1unit)
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(1unit) 50-22 correc- value in the
_MIN_S_F_D linearity tion value previous print
difference in check Main scan
the effective writing
line after TEMP_ADJ_M2 Temperature -99.9-99.9 -
removing the correction (0.1unit)
sampling noise value in the
Line No. at MIN previous print
Sub scanning Main scan
F (Falling) magnification
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(1unit) 50-22 ratio
_MIN_S_R_U linearity TEMP_ADJ Temperature -99.9-99.9 -
difference in _SUB correction (0.1unit)
the effective value in the
line after previous print
removing the Sub scan
sampling noise Tempera TEMP_BACK Temperature in 5.0-60.0 -
Line No. at MIN -ture _TH1 the previous (0.1C)
Sub scanning check print
R (Rising) (Thermister 1)
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-17(1unit) 50-22 TEMP_BACK Temperature in 5.0-60.0 -
_MIN_S_R_D linearity _TH2 the previous (0.1C)
difference in print
the effective (Thermister 2)
line after TEMP_TH1_F Reference 5.0-60.0 50-20,
removing the _HISTORY temperature (0.1C) 21, 22
sampling noise (Thermister 1)
Line No. at MIN F
Sub scanning
TEMP_TH1_R Reference 5.0-60.0 50-20,
R (Falling)
_HISTORY temperature (0.1C) 21, 22
VALID_LINE Adjacent data 1-16(1unit) 50-22 (Thermister 1)
_MIN_M_F_U linearity R
difference in
TEMP_TH2_F Reference 5.0-60.0 50-20,
the effective
_HISTORY temperature (0.1C) 21, 22
line after
(Thermister 2)
removing the
F
sampling noise
TEMP_TH2_R_ Reference 5.0-60.0 50-20,
Line No. at MIN
HISTORY temperature (0.1C) 21, 22
Main scanning
(Thermister 2)
F (Rising)
R
Error ERROR Error record - 50-22
record HISTORY status check
status
check
Setting Default

range value
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( FAX G Image LEAD_EDGE Back 0 - 100 20
$8725(*,675$7,21'$7$',63/$<
5(*B(;(B&17
send loss (SPF_SIDE2) surface (2mm)
5(*B68&B&17
amount lead edge
5(*B&17 setting image loss
SPF amount
SIDE2 setting
H FRONT Back 0 - 100 20
_REAR surface (2mm)
(SPF_SIDE2) side image
loss
amount
setting
1(;7
. & 0 < %$&.
I TRAIL_EDGE Back 0 - 100 30
(SPF_SIDE2) surface (3mm)
rear edge
50-27 image loss
Purpose Adjustment amount
setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
When A Image LEAD_EDGE OC lead 0 - 100 0
of scanned images in the FAX or image image loss (OC) edge (0mm)
send mode. send amount image loss
Section mode setting amount
(Except OC setting
Operation/Procedure
for FAX B FRONT OC side 0 - 100 0
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER] and _REAR(OC) image loss (0mm)
key. copy) amount
2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch setting
panel. C TRAIL_EDGE OC rear 0 - 100 0
(OC) edge (0mm)
image loss
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) amount
setting
Setting Default D Image LEAD_EDGE Front 0 - 100 0
range value loss (SPF_SIDE1) surface (0mm)
FAX A Image LEAD_EDGE OC lead 0 - 100 30 amount lead edge
send loss (OC) edge (3mm) setting image loss
amount image loss SPF amount
setting amount SIDE1 setting
OC setting E FRONT Front 0 - 100 0
B FRONT OC side 0 - 100 20 _REAR surface (0mm)
_REAR (OC) image loss (2mm) (SPF_SIDE1) side image
amount loss
setting amount
C TRAIL_EDGE OC rear 0 - 100 20 setting
(OC) edge (2mm) F TRAIL_EDGE Front 0 - 100 0
image loss (SPF_SIDE1) surface (0mm)
amount rear edge
setting image loss
D Image LEAD_EDGE Front 0 - 100 20 amount
loss (SPF_SIDE1) surface (2mm) setting
amount lead edge G Image LEAD_EDGE Back 0 - 100 0
setting image loss loss (SPF_SIDE2) surface (0mm)
SPF amount amount lead edge
SIDE1 setting setting image loss
E FRONT Front 0 - 100 20 SPF amount
_REAR surface (2mm) SIDE2 setting
(SPF_SIDE1) side image H FRONT Back 0 - 100 0
loss _REAR surface (0mm)
amount (SPF_SIDE2) side image
setting loss
F TRAIL_EDGE Front 0 - 100 30 amount
(SPF_SIDE1) surface (3mm) setting
rear edge I TRAIL_EDGE Back 0 - 100 0
image loss (SPF_SIDE2) surface (0mm)
amount rear edge
setting image loss
amount
setting
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is

increased.
1step = 0.1mm

(3) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image magnification
ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
1) Select [SPF ADJ] on the touch panel.
6&$11(5)$;6(1'$//('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ /($'B('*(2& 2) Select the adjustment mode; SIDE 1(Front surface) or SIDE
$ % )5217B5($52&
2(Back surface) or ALL(Both modes).
& 75$,/B('*(2&
' /($'B('*(63)B6,'( 3) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
( )5217B5($563)B6,'(
print.
) 75$,/B('*(63)B6,'(
* /($'B('*(63)B6,'( 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is
+ )5217B5($563)B6,'(
printed.
, 75$,/B('*(63)B6,'(
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the RSPF.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is
)$; 6&$11(5 2. scanned.
When ALL is selected in the procedure 2), perform proce-
dures 5) and 6) for both of the front surface and the back
50-28
surface.
Purpose Adjustment 7) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image (4) Print lead edge adjustment image off-center (Each paper feed
loss, void area, image off-center, and tray, duplex mode) adjustment
image magnification ratio.
1) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] on the touch panel.
Section 2) Select the adjustment mode; LEAD (print lead edge adjust-
Operation/Procedure ment) or OFF SET (image off-center) or ALL (both modes).
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with 3) Select the paper feed tray for the adjustment pattern print.
SIM50-28. (Two or more trays can be selected.)
* ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) printed.
* ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
* ADJ 14/15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment 6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is
* ADJ 16 scan image off-center adjustment scanned.
* ADJ 17 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section) When two or more paper feed trays are selected in the pro-
* ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment cedure 3), perform procedures 5) and 6) for the adjustment
pattern printed with each paper.
Item/Display Content 7) Press [OK] key.
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction RESCAN: The adjustment pattern is scanned.
image magnification ratio adjustment
(Document table mode) REPRINT: The adjustment pattern is printed again.
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification RETRY: Shifts to the top menu.
ratio adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction

image magnification ratio adjustment 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(RSPF mode) $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center

2&$'- %.0$*$'-
63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
(each paper feed tray, duplex mode) 5(68/7 '$7$
adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Adjustment operation data display
(1) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image magnification

ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
1) Select [OC ADJ] on the touch panel.
2) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
print.
printed.
scanned.
6) Press [OK] key.
(2) Main scan direction image magnification ration adjustment
1) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] on the touch panel.
2) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
print.
printed.
scanned.
6) Press [OK] key.

51
51-1 Default
Purpose Adjustment/Setup value
A TC2 ON Secondary transfer voltage ON timing 40
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
TIMING setting
secondary transport voltage.
B TC2 OFF Secondary transfer voltage OFF timing 60
Section TIMING setting
Operation/Procedure

panel. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 75$16&5,37,217,0,1*6(783

$ 7&217,0,1*
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) $ % 7&2))7,0,1*

When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
increased, the timing is delayed.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
2.
51-2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
the RSPF resist roller. (This adjustment is
performed when there is a considerable
variation in the print image position on the
paper or when paper jams frequently
occur.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
Setting Default
Mode Display/Item Content
range value
SIDE1 A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value
(Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN _HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN _LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
F RANDOM_THIN _LOW RSPF front surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)

Setting Default
Mode Display/Item Content
range value
SIDE2 A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value 1
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value 1
C NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_2 RSPF back surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value 2
D NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_2 RSPF back surface document deflection amount - 1 - 99 50
adjustment value 2
ENGINE A TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 40
adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40
adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size)
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 40
adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size)
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40
adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size)
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 40
adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size)
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40
adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size)
G TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 40
adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size)
H TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40
adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size)
I MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 40
(Plain paper/Small size)
J MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40
(Plain paper/Large size)
K MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 40
(Heavy paper/Small size)
L MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40
(Heavy paper/Large size)
M MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 40
N MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 40
(Envelope)
O ADU PLAIN PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 40
P ADU PLAIN PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40
Q ADU HEAVY PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 40
R ADU HEAVY PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40
S DESK(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 40
T DESK(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40
U DESK HEAVY PAPER(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (215mm) or less 1 - 99 40
V DESK HEAVY PAPER(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 40
W A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 40
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is

increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp

amount is decreased. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
5(*,6752//(5$'-8670(17
$ 1250$/B3/$,1B+,*+
$ % 1250$/B3/$,1B/2:
& 1250$/B7+,1B+,*+
' 1250$/B7+,1B/2:
( 5$1'20B3/$,1B/2:
) 5$1'20B7+,1B/2:
6,'( 6,'( (1*,1( 2.

2 : '09/Sep
53 6,08/$7,2112

7(67 &/26(
63)75<$'-8670(170$18$/
$ $'B0$;
53-6 $ % $'B3
Purpose Adjustment & $'B3
' $'B0,1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the
RSPF document width.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2.
The maximum width detection level is recognized.

3) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width. 53-8
Purpose Adjustment
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref-
5) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width. erence and the RSPF mode document
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. scan position.
The A5R width detection level is recognized. Section
7) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width. Operation/Procedure
8) Press [EXECUTE] key. Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
The minimum width detection level is recognized. <AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment>(Auto
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is adjustment)
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally, 1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
"COMPLETE" is displayed. table.
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value 2) Press [EXCUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
adjustment value is saved.)
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
Setting Default
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value Item/Display Content
range value
MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
7(67
63)75$<$'-8670(17 reference position
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
<MANUAL: RSPF mode document scan position adjustment>
Setting Default
range value
A ADJUST RSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 25 2
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
(;(&87(
stop position adjustment)
When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-

53-7 tion in the RSPF mode is shifted to the right.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
shifted by 0.1mm.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the RSPF document size
width sensor.

Section 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure 63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
$872 0$18$/

panel.
Setting Default
Item/Display
range value
A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 72
B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 499
C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 805

D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 955

55 56
55-1 56-1
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially Purpose Backup
required.) Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
control operations. (SOFT SW) PWB.)
Section Section
1) Select a target content of data transfer.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
(1*,1(62)76:6(77,1*
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
6:1R 6:1R
'$7$ When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is

displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
ALL HDD All the memory contents are transferred to the

HDD.
HDD ALL The HDD contents are transferred to all the
memories.
EEPROM HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
HDD EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
(;(&87( SRAM HDD Data transfer from SRAM to HDD.
(Including the FAX memory)
When the FAX memory or an option memory
55-2 (memory for FAX) is installed, the contents in
the memory for FAX are also transferred to
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially HDD.
required.) HDD SRAM Transfer from HDD to SRAM
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan- (including the FAX memory)
ner control operation. (SOFT SW) When the FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents of
Section the FAX memory are also transferred to HDD.
Operation/Procedure

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(562)76:6(77,1* &23<'$7$
6:1R 6:1R $//+'' (1$%/(
'$7$ +''$// ',6$%/(
((3520+'' ',6$%/(
+''((3520 ',6$%/(
65$0+'' ',6$%/(
+''65$0 ',6$%/(
(;(&87( $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
55-3
56-2
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.) Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control- Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.
ler operation. (SOFT SW) SRAM, and HDD (including user authenti-
cation data and address data) to the USB
Section memory. (Corresponding to the device
Operation/Procedure cloning and the storage backup.)
Section

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Operation/Procedure
0)362)76:6(77,1*
6:1R 6:1R
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
'$7$ 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.

<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, ESRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
(;(&87(

(Machine with the DSK installed)
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. 56-3
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. Purpose Data backup
<IMPORT> Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SRAM, HDD the USB memory.
<EXPORT> Section
From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE Operation/Procedure
3) Enter the password with 10 key. 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
4) Press [SET] key. 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. <IMPORT>
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is <EXPORT>
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY DEVICE
<Data list outside the backup targets> 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
(EEPROM/SRAM) Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
PWB Type Content NOTE
Controller Machine serial No.
Product key information
Various counter Copy counter/FAX

6,08/$7,2112
send counter etc. 7(67 &/26(
(;3257,03257'2&80(17),/,1*'$7$
Trouble history '2&),/(;3257 '2&),/,03257
PCU Machine serial No.

Various counter Maintenance counter
Machine adjustment execute
history
Trouble history
SCU Various counter Maintenance counter
Trouble history
(HDD)

Classifi-
Content NOTE
cation
56-4
Japanese User dictionary
FEP Purpose Data backup
Job end list Job end list display data Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
(The image send series include
USB memory.
the preserved job list.)
Log Job log Read from WEB is Section
enable. Operation/Procedure
New N/A Print history information 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
JAM history information
Trouble history information 2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key.
Same position continuous jam 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
count value Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
Charging information
Life information When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Operation E-manual displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
manual

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;3257-2%/2*'$7$

6,08/$7,2112 -2%/2*(;3257
7(67 &/26(
(;3257,03257),/,1*'$7$
+''(;3257 +'',03257
((352065$0(;3257 ((352065$0,03257


60 60-2
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the
60-1 market.)
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to set the MFP PWB onboard
SDRAM.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write)
of the MFP PWB image memory (SDRAM). Section
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Start the test.
3) Press [OK] key.
Result display Description NOTE: Set to the default value.
OK Success
NG Fail Setting Default
NG Fail range value
(NOT SLOT4) When fail SLOT4 (Standard) is not installed and SLOT3 A SETTING DISABLE SDRAM DDR 0-1 0 0
(Option) is installed. ENABLE setting setting
NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble) change of
DISABLE Error at SLOT2 flag Onboard
SPD
ENABLE DDR 1
SLOT Description setting
SLOT1 System memory (expansion) of B or
SLOT2 System memory (standard) later
SLOT3 Local memory (image memory) (MFP expansion) B NUMBER 11BIT ROW address 0-2 0 2
SLOT4 Local memory (image memory) (MFP standard) OF ROW 12BIT width 1
SLOT5 Not used. 13BIT 2
SLOT6 Not used. C NUMBER 8BIT COLUMN address 0-4 0 2
SLOT7 Not used. OF 9BIT width 1
SLOT8 Not used. COLUMN 10BIT 2
11BIT 3
12BIT 4
D TWR 2CLOCK TWR set value 0-3 0 1
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( SETTING 3CLOCK 1
6'5$05($':5,7(7(67
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 VALUE 4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
E TRAS 4CLOCK TRAS set value 0-3 0 2
SETTING 5CLOCK 1
VALUE 6CLOCK 2
7CLOCK 3
F TRC 6CLOCK TRC set value 0-4 0 3
SETTING 7CLOCK 1
VALUE 8CLOCK 2
9CLOCK 3
(;(&87(
10CLOCK 4
G TRCD 2CLOCK TRCD set value 0-3 0 1
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
H TRP 2CLOCK TRP set value 0-3 0 1
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
I TFRC 7CLOCK TFRC set value 0- 0 3
SETTING 8CLOCK 13 1
VALUE - -
20CLOCK 1
3
J CAS CL=2 CAS latency 0-2 0 1
LATENC CL=2.5 1
Y CL=3 2
K TOTAL NONE Onboard DDR total 0-2 0 1
NUMBER 128M capacity 1
OF BYTE
MBYTES 256M 2
ON BYTE
BOARD
DDR

Setting Default When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
Item/Display Content increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
range value
L NUMBER NONE Onboard DDR bunk 0-2 0 1 line images are increased.
OF ON 1CHIP number 1 <26/31 ppm models>
BOARD- SELECT
DDR 2CHIP 2 Set- De- Desti-
CS-BANK SELECT Mode Item/Display Content ting fault nation
range value linkage
COPY A LASER Used to set the 0- 110

POWER laser power 255
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( MIDDLE (Middle speed/
6'5$06(77,1* (K1) K1)
$ 6(77,1*(1$%/(',6$%/(
$ B LASER Used to set the 0- 110
% 180%(52)52:%,7
& 180%(52)&2/801%,7

' 7:56(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. MIDDLE (Middle speed/
( 75$66(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. (K2) K2)
) 75&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
C LASER Used to set the 0- 120
* 75&'6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
+ 7536(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
, 7)5&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
MIDDLE (Middle speed/
- &$6/$7(1&<&/
(C1) C1)
. 727$/180%(52)0%<7(621%2$5'''50%<7( D LASER Used to set the 0- 120
/ 180%(52)21%2$5'''5&6%$1.&+,36(/(&7 POWER laser power 255
2. MIDDLE (Middle speed/
(C2) C2)
E LASER Used to set the 0- 110
61 MIDDLE (Middle speed/
(M1) M1)
F LASER Used to set the 0- 110
61-1 POWER laser power 255
Purpose Operation test/check MIDDLE (Middle speed/
(M2) M2)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
G LASER Used to set the 0- 110
tion and laser detection.
Section LSU MIDDLE (Middle speed/
Operation/Procedure (Y1) Y1)
H LASER Used to set the 0- 110
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. POWER laser power 255
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed. MIDDLE (Middle speed/
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed. (Y2) Y2)
I LASER Used to set the 0- 110
Display Content POWER laser power 255
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality LOW (K1) (Low speed/
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K) K1)
LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL Laser light emitting abnormality J LASER Used to set the 0- 110
(C,M,Y) POWER laser power 255
LOW (K2) (Low speed/
K2)

K LASER Used to set the 0- 120
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/687(67
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 LOW (C1) (Low speed/
C1)
L LASER Used to set the 0- 120
LOW (C2) (Low speed/
C2)
M LASER Used to set the 0- 110
LOW (M1) (Low speed/
M1)
(;(&87(
N LASER Used to set the 0- 110
LOW (M2) (Low speed/
61-3 M2)
O LASER Used to set the 0- 110
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power LOW (Y1) (Low speed/
Y1)
Section
P LASER Used to set the 0- 110
Operation/Procedure POWER laser power 255
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY] , [PR600/ LOW (Y2) (Low speed/
FAX] and [PR1200] on the touch panel. Y2)
2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch Q LASER Used to set the 0- 110
panel.
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. (BW1) BW1)

Set- De- Desti- Set- De- Desti-
Mode Item/Display Content ting fault nation Mode Item/Display Content ting fault nation
range value linkage range value linkage
COPY R LASER Used to set the 0- 110 PR600/ H LASER Used to set the 0- 110
POWER laser power 255 FAX POWER laser power 255
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ MIDDLE (Middle speed/
(BW2) BW2) (Y2) Y2)
S LASER Used to set the 0- 110 I LASER Used to set the 0- 110
POWER laser power 255 POWER laser power 255
LOW (Low speed/ LOW (K1) (Low speed/
(BW1) BW1) K1)
T LASER Used to set the 0- 110 J LASER Used to set the 0- 110
POWER laser power 255 POWER laser power 255
LOW (Low speed/ LOW (K2) (Low speed/
(BW2) BW2) K2)
U LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { K LASER Used to set the 0- 120
DUTY select middle 255 POWER laser power 255
MIDDLE speed (K) LOW (C1) (Low speed/
(K) C1)
V LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { L LASER Used to set the 0- 120
MIDDLE speed (C) LOW (C2) (Low speed/
(C) C2)
W LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { M LASER Used to set the 0- 110
MIDDLE speed (M) LOW (M1) (Low speed/
(M) M1)
X LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { N LASER Used to set the 0- 110
MIDDLE speed (Y) LOW (M2) (Low speed/
(Y) M2)
Y LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { O LASER Used to set the 0- 110
DUTY select low 255 POWER laser power 255
LOW (K) speed (K) LOW (Y1) (Low speed/
Z LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { Y1)
DUTY select low 255 P LASER Used to set the 0- 110
LOW (C) speed (C) POWER laser power 255
AA LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { LOW (Y2) (Low speed/
DUTY select low 255 Y2)
LOW(M) speed (M) Q LASER Used to set the 0- 110
AB LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { POWER laser power 255
DUTY select low 255 MIDDLE (Middle speed/
LOW(Y) speed (Y) (BW1) BW1)
AC LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { R LASER Used to set the 0- 110
MIDDLE speed (BW) MIDDLE (Middle speed/
(BW) (BW2) BW2)
AD LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { S LASER Used to set the 0- 110
LOW (BW) speed (BW) LOW (Low speed/
PR600/ A LASER Used to set the 0- 110 (BW1) BW1)
FAX POWER laser power 255 T LASER Used to set the 0- 110
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ POWER laser power 255
(K1) K1) LOW (Low speed/
B LASER Used to set the 0- 110 (BW2) BW2)
POWER laser power 255 U LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ DUTY select middle 255
(K2) K2) MIDDLE speed (K)
C LASER Used to set the 0- 120 (K)
POWER laser power 255 V LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
(C1) C1) MIDDLE speed (C)
D LASER Used to set the 0- 120 (C)
POWER laser power 255 W LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
(C2) C2) MIDDLE speed (M)
E LASER Used to set the 0- 110 (M)
POWER laser power 255 X LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
(M1) M1) MIDDLE speed (Y)
F LASER Used to set the 0- 110 (Y)
(M2) M2)
G LASER Used to set the 0- 110
(Y1) Y1)

Set- De- Desti- Set- De- Desti-
Mode Item/Display Content ting fault nation Mode Item/Display Content ting fault nation
range value linkage range value linkage
PR600/ Y LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { PR1200 O LASER Used to set the 0- 110
FAX DUTY select low 255 POWER laser power 255
LOW (K) speed (K) LOW (Y1) (Low speed/
Z LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { Y1)
DUTY select low 255 P LASER Used to set the 0- 110
LOW (C) speed (C) POWER laser power 255
AA LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { LOW (Y2) (Low speed/
DUTY select low 255 Y2)
LOW (M) speed (M) Q LASER Used to set the 0- 110
AB LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { POWER laser power 255
DUTY select low 255 MIDDLE (Middle speed/
LOW (Y) speed (Y) (BW1) BW1)
AC LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { R LASER Used to set the 0- 110
MIDDLE speed (BW) MIDDLE (Middle speed/
(BW) (BW2) BW2)
AD LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { S LASER Used to set the 0- 110
LOW (BW) speed (BW) LOW (Low speed/
PR1200 A LASER Used to set the 0- 110 (BW1) BW1)
POWER laser power 255 T LASER Used to set the 0- 110
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ POWER laser power 255
(K1) K1) LOW (Low speed/
B LASER Used to set the 0- 110 (BW2) BW2)
POWER laser power 255 U LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0
(K2) K2) MIDDLE speed (K)
C LASER Used to set the 0- 120 (K)
POWER laser power 255 V LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0
(C1) C1) MIDDLE speed (C)
D LASER Used to set the 0- 120 (C)
POWER laser power 255 W LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0
(C2) C2) MIDDLE speed (M)
E LASER Used to set the 0- 110 (M)
POWER laser power 255 X LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0
(M1) M1) MIDDLE speed (Y)
F LASER Used to set the 0- 110 (Y)
POWER laser power 255 Y LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ DUTY select low 255
(M2) M2) LOW (K) speed (K)
G LASER Used to set the 0- 110 Z LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0
POWER laser power 255 DUTY select low 255
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ LOW (C) speed (C)
(Y1) Y1) AA LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0
H LASER Used to set the 0- 110 DUTY select low 255
POWER laser power 255 LOW (M) speed (M)
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ AB LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0
(Y2) Y2) DUTY select low 255
I LASER Used to set the 0- 110 LOW (Y) speed (Y)
POWER laser power 255 AC LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0
LOW (K1) (Low speed/ DUTY select middle 255
K1) MIDDLE speed (BW)
J LASER Used to set the 0- 110 (BW)
POWER laser power 255 AD LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0
LOW (K2) (Low speed/ DUTY select low 255
K2) LOW (BW) speed (BW)
K LASER Used to set the 0- 120

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
C1) /$6(532:(5$8726(783
L LASER Used to set the 0- 120 $ /$6(532:(50,''/(.

$
POWER laser power 255 % /$6(532:(50,''/(.
& /$6(532:(50,''/(&

' /$6(532:(50,''/(&
C2) ( /$6(532:(50,''/(0
M LASER Used to set the 0- 110 ) /$6(532:(50,''/(0
POWER laser power 255 * /$6(532:(50,''/(<
LOW (M1) (Low speed/ + /$6(532:(50,''/(<

, /$6(532:(5/2:.
M1)
- /$6(532:(5/2:.
N LASER Used to set the 0- 110 . /$6(532:(5/2:&
POWER laser power 255 / /$6(532:(5/2:&
LOW (M2) (Low speed/ &23< 35)$; 35 2.
M2)

2 : '09/Sep
<23 ppm models> Set- De- Desti-

2
Set- De- Desti- Mode Item/Display Content ting fault nation
Mode Item/Display Content ting fault nation range value linkage
range value linkage PR/FAX A LASER Used to set the 0- 110
COPY A LASER Used to set the 0- 110 POWER laser power 255
POWER laser power 255 MIDDLE (Middle speed/
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ (K) K)
(K) K) B LASER Used to set the 0- 120
B LASER Used to set the 0- 120 POWER laser power 255
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ (C) C)
(C) C) C LASER Used to set the 0- 110
C LASER Used to set the 0- 110 POWER laser power 255
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ (M) M)
(M) M) D LASER Used to set the 0- 110
D LASER Used to set the 0- 110 POWER laser power 255
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ (Y) Y)
(Y) Y) E LASER Used to set the 0- 110
E LASER Used to set the 0- 110 POWER laser power 255
POWER laser power 255 LOW (K) (Low speed/K)
LOW (K) (Low speed/K) F LASER Used to set the 0- 120
F LASER Used to set the 0- 120 POWER laser power 255
POWER laser power 255 LOW (C) (Low speed/C)
LOW (C) (Low speed/C) G LASER Used to set the 0- 110
G LASER Used to set the 0- 110 POWER laser power 255
POWER laser power 255 LOW (M) (Low speed/M)
LOW (M) (Low speed/M) H LASER Used to set the 0- 110
H LASER Used to set the 0- 110 POWER laser power 255
POWER laser power 255 LOW (Y) (Low speed/Y)
LOW (Y) (Low speed/Y) I LASER Used to set the 0- 110
I LASER Used to set the 0- 110 POWER laser power 255
MIDDLE (Middle speed/ (BW) BW)
(BW) BW) J LASER Used to set the 0- 110
J LASER Used to set the 0- 110 POWER laser power 255
POWER laser power 255 LOW (BW) (Low speed/
LOW (BW) (Low speed/ BW)
BW) K LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
K LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { DUTY select middle 255
DUTY select middle 255 MIDDLE speed (K)
MIDDLE speed (K) (K)
(K) L LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
L LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { DUTY select middle 255
DUTY select middle 255 MIDDLE speed (C)
MIDDLE speed (C) (C)
(C) M LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
M LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { DUTY select middle 255
DUTY select middle 255 MIDDLE speed (M)
MIDDLE speed (M) (M)
(M) N LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
N LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { DUTY select middle 255
DUTY select middle 255 MIDDLE speed (Y)
MIDDLE speed (Y) (Y)
(Y) O LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
O LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { DUTY select low 255
DUTY select low 255 LOW (K) speed (K)
LOW (K) speed (K) P LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
P LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { DUTY select low 255
DUTY select low 255 LOW (C) speed (C)
LOW (C) speed (C) Q LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
Q LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { DUTY select low 255
DUTY select low 255 LOW (M) speed (M)
LOW (M) speed (M) R LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
R LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { DUTY select low 255
DUTY select low 255 LOW (Y) speed (Y)
LOW (Y) speed (Y) S LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
S LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { DUTY select middle 255
DUTY select middle 255 MIDDLE speed (BW)
MIDDLE speed (BW) (BW)
(BW) T LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 {
T LASER Laser DUTY 0- 0 { DUTY select low 255
DUTY select low 255 LOW (BW) speed (BW)
LOW (BW) speed (BW)

2 : '09/Sep
2

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( +'')250$7
/$6(532:(5$8726(783
$ /$6(532:(50,''/(.
$ % /$6(532:(50,''/(&
& /$6(532:(50,''/(0
' /$6(532:(50,''/(<
&23< 35)$; 2.
61-4
Purpose Adjustment $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjust-

ment pattern. (LSU unit)
62-2
Section
Operation/Procedure Purpose Operation test/check
1) Select a target item with [] [] key on the touch panel. Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(partial).
2) Enter the print conditions setting value with 10 key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed. Operation/Procedure
Default 2) Press [YES] key.
value
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity (1-999) 1
B PAPER MFT Tray 1 Manual paper 3
6,08/$7,2112
selection feed (CS2) 7(67 &/26(
+''5:7(673$57
CS1 2 Tray 1
CS2 3 Tray 2
CS3 4 Tray 3
CS4 5 Tray 4
LCC 6 LCC

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17
$ 08/7,&2817 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
$ % 3$3(5&6

62-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(all areas).
Section
(;(&87( 2.
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
Read/write operations are performed.
62

62-1 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+''5:7(67$//
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the hard disk format
(except operation manual area).
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the hard disk format.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
normal display.

62-6 62-8
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding
hard disk. the system area and the operation manual
Section area)
1) Select the self diag area. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The self diag operation is performed. 2) Press [YES] key.
NOTE: Used to execute the hard disk format.
E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, use this When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
simulation to cheek the HDD. normal display.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
SHORT S.T Partial area diag
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
EXTENDED S.T All area diag
NG" is displayed.
normal display.
Normal completion "OK(RESULT:0)" is displayed.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+'')250$7(;&(376<67(0$5($
Abnormal end "NG(RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-
tion.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
60$572))/,1(7(67
6+25767 (1$%/(
(;7(1'('67 ',6$%/(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
62-10
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job log data.
Section
(;(&87( Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
62-7
Used to delete the job log data.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics normal display.
error log.
Section

Operation/Procedure 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
-2%&203/(7('$7$&/($5:,7+-2%/2*'$7$
ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
the result is printed.
normal display.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
60$57(5525/2*35,17287
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(60$57(552535,17
62-11
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to delete the document filing data.
normal display.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(17),/,1*'$7$&/($5
+'')250$70$18$/$5($21/<
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
62-12
Purpose Setting 63
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
in a hard disk trouble.
63-1
Section
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
result.
2) Press [OK] key.
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
panel.
data storage area is cleared.
Item/
A 0 Enable Content NOTE
Display
1 Disable (Default)
GAIN ODD Gain adjustment
value

(odd number)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment
$872)250$76(77,1*+''7528%/(
value
$ <(612
$ (Even number)
OFFSET Offset value
ODD (odd number)
OFFSET Offset value
EVEN (even number)
SMP AVE Reference plate
ODD sampling average
value (ODD)
SMP AVE Reference plate
EVEN sampling average
2.
value (EVEN)
TARGET Target value
62-13 VALUE
BLACK Black output level
Purpose Data clear
LEVEL
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the ERROR Error code 0 No error
operation manual area) CODE (0, 1-14) 1 Loop number over
(for debug) 2 The target value is under the
Section
specified value.
Operation/Procedure
3 The gain set value is negative.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 4 END is not asserted.
2) Press [YES] key. (Gain adjustment)
The operation manual data are deleted. 5 (reserve)
6 Underflow
7 Black shading error
normal display.
8 Other error
9 END is not asserted.
(White shading)
(Black shading)
(Light quantity correction)
12 END is not asserted. (Scan)
13 Register check error.
(When booting/Before gain)
14 Register check error.
(Before light quantity
correction)

Item/
Content NOTE
Display
RSPF First scan 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&8$872$'-8670(17
WHITE RSPF white 2&
LEVEL 1ST reference level
RSPF Second scan
WHITE RSPF white
LEVEL 2ND reference level

&&&555
000***
<<<%%%

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6+$',1*'$7$',63/$<
*$,12''
*$,1(9(1
2))6(72'' % * 5 (;(&87(
2&
2))6(7(9(1
603$9(2''
603$9((9(1 63-4
7$5*(79$/8(
%/$&./(9(/ Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check

(5525&2'(
Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
563):+,7(/(9(/67
563):+,7(/(9(/1' Section
% * 5
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
63-2 ment table.
Purpose Adjustment 2) Press [OC] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
Operation/Procedure When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. the normal display.
Used to perform shading. 4) Select a data display mode.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the THROUGH GAMMA SIT chart scan data
normal display. COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the
SIT chart scan data
SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of
the SIT chart scan data
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6+$',1*(;(&87,21
35(66>(;(&87(@726+$',1*67$57 Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$7&+'$7$',63/$<2)6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&(
2&

&&&555
000***
(;(&87(
<<<%%%
63-3
Purpose Adjustment % * 5 (;(&87(
2&
Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-

ance and gamma auto adjustment.
63-5
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color
1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) balance and gamma default setting.
on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
ument table. Section
2) Press [OK] key. Operation/Procedure
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [SIDE A(OC)] key.
The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per- 2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [OK] key
formed. 3) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the
default.
normal display.
After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the
adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data
display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key.

E Point E target value
F Point F target value
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( G Point G target value
67$1'$5'6&$11(5*$00$6(783
H Point H target value
6,'($2&
I Point I target value
J Point J target value
K Point K target value
L Point L target value
M Point M target value
N Point N target value
O Point O target value
BASE Background sampling value
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
63-6 *+,-.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check 012
Function (Purpose) Used to display the scan level and the den-
sity level of the copy color balance adjust-
ment patch.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with
SIM46-21 on the document table.
. & 0 < 6(783

The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. 63-8
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
of the copy mode auto color balance adjust-
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( ment.
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(&+$575($',1*
6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@ Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
adjustment is set to the default.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
balance as the factory color balance target.
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63-7 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(77,1*6(59,&(
Function (Purpose) Used to register the service target of the
copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.
2) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with
SIM46-21 on the document table. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
4) Press [OK] key.
The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
adjustment is registered according to the patch image of the
scanned adjustment pattern sheet.
The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the copy color bal-
ance is manually adjusted.
B Point B target value

C Point C target value
D Point D target value

63-11

Purpose Adjustment/Setup 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(/(&72)(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(17
7$5*(77%/ '() '() '()
copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
Default
value
Target color DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1
balance target in the automatic color balance

operation is slightly shifted to
Magenta. When this target is
selected, the color balance is
converted into natural gray color
balance by the color table in an actual
copy mode and print is made.
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment
target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to natural
gray color balance. When this target 64
is selected, the color balance is
slightly shifted to Cyan by the color
table in an actual copy mode and 64-1
print is made. Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. Section
When this target is selected, the color Operation/Procedure
balance is converted into the color
balance with enhanced Cyan by the 1) Set the print conditions.
color table in an actual copy mode Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.
and print is made. Set the print conditions with 10 key.
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 - 58 1
(1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19,21,22,29) (* For details, refer to the description (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22, 29)
below.)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 15 - 19) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 15-19: 2-8 except above:1-8) 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD Dither without 8
DITHER correction
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-4 1 1 (PLAIN)

2 : '09/Sep
<Print pattern of Item A>
Pattern
Pattern
Content generating NOTE
No. 6,08/$7,2112
section 7(67 &/26(
6(/)35,17&2/256(59,&(
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC $ 35,173$77(51
$
2 Dot print - % '27'27,)$
& '27'27,)$

9 Each color 10% Each interval is 41.86mm
' '(16,7<),;(',)$

area (A4/A4E) (989dot). ( 08/7,&2817
density print ) (;32685(,)$67$1'$5'',7+(5
10 8-color belt print * 3$3(5&6
11 4-color dot print + '83/(;12

, 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
(sub scan)
15 16 gradations MFP ASIC When all colors are
+ M by N selected, print is made in
(center gradations CMY. . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
only): Sub scan) 16 gradations print

16 16 gradations The gradation is changed
+ M by N for every 256 dots.
(center gradations
only): Main scan)
17 All background Half tone When all colors are
(half tone) (MFP ASIC selected, print is made in
rear CMY.
18 256 gradations process) When all colors are
pattern selected, print is made in
(Other dither) CMY.
19 256 gradations 16 gradations are printed
pattern in the main scanning
(For text dither) direction, and feedback is
made, and the next 16 64-2
gradations are printed. Purpose Operation test/check
(16 x 16 patch print)
Print is made from 255 Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
gradations, and 0-254 Section
gradations are printed.
Operation/Procedure
20 - - -
21 4-point dot print LSU-ASIC 1) Set the print conditions.
(main scan) Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.
22 Slant line Set the print conditions with 10 key.
2 29 Dot print 1200dpi Except 23 ppm machine

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 58 1
(1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19,21,22,29) (* For details, refer to the description (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22, 29)
below.)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 15 - 19) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 15-19: 2-8 except above:1-8) 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD Dither without 8
DITHER correction
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-4 1 1 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4

2 : '09/Sep
Pattern Pattern

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
No. Content generating NOTE 6(/)35,17%:6(59,&(
section $ 35,173$77(51
$
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC % '27'27,)$
& '27'27,)$

2 Dot print -
' '(16,7<),;(',)$
9 Each color 10% ( 08/7,&2817
area (A4/A4R) ) (;32685(,)$67$1'$5'',7+(5
density print * 3$3(5&6
+ '83/(;12
10 8-color belt print
, 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
11 4-color dot print Print of each color is made
(sub scan) for every 1/4 of the sub
scanning paper size.
15 16 gradations MFP ASIC When all colors are (;(&87( 2.
+ M by N selected, print is made in

(center gradations CMY.
only): Sub scan) 16 gradations print
16 16 gradations The gradation is changed
+ M by N for every 256 dots.
(center gradations
only): Main scan)
17 All background Half tone - 64-4
(half tone) (MFP ASIC
18 256 gradations after -
pattern process) Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (256 grada-
(Other dither) tions)
19 256 gradations - Section
pattern
(For text dither) Operation/Procedure
20 - - - 1) Set the print conditions.
21 4-point dot print LSU-ASIC Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.
(main scan)
Set the print conditions with 10 key.
22 Slant line
2 Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
29 Dot print 1200dpi Except 23 ppm machine
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

2 A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-6 3 (26/31 ppm
(* For details, refer to the description model)
below.) 6 (23 ppm
model)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW Halftone Low line number 0-1 0 0
HIGH High line number 1 (LOW)
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality Standard 0-2 0 1
HIGHQUALITY setting Fine image quality 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Ultra fine text 2
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of Straight 1-2 1 2
CALIB dither correction Calibration 2 (CALIB)
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

Pattern No. Content 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56(/)35,17
1 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) $ 35,173$77(51
2 256 gradations pattern (B/W) $ % '(16,7<
& 08/7,&2817
3 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) (Y-M-C-K continuous)
' 3$3(5&6
4 Half tone pattern (COLOR) ( +$/)721(/2:
5 Half tone pattern (B/W) ) 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
2 6 background, Mesh print * ',7+(5&$/,%
+ 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

64-5
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-3 3
(* For details, refer to the description
below.)
B DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of Straight 1-2 1 2
CALIB dither correction Calibration 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0-1 0 0
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (LOW)
setting (600dpi, 1bit) (HIGHQUALITY)
HIGHQUALITY Fine image quality 1
(600dpi, 4bit)
FINE Ultra Fine 2
(1200dpi, 1bit)
G INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0-2 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
H OUTPUT SHARP Output profile Standard 0-1 0 0
PROFILE STANDARD For Photo image 1 (SHARP)
I RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source SRGB 0-4 0 1
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 profile Gamma 1.6 1 (Gamma1.6)
GAMMA1.8 Gamma 1.8 2
TONER SAVE TONER SAVE mode 4
J GRAY K Gray K only 0-1 0 0 (K)
COMPENSATION KCMY compensation KCMY 1
K TONER SAVE ON Toner save mode set. 0-1 0 1 (OFF)
MODE OFF not set. 1
L PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

Pattern 6,08/$7,2112
Content 7(67 &/26(
No. 35,17(56(/)35,173&/
$ 35,173$77(51
1 COLOR $ % ',7+(5&$/,%
2 B/W & 08/7,&2817
3 Continuous COLOR,B/W ' 3$3(5&6

( +$/)721(/2:
) 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
* ,17(173(5&(378$/
+ 287387352),/(6+$53
, 5*%6285&(352),/(65*%
- *5$<&203(16$7,21.
. 721(56$9(02'(2))
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

64-6
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern (* For 1-2 1
details, refer to the description below.)
B DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of Straight 1-2 1 2
CALIB dither correction Calibration 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone Photograph 0-1 0 0
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (LOW)
setting (600dpi, 1bit) (HIGHQUALITY)
HIGHQUALITY Fine image quality 1
(600dpi, 4bit)
FINE Ultra Fine 2
(1200dpi, 1bit)
G INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0-2 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
H OUTPUT SHARP Output profile Standard 0-1 0 0
PROFILE STANDARD For Photo image 1 (SHARP)
I RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source SRGB 0-5 0 1
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 profile Gamma 1.6 1 (GAMMA1.6)
TONER SAVE Gamma 0.6 4
J GRAY K Gray K only 0-1 0 0 (K)
COMPENSATION KCMY compensation KCMY 1
K CMY INK OFF Ink simulation OFF 0-3 0 0 (OFF)
SIMULATION SWOP SWOP 1
EURO EURO 2
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR 3
L PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
Pattern 7(67
Content 35,17(56(/)35,1736
No. $ 35,173$77(51
$
1 COLOR % ',7+(5&$/,%
& 08/7,&2817
2 B/W
' 3$3(5&6
( +$/)721(/2:
) 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
* ,17(173(5&(378$/
+ 287387352),/(6+$53
, 5*%6285&(352),/(65*%
- *5$<&203(16$7,21.
. &0<,1.6,08/$7,212))
/ 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

64-7
Function (Purpose) Used to print the adjustment pattern of the
test print .(Self print). (The adjustment pat-
tern of SIM46-21 is printed.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.

Item/Display Content Writing
range value
A COPIES Number of print 1 - 999 1 No
Purpose Operation check/test
B PROC YES 0 The half tone 0-1 1 Yes Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis-
ADJ process play section) detection coordinates.
control
Section
correction
value is Operation/Procedure
reflected. Touch the touch panel.
NO 1 The half tone
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
process
the touched position is displayed in real time.
control
correction
value is not
reflected.

;<
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(

(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(3$7&+35,1702'(
$ &23,(6

$ % 352&$'-12

(;(&87( 2.
65-5
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
65 input.
Section
65-1
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis- the screen.
play section) detection coordinates. If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
Section Operation panel section is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
Operation/Procedure is displayed.
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the <Check target key>
screen.
8.5 Inch LCD model 8.1 Inch LCD model
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to
JOB STATUS DOCUMENT FILING
the simulation sub number entry menu.
SYSTEM SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. HOME COPY
1 JOB STATUS
2 FUNCTION
3 SYSTEM SETTINGS
4 1
5 2
6 3
7 4
8 5
9 6
AUDIT CLEAR 7

8.5 Inch LCD model 8.1 Inch LCD model
0 8 67-24
PROGRAM 9 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
CLEAR AUDIT CLEAR
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Auto
STOP 0
adjustment)
CLEAR ALL/RESET PROGRAM
START (COLOR) CLEAR Section Printer
START (MONO) STOP Operation/Procedure
CLEAR ALL/RESET 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
START (COLOR) The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
START (MONO)
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
23(5$7,213$1(/.(<&+(&. The printer color balance auto adjustment is performed, and
3/($6(386+-2%67$786.(<
the adjustment result is printed.
4) Press [OK] key.
The half tone correction target registration is processed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
67
67-17 (;(&87(
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Printer reset
Section Printer
7(67
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
Operation/Procedure 3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
7(6735,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
2) Press [YES] key. /,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
NIC setting.)
normal display.
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5&21752//(50(025<&/($5
67-25
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( touch panel.
2) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the
touch panel.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value.
Setting Default
Item/Display
range value
A POINT1 1 - 99 50

Setting Default
Item/Display
range value

B POINT2 1 - 99 50 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(/(&72)357(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-
C POINT3 1 - 99 50 7$5*(77%/ '() '() '()
D POINT4 1 - 99 50
E POINT5 1 - 99 50
F POINT6 1 - 99 50
G POINT7 1 - 99 50
H POINT8 1 - 99 50
I POINT9 1 - 99 50
J POINT10 1 - 99 50
K POINT11 1 - 99 50
L POINT12 1 - 99 50

M POINT13 1 - 99 50
N POINT14 1 - 99 50
O POINT15 1 - 99 50 67-27
P POINT16 1 - 99 50
Q POINT17 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to set the service target of the printer
mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section Printer
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
&/26(
Operation/Procedure
$
$ 32,17
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel.
% 32,17
& 32,17 2) Place the printed color balance adjustment pattern sheet
' 32,17 printed in SIM 67-25 on the document table.
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17 The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
+ 32,17
, 32,17
4) Press [OK] key.
- 32,17
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance
. 32,17
/ 32,17
adjustment is set according to the scanned adjustment pattern
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2. sheet patch images.
The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
67-26
NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the printer color bal-
ance is manually adjusted.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the
printer mode auto color balance adjust- B Point B target value
ment. C Point C target value
Section Printer D Point D target value
E Point E target value
Operation/Procedure
F Point F target value
1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel. G Point G target value
H Point H target value
Default
Item/Display Content I Point I target value
value
J Point J target value
Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1
value table target in the automatic color balance K Point K target value
select operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. L Point L target value
When this target is selected, the color M Point M target value
balance is converted into natural gray N Point N target value
color balance by the color table in an O Point O target value
actual printer mode and print is made. BASE Background sampling value
operation is slightly shifted to natural
gray color balance. When this target is

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
selected, the color balance is slightly 6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
shifted to Cyan by the color table in an %&'()
actual copy mode and print is made. *+,-.
/012
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan.
When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color
balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode and
print is made.
. & 0 < 6(783

67-28 67-31
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
of the printer mode auto color balance Section Printer
adjustment.
Operation/Procedure
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The printer calibration data (Half tone correction data) are
2) Press [YES] key. cleared.
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance (The printer color balance correction is canceled.)
adjustment is set to the default.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color 35,17(5&$/%5$7,21'$7$&/($5
balance as the factory color balance target.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
67-33
$5(<28685(" <(6 12
Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer
(;(&87(
screen. (for PCL/PS)
Section Printer
67-30 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 1) Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key on the
Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of sending the touch panel.
machine calibration data and the half tone 2) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key.
correction data to a client PC. (For GDI 3) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key.
printer) 4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section Printer 5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Item/Display Content
range value
2) Press [OK] key. A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128
B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128
Setting Default
Item/Display Content C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128
range value
D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128
A (0: YES 0 Sending the calibration 0-1 1
1: NO) data and the half tone E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128
correction data to a client F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128
PC is disabled. G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128
1 Sending the calibration H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128
data and the half tone I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
correction data to a client J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
PC is enabled. K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128
L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128

M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128
&$/,%5$7,21'$7$5(/($6($'-8670(17
$ <(612
O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128
$ P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128

Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128
Display Content
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit Photo
SCREEN2 600dpi 1 bit Graphics
SCREEN3 600dpi 4 bit Photo
2. SCREEN5 1200dpi 1 bit Photo
SCREEN7 B/W 600dpi 1 bit

Display Content

SCREEN10 Toner Save B/W 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
HEAVY PAPER Printer paper kind manual gamma 35,17(56&5((1*$00$$'-8670(176&5((1
$ 32,17
correction (Heavy paper)
$ % 32,17
& 32,17

' 32,17
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( ( 32,17
35,17(56&5((1*$00$$'-8670(176&5((1 ) 32,17

$ 32,17 * 32,17
$ % 32,17 + 32,17
& 32,17 , 32,17
' 32,17 - 32,17
( 32,17 . 32,17
) 32,17 / 32,17
* 32,17 . & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
67-34
/ 32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the
printer high density section. (Support for
67-33 the high density section tone gap)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Section Printer
Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer Operation/Procedure
screen. (for GDI) 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Section Printer
0 Enable
Operation/Procedure
1 Disable
1) Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key on the
touch panel. 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
2) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key.
Setting Default
3) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key. Item/Display Content
range value
4) Enter the set value with 10-key. A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0
5) Press [OK] key. (0: ENABLE density correction
1: DISABLE) mode : Enable
1 CMY engine highest
Setting Default density correction
Item/Display Content mode : Disable
range value
A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128 B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
(0: ENABLE density correction
B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128
1: DISABLE) mode : Enable
C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128
1 K engine highest
D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128
density correction
E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128 mode : Disable
F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128 C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128 TARGET CYAN maximum density
H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128 correction
I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128 D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128 TARGET MAGENTA maximum
K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128 density correction
L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128 E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128 TARGET YELLOW maximum
N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128 density correction
O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128 F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET BLACK maximum density
P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128
correction
Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128
When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set items
Display Content A and B to "0."
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit Photo The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone
SCREEN2 600dpi 1bit Graphics gap is reduced.
SCREEN3 1200dpi 1bit Photo To increase the density in the high density section further, set
SCREEN4 1200dpi 1bit Graphics items A and B to "1.
SCREEN5 B/W 600dpi 1bit The tone gap may occur in high density part.
SCREEN6 B/W 1200dpi 1bit
NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these
values are changed, the density in the high density area is
changed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(53&/
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
+($9<3$3(5 '3,B%,7 '3,B%,7 %:
$ &0<(1$%/(',6$%/(
$ % .(1$%/(',6$%/(
& &<$10$;7$5*(7
' 0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
( <(//2:0$;7$5*(7
) %/$&.0$;7$5*(7
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
2.
67-52
67-36
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den-
printer screen. (GDI)
sity section.
Section Printer
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel.
Press [ALL] key to select all the modes.
2) Press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images
are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33, it is
low density are images are weakly reproduced. reset to the default.
When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight Item/Display Content
section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble.
Screen 1200DPI_1BIT SCREEN3(1200dpi 1bit Photo)
SCREEN4(1200dpi 1bit Graphic)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1(600dpi 1bit Photo)
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
SCREEN2(600dpi 1bit Graphic)
$ $3$7&+,1387
$ B/W SCREEN5(B/W 600dpi 1bit)
SCREEN6(B/W 1200dpi 1bit)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(5*',
'3,B%,7 '3,B%,7 %:
2.
67-52
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the
printer screen. (for PCL/PS)
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel.
Press [ALL] key to select all the modes.
When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33, it is
reset to the default.
Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen
1200DPI_1BIT SCREEN5(1200dpi 1bit Photo)
SCREEN6(1200dpi 1bit Graphics)
600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1(600dpi 1bit Photo)
SCREEN2(600dpi 1bit Graphics)
B/W SCREEN7(B/W 600dpi 1bit)
SCREEN10(Toner Save B/W)

67-70
Purpose
Function (Purpose) MFP PWB SRAM data clear
Section MFP PWB
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
MFP PWB SRAM data is cleared.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display.
NOTE: When the MFP PWB is replaced, execute this simulation.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
65$00(025<&/($5
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

[8] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE
MX-3100N C. Self diag
Service operation
Manual
(1) Self diag operation and related work flow
CODE The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
1. Self diag displays the trouble message.
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine nearly expired or is expired.
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trou- may not be stopped.
ble,this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
machine to minimize the damage. the LCD and lamp.
A. Function and purpose Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
tion.
trouble.)
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
sages must be cleared by a simulation.
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.) Monitors the machine
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows conditions.
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con-
Detects/analyzes
sumable part.) the content.
B. Self diag message kinds
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Warning

Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the Trouble/Warning

user. (Paper jam,consumable part life expiration,
etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by Trouble

a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others -
The machine is stopped.
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
The content is displayed.
stopped.
Others -
Warning
A consumable No
OP

Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
the cause.
the consumable part.

Repair

Cancel the selfdiagnostic
message with the diag-

nostics (test
commands).
Reset

Standby
state
MX-3100N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 1

D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode processing
a. Breakdown mode list
There are following cases of the breakdown mode.
Operatable mode
FAST
Judgment Copy scan
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan ScanTo FAX FAX List Notifica-
block (including Print
push pull HDD Send print print tion to
interruption)
host
FAX board trouble MFP F6 (1 line) { { { { U1 U1 { { U1
HDD trouble E7 (03, 04)
HDD-ASIC self test
trouble
SCU communication E7 (80) { { { {
trouble A0 (02)
PCU communication E7 (90) {
trouble A0 (01)
Power controler trouble L8 (20) {
Backup battery voltage U1 (01) {
fall
Controller fan motor L4 (30)
trouble
Connection trouble (MFP E7 (60, 61, 65)
detection) A0 (10 - 12, 20)
Serial number U2 (30)
discrepancy
Vendor machine error U7 (50, 51) {
Memory error (included U2 (00, 05, 10, 11, 22, {
not installed the 23, 24)
expansion RAM)
HDD registration data U2 (50) {
sum error
Image memory trouble, E7 (01, 05, 06, 08, 09) {
decode error
Personal counter PC (--) {
installation trouble
Laser trouble PCU E7 (20, 28, 29), L6 {
(10) *10
Connection trouble (PCU E7 (50)
detection) A0 (21)
F1 (50)
PCU section troubles C1 (10, 14), {
(motor, fusing, etc.) C4 (excluding 10), *10
E7 (21, 22, 23),
F2 (22, 40, 64, 70, 74),
H2, H3, H4, H5, H7,
L4 (excluding 30),
L8 (01, 02),
U2 (90, 91),
Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3 (12) U3 { { { { U3 U3 U3 {
*10
Paper feed tray 2 trouble F3 (22) U3 { { { { U3 U3 U3 {
*10
Paper feed tray 3 trouble U6 (01) U3 { { { { U3 U3 U3 {
*10
Paper feed tray 4 trouble U6 (02) U3 { { { { U3 U3 U3 {
*10
Paper feed tray 5 trouble U6 (09,20,21,22,51) U3 { { { { U3 U3 U3 {
*10
Paper feed tray other U6 (00,10,50) U 11 { { { { U 11 U 11 U 11 {
troubles *10
Staple trouble F1(08,10) U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 {
*10
Saddle stitch section F1 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 {
trouble (21,31,41,43,45,47) *10
After-process trouble F1 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 {
(00,03,11,15,19,20,32, *10
33,34,36,37,38,39)
Other troubles EE (EL, EU, EC) { { { { { { { { {

Operatable mode
FAST
Judgment Copy scan
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan ScanTo FAX FAX List Notifica-
block (including Print
push pull HDD Send print print tion to
interruption)
host
General PCU color PCU E7 (21 - 23), {
system trouble F2 (23 - 25, 41 - 43, *11 *11 *11 *11 *11 *11 *11 *11
65 - 67, 71 - 73,
75 - 77)
Process control trouble F2 (39, 58, 45, 49 - 53, { { { { { { { { {
(PCU detection) 78) *12
PCU section error C4 (10) { { { { { { { { {
*16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16 *16
Connection trouble (SCU SCU A0 (22)
detection)
SCU color system UC (02) U9 U9 U9 U9 U9 { { { {
troubles (SCU detection)
Anti copy system UC (20) { { { {
EEPROM faction U2 (80, 81) { { { {
Scanner section troubles L1,L3 { { { {
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD troubles E7 (10, 11, 14) { { { {
(shading, etc.)
{ : Operation enabled, : Operation disabled

U 1 : The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
U 3 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
U 4 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section.
U 9 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
* 10 : Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
U 11 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK.
* 11 : When the color mode is inhibited in "Color mode inhibit" setting of the system setting, the operation is performed in the monochrome
mode.
* 12 : Trouble display is message of 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
* 16 : Print is enabled. Displays "Call for service. CODE: **-**".
* Trouble mode process
Machine operation enabled under some conditions.
A dialog is displayed when a trouble occurs. For the mode where operations are enabled, [OK] button is added to the message. When oper-
ations are disabled, [OK] button is not displayed, and the message is displayed until the trouble is cancelled.
* For U3, 4, 11 perform the following procedures.
When a trouble is detected during a job, the machine operation is terminated. (Trouble display/without [OK] key)
When trouble is detected other than during the JOB operating, the trouble display is not made and the JOB that relates to the trouble part
cannot be selected.
Troubles which disable the machine operations
The trouble display is always made.
* Writing to the trouble memory
Writing of a same trouble to the trouble memory can be selected with SIM 26-35.
(Sim.26-35)
0: ONCE; If same as the previous one, it is not saved. (Default)
1: ANY; Though same as the previous one, it is saved.

(2) Power ON trouble detection sequence.
MFP event
manager Each block
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, PF trouble check When the power is turned
on, check is made in each
Trouble check is made in each block when initializing
and data are sent to the MFP PWB. block.
Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP.
U2 Saved in each block.
PF Saved in the MFP.
U6-09 Saved in the PCU
sim task
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
(To the corre-
sponding block)
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel Trouble cancel
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 (Color mode Trouble cancel command (The trouble memory
inhibition) cancel is initialized.)
SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel Trouble cancel status
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel is communicated.
SIM 17: PF trouble cancel
2. Trouble code list

Trouble code
Trouble Mecha Electri
Main Sub Trouble code content Option FAX Supply
detection nism city
code code
C1 10 Main charger trouble (BK) PCU {
14 Main charger trouble (Color) PCU {
C4 00 PTC trouble PCU {
02 PTC heater open trouble PCU {
03 PTC heater short trouble PCU {
10 PTC no control PCU {
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP {
03 HDD trouble MFP {
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP {
05 Standard memory/expansion memory read/write error (MFP PWB) MFP {
06 Image data decode error MFP {
08 MFP memory compatibility error (MFP PWB) MFP {
09 Standard memory size/Expansion memory size error (MFP PWB) MFP {
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU {
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU {
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU {
20 LSU laser detection error (K) PCU {
21 LSU laser detection error (C) PCU {
22 LSU laser detection error (M) PCU {
23 LSU laser detection error (Y) PCU {
28 LSU-PCU connection error PCU {
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU {
50 Engine connection trouble PCU {
55 PWB information sum error (Engine detection) PCU {
60 Combination error between the MFP PWB and other PWB, firmware MFP {
61 Combination error between the MFP PWB and the PCU PWB MFP {
65 MFP EEPROM sum check error MFP {
80 MFP-SCU PWB communication error MFP {
90 MFP-PCU PWB communication error MFP {

Trouble code
detection nism city
code code
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error (Sampling level 76 - 117/ 139 - 178) PCU {
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Overtoner) PCU {
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Undertoner) PCU {
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU {
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU {
08 Stapler shift trouble PCU {
10 Staple operation trouble PCU {
11 Finisher grip operation trouble PCU {
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU {
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU {
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU {
21 Finisher fan trouble PCU {
31 Saddle paper folding trouble PCU {
32 Finisher - Punch unit communication error PCU {
33 Punch unit shift operation trouble PCU {
34 Punch operation trouble PCU {
36 Punch paper edge detection error PCU {
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU {
38 Punch data backup RAM error PCU {
39 Punch paper dust sensor error PCU {
41 Saddle paper positioning operation trouble PCU {
43 Saddle alignment operation trouble PCU {
45 Saddle staple trouble PCU {
47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble PCU {
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU {
F2 22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) PCU {
23 Discharge lamp trouble (C) PCU {
24 Discharge lamp trouble (M) PCU {
25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) PCU {
39 Process thermister trouble PCU {
40 Toner density sensor trouble (BLACK) PCU {
41 Toner density sensor trouble (CYAN) PCU {
42 Toner density sensor trouble (MAGENTA) PCU {
43 Toner density sensor trouble (YELLOW) PCU {
45 Color image density sensor trouble PCU {
49 LSU thermister trouble PCU {
50 K drum phase sensor trouble PCU {
51 CL drum phase sensor trouble PCU {
58 Process humidity sensor trouble PCU {
64 Toner supply operation trouble (BK) PCU {
65 Toner supply operation trouble (C) PCU {
66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) PCU {
67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) PCU {
70 Improper toner cartridge detection (BLACK) PCU {
71 Improper toner cartridge detection (CYAN) PCU {
72 Improper toner cartridge detection (MAGENTA) PCU {
73 Improper toner cartridge detection (YELLOW) PCU {
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK) PCU {
75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN) PCU {
76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (MAGENTA) PCU {
77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (YELLOW) PCU {
78 Registration image density sensor trouble (Transfer belt substrate reflection rate PCU {
abnormality)
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU {
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU {
H2 00 Thermister open trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU {
01 Thermister open trouble (TH_LM) PCU {
02 Sub thermister open trouble (TH_US) PCU {
03 Compensation thermister open trouble (TH_UM_AD1) PCU {
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU {
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU {
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU {
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU {
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU {
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU {
30 Thermister input circuit trouble (TH_UM) PCU {
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU {

2 : '09/Sep
Trouble code
detection nism city
code code
H7 10 Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_UM_AD2). PCU {
11 Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_LM) PCU {
12 Fusing low temperature recovery trouble (TH_US) PCU {
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU {
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU {
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU {
04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK) PCU {
05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR) PCU {
06 Transfer unit lift trouble PCU {
11 Shift motor trouble PCU {
16 Fusing pressure release trouble PCU {
30 MFP fan motor trouble MFP {
31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble PCU {
32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU {
35 Fusing cooling fan trouble PCU {
50 Process fan trouble PCU {
56 Rear cooling fan trouble PCU {
58 Ozone exhaust fan trouble PCU {
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU {
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU {
02 Full wave signal error PCU {
20 MFP PWB - Mother board communication error MFP {
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP {
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP {
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP {
05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents inconsistency MFP {
10 MFP PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP {
11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP {
22 MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum error MFP {
23 MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum error MFP {
24 MFP PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP {
30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP {
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFP {
80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU {
81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU {
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU {
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU {
U6 00 PCU PWB - Desk paper feed unit communication error PCU {
01 Desk paper feeding tray 1 lift trouble PCU {
02 Desk paper feeding tray 2 lift trouble PCU {
09 LCC lift trouble PCU {
10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble PCU {
20 PCU PWB - LCC communication error PCU {
21 LCC paper transport motor trouble PCU {
22 LCC 24V power trouble PCU {
50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble PCU {
51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble PCU {
U7 50 MFP PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP {
51 Vendor machine error MFP {
UC 02 CPT - ASIC error SCU {
20 DOCC ASIC error SCU {
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP {
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP {
10 MFP PWB ROM error MFP {
11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU) MFP {
12 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - SCU) MFP {
2 15 Conflict DSK Boot version MFP {
20 MFP firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency MFP {
21 PCU firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency PCU {
22 SCU firmware version and EEPROM data version inconsistency SCU {

3. Details of trouble code
C4-02 PTC heater open trouble
C1-10 Main charger trouble (BK)
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause The PTC unit is not installed, or the eater line
Cause The main charger unit (BK) is not installed properly. conduction trouble.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit. PCU PWB trouble.
Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Breakage of the high voltage harness. Check & Remedy Replace the PTC unit.
MC/DV PWB trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2. NOTE:
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace. When the PTC unit is broken down and repair cannot
Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB. be made because of no replacement part:
connector. /Replace. To use the machine continuously, make the setting to
Replace the MC/DV PWB. ignore the PTC trouble, and the machine can be
Replace the PCU PWB. operated tentatively.
Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "1".
This setting disables the PTC output, the heater
control, and the error detection.
C1-14 Main charger trouble (Color) After completion of repair, set the engine soft SW8-3
in SIM55-1 to "0".
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause The main charger unit (CMY) is not installed C4-03 PTC heater short trouble
properly.
There is an abnormality in the main charger.
Trouble content
Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector.
Detail PCU
Breakage of the high voltage harness.
MC/DV PWB trouble. Cause PTC unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace. Check & Remedy Replace the PTC unit.
Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB Replace the PCU PWB.
connector. /Replace. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the MC/DV PWB. NOTE:
Replace the PCU PWB. When the PTC unit is broken down and repair cannot
be made because of no replacement part:
To use the machine continuously, make the setting to
ignore the PTC trouble, and the machine can be
C4-00 PTC trouble operated tentatively.
Trouble content This setting disables the PTC output, the heater
Detail PCU control, and the error detection.
Cause The PTC unit is not properly installed. After completion of repair, set the engine soft SW8-3
PTC unit trouble. in SIM55-1 to "0".
Secondary transfer PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. C4-10 PTC no control
Check & Remedy Replace the PTC unit.
Replace the secondary transfer PWB. Trouble content
Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Cause The engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 is set to "1".
NOTE:
The PTC control is not executed. (The PTC does not
When the PTC unit is broken down and repair cannot
operate.)
be made because of no replacement part:
When the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 is set to
To use the machine continuously, make the setting to
"1", the PTC output, the heater control, and the error
ignore the PTC trouble, and the machine can be
detection are disabled. When this setting is made in
operated tentatively.
case of a PTC unit trouble, the PTC function is
disabled regardless of the PTC trouble and printing
This setting disables the PTC output, the heater
operation can be performed.
control, and the error detection.
After completion of repair, set the engine soft SW8-3 Check & Remedy Set the engine soft SW8-3 in SIM55-1 to "0".
in SIM55-1 to "0". (The mode returns to the normal PTC control mode.)
E7-01 MFP image data error
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Image data transfer error in the MFP PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
of the MFP PWB.
Replace the MFP PWB.

E7-03 HDD trouble E7-09 Standard memory size/Expansion
memory size error (MFP PWB)
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFP Detail MFP
PWB and HDD.
Cause A DIMM which is not 1GB is inserted into the default
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality
slot.
(FAT breakage).
DIMM trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Insufficient memory size.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
Check & Remedy Replace the DIMM.
of the MFP PWB and HDD.
Use SIM62-2,3 to check read/write operations of the
HDD.
Replace the HDD.
E7-10 Shading error (Black correction)
Trouble content
Detail SCU
E7-04 HDD-ASIC error Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
scanner lamp is turned OFF.
Trouble content Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
CCD unit abnormality.
Detail MFP
SCU PWB abnormality.
Cause HDD-ASIC trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
Check the CCD unit.
booting.
Check the SCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
E7-11 Shading error (White correction)

E7-05 Standard memory/expansion memory
read/write error (MFP PWB) Trouble content
Detail SCU
Trouble content Memory access is disabled. Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
Detail MFP level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
Cause Improper insertion of the memory. Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Garbled memory data. Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
The memory capacity is not the specified level. Scanner lamp lighting trouble.
Check & Remedy Check insertion of the memory. CCD unit abnormality.
Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of SCU PWB abnormality.
the memory. Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Replace the expansion memory. Check connection of the harness to the scanner
Replace the MFP PWB. lamp unit.
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the reference white
plate.
E7-06 Image data decode error Check the CCD unit.
Check the SCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail MFP E7-14 CCD-ASIC error
Cause Compressed image data abnormality.
HDD connection trouble when HDD is installed.
Image data compression/transfer data garble. Trouble content
MFP PWB trouble. Detail SCU
Check & Remedy If the job at an occurrence of an error is a FAX job, Cause SCU PWB trouble.
check the FAX PWB. Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB.
Check connection of the MFPC PWB and the HDD. Replace the SCU PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
E7-20 LSU laser detection error (K)

E7-08 MFP memory compatibility error (MFP
PWB) Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Optical axis shift.
Detail MFP Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
trouble.
Cause A DIMM of different specifications is installed to the
BD PWB trouble.
MFP memory slot.
Harness and connector trouble between the LD/BD
(Support memory: ROW=13bit, Column=10bit)
PWB and the LSU cnt PWB.
DIMM trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the installed DIMM. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Replace the DIMM. Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
LSU.
Replace the LSU.

E7-21 LSU laser detection error (C) E7-50 Engine connection trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause A PWB, or firmware, or LSU which is not supported
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
by the machine specifications is detected in the PCU
trouble.
PWB.
Harness and connector trouble between the LD PWB
PCU PWB trouble.
and the LSU cnt PWB.
LSU trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
Check the LSU, and replace it if necessary.
LSU.
Check the PCU PWB, and replace it if necessary.
Replace the LSU.
E7-22 LSU laser detection error (M) E7-55 PWB information sum error
(Engine detection)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode Detail PCU
trouble. Cause PCU EEPROM sum check error.
Harness and connector trouble between the LD PWB PCU EEPROM trouble.
and the LSU cnt PWB. PCU EEPROM contact trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Malfunction due to noises
Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
LSU. Replace the PCU EEPROM.
Replace the LSU.
E7-60 Combination error between the MFP

E7-23 LSU laser detection error (Y) PWB and other PWB, firmware
Trouble content Trouble content
Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode Cause A PWB or firmware which is not supported by the
trouble. machine specifications is detected in the MFP PWB.
Harness and connector trouble between the LD PWB MFP PWB trouble.
and the LSU cnt PWB. The PWB/firmware which is not supported by the
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. machine specifications is connected.
Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
LSU. Check the MFP PWB, and replace it if necessary.
Replace the LSU.
E7-61 Combination error between the MFP

E7-28 LSU-PCU connection error
PWB and the PCU PWB
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU Detail MFP
PWB and the control ASIC. Cause Combination error between the MFP PWB and the
Improper connection of the communication PCU PWB.
connector between the PCU PWB and the LSU cnt MFP PWB trouble.
PWB (interface PWB). PCU PWB trouble.
Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP PWB and
cnt PWB (interface PWB) the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB or LSU cnt PWB (interface PWB) trouble Replace the MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness Replace the PCU PWB.
between the PCU PWB and the LSU cnt PWB
(interface PWB).
Replace the LSU cnt PWB. E7-65 MFP EEPROM sum check error
Trouble content
Detail MFP
E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error Cause MFP PWB EEPROM device breakdown.
Contact trouble of the MFP EEPROM device.
Trouble content Malfunction due to noises.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator and Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
the internal oscillating circuit used in the LSU ASIC.
LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU ASIC PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the LSU cnt PWB.

E7-80 MFP-SCU PWB communication error EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment
error (Undertoner)
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
Cause SCU PWB connector connection trouble. adjustment is 178 or above or the control voltage is
SCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble. 51 or less.
SCU PWB mother board connection trouble. Detail PCU
SCU PWB trouble. Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner
Replace the mother board. density trouble, or developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB, the MFP PWB, PCU PWB trouble.
and the mother board.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check the earth line.
Replace the developing unit.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Replace the mother board.
F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication

E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error error

Detail MFP Detail PCU
Cause PCU PWB connector connection trouble. Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
PCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble. between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB motherboard connection trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. Strong external noises.
Replace the mother board. Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB, the MFP PWB, finisher and the PCU PWB.
and the mother board. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check the earth line. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the mother board. F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting opera-
tion trouble
EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment
Trouble content
error (Sampling level 76 - 117/ 139 - Detail PCU
178) Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density Home position sensor trouble.
adjustment is outside of 128 10. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
roller lift motor.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-08 Stapler shift trouble

EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment
Trouble content
error (Overtoner)
Detail PCU
Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density Finisher control PWB trouble.
adjustment is 76 or less or the control voltage is 208 Home position sensor trouble.
or above. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
Detail PCU motor.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Replace the stapler shift motor.
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner Check connection of the connector and the harness.
density trouble, or developing unit trouble. Replace the home position sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.

F1-10 Staple operation trouble F1-21 Finisher fan trouble

Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Staple motor trouble. Cause Finisher fan motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan motor.
motor. Check connection between the finisher control PWB
Replace the staple motor. and the fan.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the fan.
Replace the home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-31 Saddle paper folding trouble

F1-11 Finisher grip operation trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause Saddle paper folding motor trouble.
Cause Grip motor trouble. Saddle paper folding mechanism trouble.
Grip arm trouble. Home position sensor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the grip motor. paper folding.
Replace the grip motor. Replace the saddle paper folding motor.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Check and repair the saddle paper folding
Replace the grip arm. mechanism.
Replace the home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation

trouble F1-32 Finisher - Punch unit communication
error
Trouble content Lift motor trouble.
Detail PCU Trouble content
Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble. Detail PCU
Finisher control PWB trouble. Cause Connector/harness connection trouble or
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit disconnection between the finisher and the punch
tray lift motor. unit.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor. PCU PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noises.
The punch unit is in the adjustment mode.
F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
finisher and the punch unit.
Trouble content Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU Cancel the adjustment mode of the punch unit.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
Overcurrent to the motor. F1-33 Punch unit shift operation trouble
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor F. Trouble content
Replace the finisher control PWB. Detail PCU
Replace the paper alignment motor F. Cause Punch shift motor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
R shifting.
Replace the punch shift motor.
Trouble content Replace the finisher control PWB.
Detail PCU Replace the home position sensor.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock. Check connection of the connectors and the
Motor speed abnormality. harness.
Overcurrent to the motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor R.
Replace the paper alignment motor R.

F1-34 Punch operation trouble F1-41 Saddle paper positioning operation
trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content Abnormality in the folding positioning guide motor in
Cause Punch motor trouble. the saddle section.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Home position sensor trouble. Cause Saddle paper positioning guide drive motor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the punch operation. Home position sensor trouble.
Replace the punch motor. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
paper positioning motor.
Check connection of the connectors and the
Replace the saddle paper folding positioning guide
harness.
drive motor.
F1-36 Punch paper edge detection error Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Trouble content
Detail PCU F1-43 Saddle alignment operation trouble
Cause Punch paper edge sensor trouble.
Harness disconnection. Trouble content
Finisher control PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Punch control PWB trouble.
Cause Saddle alignment motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Replace the punch paper edge sensor. Home position sensor trouble.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the punch control PWB.
paper alignment motor.
Replace the saddle alignment motor.
F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error Replace the finisher control PWB.
Trouble content Check connection of the connectors and the
harness.
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Malfunction due to noises
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-45 Saddle staple trouble
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10,Finisher control
PWB DIP SW adjustment.) Trouble content Abnormality of the staple unit drive motor in the
saddle section.
Detail PCU
F1-38 Punch data backup RAM error Cause Saddle staple motor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Punch control PWB trouble.
staple motor.
Malfunction due to noises
Replace the saddle staple motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the punch control PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Set the punch unit specifications, and adjust the Replace the home position sensor.
sensor. (Punch unit control PWB DIP SW Check connection of the connectors and the
adjustment.) harness.
F1-39 Punch paper dust sensor error F1-47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble
Trouble content Trouble content Abnormality in the drive roller oscillation motor in the
Detail PCU finisher saddle transport section.
Cause Punch dust sensor trouble. Detail PCU
Harness and connector connection trouble. Cause Saddle paper transport motor trouble.
Punch unit control PWB trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor. Fuse blown (24V line).
Check connection of the connectors and the Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
harness. paper transport motor.
Replace the punch dust sensor. Replace the saddle paper transport motor.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the punch unit control PWB. Check connection of the connectors and the
harness.
Replace the fuse.

F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error F2-39 Process thermister trouble

Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit Cause Process thermister trouble.
model is installed. Process thermister harness connection trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher. Check & Remedy Replace the process thermister.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Check connection of the harness and the connector.
F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble (K)

F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble (BLACK)
Trouble content A trouble is detected when the discharge lamp open
sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the Trouble content
discharge lamp. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB level 25 or less, or 231 or above)
(K) and the PCU PWB. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble. harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (K). Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check the harness and the connector. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the developing unit.
F2-23 Discharge lamp trouble (C)

F2-41 Toner density sensor trouble (CYAN)
sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the Trouble content
discharge lamp. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB level 25 or less, or 231 or above)
(C) and the PCU PWB. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Discharge lamp PWB (C) trouble. harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (C). PCU PWB trouble
Check the harness and the connector. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Harness and connector connection trouble.
F2-24 Discharge lamp trouble (M)

F2-42 Toner density sensor trouble
sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the (MAGENTA)
discharge lamp.
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB Detail PCU
(M) and the PCU PWB.
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample
Discharge lamp PWB (M) trouble.
level 25 or less, or 231 or above)
PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (M). harness.
Check the harness and the connector. Developing unit trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble
F2-25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) Replace the developing unit.
sensor is open for 1 sec after turning ON the
discharge lamp.
Detail PCU
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB
(Y) and the PCU PWB.
Discharge lamp PWB (Y) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (Y).
Check the harness and the connector.

F2-43 Toner density sensor trouble (YEL- F2-50 K drum phase sensor trouble
LOW)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample Harness and connector connection trouble.
level 25 or less, or 231 or above). Drum drive section trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the PCU PWB trouble
harness. Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K.".
Developing unit trouble. Replace the drum phase sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the
harness.
Repair the drum drive section.
F2-51 CL drum phase sensor trouble

F2-45 Color image density sensor trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
Cause Color image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
Drum drive section trouble.
trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Color image density sensor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K.".
Image density sensor dirt. Replace the drum phase sensor.
Calibration plate dirt. Check connection of the connectors and the
Calibration plate solenoid trouble. harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Repair the drum drive section.
Check & Remedy Replace the color image density sensor.
harness.
Clean the image density sensor. F2-58 Process humidity sensor trouble
Replace the calibration plate.
Replace the calibration plate solenoid. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Use SIM44-2 to adjust the process control sensor
Cause Process humidity sensor trouble.
sensitivity.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the process humidity sensor.
F2-49 LSU thermister trouble Check connection of the connectors and the
harness.
Trouble content Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause The LSU detection temperature is outside of -28C -
78C. F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble (BK)
LSU thermister trouble.
Trouble content
PCU PWB trouble
Detail PCU
LSU control PWB trouble.
Cause Toner motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the LSU thermister.
Toner density sensor trouble.
Connector/harness trouble.
harness.
PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble.
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Replace the LSU.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the toner cartridge.

F2-65 Toner supply operation trouble (C) F2-71 Improper toner cartridge detection
(CYAN)
Trouble content
Cause Toner motor trouble. Detail PCU
Toner density sensor trouble. Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
Connector/harness trouble. unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
PCU PWB trouble specification.)
Toner cartridge trouble. Toner cartridge trouble.
Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the toner density sensor.
F2-72 Improper toner cartridge detection
(MAGENTA)
F2-66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
Detail PCU unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
Cause Toner motor trouble. specification.)
Toner density sensor trouble. Toner cartridge trouble.
Connector/harness trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Toner cartridge trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the toner density sensor. F2-73 Improper toner cartridge detection
Connector/harness trouble. (YELLOW)
Replace the developing unit. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
F2-67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
specification.)
Trouble content
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU
Cause Toner motor trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Toner density sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK)
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor. Trouble content
Replace the toner density sensor. Detail PCU
Connector/harness trouble. Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the toner cartridge. Connector/harness trouble.
Replace the developing unit. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection
(BLACK)
F2-75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN)
Trouble content
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main Detail PCU
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
specification.) PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble. Connector/harness trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Connector/harness trouble.

F2-76 Toner cartridge CRUM error F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble
(MAGENTA)
Trouble content LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU Cause LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble. CLUD2 sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
Connector/harness trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
Replace the lift-up unit.
F2-77 Toner cartridge CRUM error

H2-00 Thermister open trouble
(YELLOW)
(TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Cause Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
harness.
Fusing unit not installed.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermister.
F2-78 Registration image density sensor
trouble (Transfer belt substrate reflec-
tion rate abnormality) H2-01 Thermister open trouble (TH_LM)

Cause Image density (registration) sensor trouble (Sensor Cause Thermister trouble.
sensitivity adjustment trouble). PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
harness. Fusing unit not installed.
Image density (registration) sensor dirt. Check & Remedy Replace the thermister.
Transfer belt dirt, scratch. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the image density (registration) sensor. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Clean the image density (registration) sensor. H2-02 Sub thermister open trouble (TH_US)
Clean or replace the transfer belt.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Connection trouble of the connector and the
Detail PCU harness.
Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time. Fusing unit not installed.
CLUD1 sensor trouble Check & Remedy Replace the thermister.
Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
of LUD1. H2-03 Compensation thermister open trou-
Replace the lift-up unit. ble (TH_UM_AD1)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble
harness.
Fusing unit not installed.

H3-00 Fusing section high temperature trou- H4-00 Fusing section low temperature trou-
ble (TH_UM) ble (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Thermister trouble.
level within the specified time from turning ON the
PCU PWB trouble
power relay.
Thermister trouble.
harness.
Heater lamp trouble.
Power unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Thermostat trouble.
heater lamp. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Power unit trouble.
Replace the thermister. Interlock switch trouble.
Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the power unit.
Replace the thermostat.
H3-01 Fusing section high temperature trou- Replace the power unit.
ble (TH_LM) Replace the interlock switch.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Trouble content Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermister trouble. H4-01 Fusing section low temperature trou-
PCU PWB trouble.Harness and connector
connection trouble. ble (TH_LM)
Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Trouble content
heater lamp. Detail PCU
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Replace the thermister. level within the specified time from turning ON the
Replace the PCU PWB. power relay.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Thermister trouble.
Replace the power unit. Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
H3-02 Fusing section high temperature trou- Connector, harness connection trouble.
ble (TH_US) Power unit trouble.
Interlock switch trouble.
Trouble content Replace the heater lamp.
Detail PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Replace the thermostat.
Thermister trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the power unit.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Replace the interlock switch.
harness. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Power unit trouble. heater lamp.
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
heater lamp.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Replace the thermister.

H4-02 Fusing section low temperature trou- H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach
ble (TH_US) jam

Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam
level within the specified time from turning ON the paper remains.)
power relay. POD1 sensor trouble.
Thermister trouble. Fusing unit installation trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Check the installing position of the fusing unit.
Power unit trouble. Replace the fusing unit.
Interlock switch trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermister. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the heater lamp. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. H7-10 Fusing low temperature recovery trou-
Replace the interlock switch.
ble (TH_UM_AD2).
heater lamp. Trouble content
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from stopping a job
H4-30 Thermister input circuit trouble due to fall in the fusing temperature.
(TH_UM) Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Trouble content Thermostat trouble.
Detail PCU Connector, harness connection trouble.
Cause The values of TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not Power unit trouble.
exceed the specified value (50 counts in AD value) Interlock switch trouble.
within the specified time from turning ON the Check & Remedy Replace the thermister.
HL_UM. Replace the heater lamp.
Thermister trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Heater lamp trouble. Replace the thermostat.
PCU PWB trouble Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Thermostat trouble. Replace the power unit.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the interlock switch.
Power unit trouble. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Interlock switch trouble heater lamp.
Replace the PCU PWB. H7-11 Fusing low temperature recovery trou-
ble (TH_LM)
Replace the interlock switch. Trouble content
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Detail PCU
heater lamp. Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. level within the specified time from stopping a job
due to fall in the fusing temperature.
Thermister trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Interlock switch trouble.
heater lamp.

H7-12 Fusing low temperature recovery trou- L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble
ble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Cause The lock signal Is not detected within 1 sec when
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified turning ON the paper feed motor when warming up,
level within the specified time from stopping a job canceling a jam.
due to fall in the fusing temperature. Paper feed motor trouble.
Thermister trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed
Thermostat trouble. motor.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the paper feed motor.
Power unit trouble. Check connection of the connectors and the
Interlock switch trouble. harness.
Replace the thermostat. L4-04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK)
Replace the power unit. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
heater lamp.
the developing motor.
Developing motor trouble.
L1-00 Scanner feed trouble PCU PWB trouble
Trouble content Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the
Detail SCU developing motor.
Cause Scanner feed is not completed within the specified Replace the developing motor.
time. Check connection of the connectors and the
Scanner unit trouble. harness.
SCU PWB trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Scanner control PWB trouble. Replace the developing motor.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the developing unit.
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Scanner motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. L4-05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR)
Replace the scanner unit.
Replace the SCU PWB. Trouble content
Detail PCU
harness.
Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
the developing motor.
Replace the scanner motor.
Developing motor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
L3-00 Scanner return trouble Developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the
Trouble content developing motor.
Detail SCU Replace the developing motor.
Cause Scanner return is not completed within the specified Check connection of the connectors and the
time. harness.
Scanner unit trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
SCU PWB trouble Replace the developing motor.
Scanner control PWB trouble. Replace the developing unit.
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Scanner motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Replace the scanner unit.
harness.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the scanner motor.

L4-06 Transfer unit lift trouble L4-30 MFP fan motor trouble
Trouble content When separating the primary transfer belt unit, Trouble content
change in the separation position sensor Detail MFP
characteristics is not detected within the specified Cause Fan motor trouble.
time. MFP PWB trouble.Harness and connector
Detail PCU connection trouble.
Cause Transfer unit position sensor trouble. PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Replace the fan motor.
harness. Replace the MFP PWB.
Transfer unit separation clutch operation trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Primary transfer belt unit is not installed. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the separating operation of the
transfer unit.
Install the primary transfer belt unit. L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble
Replace the transfer unit position sensor.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Trouble content
Replace the transfer unit separation clutch. Detail PCU
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time in the paper exit cooling fan operation.
L4-11 Shift motor trouble Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Trouble content harness.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the
Cause No change in the shifter home position sensor signal harness.
is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing. Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the
Shift motor trouble. fan.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the paper exit cooling fan.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Replace the PCU PWB.
harness.
Shifter home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation. L4-32 Power source cooling fan trouble
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter
home position sensor.
Replace the shift motor. Trouble content
Replace the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Harness and connector connection trouble. Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Replace the shifter home position sensor. specified time in the power cooling fan operation.
Power cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
L4-16 Fusing pressure release trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the
Trouble content fan.
Detail PCU Replace the power cooling fan.
Cause No change in the fusing pressure release sensor Replace the PCU PWB.
signal is detected within the specified time after Check/replace the connector or the harness.
turning ON the fusing pressure release motor.
Fusing pressure release sensor trouble.
Fusing pressure release motor trouble. L4-35 Fusing cooling fan trouble
Fusing pressure release level F, R trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Trouble content
harness. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Replace the fusing pressure release sensor. Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Replace the fusing pressure release motor. specified time in the fusing cooling fan operation.
Replace the fusing pressure release lever F, R. Fusing cooling fan trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble
Harness and connector connection trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the
fan.
Replace the fusing cooling fan.

L4-50 Process fan trouble L8-01 Full wave signal detection error

Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the Cause No full wave signal is detected.
specified time in the process fan operation. PCU PWB trouble
Process fan trouble. Power unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the Replace the power unit.
power. Check connection of the connectors and the
Replace the process fan. harness.
L8-02 Full wave signal error
L4-56 Rear cooling fan trouble Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is
Detail PCU detected.
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the (The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or
specified time in the rear cooling fan operation. 45Hz or less.)PCU PWB trouble.
Rear cooling fan trouble. Power unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness. Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
power. Replace the power unit.
Replace the rear cooling fan. Check connection of the connectors and the
Replace the PCU PWB. harness.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Check the power waveform.
L4-58 Ozone exhaust fan trouble L8-20 MFP PWB - Mother board communica-
tion error
Trouble content
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the Detail MFP
specified time in the ozone exhaust fan operation.
Cause Mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
Ozone exhaust fan trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the mother board.
Check & Remedy Check connection between the mother board and the
harness.
MFPC PWB.
Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the Check the earth line of the main unit.
power. Replace the MFPC PWB.
Replace the ozone exhaust fan. Replace the mother board.
PC-- Personal counter not detected
L6-10 Polygon motor trouble
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content
Cause The personal counter is not installed.
Detail PCU
The personal counter is not detected.
Cause The motor does not reach the specified rpm in 7 sec
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the
after starting rotation of the polygon motor.
harness.
Polygon motor trouble.
LSU control PWB trouble.
harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
U1-01 Battery trouble
motor.
Check connection of the connectors and the Trouble content Backup SRAM battery voltage fall.
harness. Detail MFP
Replace the polygon motor. Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
Replace the LSU. 2) Battery circuit abnormality
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Check & Check to confirm that the battery voltage is
Remedy about 2.0V or above.

U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error U2-23 MFP PWB SRAM memory individual
data check sum error
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum
Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble. error.
EEPROM socket contact trouble. Detail MFP
MFP PWB trouble. Cause The check sum value for individual data of the
Strong external noises. communication table and the sender registration
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM. does not match.
Replace the MFP PWB. MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
Check the power environment. MFP PWB trouble.
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data related
U2-05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents incon- to the content of check sum error.
sistency Since the registered contents are deleted, register
the deleted contents again.
Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Trouble content Replace the MFP PWB.
Detail MFP
Cause The HDD or the MFP PWB which differs from that
before turning OFF the power is installed. U2-24 MFP PWB SRAM memory user
HDD trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
authentication counter check sum
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. error
If there is backup data (export data by device
cloning), import it.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
U2-10 MFP PWB SRAM user authentication MFP PWB trouble.
index check sum error Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause SRAM user index information (user authentication
U2-30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufactur-
basic data) check sum error. ing No. data inconsistency
MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Transfer the user index information data in the HDD
to the SRAM. Cause Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved
Replace the MFP PWB. in the PCU PWB and that in the MFP PWB.
When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFP PWB, the
EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
U2-11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check MFP PWB trouble.
sum error PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Trouble content Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
mounted on the PWB before replacement is
Detail MFP
mounted on the new PWB.
Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
U2-50 HDD user authentication data check
sum error
U2-22 MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum Trouble content
error Detail MFP
Cause HDD trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Initialize the data (one-touch, group, program, etc.)
Cause The identifier which controls the communication
related to the check sum error by turning OFF/ON
management table stored in the SRAM and the FAX
the power.
soft switch is not detected correctly.
Since the registered contents are deleted, register
MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
the deleted contents again.
MFP PWB trouble.
Replace the HDD.
Check & Remedy Since the data of the communication management Replace the MFP PWB.
table and the FAX soft switch stored in the SRAM are
initialized when an error occurs, register the deleted
data again individually.

U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error U6-00 PCU PWB - Desk paper feed unit com-
munication error
Trouble content
Detail SCU Trouble content
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble. Detail PCU
SCU PWB trouble. Cause Error when testing the communication line after
EEPROM socket contact trouble. turning ON the power or canceling the simulation.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Replace the SCU PWB. Desk control PWB trouble.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. PCU PWB trouble
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the Strong external noises.
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel.
and the adjustment values.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Replace the desk control PWB.
U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Trouble content U6-01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble

Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble. Trouble content
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM. Detail PCU
SCU PWB trouble. Cause DLUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time
EEPROM socket contact trouble. when lift-up operation.
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM. DLUD1 sensor trouble.
Replace the SCU PWB. Desk control PWB trouble.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Lift unit trouble.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the Connection trouble of the connector and the
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data harness.
and the adjustment values. PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the DLDU1 sensor.
Replace the lift unit.
U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error Harness and connector connection trouble.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
U6-02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
PCU PWB trouble Trouble content
EEPROM socket contact trouble. Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. Cause DLUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time
Replace the PCU PWB. when lift-up operation.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. DLUD2 sensor trouble.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the Desk control PWB trouble.
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data Lift unit trouble.
and the adjustment values. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. harness.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the DLDU2 sensor.
U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the lift unit.
Trouble content Harness and connector connection trouble.
Detail PCU
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
PCU PWB trouble
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
and the adjustment values.

U6-09 LCC lift trouble U6-21 LCC paper transport motor trouble

Cause No change in the lift motor rotation sensor signal is Cause No change in the paper transport motor rotation
detected within the specified time after outputting the sensor signal is detected within the specified time
lift motor ON signal. after outputting the paper transport motor ON signal.
The lift motor rotation sensor signal varies though the The paper transport motor rotation sensor signal
lift motor is stopped. varies though the paper transport motor is stopped.
Lift motor rotation sensor trouble. Paper transport motor rotation sensor trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble LCC control PWB trouble.
Lift mechanism trouble. Mechanism trouble.
Lift motor trouble. Paper transport motor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness. harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the paper
sensor and the lift motor. transport motor.
Replace the lift motor rotation sensor. Replace the paper transport motor.
Replace the LCC control PWB. Replace the LCC control PWB.
Replace the lift mechanism. Replace the mechanism.
Replace the lift motor. Replace the paper transport motor.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
U6-22 LCC 24V power trouble

U6-10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport
motor trouble Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause The DC24V power is not supplied from the main unit
Detail PCU to the LCC.
Cause Desk paper feed motor trouble (motor lock, motor Connector, harness connection trouble.
rpm abnormality, overcurrent to the motor). LCC control PWB trouble.
Desk control PWB trouble. Power source unit trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness in the power
harness. line.
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk Replace the power unit.
transport motor. Replace the LCC control PWB.
Replace the desk paper feed motor.
Harness and connector connection trouble. U6-50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble
Trouble content
U6-20 PCU PWB - LCC communication error Detail PCU
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
Trouble content desk.
Detail PCU Desk control PWB trouble.
Cause Error when testing the communication line after Check & Remedy Install a desk which is proper for the main unit mode.
turning ON the power or canceling the simulation. Replace the desk control PWB.
LCC control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. U6-51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble
Improper combination between the main unit and the
Trouble content
LCC.
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
Check the connector and the harness in the
LCC.
communication line.
LCC control PWB trouble.
Replace the LCC control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Install a LCC which is proper for the main unit mode.
Replace the LCC control PWB.

2 : '09/Sep
U7-50 MFP PWB - Vendor machine commu- A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error
nication error
Trouble content
Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the Detail MFP
serial vendor. Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly
Detail MFP by interruption of the power during the version-up
Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine operation, etc.
specifications (SIMI26-3). ROM trouble.
Vendor machine trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
MFP PWB trouble. again.
Connector, harness connection trouble. ROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connector and the harness in the A0-10 MFP PWB ROM error
communication line. Change the specifications of the
vendor machine (SIM26-3). Replace the LCC control Trouble content
PWB.
Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the image ROM (color correction ROM).
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware versions of the MFP and the
U7-51 Vendor machine error image ROM (color correction ROM).
Trouble content
Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor) A0-11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP
Cause Serial vendor machine trouble. - PCU)
Check & Remedy Err.XX" is displayed on the operation panel of the
vendor. (XX is the detail code.) Trouble content
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail Detail MFP
code. Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
Check the connector and the harness in the the PCU.
communication line. Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
PCU.
UC-02 CPT - ASIC error

A0-12 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP
Trouble content - SCU)
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble (CPT-ASIC trouble) Trouble content
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB. Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the SCU.
UC-20 DOCC ASIC error Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
SCU.
Trouble content
Detail SCU 2
Cause SCU PWB trouble. A0-15 Conflict DSK boot version
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error Cause Firmware combination error between the DSK and
the Boot.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Check the combination between the DSK and the
Boot.
Detail MFP
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly
by interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc. A0-20 MFP firmware version and EEPROM
ROM trouble. data version inconsistency
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
again.
Trouble content
ROM trouble.
Detail MFP
Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version
and the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.

A0-21 PCU firmware version and EEPROM
data version inconsistency
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version
A0-22 SCU firmware version and EEPROM

data version inconsistency
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version

[9] MAINTENANCE
MX-3100N
Service Manual
1. Maintenance list
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean S: Replace U: Adjust : Lubricate
Color items
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
When 60 120 180 240 300 360 420 480 540 600 660 Block/Item No.
Section Part name
calling k k k k k k k k k k k (Only the
replacement
parts are described.)
photocon- Drum Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S
ductor MC unit { S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-2)
section Toner reception seal Mechanical -
Side seal F/R parts -
Cleaner blade Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-14)
MC cleaner rubber Mechanical S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [2]-68)
parts
Developing Toner filter Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-37)
section DV blade - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-22)
DV side seal F/R - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [23]-26,
[23]-15)
Developer (Y) - S S S S S S S S S S S
Developer (M) - S S S S S S S S S S S
Developer (C) - S S S S S S S S S S S
Bias pin/Connector Mechanical -
parts
Toner Toner cartridges Supply User replacement for every toner empty.
supply
section
Monochrome items
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Section Part name
replacement
photocon- Waste toner box Mechanical
ductor parts
section Drum Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S
MC unit { S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-2)
Toner reception seal Mechanical -
Side seal F/R parts -
Cleaner blade Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-14)
MC cleaner rubber Mechanical S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [2]-68)
parts
Developing Toner filter Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-37)
section DV blade - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-22)
S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [23]-26,
DV side seal F/R -
[23]-15)
Developer - S S S S S S S S S S S
Bias pin/Connector Mechanical -
parts
Toner Toner cartridges Supply User replacement for every toner empty.
supply
section
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Section Part name
replacement
LSU Dust-proof glass Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
section Belt cleaning base parts - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [2]-35)
Transfer Primary transfer Mechanical - S S S S S (P/G No.: [25]-18)
section cleaner blade parts
Primary transfer belt - S S S S S (P/G No.: [27]-13)
drive gear
Primary transfer belt - S S S S S (P/G No.: [26]-1)
MX-3100N MAINTENANCE 9 1
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Section Part name
replacement
Transfer Primary transfer belt Mechanical - { { { { {
section drive roller parts
Belt CL brush - { { { { {
Primary transfer belt - { { { { {
follower roller
Primary transfer belt - { { { { {
tension roller
PTC opposed roller - { { { { {
Primary transfer roller - S S S S S (P/G No.: [27]-9,
[28]-42)
PTC unit - S S S S S (P/G No.: [20]-502)
Secondary transfer - S S S (P/G No.: [29]-6)
idle gear
Secondary transfer - { { {
belt follower roller
belt
belt drive roller
idle shaft
roller
Pro-reg sensor - { { { { { { { { { { {
Transfer cleaner seal -
F/R
Primary transfer toner -
reception seal
Secondary transfer -
backup blade
Fuser Paper guides Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
section Non-contact parts S S S (P/G No.: [32]-37)
thermistor
Upper thermistor S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-46)
Lower thermistor S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-20)
Upper separation S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-11,
pawl/pawl spring [32]-12)
Lower separation S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-100,
pawl/pawl spring [33]-101)
Upper heat roller gear S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-30)
Upper heat roller S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-31)
bearing
Upper heat roller S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-32)
Lower heat roller S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-14)
bearing
Lower heat roller S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-15)
Gears
Fusing cleaning roller S S S S S S S S S S S
Fusing cleaning roller S S S S S S S S S S S
bearing
Discharge brush
Filter Ozone filter Mechanical S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [47]-40)
section Paper exit filter parts S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [37]-100)
Left cabinet filter { { { { { { { { { { {
Paper feed Pickup roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { {
section Paper feed roller parts { { { { { { { { { { {
Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { {
Torque limiter
Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { {
Sensors
Transport paper { { { { { { { { { { { {
guides
Paper PS follower roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { {
transport PS paper dust parts { S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [26]-58)
section removal cleaner
Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { {
Sensors
Transport paper { { { { { { { { { { { {
guides
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Section Part name
replacement
Duplex/ Discharge brush Mechanical
Paper exit Transport rollers parts { { { { { { { { { { {
section Sensors
Gears
Transport paper { { { { { { { { { { { {
guides
Drive Gears (Grease) Mechanical -
section Shaft earth sections parts -
(Conduction grease)
Belts -
Sensors
Scanner Mirror/Lens/Reflector/ Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
section CCD parts
Table glass/SPF glass { { { { { { { { { { { {
Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { { {
Rails
Drive belt/drive wire
Sensors
RSPF Paper feed roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
section Pickup roller parts { { { { { { { { { { { {
Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
Torque limiter
Discharge brush
Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { { {
Sensors
Belts
Gears
2. Details
A. Photoconductor section
Color items
Remark/Refer to the Parts
Guide.
When 60 120 180 240 300 360 420 480 540 600 660
No. Part name Block/Item No.
calling k k k k k k k k k k k
(Only the replacement
2 Drum Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S
3 MC unit { S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-2)
4 Toner reception seal Mechanical -
5 Side seal F/R parts -
6 Cleaner blade Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-14)
7 MC cleaner rubber Mechanical S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [2]-68)
parts
Monochrome items
Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Waste toner box Mechanical
parts
2 Drum Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S
3 MC unit { S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-2)
4 Toner reception seal Mechanical -
5 Side seal F/R parts -
6 Cleaner blade Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [24]-14)
7 MC cleaner rubber Mechanical S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [2]-68)
parts
1) Open the front cover. 5) Remove the MC cleaner rubber from the MC cleaner rod.
Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K
(monochrome).
2) Remove the waste toner box.

Maintenance: Check at every 100K. (Replace as necessary.)
* Be careful to prevent against dirt of the MC cleaner rubber.

1 (Prevent adhesion of the oils or the toner etc.)
6) Check that the lock is released as shown in (A). Loosen the
blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit.
2 * When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the
screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A).
A
B
3) Remove the MC cleaner rod.
7) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw.

PET
(1position for each color)
4) Insert the MC cleaner rod into the insertion port where the
1
cleaning guide label is attached, and clean the MC unit.
Maintenance: Clean at every call.
8) Pinch the knob and remove the development unit.
T
PE
PET
* Slide the rod back and forth 3 times to cleaning the MC unit.
If the improvement effect is not obtained, clean again.
If the improvement effect is not obtained by cleaning again,
replace the MC cleaner rubber to those spare.
9) Hold the lock lever, and pull out each color drum unit slowly, * Hold the both ends, rotate twice by hands in the direction
and support the lower section of the unit with hand to remove. shown in the figure. (For adapting the drum to the cleaning
blade.)
10) Remove the screws and remove the fixing shaft.

12) Remove the C-ring, lift the hook, and push the drum shaft.
Pull the drum shaft which extends to the opposite side until it is
caught, and rotate and remove the OPC drum.
11) Slide the OPC drum to the front side, and lift the drum rear
side, and remove the OPC drum from the hole in the front sec-
tion.
(monochrome).
13) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
* When replacing, apply stearic acid powder to the OPC drum.
* Don't touch the OPC drum surface. (excluding the area of

within 1cm from the both ends)
* Even if it wrapped with black paper, don't apply a hard pres-
sure.
* Apply the stearic acid powder to the whole surface of the
OPC drum.
14) Release the pawl, and remove the cover. Remove the MC unit. * When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached
Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K surface, and fit with the reference.
(monochrome).
00.3mm 00.3mm
NOTE: Attach the cover so that there is no float on the opposite
side of the pawl.
1 3
00.3mm 00.3mm
17) Remove the screw, and remove the DC holding plate and the
DCH lens.
15) Remove the toner receiving seal.

Maintenance: Check at every 60K (color) or every 100K
(monochrome). (Replace as necessary.)
18) Remove the screws, and remove the cleaner blade.

(monochrome).
* When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached
surface, and fit with the reference.
Reference line
Reference
line
16) Remove the side seal F/R.

Maintenance: Check at every 60K (color) or every 100K
(monochrome). (Replace as necessary.)
B. Developing section
Color items
Guide.
When 60 120 180 240 300 360 420 480 540
No. Part name 600k 660k Block/Item No.
calling k k k k k k k k k
1 Toner filter Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-37)
2 DV blade - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-22)
3 DV side seal F/R - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [23]-26, [23]-15)
4 Developer (Y) - S S S S S S S S S S S
Developer (M) - S S S S S S S S S S S
Developer (C) - S S S S S S S S S S S
5 Bias pin/Connector Mechanical -
parts
Monochrome items
Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Toner filter Supply - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-37)
2 DV blade - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [22]-22)
3 DV side seal F/R - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [23]-26, [23]-15)
4 Developer - S S S S S S S S S S S
5 Bias pin/Connector Mechanical
-
parts
3
4
5
5 3
1) Remove the front cabinet. 5) Pinch the knob and remove the development unit.

6) Remove the screws.
3) Check that the lock is released as shown in (A).

Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit. 7) Hold the sections A, and remove the DV cover in the arrow
* When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the direction (B).
screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A).
A
A
B
A
4) Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw. 8) Take out the developer.
9) Remove the cover and the toner filter. * When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached
Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K surface, and fit with the reference so that the DV side seals
(monochrome). F and R are inserted between the DV cover R(A) and the DV
blade (B).
00.3mm
0 0.5mm
0 0.3mm 0 0.3mm
B
10) Remove the DV blade.
(monochrome).
12) Insert the new developer.

(monochrome).
* When attaching, use alcohol to remove oil from the attached

surface, and fit with the reference.
00.3mm
00.3mm
11) Remove the DV side seal F/R.

Maintenance: Replace at every 60K (color) or every 100K NOTE: When replacing developer, use an extreme care not to drop
(monochrome). developer on the drive section (marked with { ).
NOTE: Note for cleaning the developing unit If the developing unit
is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower with much devel-
oper in the developing unit, static electricity may be accu-
mulated in the unit. In order to prevent against this, note
the following items.
* metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller
surface when transporting developer or removing foreign
material from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to
the magnet roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when
handling the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as
developer attached to the magnet roller as far as possi-
ble.
NOTE: When cleaning the developing unit with an air blower [duct]
Before cleaning with an air duct, remove developer from
the unit as far as possible, and ground the magnet roller
rear side cored bar as shown in the figure below and clean
the unit with an air blower. (Do not pinch the grounding wire
with a crocodile clip connector in order to prevent against
damage on the cored bar.)
Magnet roller
rear side cored bar
NOTE: After supplying developer, do not tilt the development unit.
C. Toner supply section
Color items
Guide.
When 60 120 180 240 300 360 420 480 540 600 660
1 Toner cartridges Supply User replacement for every toner empty.
Monochrome items
Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Toner cartridges Supply User replacement for every toner empty.
1) Open the front cover.
2) Lift the lock lever, and pull the toner cartridge out slowly and
horizontally.
Maintenance: Replacement is made by the user at every toner
empty.
D. LSU section

Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Dust-proof glass Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Cleaning base parts - S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [2]-35)
1) Open the front cover. 5) Remove the cleaning base from the LSU cleaning rod.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K.
3) Remove the LSU cleaning rod from the front cover.
4) Insert the LSU cleaning rod into the insertion port and move it
forward and backward 2 or 3 times to clean the dust proof
glass.
Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.
PET
PET
E. Transfer section

Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Primary transfer Mechanical - S S S S S (P/G No.: [25]-18)
cleaner blade parts
2 Primary transfer belt - S S S S S (P/G No.: [27]-13)
drive gear
3 Primary transfer belt - S S S S S (P/G No.: [26]-1)
4 Primary transfer belt - { { { { {
drive roller
5 Belt CL brush - { { { { {
follower roller
tension roller
8 PTC opposed roller - { { { { {
9 Primary transfer roller - S S S S S (P/G No.: [27]-9, [28]-42)
10 PTC unit - S S S S S (P/G No.: [20]-502)
11 Secondary transfer - S S S (P/G No.: [29]-6)
idle gear
12 Secondary transfer - { { {
belt follower roller
belt
belt drive roller
idle shaft
roller
17 Pro-reg sensor - { { { { { { { { { { {
18 Transfer cleaner seal -
F/R
19 Primary transfer toner -
reception seal
20 Secondary transfer -
backup blade
18
1
7 3
18
6
8
9
9 9
5 9 4
8
13
14
16
20
11
12
15
17
10 17
1) Open the front cover. 5) Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that
the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum posi-
tioning unit.
NOTE: Failure to complete this step may damage the primary
transfer belt.
A
B
2
6) Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer
unit.
3) Open the right door.
NOTE: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
released manually, turn on the power again after comple-
tion of the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes
the transfer roller to return it to the home position.
7) Remove the screws, and remove the maintenance cover.
4) Loosen the blue screw.
8) Remove the screw, and tilt the cleaner unit and remove it. 11) Remove the parts.
12) Remove the screws, and remove the paper guide.
9) Remove the screws, and remove the primary transfer cleaner

blade.
10) Remove the screws, and remove the primary transfer belt
drive gear.
2 : '09/Sep
13) Fold the transfer frame and lift the rear side and put the trans- 15) Clean the belt CL brush.
fer unit straight. Remove the primary transfer belt. Maintenance: Clean at every 200K.
16) Clean the primary transfer belt follower roller (A) and the pri-
mary transfer belt tension roller (B).
[Installing method]
Make the primary transfer belt into triangle. Attach the primary
transfer belt to the transfer frame.
B
2
Lot number
(Front surface
of the belt)
17) Disengage the engagement on the front side, and remove the
primary transfer roller.
NOTE: When installing, be careful not to bring the primary transfer
belt into contact with the transfer unit frame and the gears.
Use care not to touch the primary transfer belt surface with
bare hand.
When installing, put the unit so that the lot number speci-
2 fied on the front surface of the belt is on the rear side.
14) Clean the primary transfer belt drive roller.
18) After replacing the primary transfer belt, apply Kynar. 21) Remove each parts, and remove the secondary trasnfer idle
NOTE: Do not touch the primary transfer belt with bare hands. Be gear (A).
careful not to scratch or fold it. Maintenance: Replace at every 300K.
a) Place the primary transfer unit on a flat surface with the
top surface upward, and apply Kynar (UKOG-0123FCZZ)
to all the top surface of the belt.
NOTE:
When placing the primary transfer unit on a flat surface, 22) Remove the secondary belt transfer frame.
use a flat table and be careful not to scratch the belt and
not to attach a foreign material.
NOTE:
When installing the cleaner unit, rotate the primary trans-
fer belt so that the section where Kynar was applied
comes to the blade edge section, and install it.
b) After inserting into the machine, make three sheets of
background copy on A3 paper.
19) Remove the PTC unit.
* When replacing the PTC unit, use SIM24-4 to reset the PTC
counter.
23) Remove each parts, and remove the secondary follower roller.
20) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
3 24) Remove the secondary transfer belt.

25) Clean the secondary transfer belt drive roller and the second-
ary transfer idle shaft.
26) Remove the bearing on the front side, and remove the second-
ary transfer roller.
27) Push up the shutter, and clean the pro-reg sensor.

F. Fuser section

Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Paper guides Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Non-contact parts S S S (P/G No.: [32]-37)
thermistor
3 Upper thermistor S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-46)
4 Lower thermistor S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-20)
5 Upper separation S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-11, [32]-12)
pawl/pawl spring
6 Lower separation S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-100, [33]-101)
pawl/pawl spring
7 Upper heat roller gear S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-30)
8 Upper heat roller S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-31)
bearing
9 Upper heat roller S S S S S (P/G No.: [32]-32)
10 Lower heat roller S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-14)
bearing
11 Lower heat roller S S S S S (P/G No.: [33]-15)
12 Gears
13 Fusing cleaning roller S S S S S S S S S S S
14 Fusing cleaning roller S S S S S S S S S S S
bearing
15 Discharge brush
5 5
2
5
6
8
6 7
1
15
6 9
6
4
8
10
14
11
13
10
14
1) Open the right door. 5) Remove the screws, and remove the cover. Remove the con-
nector and the screws, then remove the non-contact ther-
mistor.
2) Remove the blue screw. Release the lock, and remove the fus-
ing unit. 6) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the upper
thermistor.
3 Maintenance: Replace at every 200K.
2
1
1
3) Clean the paper guide.

Maintenance: Clean at every 100K. 7) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
8) Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the Lower
thermistor.
2 : '09/Sep
9) Remove the screws, and remove the paper guide. 13) Open the paper guide.
14) Remove the fusing cleaning roller and the fusing cleaning
10) Remove the screws, and remove the stay. roller bearing.
NOTE: When installing or removing, be careful not to scratch the
heat roller.
11) Remove the upper separation pawl and the pawl spring.
NOTE: Make sure to install the CL roller in correct position when 2

reassemble the Fusing unit after the maintenance, other-
wise the performance of the CL roller will be insufficient
and may cause cleaning failure.
[Correct position and wrong position of the CL roller]
<Correct> The CL roller is on the lower heat roller.
12) Check the discharge brush.

Maintenance: Check at every 100K.
<Wrong> The CL roller is under the lower heat roller.

* Normal cleaning performance may not be acquired in
this state.
15) Remove the lower separation pawl and the pawl spring. 19) Remove the screws and remove the lamp holder. Remove the
Maintenance: Replace at every 200K. upper heater lamp.
NOTE: When attaching, fit the convex section of the upper heater
lamp with the hole in the cover.

20) Remove the connector of the lower heater lamp.

21) Remove the screws and the clamp. Remove the screws and
the lamp holder. Remove the lower heater lamp.
NOTE: When installing, wire so that the harness of the lower heat
lamp not come in contact with the boss (A).
18) Remove the connector of the upper heater lamp.
22) Remove the screws to open the fusing unit. 26) Remove the lower heat roller unit.
23) Remove the upper heat roller unit.
27) Remove the stopper from the lower heat roller, and remove the
lower heat roller bearing.
24) Remove the stopper from the upper heat roller, and remove
the upper heat roller gear and the upper heat roller bearing.
Maintenance: Replace at every 200K. 28) Apply grease (BARRIERTA grease: JFE552) to the lower heat
roller.
Maintenance: Lubricate at every 100K.
25) Apply grease (BARRIERTA grease: JFE552) to the upper heat

roller.
Maintenance: Lubricate at every 100K.
G. Filter section

Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Ozone filter Mechanical S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [47]-40)
2 Paper exit filter parts S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [37]-100)
3 Left cabinet filter { { { { { { { { { { {
H. Paper feed section

Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Pickup roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Paper feed roller parts { { { { { { { { { { {
3 Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Torque limiter
5 Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { {
6 Sensors
7 Transport paper { { { { { { { { { { { {
guides
1
2
4
5 6
6
6 6
6
3
2
6 6
1 1 5
6 6
5
2
6
4 4
6 6
3 3
5 5
1) Remove the pickup cover. 5) Remove the paper guide.
6) Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
2) Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
(b).
(B).
3) Open the maintenance cover, remove the separation roller. 7) Remove the separation roller.
Maintenance: Clean at every 100K. Maintenance: Clean at every 100K.
4) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
I. Paper transport section

Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 PS follower roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { {
2 PS paper dust parts { S S S S S S S S S S S (P/G No.: [26]-58)
removal cleaner
3 Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Sensors
5 Transport paper { { { { { { { { { { { {
guides
3
1
4
4
3
J. Duplex/Paper exit section

Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Discharge brush Mechanical
2 Transport rollers parts { { { { { { { { { { {
3 Sensors
4 Gears
5 Transport paper { { { { { { { { { { { {
guides
3 3
1
3
2
2
1
3
3
1
2
3
3
2
3
K. Drive section

Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Gears (Grease) Mechanical -
2 Shaft earth sections parts -
(Conduction grease)
3 Belts -
4 Sensors
4 3 4
1
(FLOIL G313S)
2
(FLOIL GE-676)
1
3 (HANARL FL955R)
L. Scanner section

Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Mirror/Lens/Reflector/ Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
CCD parts
2 Table glass/SPF glass { { { { { { { { { { { {
3 Scanner lamp { { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Rails
5 Drive belt/drive wire
6 Sensors
4 4
2
2
4
5
6
5
5
1
1
1
M. RSPF section

Guide.
When 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100
1 Paper feed roller Mechanical { { { { { { { { { { { {
2 Pickup roller parts { { { { { { { { { { { {
3 Separation roller { { { { { { { { { { { {
4 Torque limiter
5 Discharge brush
6 Transport rollers { { { { { { { { { { { {
7 Sensors
8 Belts
9 Gears
8
7 6
4
2
1
7
3
6
7
5
7
1) Open the paper feed unit.
2) Remove the paper guide.
3) Remove the holder guide, and remove the paper feed roller
and the pickup roller.
4) Remove the cover and remove the separation roller.

3. Other related items d. Drum cartridge system counters
A. Maintenance timing display Print job

The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when Code Content Enable/
Disable
each counter reaches the set value. The relationship between the
DK The drum cartridge print counter (K) reaches 100,000 Enable
messages and the counters is shown blow.
sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the
(1) (Maintenance timing) (Frameless) drum (K) reaches 840K.
DC The drum cartridge print counter (C) reaches 60,000 Enable
a. Maintenance counter
drum (C) reaches 840K.
Print job
DM The drum cartridge print counter (M) reaches 60,000 Enable
Code Content Enable/
Disable
drum (M) reaches 840K.
TA When the maintenance counter (total) reaches 90% of Enable
DY The drum cartridge print counter (Y) reaches 60,000 Enable
the set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-
38 is print stop).
drum (Y) reaches 840K.
When the maintenance counter (total) reaches the set
value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-38 is After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-7 (Drum
print allowing).
counters (number of the drum print counter, accumulated travel-
CA When The maintenance counters (color) reaches Enable
ing distance of the drum) clear).
90% of the set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of
SIM26-38 is print stop). e. Developer cartridge system counters
When The maintenance counters (color) reaches the
set value of SIM21-1 (When the setting of SIM26-38 is Print job
print allowing). Code Content Enable/
AA WhenThe maintenance counters (both of total and Enable Disable
color) reaches 90% of the set value of SIM21-1 VK The developer print counter (K) reaches 100,000 Enable
(When the setting of SIM26-38 is print stop). sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the
When The maintenance counters (both of total and developer (K) reaches 840K.
color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1 (When the VC The developer print counter (C) reaches 60,000 Enable
setting of SIM26-38 is print allowing). sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the
developer (C) reaches 840K.
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Mainte-
VM The developer print counter (M) reaches 60,000 Enable
nance counters (total, color) clear). sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the
b. Transfer unit system counters developer (M) reaches 840K.
VY The developer print counter (Y) reaches 60,000 Enable
Print job sheets, or the accumulated number of rotations of the
Code Content Enable/ developer (Y) reaches 840K.
Disable
TK1 The primary transfer unit print counter reaches Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-5 (Devel-
200,000 sheets. oper counters (number of the developer print counter, accumu-
TK2 The secondary transfer unit print counter reaches Enable lated traveling distance of the developer) clear).
300,000 sheets. (2) [Maintenance timing] (Framed)
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Primary a. Maintenance counter
and secondary transfer unit counters (number of the transfer unit
print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the transfer unit, Print job
days of use of the transfer unit) clear). Code Content Enable/
Disable
c. Fusing unit counter TA The maintenance counters (total) reaches the set Disable
value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to Print
Print job Disable.
CA The maintenance counters (color) reaches the set Disable
Disable
value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to Print
FK1 The fusing unit print counter reaches 200,000 sheets. Enable Disable.
AA The maintenance counters (both of total and color) Disable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Fusing
reaches the set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is
unit counters (number of the fusing unit print counter, days of use
set to Print Disable.
of the fusing unit) clear).
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Mainte-
nance counters (total, color) clear).
(3) [Check the waste toner box.] (Framed)
Print job
Disable
- Waste toner full Disable
After detection of the waste toner full, reset the full detection by
opening/close of the front door.
*Firmware types
[10] FIRMWARE UPDATE
MX-3100N
Service Manual
Flash ROM1 CONTENTS
MAIN ALL The following All the contents
1. Outline BODY ICU (PROG1) ANIME
BOOT MAIN
A. Cases where update is required CONFIG
ROM update is required in the following cases: ESCP FONT
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. UNI CODE
XIO FONT
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the
PROFILE
machine.
ICU (PROG2) SPDL
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for
LANG
repair to the machine.
GRPH
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be WEB HELP
repaired. MAIN
IMG-ASIC IMG DATA ROM
B. Notes for update
SCU SCU (MAIN)
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update PCU PCU (MAIN)
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROMs FAX1 FAX1 (MAIN)
installed in the other PWBs including options. Some combinations OPTION 1K FINISHER FINISHER_1K (MAIN)
of each ROMs versions may cause malfunctions of the machine. INNER FINISHER FINISHER_INNER (MAIN)
LCC A4 LCC_A4 (MAIN)
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware DESK DESK (MAIN)
There are following methods of update of the firmware. PUNCH PUNCH (MAIN)
1) Firmware update using media
2) Firmware update using FTP
3) Firmware update using Web page
4) Emergency update (incase of an HDD breakdown)
2. Update procedure
A. Firmware update using media
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port
that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the
media or USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
Firmware.sfu USB memory
Firmware.sfu The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
*1:
Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory
beforehand.
The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function
cannot be used.
MX-3100N FIRMWARE UPDATE 10 1

(1) Firmware update procedure from the USB memory 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]
The firmware update executes by SIM49-01. becomes clear. Press [YES] to start the update of selected
firemware.
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware
into the main unit.

2) Enter the SIM49-01. Press the key of the file to be updated. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
The screen transfers to the update screen. &21),* &855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 &855(1783'$7('72

,&8%2276 &855(1783'$7('72
6,08/$7,2112 /$1*8$*( &855(1783'$7('72

7(67 &/26(
*5$3+,& &855(1783'$7('72
),50:$5(83'$7(XVEEG
6/,67 &855(1783'$7('72
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
3&8%227 &855(1783'$7('72
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
3&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.0$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 &855(1783'$7('72
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE

UPDATE" title by 20 steps.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
6 (
* The number of key changes according to the number of the 5(0$,16)25 0,187(6
&$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted.
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A STORAGE FIRMWARE
STORED ON [OK]" is displayed on the screen. Insert the
media or USB memory and push the [OK] key to open the
file. If the media have not been inserted and [OK] key is
pushed, the next screen does not appear and the screen
waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB memory is
pulled out on the file list screen, the error is detected by the At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the
[FILE] key pressing, and the first screen appears. screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated displayed.
will be shown for each firmware respectively. 6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
played.

6,08/$7,2112

7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
),50:$5(83'$7(
&21),* &855(1783'$7('72 &203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
,&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2276 &855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*( &855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,& &855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 &855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 &855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.0$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 &855(1783'$7('72
2.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Exit the simulation mode and turn off the power.
4) Select the key of the firmware to be updated. The key will be Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
highlighted. (In this screen, [CONFIG] and [ICU(BOOTM)] are upgraded successfully.
selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] key appears.
7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] is gray out and played.
cannot be pressed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
6,08/$7,2112 (55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
7(67 &/26( ,&803&86&8
),50:$5(83'$7(
&21),* &855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2276 &855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*( &855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,& &855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 &855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 &855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227 &855(1783'$7('72 2.
'(6.0$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 &855(1783'$7('72
* When the power supply is turned off due to a black out etc. while
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
updating or when the update terminated abnormally, a part of the
main program stored in HDD may be damaged and may not
* Press the selected key again to release the selection. booted normally.
* Press [ALL] key to select all items. In this case, the emergency update described later must be exe-
cuted.

B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware iden-
tifier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.112.83
C. Firmware update using the Web page

An Web browser (service technicians Web page) is used to update the firmware.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
special firmware upgrade page appears. pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the [Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update. The browser will shift to the following screen.
/:0
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-

tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.

D. Emergency update (incase of an HDD 5) Check the update result.
breakdown) When writing the program both to the HDD and to the Flash
ROM is normally completed, the following message is dis-
The HDD of this machine stores the main program along with the
played.
sophisticated variations.
When, therefore, the HDD breaks down, or when the HDD must be
replaced with another HDD, or when the main program is damaged
by turning OFF the power during the firmware updating, the firm- EmergencyUpdateMode
ware (main program) must be rewritten into the HDD by the follow- Update Succeeded
ing procedures. It is called the emergency update.
[Conditions where the emergency update is required]
The emergency update is required in the following cases:
1) "Main Program Error" is displayed on the panel. If writing to either of the HDD or the Flash ROM is failed, the
It means that the data are destroyed and that replacement of following message is displayed.
the HDD is not required. The problem can be settled by execu-
tion of the emergency update only.
2) "HDD Trouble (E7-03)" is displayed on the panel. EmergencyUpdateMode
It means a HDD breakdown. The HDD must be replaced with a Update Failed
new one, and the emergency update must be executed.
* When U2-05 (HDD/EEPROM/SRAM abnormality) or U2-50
(HDD data abnormality related to IMS) occurs, execute SIM16
only, and there is no need to execute the emergency update. In this case, if Update Failed is displayed, it may the HDD
[Environment necessary for the emergency update] has been broken down probably. Replace the HDD with a new
1) The MFP with the HDD where the firmware is rewritten one, and execute the emergency update again.
2) The USB memory which stores the firmware for the emer- 6) Turn OFF the main power.
gency upgrade. 7) Remove the USB memory from the USB port.
File name: emupdate_p2.sfu 8) Turn ON the main power.
* The firmware must be stored in the root folder of the USB 9) Check the system operates normally.
memory. [Note]
[Emergency update procedures] It takes about 6 minutes for the emergency update.
1) Insert the USB memory which stores the firmware for the Never turn OFF the main power until the emergency update is
emergency update into the USB port. completed.
2) Turn on the main power. When the emergency update is completed, be sure to remove
The firmware for the emergency update in the USB memory is the USB memory for the emergency update. The machine does
automatically recognized to start reading the USB memory. not boot normally with the USB memory inserted.
It takes about 1 minute, and the booting animation is displayed
during this period.
3) Check to confirm that "EmergencyUpdateMode" is displayed
on the panel.
After that, the process is automatically executed.
EmergencyUpdateMode
4) Check the procedure.

When the process is going on normally, the following message
is displayed.
EmergencyUpdateMode
Updating ....10%

1.
PTC UNIT
MX-3100N
PTC_HEATER
RSPF UNIT
2TC PTC_HV
SPPD1 SOCD
STMPS
SGS (OPTION) SPLS1
DSW_F WTNM 1TNFD
DERIVERY UNIT FUFM RCFM
SPPD2 SCOV
SPFM SPPD4 SPLS2
POD1
SPPD3 SPED
TONER_K UNIT TONEIR_C UNT TONER_M UNIT TONER_Y UNIT SPRM SPPD5 SPWS
There is a standards
Block diagram
POD2 POFM_F 1TUD_K 1TUD_CL setting model

Only Japan
DVCRUM_K DVCRUM_C DVCRUM_M DVCRUM_Y SPFC SRRC
OPTION
RSPF
TFD2 POFM_R PWB
PROCESS DRIVE UNIT FAX1
HLPCD
HPOS OSM
A. SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM
SCANNER UNIT
TM-DRV Option
PWB
PRM
DHPD_K Option
POM FUM ADUM_L Option
KEYBORD KEYBORD
TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y AUDITOR
CARD
1TURC READER PNC
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION
DHPD_CL DVM_CL USB USB USB

FUSER UNIT DVM_K CONV CONV CN CL
PWB PWB PWB ORS_LED
RRM
TH1_FU HL1_U
CL INVERTER
PWB OCSW
OPERATION UNIT
SCNC
DL_K DL_C DL_M DL_Y
TH2_FU HL2_L PWB
USB TOUCH
CCD ORS-PD
HUB PANEL
PWB
PWB
DV_K UNIT DV_C UNIT DV_M UNIT DV_Y UNIT LVDS
TH3_FU HL3_U PWB
REGIST SENSOR UNIT
MIM LCD
TCS_K TCS_C TCS_M TCS_Y INVERTER
PWB
HL4_U REGS_F
MOTHER-
or MOTHER MHPS
HUB
PWB
DVTYP_K DVTYP_C DVTYP_M DVTYP_Y PWB OPE
PS UNIT PWB
REGS_R
POWER SW
PPD1 PWB
PCSS
DSW_R ITC MC OZFM PSFM2
MOTHER
PPD2
PCU
PWB
RIGHT DOOR UNIT CSS1 CSS2 PSFM
MFPFM
HDD
APPD1 POD3
PAPER FEED DRIVE UNIT MFPC
OPTION LSU UNIT
MX-3100N ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 1

PWB
CCFM
FAX2
APPD2 TFD3
PAPER FEED 1 PAPER FEED 2
UNIT UNIT LD PWB
CLUM1 CLUM2
Service Manual
LSUSS
RD I/F
PWB OPTION LD_K
PWB
HL
DSW_ADU CPUC1 CPUC2 CPFD1 CPFD2 COINVENDER
PWB
LD_C
PWB
MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT FIN 1K
CPFC CPFM CLUD1 CLUD2
DESK LCC FIN INNER LSU CNT
PWB LD_M
MPWD MPLD1 PWB
CPED1 CPED2 DH_DESK DH_DESK
PFM DCPS TH1_LSU
LD_Y
MPED MPUC PWB
CSPD1 CSPD2
BD_K
PWB
MPFD MTOP1 MPFS DHSW
DSW_C AC
DRIVER MAIN PWB PGM
PWB
TH/HUD_M MTOP2 MPGS MSW
WH
PWB
DH1
AC IN
OPTION Standards : Only Japan

(1)
USB HOST
SATA2 TYPE-A CN LCD Pannel SCANNER Control
HDD (FRONT)
LVDS System (SCU)
SATA Compact
CN Flash
USB Device
TYPE-B CN SATA-IDE
Bridge
USB HOST
TYPE-A CN
(REAR)
SYSTEM Memory
DDR2 DIMM SPD USB2.0 SATA SATA
DIP USB
Device SWITCH
Interface Interface SWITCH
SLOT Controller 0 1 USB2.0
B. MFP CONTROLLER PWB
Host
Controller
MX-2600N/2600G/3100N/3100G
SDRAM SDRAM
DDR/ Cont roller
DDR2 64Mbx2 PCU
Giga IF
HDD ASIC
LAN JACK RTC
RTC
BitEther GMII Controller
RJ45
PHY GbE
MAC PCI-Express UART
PCI- Interface Interface
Express (4Lane) (x10)
Interface
(4lane)
I2C 1
I2C 2
SOC LCDC
Cont roller
Cont roller
Local-Bus
PCI-
Interface
D-SUB9 RS232C Express
LEVEL CON. Interface
RS232C MPC8533E (4lane)
FAX (1st)
Local Bus
Interrupt
Controller
Controller
Programmable
FPDLINK
Transmitt er
256Kbit
EEPROM
I2C1
I2C2
UART
Controller
Controller
Receiver
FPDLINK
LSU Controller
FPDLINK
(LSUC)
Transmitt er
LVDS
Board to Board Connector
Receiver
CPLD
PCI-
5V FAN FAN Controller Express SCAN LSU
Interface

PCI Express ACRE
ROM FLASH
Clock
Generater
MFP ASIC
Local
Bus
DDR/DDR2
Video In Memory
Out Controlller
SRAM
4Mbit
FAX PROGROM & OPT
(2nd) Local Memory
FLASH DIMM I2C DDR2 DIMM
PIC
CN
SLOT Micon.
MFPC Mother
2
(2)
2
USB HOST
SATA2 TYPE-A CN
(FRONT)
LCD Pannel SCANNER Control
HDD
LVDS SystemSCU)
: '09/Sep
MX-2301N
SATA Compact
CN Flash
USB Device
TYPE-B CN SATA- IDE
Bridge
USB HOST
TYPE-A CN
(REAR)
SYSTEM Memory
DDR2 DIMM SPD USB2.0 SATA SATA
DIP USB
Device Switch
Interface Interface SWITCH
SLOT Controller USB2.0
Host
Controller
SDRAM
DDR/ Controller
DDR2 PCU
HDD ASIC
LAN JACK IF RTC
BitEther GMII RTC
Controller
RJ45
PHY GbE
MAC PCI-Express UART
PCI- Interface Interface
Express (4Lane) (10
Interface
(4lane)
I2C 1
I2C 2
SOC LCDC
Controller
Controller
PCI- Local-Bus
Interface
D-SUB9 Express
Interface
LEVEL CON. (4lane)
MPC8533E FAX (1st)
Local Bus
Interrupt
Controller
Controller
Programable
FPDLINK
Transmitter
256Kb
EEPROM
I2C1
I2C2
Controller
UART
Controller
Receiver
FPDLINK
LSU Controller
LSUC)
FPDLINK
Transmitter
Boad to Board Connector
LVDS
Receiver
CPLD
PCI-
5V FAN FAN Controller Express SCAN LSU
Interface

PCI Express ACRE
ROM FLASH
Clock MFP ASIC
Generater
Local
Bus
DDR/DDR2
Video In Memory
Out Controlller
SRAM
4M
FAX PROGRAM & OPT

(2nd) Local Memory
CN
FLASH DIMM I2C DDR2 DIMM PIC
BOOTPROGROM Mem.
SLOT Micon.
BOOTPROGROM Mem.
BOOTPROGROM Mem.
BOOTPROGROM Mem.
BOOTPROGROM Mem.
MFPC Mother
DC Motor Control
DV Motor BK(DVM_K)
DV Motor CL(DVM_CL) DC Motor Control
IC30 Paper Feed Motor (CPFM)
Fuser unit
C. PCU PWB
IC46 or IC47 I2C Bus EEPROM HV

(64kbit) HL control MC / TC unit
RESET IC HL_UM/LM/US/UW Stepping Motor control
AddressBus[20:0] Pout Motor(POM) / ADU Motor(ADUML) / FAN Motor Control
FLASH ROM Shifter Motor(OSM) / PS FAN (PSFM) /
DataBus[15:0] (16Mbit) Resist Motor(RRM) / PSF Motor(PFM) / Ozone FAN (OZFM) /
X1 IC44 Fuser Motor(FUM) / PoutFAN (POFM_F/POFM_R)
Xtal Spread Toner Motor (TNM_K/C/M/Y)
19.6608MHz Spectrum
3-wired serial
IC31 Drum Lamp
Not Mount SRAM (DL_K/C/M/Y)
(1Mbit)
Sensor Input
POD1/ HLPCD
APPD1 / APPD2 / Sensor Input
1TUD_K / 1TUD_CL Coin Vendor
IC28
DC Power PWM Drum Lamp Open Detect (Optional)
PMC ASIC
Supply FW CLOCK DLOPEN_Y/M/C/K CV_CLCOPY /
I2C Bus CRUM HV Error Detect CV_COPY
CRUM_K/C/M/Y MC_BK_ERR /CL
/PTC_ERR
IC39 IC34
CPU I/O ASIC
Load control Output
H8S/2373
MPGS / CPUC1 / CPUC2/
To MFPC IC35 PCSS / CPFC / LSUSS1
UART
Via Mother I/O GA MPUC / MPFS / 1TURC
I2C Bus
Sensor Input
CSS1 / CPED2 / CSS2 /
PTC CPED1 / MPFD /
HEATER TFD2 / 1TNFD / WENDD / W INID Sensor Input
Motor Lock Detect CPFD1 / CPFD2 / HPOS / PPD1 /
Load Control Output POFM_LD1-2 / FAN_LD2-3 / DVM_CL_LD / DHPD_CL / DHPD_K /
Coin vendor DVM_K_LD /CPFM_LD / FUM_LD /OZFM_LD POD3 / POD2 /
To LSU (Optional) IC10
UART Fuser Thermistor open detect DSW_F / DSW_R / DSW_C /
Via Mother D/A Conv
THOPEN_UM / LM / US CLUD1 / CLUD2 /

(TCS/REGS cont)
PTC Heater Open Detect CSPD1 / CSPD2 /
IC22 / IC24 / IC25
PTCHT_OPEN
MUX
Option detect
HC151x3
RES_DSK_in / RES_LCC_in / RES_INS_in
Optional Fuse open detect (OEM model only) FAN Motor
TNCRU_C/M/Y/K Process Cooling Fan
RD I/F PWB (PCSFM/PCSFM2)
UART MUX
LCC Sensor Input
HC151
MPFD / DSW_ADU / TFD3 /
MPLD / MTOP1 / MTOP2 / MPED
Sensor Input Syncronous Motor
FINISHER UART PPD2
Waste Toner Motor(WTNM)
Analog Input Analog Input

DESK UART IC21 Temp/Hum sensor(TH_M/HUD_M) Fuser Themistor(TH_UM/LM/US) DC Motor
Analog LSU Thermistor(TH1_LSU) Toner Detector(TCS_K/C/M/Y) Lift Up Motor
MUX DV detector(DVTYP_C/M/Y/K) Process Cont.CL sensor(PCS_CL) (CLUM1 / CLUM2)
Multi-bypass tray width sensor(MPWD) Process Cont.BK & Resist sensor(REGS_F/R)
D. SCANNER CONTROL PWB
3.3V
1.8V
CCD-F
(Machine side) Tr
10V Tr
Tr Image data
AFE
3line color CCD Tr
TCD2716ADG Tr line buf
AFE_CS SCNcnt
Tr Oscillator 16 (8Mx16bit)
line buf
BUFFER 16 (8Mx16bit)
AD_CLK clk SS
BUFFER RGB Rx FPD Link
35bit
AFE_CSTG 32bit bus mother
SH, 1, others Timing
5V/.33V 10V/5V/3V
SCN
generator
ASIC Image data
Oscillator
3.3VPD LVDS IC Tx
Two serial systems 1.5V 28bit
CS3
12 10V CTRL_A10V IPD/IDOCC

12 5V CTRL_A5V
5 3.3V CTRL_A3.3V CS4
1.2V
Mirror
.Moto 3.3VPD
MOTOR
DRIVER
CopyLamp BUSBUF
powdown
MHPsensor
CPU CS2 CS0
RSPF unit H8S/2373 F-ROM
SRAM
MOTOR (DIMM)
DRIVER
E2PROM
uart, others
HC151 SEL_A/B/C
Sensors CS5
ORS LED
Touch panel
LVDS PWB (8.5 inch TFT) IO ASIC

or LCDs detection
LVDS PWB (8.1 inch mono) PNL_SEL0
PNL_SEL1
PNL_SEL2 HC151 LCD_SKT
PNL_SEL3 LCDs detection
Touch panel
CCFT_CPU
INV PWB /CCFT
nLCD_DISP
Vcc REG (ON/OFF)
8.5 inch Rx
LCD 28bit
KEY PWB
KEY CON
/KEYIN
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
Original size sensor PDSEL2
PD
5V2
NINFO_LED
NPWRSW
POW_LED
WU_LED
NWU_KEY
5V2
Buzzer /BZR
LED matrix LED drive circuit

P.U.
TxD0 RxD[1]
nPCU_RxD
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
RxD0 TxD[1]
nPCU_TxD
Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U.
I/O port CTS[1]
PCU_DSR
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
I/O port RTS[1]
PCU_DTR
Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
SCN Cnt
P.U.
TxD1 RxD
TRANS_DAT
P.U.
P.D. Schmit Inv. RxD TxD[2]
Schmit Inv. nTxD_SCN
P.U.
RxD1 TxD P.D.
RSV_DAT Schmit Inv. O.C.
LSU ASIC P.U.
P.D. TxD RxD[2]
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nRxD_SCN
E. SERIAL COMMUNICATION
P.U.
SCK1 SCK CPU P.D.
SCK_LSU O.C Schmit Inv.
H8S/23 73 P.U.
P.D. Schmit Inv. RTS[2]
Schmit Inv. RTS_SCN
LSU A[4:0] Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
I/O ASIC
P.U.
PD65892GC CTS[2]
D[15:8] CTS_SCN
P.U. P.U.
TxD2 RxD P.D.
TxD_FIN O.C Schmit Inv.
CPU O.C. Schmit Inv.

H8S/2373 P.U. P.U.
RxD2 TxD
RxD_FIN
O.C. O.C. CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/ O M30843FWGP TxD[PIC]
DTR_FIN nTxD_PIC
O.C. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/ O FINISHER RxD[PIC]
DSR_FIN nRxD_PIC
(Optional) PIC
O.C. O.C. O.C Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
TxD3 RxD CLR[PIC]
TxD_DSK CLR_PIC
O.C. O.C. O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD3 TxD REQ[PIC]
RxD_DSK REQ_PIC
O.C. O.C. CPU O.C Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3684
I/O
DTR_DSK HDD ASIC
O.C. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O DESK
DSR_DSK
O.C. O.C. (Optional)

P.U. P.U. P.U.
TxD4 RxD
TxD_LCC
Mother MFPC
O.C. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD4 TxD
RxD_LCC
O.C. O.C. CPU
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3687
I/O TxD[3]
DTR_LCC TxD_FAX(D)
O.C. O.C. TxD_FAX(D)+
P.U. P.U. P.U. TxD_FAX(D)- RxD[3]
I/O LCC RxD_FAX(D)
DSR_LCC RxD_FAX(D)+
O.C. O.C. (Optional) RxD_FAX(D)- LVDS TxD[4]
TxD_FAX(CS)
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)- RxD[4]
RxD_FAX(CS)
RxD_FAX(CS)+
New RxD_FAX(CS)-
A[4:0] I/O GA ASIC

P.U.
RTS[3]
DTR_FAX(D)
D[15:8] EPM240T100C5N TxD
Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D.
PCU CPU CTS[3]
PIC DSR_FAX(D)
SH7706
P.D. O.C P.U. Schmit Inv.
RxD RTS[4]
DTR_FAX(CS)
Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. P.D.
CTS[4]
2nd FAX DSR_FAX(CS)
(same as 1st) 1st FAX P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
(Optional) (for FG Model)
DC POWER SUPPLY
F301
Voltage
T5AH/250V Generation
AC PWB + 5Vo
+ 5VL
no-mounting
D101
+
A1 F101
~
~
12A/125V
-
VR1
N/F
no-mounting
A2 MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
15A 250V
A3 VR3 F102
T1AH/250V
N
F. AC power line diagram (120V)
FW
T2.0AH/250V Z101 Generating Voltage
F3 F103 Generation
Circuit
+24V1
no- +24V2
T8AH/250V +24V3
mounting +24V4
VR2 +24V5
WH-L WH-N +12V
+5Vn
+3.3V
L1
option
WARM HEATER SET: OPTION RY1
INT24V1
HL PWB
L2
/HL_PR
WH-SW
OPTION
10W
WH PWB
CCD
OPTION
SCN unit
WH-N 7W OPTION
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC
GND
NO TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4

T1 GT 1 G T1 G T1 G
24V2
T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3 T2 4 SSR4
MAIN UNIT 1 1 1 1
HLOUT_UM HLOUT_US HLOUT_LM HLOUT_UW
10W
OPTION 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
MAIN UNIT
6 6 6 6
DESK
10W
OPTION
DESK drawer
LCC HL_SUB HL_LOW HL_UW

10W
OPTION THERMOSTAT TS_LM
LCC
THERMOSTAT TS_US
HL_MAIN THERMOSTAT TS_UM

10W or 14W LSU
OPTION
LSU
FUSING UNIT
DC POWER SUPPLY
Reactor F301
Voltage
10mH Generation
T3.15AH/250V
3A + 5Vo
AC PWB + 5VL
no-mounting D101
+
F101
A1
~
~
T6.3AH/250V
-
VR1
N/F
no-mounting
A2 MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
T10AH/250V F102
A3 VR3 T3.15AH/250V
F2
N
T10AH/250V
FW Voltage
Z101
Generating
G. AC power line diagram (200V)
F103 Generation
F3 F4 Circuit +24V1
+24V2
T2.0AH/250V T2.0AH/250V T5AH/250V +24V3
no- +24V4
mounting +24V5
VR2 +12V
WH-L WH-N +5Vn
+3.3V
L1
WARM HEATER SET: OPTION RY1

INT24V1
HL PWB
L2
/HL_PR
WH-SW
OPTION
10W
WH PWB
CCD
OPTION
SCN unit
WH-N 7W OPTION
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC
GND
NO TD1 TD2 TD3 TD4

T1 GT 1 G T1 G T1 G
24V2
T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3 T2 4 SSR4
MAIN UNIT 1 1 1 1
HLOUT_UM HLOUT_US HLOUT_LM HLOUT_UW
10W
OPTION 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
MAIN UNIT
6 6 6 6
10W
DESK
DESK OPTION drawer
LCC HL_SUB HL_LOW HL_UW

10W
OPTION THERMOSTAT TS_LM
LCC
THERMOSTAT TS_US
HL_MAIN THERMOSTAT TS_UM

10W or 14W LSU
OPTION
LSU
FUSING UNIT
1
1
INT24V1
P-GND
INT24V2
CPFM P-GND INT24V1
24V3 24V3 L
5VN
: '08 Oct 15
5VNPD P-GND TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y PRM

TM DRIVER PWB
3.3V 3.3V
D-GND D-GND 24V2
5VN 5VN OSM
D-GND D-GND INT24V1 INT24V1
F201 12V 12V
24V1 24V1 24V1 5VN
F203 FUSE
24V3 24V3 RDSW P-GND PSFM PSM FUM POM ADULM HL_PR
P-GND P-GND PCU PWB HL(MAIN) HL(SUB) HL(WARM) HL(LOW)
FUSE P-GND P-GND 5VNPD
FW FW DRIVER MAIN PWB HL PWB
D-GND FDSW 5VN N_HL(MAIN)

5V_LD 5VNPD
5VN D-GND D-GND RD I/F PWB
FET N_HL(SUB)
24V2 P-GND N_HL(WARM)

INT24V2 INT24V2 INT24V2
H. DC power line diagram (120V)
/INT_CNT N_HL(LOW)
INT24V1 INT24V1
P-GND P-GND INT24V2
P-GND
P-GND DVM_CL DVM_BK
INT24V1 INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V2 P-GND
24V2
F202 INT24V2 2ndTC PWB
24V2 24V2 P-GND
FUSE INT24V2
AC PWB
MC PWB 1stTC PWB
INT24V2
P-GND
PFM
12V INT24V1
5VN HDD 5VN
D-GND LSUSS_B 5VO KEY OP 5VN ORS PD
D-GND 3.3V PWB D-GND PWB
D-GND
5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD INT24V1
24V3 24V3 LSUSS_C 24V_EXT

3.3V 3.3V P-GND P-GND LD_BK LD_C LD_M LD_Y option P-GND LVDS 3.3V
D-GND D-GND 5VN 5VN LSU 3.3V_EXT PWB D-GND LCD PWB
5VN 5VN 3.3V 3.3V PWB D-GND D-GND
5VL 5VL D-GND D-GND
5VL 5VL D-GND D-GND 24V3
5VO 5VO MOTHER PWB P-GND PM
D-GND D-GND A10V 24V INVERTOR
12V 12V A5V P-GND PWB

24V3 24V3 A3.3V CCD PWB
P-GND P-GND D-GND
24V 24V3 24V3

5VL P-GND P-GND CL
5VO 12V 12V 24V INVERTOR
3.3V 5VN 5VN P-GND PWB CL
D-GND 3.3V 3.3V
MFPC PWB D-GND D-GND
5VO 5VO
24V1 ORS LED
PWB
24V 24V
P-GND P-GND
5VN 5VN FAX 24V_EXT 24V_EXT
3.3V 3.3V P-GND P-GND
D-GND D-GND 5V_EXT 5V_EXT
F205 AVCC AVCC
24V5 24V5 SCAN CNT 5VPD 5VPD
P-GND P-GND D-GND PWB D-GND D-GND RSPF UN
FUSE 5VN 5VN FINISHER USB I/F PWB
D-GND D-GND option
F204 5V
24V4 24V4 D-GND CARD READER
P-GND P-GND
FUSE 5VN 5VN LCC option
D-GND D-GND D-GND USB CONVERSION PWB
PSU D-GND D-GND
24V4
P-GND
5VN DESK
D-GND
D-GND
option
1
1
INT24V1
P-GND
INT24V2
CPFM P-GND INT24V1
24V3 24V3 L
5VN
: '08 Oct 15
5VNPD P-GND TNM_K TNM_C TNM_M TNM_Y PRM

TM DRIVER PWB
3.3V 3.3V
D-GND D-GND 24V2
5VN 5VN OSM
D-GND D-GND INT24V1 INT24V1
F201 12V 12V
24V1 24V1 24V1 5VN
F203 FUSE
24V3 24V3 RDSW P-GND PSFM PSM FUM POM ADULM HL_PR
P-GND P-GND PCU PWB HL(MAIN) HL(SUB) HL(WARM) HL(LOW)
FUSE
P-GND P-GND 5VNPD
FW FW DRIVER MAIN PWB HL PWB
D-GND FDSW 5VN N_HL(MAIN)

5V_LD 5VNPD
5VN D-GND D-GND RD I/F PWB
FET N_HL(SUB)
24V2 P-GND N_HL(WARM)

INT24V2 INT24V2 INT24V2
/INT_CNT N_HL(LOW)
I. DC power line diagram (230V)
INT24V1 INT24V1
P-GND P-GND INT24V2
P-GND
P-GND DVM_CL DVM_BK
INT24V1 INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V2 P-GND
24V2
F202 INT24V2 2ndTC PWB
24V2 24V2 P-GND
FUSE INT24V2
AC PWB
MC PWB 1stTC PWB
INT24V2
P-GND
PFM
12V INT24V1
5VN HDD 5VN
D-GND LSUSS_B 5VO KEY OP 5VN ORS PD
D-GND 3.3V PWB D-GND PWB
D-GND
5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD 5V_LD INT24V1
24V3 24V3 LSUSS_C 24V_EXT

3.3V 3.3V P-GND P-GND LD_BK LD_C LD_M LD_Y option P-GND LVDS 3.3V
D-GND D-GND 5VN 5VN LSU 3.3V_EXT PWB D-GND LCD PWB
5VN 5VN 3.3V 3.3V PWB D-GND D-GND
5VL 5VL D-GND D-GND
5VL 5VL D-GND D-GND 24V3
5VO 5VO MOTHER PWB P-GND PM
D-GND D-GND A10V 24V INVERTOR
12V 12V A5V P-GND PWB

24V3 24V3 A3.3V CCD PWB
P-GND P-GND D-GND
24V 24V3 24V3

5VL P-GND P-GND
CL
5VO 12V 12V 24V
INVERTOR
3.3V 5VN 5VN P-GND PWB CL
D-GND 3.3V 3.3V
MFPC PWB D-GND D-GND
5VO 5VO
24V1 ORS LED
PWB
24V 24V
P-GND P-GND
5VN 5VN FAX 24V_EXT 24V_EXT
3.3V 3.3V P-GND P-GND
D-GND D-GND 5VO 5V_EXT 5V_EXT
F205 AVCC AVCC
24V5 24V5 D-GND USB HUB PWB SCAN CNT 5VPD 5VPD
P-GND P-GND PWB D-GND D-GND RSPF UN
FUSE 5VN 5VN FINISHER
D-GND D-GND option
F204 5V
24V4 24V4 D-GND CARD READER
P-GND P-GND
FUSE 5VN 5VN LCC option
D-GND D-GND D-GND
PSU D-GND D-GND
D-GND D-GND USB I/F PWB
24V4
P-GND
5VN DESK USB CONVERSION PWB
D-GND
D-GND
OPTION
option
2.
(AC CORD) CN1(B03P-VL ) CN2(B03P-VL-K) (MSW harness) CN2(B5P-VH-B) CN10

AC PWB (DC main harness PA2)
1 L_I N MSW- Nout 1 MSW- Nout 1 D-GND 1 1 D-GND
2 NC NC 2 PS-250(RED) D-GND 2 2 D-GND
3 N_I N MSW- Lout 3 MSW- Lout 1 5VO 3 3 5VL
CN 6( B2P3-VH - R) CN3 ( B03P- VL- R) PS-250 (RED) 5VL 4 4 5VL
1 N_WH MSW - Li n 1 MSW- Li n 1 5VL 5 5 5VO
2 NC NC 2 PS-25 0 MSW 6 3.3V
3 L_WH MSW - Ni n 3 MSW- Ni n 1 7 5VN
CN4 ( B3P4-VH-R) PS- 250 CN1( B2P3 - VH-B) 8 12V
CN5(B03P-VL-E) L_DC 1 3 L_DC CN3(B03P-VH-B) 9 24V3
1 L_HL NC 2 2 NC 3. 3V 1 10 P-GND
2 NC NC 3 1 N_D C 3. 3V 2 B10P-VH
A. Power supply section
(AC-HL harness PA2) 3 N_HL N_DC 4 D-GND 3

(AC-DC harness)
CN10(B4P-PH-K-S) MOTHER PWB
Actual wiring chart
24V2 1 CN6(B03B-PASK-1) CN15

NC 2 DCCNT1 1 4 n DCCNT1
CN1 NC 3 NC 2 5 n DCCNT2
L_HL 1 D-GND 4 DCCNT2 3
NC 2 3 5VNPD
N_HL 3 CN4(B6P-VH-B) 2 D-GND
B03P-VL(WH) NAME 5VN 1 1 INT5V
HL PWB 5VL MFP 5VN 2 B05B-PH-K-S
5VO FAX 5VN 3 TO LCC (11-23)
5VN OTHER 5VN 4 TO INSERTOR (11-24)

(AC-WH harness (1)) 24V1 ENGINE D-GND 5 CN4
24V2 ENGINE D-GND 6 TO LCC (11-23) 1 INT5V
PS-187 24V3 ENGINE 3 D-GND
L_WH 1 24V4 LCC, DESK CN5(B04P- VH-B) 5 5VNPD
WH_SW 24V5 FI NI SHER 12V 1 B26B-PHDSS
12V 2
L_WH 1
DC PWB NC 3
PS-187 NC 4 PCU PWB
CN7(B8P-VH-B)
FW 1 CN2
CN1 P-GND 2 1 24V1
1 WH-L P-GND 3 2 P-GND
2 NC TO 11-11 3 24V2
3 WH-N P-GND 4 4 P-GND
B2P3-VH-R NC(P-GND) 5 5 24V3
P-GND 6 TO INSERTOR (11-24) 6 D-GND
WH PWB SCANNER UNIT P-GND 7 TO LCC (11-23) 7 12V
(AC-HL harness PA2) (SCN-WH harness (2)) NC(P-GND) 8 8 D-GND
CN2 R EL 2 PIN P R EL2PIN P 9 5VN
WH-N(SCAN) 1 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 CN8(B7P-VH-B) 11 3.3V
NC 2 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 WH NC(24V1) 1 12 FW
WH-L(SCAN) 3 24V 1 2 10 NC(D-GND)

B2P3VH-BL JPN:OPTION 24V 2 3 TO 11-11 B12B- XL
EX100V:OPTION 24V 3 4
CN3 EX120V:OPTION 24V 3 5
WH-N(DESK1) 1 EX200V:OPTION 24V 4 6 TO LCC (11-23) SMR-3 SMP-3 CN5
NC 2 WH 24V 5 7 TO INSERTOR (11-25) 2 2 23 P-GND
WH-L(DESK1) 3 PSFM2 3 3 22 PSFM2_LD
B2P3-VH J PN:STANDARD 1 1 21 PSFM2_V
EX100V:OPTION
CN4 EX12 0V: OPTION SMP-3 SMR-3
WH_N(LSU) 1 EX200V:OPTION 3 3 15 P-GND
WH_N(DESK/LCC) 2 2 2 13 PSFM_LD
PSFM 1 1
NC 3 To 11-23 11 PSFM_V
WH_L(DESK/LCC) 4
WH_L(LSU) 5 1 1 12 0ZFM_V
B4P(5-3)-VH 2 2 14 /0ZFM_CNT
OZFM 3 3 16 P-GND
CN5 (Ozone fan) 4 4 18 OZFM_LD
WH_CNT 1 SMP-4 SMR-4
NC 2 19 WH_CNT
24V3 3 20 24V3
B03B-PH-K-R (DC main harness PA2) B24B-PHDSS
DSW-R (Upper main harness PA2) CN16
24V1 1 1 24V1
24V(RDSW) 2 2 24V(RDSW)
PS-187-2V 3 24V(RDSW)
4 24V(FDSW) INTCNT
DSW-F (HL I/F harness PA2) P EL2P R B4P-VH
24V(RDSW) 1 24V(RDSW) 1 CN3
B. Front section
PS-187 2 24V(FDSW) 2 1 5VNPD

24V(FDSW)
TO 11-23 2 P-GND
SPS-51T-187 3 INT24V1
(DC main harness PA2)
I NT24V2 1 5 I NT24V2
P- GND 2 6 P- GND
INT24V1in 3 4 INT24V1in
AC N,C 4
/ IN T_CNT 5 7 /INT_CNT
PWB 24V2 7 B7P-VH-B
24V2 6 CN8 CN2
B7P-VH-B 3 24V2 3 24V2
B7P-VH-B DCPS B12B-XL
P SM-5pin_N R (HL I/F harness PA2) P DF1B-24DE S CN6

5 24V3 5 1 24V3 1 1 24V3 CN6 (Upper main harness PA2) CN13
PRM 4 PRM_A 4 3 PRM_A 3 8 PRM_A PRM_A 9 20 PRM_A
TM-DRV
3 PRM_B 3 5 PRM_B 5 4 PRM_B PRM_B 5 22 PRM_B
(Fusing pressure 2 PRM_/A 2 PRM_/A PRM_/A PWB PRM_/A PRM_/A
7 7 6 7 24
release motor) 1 PRM_/B 1 9 PRM_/B 9 2 PRM_/B PRM_/B 3 26 PRM_/B
B10B-PNDZS B10B- PNDZS
(Fusing pressure
HLPCD release detection)
5VN 1 11 5VN 11 28 5VN
HLPCD 2 13 HLPCD 13 30 HLPCD PCU PWB
D-GND 3 15 D-GND 15 32 D-GND
GP1A73 179228-3
P SL2PIN R
TMN (Waste 1 WTNM_1 1 17 WTNM_1 17 11 WTNM_1
toner motor) 2 WTNM_2 2 19 WTNM_2 19 13 WTNM_2
(Waste toner
1TNFD full detection)
1TNFD 1 21 1TNFD 21 7 1TNFD

6-179228-2

1 /RCFM_V 1 25 /RCFM_V
Machine cooling fan 2 RCFM_LD 2 23 RCFM_LD
(80 FAN)
3 P-GND 3 5 P-GND
P SM-3PIN R B32B-PHDSS
(SCN-Mother harness P2)

R SM6P P (Upper main harness PA2) R SM-6pin P
1 /C_CARD 1 14 /C_CARD 14 1 /C_CARD 1 1 /C_CARD
2 /C_SEL 2 16 /C_SEL 16 2 /C_SEL 2 2 /C_SEL
CARD READER 3 /C_CLOCK 3 18 /C_CLOCK 18 3 /C_CLOCK 3 3 /C_CLOCK
4 /C_DATA 4 20 /C_DATA 20 4 /C_DATA 4 4 /C_DATA SCNcnt PWB
(OPTION) 5 5V 5 22 5V 22 5 5V 5 5 5V
6 D-GND 6 24 D-GND 24 6 D-GND 6 6 D-GND
(Fusing harness PA2)
300W R YL P P Drawer RWZ R (HL I/F harness PA2)
300W WH 300W
HL UW 6 N-HL(UW) 6
(AWG18)
(AWG18)
VL-3pin D1.25-M3 D1.25-M3
780W BK 780W
2 2 TS MAIN 4 L-HL(MAIN) 4
(AWG16)
1 1 (AWG16) CN2
(TS-HL_MAIN connecting harness P2) 3 L-HL(UM) HL PWB
480W WH 480W
HL MAIN YL-2pin 1 N-HL(MAIN) 1 1 N-HL(UM)
(AWG18)
480W 1 1 (AWG18) 2 N-HL(US) CN4
510W 2 2 B03P-VL(BK) /HL_PR 7
510W WH 510W
P R 2 N-HL(SUB) 2 HL_OUT_UW 6
C. Fusing unit section
HL SUB (AWG18)
(AWG18) HL_OUT_LM 5
D1.25-M3
D1.25-M3 HL_OUT_US 4
810W BK 810W
3 3 TS SUB 5 L-HL(SUB) 5 CN3 HL_OUT_UM 3
(AWG16)
P R (AWG16) 2 N-HL(UW) D-GND 2
(TS-HL_MAIN connecting harness P2)
3 L-HL(US) INT24V1 1
(TS-HL_LOW connecting harness P2) 300W WH 300W
D1.25-M3 3 N-HL(LOW) 3 1 N-HL(LM) B07B-PASK-S
(AWG18)
TS LOW (AWG18) B03P-VL(RD)
R YL P D1.25-M3
HL LOW
300W P YL R CN13
INT24V1 4
P SM-3pin(BK) R D-GND 6
BK
RTH(MAIN) 1 TH_UM_IN 1 (Fusing HL_OUT_UW 8
WH
2 TH_UMCS_IN 2 harness PA2) HL_OUT_LM 10
BL
Non-contact 3 D-GND 3 P DF1B-20DE E HL_OUT_US 12
(Upper main
20 N,C 20 CN12 HL_OUT_UM 14
(HL I/F harness PA2) harness PA2)
B-1 TH_UM_IN B-9 18 TH_UM_IN 18 8 TH_UM_IN /HL_PR 16
P SM-2pin R B-2 D-GND B-8 16 D-GND 16 6 D-GND B32B-PHDSS
RTH(SUB) 1 TH_US_IN 1 B-3 TH_US_IN B-7 14 TH_US_IN 14 4 TH_US_IN
2 D-GND 2 B-4 D-GND B-6 12 D-GND 12 2 D-GND
Contact B-5 TH_LM_IN B-5 TH_LM_IN TH_LM_IN
10 10 9
P SM-2pin R B-6 D-GND B-4 8 D-GND 8 7 D-GND
1 TH_LM_IN 1 B-7 POFM_CNT B-3 6 POFM_CNT 6 5 POFM_CNT
RTH(LOW) 2 D-GND 2 B-8 D-GND B-2 4 D-GND 4 3 D-GND
B-9 TH_UMCS_IN B-1 2 TH_UMCS_IN 2 1 TH_UMCS_IN
Contact RCZR 9PIN B30B-PHDSS
A-1 A-10 19 19
A-2 A-9 17 17 PCU PWB
A-3 A-8 15 15
A-4 A-7 13 13

A-5 A-6 11 11
A-6 A-5 9 9
A-7 A-4 7 7
A-8 A-3 5 5
A-9 A-2 3 3
A-10 A-1 1 1
RCZR 10PIN
Fusing drawer connector pin arrangement

Fuser unit I/F Drawer Fuser unit I/F Drawer
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
1 2 3 3 2 1
A10
A10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
6 5 4 4 5 6
View from Fuser unit side (Fusing side) View from Body side (Main body side)
Separation electrode UN_K
Transfer separation
1TUD_K sensor BK (Upper main harness PA2) CN12
(PTC heater harness CJ)
1TUD_K 1 1 1TUD_K 1 27 1TUD_K
5VNPD 3 3 5VNPD 3 29 5VNPD
GP1S73 179228-3 4 PTC_HEAT 4 30 PTC_HEAT
P SM-4pin R B30B-PHDSS
Heater
electrode
SRA-21T-3
PTC UN
PTC (PTC-shield harness P2) CN1 (Upper main harness PA2) CN14
D. High voltage section
electrode PTC PTC INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2

PS-110(WH) B2P-VH D-GND 2 4 D-GND
/TC_DATA 3 6 /TC_DATA
2nd TC /TC_CLK 4 8 /TC_CLK
SRA-21T-4 PWB /TC_LD 5 10 /TC_LD
/HV_REM 6 5 /HV_REM
(Secondary transfer separation harness)
2-TC 2-TC PTC_ERR 7 7 PTC_ERR
PS-187(BLUE) PS-187 /PTC_CLK 8 9 /PTC_CLK
B8B-PASK B30B-PHDSS
CN1 (Paper feed main harness PA2) CN6

(MC-BK harness)
MC-K MC-K INT24V2 8 31 INT24V2
PS-187 PS-250(RED) D-GND 7 29 D-GND
GB-K (SPRING) GB-K /HV_DATA 6 27 /HV_DATA
/HV_CLK 5 25 /HV_CLK
BS-K (SPRING) BS-K /HV_LD 4 23 /HV_LD
HV_REM 3 21 HV_REM
GB-C (SPRING) GB-C MC_CL_ERR 2 19 MC_CL_ERR
MC_BK_ERR 1 17 MC_BK_ERR
(MC interface BS-C (SPRING) BS-C B8B-PASK B32B-PHDSS
harness)
MC-C CN2
PS-187 GB-M (SPRING) GB-M INT24V2 1
MC-M D-GND 2
(MC interface (SPRING) BS-M MC PWB 1TC-REV 3
PS-187 harness) BS-M
MC-M 1TC-Y-CC 4
PS-187 GB-Y (SPRING) GB-Y 1TC-M-CC 5 PCU PWB
MC-Y 1TC-C-CC 6
PS-187 BS-Y (SPRING) BS-Y 1TC-K-CC 7
HV_REM 8
N,C 9
(MC harness PA2)
MC-Y MC-CL B9B-PASK
PS-250 PS-250
(Paper feed main harness PA2)

CN1
(1TC output harness PA2)
1TC-K 1TC-K N,C 9
SPS-01T-187 FPS-187 HV_REM 1
1TC-C 1TC-C 1TC-K-CC 2
SPS-01T-187 FPS-187 1TC-C-CC 3
1TC-M
1st TC 1TC-M-CC 4
1TC-M
SPS-01T-187 FPS-187 PWB 1TC-Y-CC 5
1TC-Y 1TC-Y 1TC-REV 6
SPS-01T-187 FPS-187 P-GND 7
INT24V2 8
B9B-PASK
1TUD_CL (Transfer separation

sensor CL) (Transfer belt separation harness PA2) P SM-3Pin R (Upper main harness PA2) CN13
1TUD_CL 1 1 1TUD_CL 1 31 1TUD_CL
GP1S73 179228-3 B32B-PHDSS
Separation electrode UNCL
DVM_K (DV motor-BK) (Process drive harness PA2) CN11 CN15 CRUM(BLACK)
(Upper main harness PA2) (CRUM harness PA2)
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 5VN 1 1 5VN 1 2 5VN
P-GND 2 3 P-GND /CRM_K_DT 9 2 /CRM_K_DT 2 4 /CRM_K_DT
/DVMK_CK 4 5 /DVMK_CK /CRM_K_CK 11 3 /CRM_K_CK 3 3 /CRM_K_CK
/DVMK_D 5 7 /DVMK_D D-GND 5 4 D-GND 4 1 D-GND
DVMK_LD 7 9 DVMK_LD TSR-04V-K
NC 3
NC 6 CRUM(CYAN)
B07B-PASK-S DVM_CL (DV motor-CL) 5VN 3 5 5VN 5 2 5VN
E. Main drive unit section
INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2 /CRM_C_DT 13 6 /CRM_C_DT 6 4 /CRM_C_DT

P-GND 2 4 P-GND /CRM_C_CK 15 7 /CRM_C_CK 7 3 /CRM_C_CK
/DVMC_CK 4 6 /DVMC_CK D-GND 7 8 D-GND 8 1 D-GND
/DVMC_D 5 8 /DVMC_D TSR-04V-K
DVMC_LD 7 10 DVMC_LD
NC 3 CRUM(MAGENTA)
NC 6 5VN 2 9 5VN 9 2 5VN
B07B-PASK-S R SM-2Pin P /CRM_M_DT 10 10 /CRM_M_DT 10 4 /CRM_M_DT
1TURC 1 24V3 1 11 24V3 /CRM_M_CK 12 11 /CRM_M_CK 11 3 /CRM_M_CK
(Transfer separation clutch) 2 1TURC 2 12 1TURC D-GND 6 12 D-GND 12 1 D-GND
TSR-04V-K
DHPD_K (Phase detection BK) CRUM(YELLOW)

(Process drive harness PA2)
DHPD_K 1 13 DHPD_K 5VN 4 13 5VN 13 2 5VN
D-GND 2 14 D-GND /CRM_Y_DT 14 14 /CRM_Y_DT 14 4 /CRM_Y_DT
5VNPD 3 15 5VNPD /CRM_Y_CK 16 15 /CRM_Y_CK 15 3 /CRM_Y_CK
GP1S73 179228-3 DHPD_CL (Phase detection cL) D-GND 8 16 D-GND 16 1 D-GND
DHPD_CL 1 16 DHPD_CL B16B-PHDSS P SM-18Pin R TSR-04V-K
D-GND 2 17 D-GND
5VNPD 3 18 5VNPD
GP1S73 179228-3 B18B-PHDSS CN5
+24V 1
+24V 2
CN14 CN3 TMK_A 3
(Upper main harness PA2) TNM_K
24V3 22 12 24V3 TMK_/A 4
TNM_Y_/B 11 1 TNM_Y_/B TMK_B 5
TNM_Y_B 13 3 TNM_Y_B TMK_/B 6
TNM_Y_/A 15 5 TNM_Y_/A CN4
TNM_Y_A 17 7 TNM_Y_A +24V 1
P-GND 19 9 P-GND +24V 2
PCU PWB TNM_K_/B 21 17 TMK_/B TMC_A 3
TNM_K_B 23 15 TMK_B TMC_/A 4
TNM_C

TNM_K_/A 25 13 TMK_/A TMC_B 5
TNM_K_A 27 11 TMK_A TMC_/B 6
P-GND 29 19 P-GND CN2
P-GND 12 2 P-GND +24V 1
TNM_M_A 14 10 TMM_A +24V 2
TNM_M_/A 16 8 TMM_/A TMM_A 3
TNM_M_B 18 6 TMM_B TMM_/A 4
TNM_M
TNM_M_/B 20 4 TMM_/B TMM_B 5
TNM_C_A 24 20 TMC_A TMM_/B 6
TNM_C_/A 26 18 TMC_/A CN1
TNM_C_B 28 16 TMC_B +24V 1
TNM_C_/B 30 14 TMC_/B +24V 2
B30B-PHDSS B20B-PNDZS TMY_A 3
TMY_/A 4
TNM_Y
TM-DRV TMY_B 5
PWB TMY_/B 6
DV un DL_BK (Discharge lamp BK) PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H CN10
(DL/DV main harness)
(DV interface
NC 2 harness)
BLACK /DL_BK 3 10 /DL_BK 1 1 /DL_BK
53254-0310
TCS_K (Toner control sensor BK) (DV harness PA2)
24V3 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 5 5VN
TCS_K 3 6 TCS_K 6 7 TCS_K 4 7 TCS_K
D-GND 4 7 D-GND 7 5 D-GND 6 11 D-GND
TSG_BK 1 8 TSG_BK 8 6 TSG_BK 5 9 TSG_BK
51021-0400 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 13 D-GND
2 DVTYP_K 2 3 DVTYP_K 8 15 DVTYP_K
F. DL & DV section
3 TNCRU_K 3 2 TNCRU_K 9 17 TNCRU_K

4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 19 5VN
(BIAS harness B) (BIAS harness A) C QR/P8-8P P
BS-K (SPRING) TO 11-3
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
DL_C (Discharge lamp CYAN) PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H (DL/DV main harness)
(DV interface
NC 2 harness)
CYAN /DL_C 3 10 /DL_C 1 21 /DL_C
53254-0310
control
TCS_C (Toner
sensor CYAN) (DV harness PA2)
24V3 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 25 5VN
TCS_C 3 6 TCS_C 6 7 TCS_C 4 27 TCS_C
TSG_C 1 8 TSG_C 8 6 TSG_C 5 29 TSG_C
51021-0400 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 33 D-GND
2 DVTYP_C 2 3 DVTYP_C 8 35 DVTYP_C
3 TNCRU_C 3 2 TNCRU_C 9 37 TNCRU_C
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 39 5VN
(BIAS harness B) (BIAS harness A) C QR/P8-8P P PCU PWB
BS-C (SPRING) TO 11-3
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
DL_M (Discharge lamp MAGENTA) PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H
(DV interface
NC 2 harness)
MAGENTA /DL_M 3 10 /DL_M 1 2 /DL_M
53254-0310
(Toner control
TCS_M sensor MAGENTA) (DV harness PA2)
24V3 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 6 5VN
TCS_M 3 6 TCS_M 6 7 TCS_M 4 8 TCS_M
TSG_M 1 8 TSG_M 8 6 TSG_M 5 10 TSG_M
51021-0400 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 14 D-GND

2 DVTYP_M 2 3 DVTYP_M 8 16 DVTYP_M
3 TNCRU_M 3 2 TNCRU_M 9 18 TNCRU_M
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 20 5VN
(BIAS harness B) (BIAS harness A) C QR/P8-8P P
BS-M (SPRING) TO 11-3
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
DL_Y (Discharge lamp YELLOW) PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H
(DV interface
NC 2 harness)
YELLOW /DL_Y 3 10 /DL_Y 1 22 /DL_Y
53254-0310
(Toner control
TCS_Y sensor YELLOW) (DV harness PA2)
24V3 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 26 5VN
TCS_Y 3 6 TCS_Y 6 7 TCS_Y 4 28 TCS_Y
TSG_Y 1 8 TSG_Y 8 6 TSG_Y 5 30 TSG_Y
51021-0400 1 D-GND 1 4 D-GND 7 34 D-GND
2 DVTYP_Y 2 3 DVTYP_Y 8 36 DVTYP_Y
3 TNCRU_Y 3 2 TNCRU_Y 9 38 TNCRU_Y
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 40 5VN
(BIAS harness A) C QR/P8-8P P B40B-PADSS-1
(BIAS harness B)
BS-Y (SPRING) TO 11-3
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 SPS-01T-110
(1)
(LSU-BD harness PA) CN1 (LSU-LD CN7

harness P2)
BD PWB CN1 +5V 50 1 5V_LD
D-GND 4 1 D-GND +5V 48 2 5V_LD
n BD 3 2 n BD
D-GND 2 3 D-GND
5VN 1 4 5VN DT_K1+ 11 14 DT_K1+
G. LSU section
B4B-PH-K-S 5 D-GND DT_K1- 9 12 DT_K1- (MOTHER-LSU harness PA2)

6 LSUTH1 GND 13 10 D-GND CN3 CN4
LSU TH1 7 NC n SH_K1 4 9 /SH_K1 3.3V CN 2 1 3.3V CN
D-GND 4 B7B-PH-K-S GND 6 7 D-GND D-GND 1 8 D-GND
LSUTH1 3 n SH_K2 8 5 /SH_K2 5V CN 4 5 5V CN
NC 2 GND 10 3 D-GND D-GND 3 7 D-GND
NC 1 n LDERR_K 12 17 /LDERR_K 24V 5 2 24V
B4B-PH-K-S DT_K2+ 5 8 DT_K2+ P-GND 6 4 P-GND
DT_K2- 3 6 DT_K2- S06B-XASK-1
(Polygon motor harness PA) GND 7 4 D-GND
POLYGON MOTOR CN2 VREF_K1 16 15 VREF_K1 CN4
/BREAK 1 6 /BREAK VREF_K2 14 13 VREF_K2 5VLD 1 6 5VLD
MX-2600N/2600G/3100N/3100G
POLYCLK 2 5 POLYCLK n ENB_K 18 11 /ENB_K D-GND 2 12 D-GND

/LOCK 3 4 /LOCK /SCK_LSU 4 14 /SCK_LSU
/START 4 3 /START D-GND 3 15 D-GND
P-GND 5 2 P-GND n SH_YMC1 40 49 /SH_C1 /TRANS_DAT 5 13 /TRANS_DAT
24V1 6 1 24V1 GND 42 47 D-GND D-GND 6 18 D-GND
B6B-PH-K-S B6B-PH-K-S n SH_YMC2 44 45 /SH_C2 /RST_DAT 8 16 /RST_DAT
GND 46 43 D-GND LSU_ASIC_RST 7 10 LSU_ASIC_RST
DT_C1+ 23 50 DT_C1+ /TRANS_RST 9 11 /TRANS_RST
DT_C1- 21 48 DT_C1- JOBEND_INT 10 17 JOBEND_INT
GND 25 46 D-GND TH_LSU 11 20 TH_LSU
n LDERR_C 20 41 /LDERR_C /PCU_TRG 12 19 /PCU_TRG
VREF_C1 24 39 VREF_C1 VSYNC_K_N 13 28 VSYNC_K_N
LD VREF_C2 22 37 VREF_C2 VSYNC_K_P 14 27 VSYNC_K_P
DT_C2+ 17 44 DT_C2+ LSU VSYNC_C_P 15 26 VSYNC_C_P
PWB DT_C2- 15 42 DT_C2- VSYNC_C_N VSYNC_C_N
PWB 16 25
GND 19 40 D-GND VSYNC_M_N 17 24 VSYNC_M_N
n ENB_YMC 38 35 /ENB_C VSYNC_M_P 18 23 VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P 19 22 VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N 20 21 VSYNC_Y_N
DT_M1+ 47 38 DT_M1+ S20B-PHDSS B28B-PHDSS
DT_M1- 45 36 DT_M1-
GND 49 34 D-GND MOTHER
n LDERR_M 32 33 /LDERR_M
VREF_M1 36 31 VREF_M1 CN5 CN5
PWB
VREF_M2 34 29 VREF_M2 CH0_N 1 23 CH0_N
DT_M2+ 41 32 DT_M2+ CH0_P 2 24 CH0_P
DT_M2- 39 30 DT_M2- D-GND 3 22 D-GND
GND 43 28 D-GND D-GND 4 21 D-GND

CH1_N 5 19 CH1_N
CH1_P 6 20 CH1_P
DT_Y1+ 35 26 DT_Y1+ CH2_N 7 17 CH2_N
DT_Y1- 33 24 DT_Y1- CH2_P 8 18 CH2_P
GND 37 22 D-GND D-GND 9 16 D-GND
n LDERR_Y 26 27 /LDERR_Y D-GND 10 15 D-GND
VREF_Y1 30 25 VREF_Y1 CLCLK_N 11 13 CLCLK_N
VREF_Y2 28 23 VREF_Y2 CLCLK_P 12 14 CLCLK_P
DT_Y2+ 29 20 DT_Y2+ CH3_N 13 11 CH3_N
(MOTHER-LSU connecting DT_Y2- 27 18 DT_Y2- CH3_P 14 12 CH3_P
harness PA2) (LSUSS-BK harness PA2) GND 31 16 D-GND D-GND 15 10 D-GND
CN19 P R R P D-GND 16 9 D-GND
INT24V1 1 1 1 1 1 LSUSS- CH4_N 17 7 CH4_N
NC 2 2 2 2 2 BK LDCHK_1 1 19 LDCHK_1 CH4_P 18 8 CH4_P
/LSUSS_B 3 SM-2Pin SM-2Pin LDCHK_2 2 21 LDCHK_2 ECLK_LSU_N 19 5 ECLK_LSU_N
501571-5007 501190-5017 ECLK_LSU_P 20 6 ECLK_LSU_P
PCU P R SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 D-GND 21 4 D-GND
PWB CCFM_V 4 1 1 D-GND 22 3 D-GND
CCFM_LD 7 2 2 HSYNC_LSU_P 23 1 HSYNC_LSU_P
P-GND 6 3 3
CCFM FG FG HSYNC_LSU_N 24 2 HSYNC_LSU_N
CCFM_CNT 5 SM-3Pin S24B-PHDSS B24B-PHDSS
B7B-PH-K-S
2
(2)
2
(LSU-BD harness PA) MOTHER-LSU harness PA2

BD PWB CN1 CN3 CN4
D-GND 4 1 D-GND 3.3V CN 2 1 3.3V CN
: '09/Sep
n BD 3 2 n BD D-GND 1 3 D-GND
MX-2301N
D-GND 2 3 D-GND 5V CN 4 5 5V CN
5VN 1 4 5VN D-GND 3 7 D-GND
B4B-PH-K-S 5 D-GND 24V 5 2 24V
6 LSUTH1 P-GND 6 4 P-GND
LSU TH1 7 NC S06B-XASK-1
D-GND 4 B7B-PH-K-S
LSUTH1 3 CN4
NC 2 5VLD 1 6 5VLD
NC 1 D-GND 2 12 D-GND
B4B-PH-K-S nSCK_LSU 4 14 nSCK_LSU
D-GND 3 15 D-GND
(Polygon motor harness PA) nTRANS_DAT 5 13 nTRANS_DAT
POLYGON MOTOR CN2 D-GND 6 18 D-GND
/BREAK 1 6 /BREAK nRST_DAT 8 16 nRST_DAT
POLYCLK 2 5 POLYCLK LSU_ASIC_RST 7 10 LSU_ASIC_RST
/LOCK 3 4 /LOCK nTRANS_RST 9 11 nTRANS_RST
/START 4 3 /START JOBEND_INT 10 17 JOBEND_INT
P-GND 5 2 P-GND TH_LSU 11 20 TH_LSU
24V1 6 1 24V1 nPCU_TRG 12 19 nPCU_TRG
B6B-PH-K-S B6B-PH-K-S VSYNC_K_N 13 28 VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P 14 27 VSYNC_K_P
(LSU LD harness P2L) VSYNC_C_P 15 26 VSYNC_C_P
CN1 CN7 VSYNC_C_N 16 25 VSYNC_C_N
DT_C1(C)+ 21 1 DT_C1(C)+ VSYNC_M_N 17 24 VSYNC_M_N
DT_C1(C)- 23 3 DT_C1(C)- VSYNC_M_P 18 23 VSYNC_M_P
D-GND 25 5 D-GND
LSU PWB VSYNC_Y_P 19 22 VSYNC_Y_P
DT_C2(Y)+ 5 7 DT_C2(Y)+ VSYNC_Y_N 20 21 VSYNC_Y_N
DT_C2(Y)- 7 9 DT_C2(Y)- S20B-PHDSS B28B-PHDSS
D-GND 3 11 D-GND
/ENB_C 18 13 /ENB_C
MOTHER
/ENB_K 24 15 /ENB_K PWB
LDCHK_2(N,C) - 17 LDCHK_2(N,C) CN5 CN5
LDCHK_1(N,C) - 19 LDCHK_1(N,C) CH0_N 1 23 CH0_N
DT_K1(K)+ 27 21 DT_K1(K)+ CH0_P 2 24 CH0_P
DT_K1(K)- 29 23 DT_K1(K)- D-GND 3 22 D-GND
D-GND 31 25 D-GND D-GND 4 21 D-GND
DT_K2(M)+ 15 27 DT_K2(M)+ CH1_N 5 19 CH1_N
DT_K2(M)- 17 29 DT_K2(M)- CH1_P 6 20 CH1_P
D-GND 19 31 D-GND CH2_N 7 17 CH2_N
LD 5V_LDD 1 33 5V_LDD CH2_P 8 18 CH2_P
VREF_K1 26 2 VREF_K1 D-GND 9 16 D-GND
PWB

VREF_C1 20 4 VREF_C1 D-GND 10 15 D-GND
VREF_M1 12 6 VREF_M1 CLCLK_N 11 13 CLCLK_N
VREF_Y1 8 8 VREF_Y1 CLCLK_P 12 14 CLCLK_P
/LDERR_Y 10 10 /LDERR_Y CH3_N 13 11 CH3_N
/LDERR_M 14 12 /LDERR_M CH3_P 14 12 CH3_P
/LDERR_C 22 14 /LDERR_C D-GND 15 10 D-GND
/LDERR_K 28 16 /LDERR_K D-GND 16 9 D-GND
/SH_C2(Y) 6 18 /SH_C2(Y) CH4_N 17 7 CH4_N
D-GND 4 20 D-GND CH4_P 18 8 CH4_P
(MOTHER-LSU connecting /SH_C1(C) 16 22 /SH_C1(C) ECLK_LSU_N 19 5 ECLK_LSU_N
harness PA2) (LSUSS-BK harness PA2) D-GND 13 24 D-GND ECLK_LSU_P 20 6 ECLK_LSU_P
CN19 P R R P /SH_K2(M) 11 26 /SH_K2(M) D-GND 21 4 D-GND
INT24V1 1 1 1 1 1 LSUSS- D-GND 9 28 D-GND D-GND 22 3 D-GND
NC 2 2 2 2 2 BK /SH_K1(K) 30 30 /SH_K1(K) HSYNC_LSU_P 23 1 HSYNC_LSU_P
/LSUSS_B 3 SM-2Pin SM-2Pin D-GND 32 32 D-GND HSYNC_LSU_N 24 2 HSYNC_LSU_N
5V_LD 2 34 5V_LD S24B-PHDSS B24B-PHDSS
PCU P R S32B-PHDSS S34B-PHDSS
PWB CCFM_V 4 1 1
CCFM_LD 7 2 2 SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3
P-GND 6 3 3
CCFM
CCFM_CNT 5 SM-3Pin
B7B-PH-K-S FG FG
PHNR-12-H +
CLUD1 (CS1 lift-up detection) BU12P-TR-P-H (Cassette SW harness PA2) P DF1B-32DE S (Paper feed main harness PA2) CN9
(Paper feed UN harness CS1 PA2)
5VNPD 1 10 5VNPD 3 1 5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD
CLUD1 2 11 CLUD1 2 3 CLUD1 3 3 CLUD1
present detection for
GP1A73 179228-3 CPED1 (Paper
CS1)
CS1 CPED1 2 8 CPED1 5 9 CPED1 9 9 CPED1
PAPER D-GND 3 9 D-GND 4 11 D-GND 11 11 D-GND
FEED CPFD1 (CS1 paper entry detection) GP1A73 179228-3
H. Paper feed unit section
UN 5VN 1 4 5VN 9 13 5VN 13 13 5VN

CPFD1 2 5 CPFD1 8 15 CPFD1 15 15 CPFD1
(Right lower door
GP1A73 179228-3 DSW_C open/close detection)
5VN 1 1 5VN 12 31 5VN 31 31 5VN
DSW_C 2 2 DSW_C 11 30 DSW_C 30 30 DSW_C
GP1A73 179228-3
CSPD1 (Paper remaining detection for CS1)

CSPD1 2 21 CSPD1 21 21 CSPD1
GP1A73 179228-3
CSS1 (CS1 cassette installation detection)
CSS1 1 25 CSS1 25 25 CSS1

NC 3
NC 4
PCU
PWB_un S4P-PH-K-S PWB
PHNR-9-H +
CLUD2 (CS2 lift-up detection) BU09P-TR-P-H
(Paper feed UN harness CS2 PA2)
GP1A73 179228-3
(Paper present detection for
CS2 CPED2 CS2)
PAPER 5VNPD 1 4 5VNPD 6 8 5VNPD 8 8 5VNPD
FEED CPED2 2 5 CPED2 5 10 CPED2 10 10 CPED2
UN D-GND 3 6 D-GND 4 12 D-GND 12 12 D-GND

CPFD2 (CS2 paper entry detection) GP1A73 179228-3
5VN 1 1 5VN 9 14 5VN 14 14 5VN
GP1A73 179228-3
CSPD2 (Paper remaining detection for CS2)

GP1A73 179228-3
CSS2 (CS2 cassette installation detection)
CSS2 1 26 CSS2 26 26 CSS2

NC 3 B32B-PHDSS
NC 4
PWB_un S4P-PH-K-S
CPFM (Paper feed motor) CN6
(Paper feed main harness PA2)
INT24V2 1 32 INT24V2
P-GND 2 30 P-GND
/CPFM_GAIN 3 28 /CPFM_GAIN
/CPFM_CK 4 26 /CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D 5 24 /CPFM_D
CPFM_LD 6 22 CPFM_LD
NC 7 B32B-PHDSS
B07B-PASK-S
R SM-2Pin P (DC main harness PA2) CN5

(Paper feed drive harness PA2)
1 /CPFC 1 1 /CPFC 1 1 /CPFC
CPFC 2 24V3 2 2 24V3 2 2 24V3 PCU PWB
(Vertical transport clutch)
3 /CPUC1 3 3 /CPUC1
4 24V3 4 4 24V3
R SM-2Pin P 5 /CPUC2 5 5 /CPUC2
I. Paper feed drive unit section
1 /CPUC1 1 6 24V3 6 6 24V3

CPLC1 2 24V3 2 7 P-GND 7 7 P-GND
(CS1 paper feed clutch)
8 /CLUM1 8 8 /CLUM1
9 P-GND 9 9 P-GND
R SM-2Pin P 10 /CLUM2 10 10 /CLUM2
1 /CPUC2 1 R SM-10Pin P B24B-PHDSS
CPLC2 2 24V3 2
(CS2 paper feed clutch)
CLUM1 (CS1 lift-up motor)

P-GND 1
/CLUM1 2
B2P-PH-K-S
CLUM2 (CS2 lift-up motor)

P-GND 1
/CLUM2 2
B2P-PH-K-S ADULM (ADU lower motor) (Paper feed drive harness PA2) CN2
INT24V1 2 7 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 8 INT24V1
ADUMLB/ 6 9 ADUMLB/
ADUMLB 3 10 ADUMLB
ADUMLA 1 11 ADUMLA
ADUMLA/ 4 12 ADUMLA/
PHR-6 B12B-PASK-1

R Frame
PFM (PS front motor) CN3

(Paper feed drive harness PA2)
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
PFMB/ 6 3 PFMB/
DRIVER
PFMB 3 4 PFMB MAIN PWB
PFMA 1 5 PFMA
PFMA/ 4 6 PFMA/
PHR-6
Paper feed drive
RRM (PS motor) (Paper feed drive harness PA2)

INT24V1 1 7 INT24V1
INT24V1 6 8 INT24V1
RRMB/ 3 9 RRMB/
RRMB 5 10 RRMB
RRMA 4 11 RRMA
RRMA/ 2 12 RRMA/
B6P-PH-K-R 13 N,C
Process drive B13B-PASK-1
RESI SENSOR F
(Process control sensor UN harness PA2)
5VNPD 1
D-GND 2
REGS_F 4
/REGS_F_LED 3
PCS_F 5
OMRON 179228-5
(Paper feed main harness PA2) CN6

1 5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD
2 D-GND 2 3 D-GND
3 REGS_F 3 5 REGS_F
PROCON
4 /REGS_F_LED 4 7 /REGS_F_LED
J. PS unit & process control unit section
SENSOR UN
RESI SENSOR R 5 5VNPD 5
PCS_R 5 6 D-GND 6
5VNPD 1 7 NC 7
D-GND 2 8 PCS_CL 8 9 PCS_CL
REGS_R 4 9 NC 9 PCU
/REGS_R_LED 3 10 5VNPD 10 2 5VNPD
OMRON 179228-5 11 D-GND 11 4 D-GND
PWB
12 REGS_R 12 6 REGS_R
13 /REGS_R_LED 13 8 /REGS_R_LED
2 /PCSS 2 14 /PCSS 14 11 /PCSS
PCSS(Process control 1 24V3 1 15 24V3 15 13 24V3
shutter solenoid) 16 NC 16
R SM2P P
17 NC 17
18 NC 18
R SM18P P
PROCON SENSOR UN
PPD1 (PS front sensor) BU06P-TR-P-H+PHNR-06-H

(PS UN harness PA2) (Paper feed main harness PA2)

PPD1 2 5 PPD1 2 12 PPD1
GP1A73 179228-3 3 5VNPD 4 16 5VNPD
PS UN 2 PPD2 5 18 PPD2
1 D-GND 6 20 D-GND
PPD2 (PS sensor) B32B-PHDSS
5VNPD 1
PPD2 2
D-GND 3
GP2A200 179228-3
PS UN
9 24V3 9 (Paper feed main
(Right door harness PA2) 25 NC 25 harness PA2)
CN1 FG 32 F-GND 32 FG CN7
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
(Right paper exit, reverse PG interface harness)
TFD3 (Right paper full detection) (Right paper exit UN harness) CN2 D-GND 2 17 D-GND 17 13 D-GND
TFD3 1 6 TFD3 1 1 TFD3 SIN3 3 2 SIN3 2 2 SIN3
D-GND 2 5 D-GND 2 2 D-GND SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 16 SELIN1
5VLED1 3 4 5VLED1 3 3 5VLED1 SELIN2 5 3 SELIN2 3 3 SELIN2
POD3 (Right paper exit detection) GP1S73 179228-3 SELIN3 6 19 SELIN3 19 15 SELIN3
POD3 1 3 POD3 4 4 POD3 APPD1 7 4 APPD1 4 4 APPD1
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 5 5 D-GND APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 18 APPD2
5VLED4 3 1 5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 APPD3 9 5 APPD3 5 5 NC(APPD3)
GP1S73 179228-3 PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H POD3 10 21 POD3 21 17 POD3
K. Right door unit section
7 DSW_ADU MPFD 11 6 MPFD 6 6 MPFD

DSW_ADU (ADU open/close (ADU open/close detection
detection) interface harness)
4 1 8 D-GND 5VNPD 16 10 5VNPD 10 10 5VNPD
DSW_ADU 1 3 D-GND 2 9 5VLED2 MPWD 13 7 MPWD 7 7 MPWD
D-GND 2 2 DSW_ADU 3 10 APPD1 TH_M 14 23 TH_M 23 19 TH_M
5VLED2 3 1 5VLED2 4 11 D-GND HUD_M 15 8 HUD_M 8 8 HUD_M
GP1S73 179228-3 PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H 12 5VLED5 S16B-PHDSS-B
13 APPD3 15 24V3 15 9 24V3
APPD1(ADU transport detection 1) (ADU transport 1 14 GND 31 /MPGS 31 14 /MPGS
interface harness)
APPD1 1 3 APPD1 1 15 5VLED 30 /MPFS 30 22 /MPFS
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2 16 NC RIGHT 14 24V3 14 11 24V3
5VLED5 3 1 5VLED5 3 S16B-PHDSS-B DOOR I/F 1 /MPUC 1 28 /MPUC 28 20 /MPUC
GP1S73 179228-3 PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H 2 24V3 2 13 24V3 13 12 24V3
PWB R SM2PIN P B22B-PHDSS
11 NC 11
12 NC 12
16 NC 16
22 NC 22
24 NC 24
APPD2 (ADU transport detection 2) CN3(1/2) 26 NC 26
(Right door harness P2)
APPD2 1 4 APPD2 27 NC 27
D-GND 2 5 D-GND 29 NC 29
5VLED10 3 6 5VLED10 P QR/P4 32PIN S
GP1S73 179228-3
CN3(2/2)
(Manual (Right door harness P2) NC (GND) 11 PCU PWB
(Manual feed paper
feed tray
MPLD harness (2)) PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H (Manual feed PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H NC (5VLED) 12
length detection 1) tray harness (1)) MPUC
MPLD 1 1 NC 9 3 MPLD 12 16 MPLD NC (GND) 17 (Manual feed paper
D-GND 2 2 NC 8 1 MPLD2 14 13 MPLD2 NC (GND) 21 feed clutch) R SM2P P
5VLED12 3 3 NC 7 4 5VLED12 11 18 5VLED12 NC (GND) 23 (Multi upper UN harness P2) 1 24V3 1
GP1S73 179228-3 4 MPLD 6 NC (GND) 26 (Right door PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-H 2 /MPFS 2 MPFS
harness P2)
5 D-GND 5 5 5VN 10 19 5VN NC (GND) 30 8 24V3 1 (Manual feed pick-up clutch)

(Manual feed paper (Manual feed paper
MPWD width detection) 6 5VLED12 4 6 MPWD 9 20 MPWD NC 32 7 /MPFS 2 MPED empty detection)
5VN 3 7 5VN 3 MPED 7 6 MPED 3 1 MPED
MPWD 2 8 MPWD 2 2 D-GND
D-GND 1 9 D-GND 1 D-GND 8 5 D-GND 4 3 5VLED7
VR_PWB PHNR-03-H 5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5 179228-3 GP1S73
feed tray
MTOP2 (Manual
expansion detection) NC (FAX_D) 1 PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
MTOP2 1 7 MTOP2 8 22 MTOP2 NC (GND) 2 2 /MPGS 7 4 /MPGS 2
D-GND 2 5VLED6 3 3 5VLED6 6 1 5VLED6 5
5VLED13 3 8 5VLED13 7 24 5VLED13 5 24V3 1
(Manual feed tray
MTOP1 non-expansion detection) GP1S73 179228-3 2 D-GND 4
MTOP1 1 9 MTOP1 6 25 MTOP1 MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 3 MPFD 3
D-GND 2 (Manual feed paper entry detection)
1
3
5
2
4
6
5VLED9 3 10 5VLED9 5 27 5VLED9 MPFD

GP1S73 179228-3 TH&HUD Temperature
humidity sensor MPFD 1
5VN 1 11 5VN 4 28 5VN D-GND 2
24V3
24V3
24V3
HUD_M 2 12 HUD_M 3 29 HUD_M 5VLED6 3

D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND 3 13 D-GND 2 14 D-GND GP1S73 179228-3

TH_M 4 14 TH_M 1 31 TH_M DF11-6DP-SP2
ZHR-4 2 5VLED4 13 15 5VLED4 P SM2P R
S32B-PHDSS-B 1 24V3 1
1
3
5
4
2
7
6
8
MPGS 2 /MPGS 2
(Multi lower UN harness)
DF11-8DP-SP1 (Manual feed gate solenoid)
P DF1B-26p S
20 N,C 20
21 N,C 21
22 N,C 22
23 N,C 23
24 N,C 24
25 N,C 25
26 N,C 26
(Upper main
R SM4PIN P (Paper exit UN harness PA2) harness PA2) CN12
1 POFM_V 1 6 POFM_V 6 16 POFM_V
2 /POFM_CNT 2 7 /POFM_CNT 7 17 /POFM_CNT
POFM 1 3 P-GND 3 11 P-GND 11 20 P-GND
4 POFM_LD1 4 8 POFM_LD1 8 18 POFM_LD1
9 POFM_LD2 9 19 POFM_LD2
L. Paper out unit section
1 POFM_V 1 R SM-6Pin P
2 /POFM_CNT 2 5 24V2 5 1 24V2 1 11 24V2
POFM 2 3 P-GND 3 1 /OSM_XB 1 2 /OSM_XB 2 12 /OSM_/B
4 POFM_LD2 4 OSM 2 /OSM_XA 2 3 /OSM_XA 3 13 /OSM_/A
R SM4PIN P (SHIFTER MOTOR) 3 /OSM_B 3 4 /OSM_B 4 14 /OSM_B
4 /OSM_A 4 5 /OSM_A 5 15 /OSM_A
6 NC 6
TFD2 (Paper exit paper full detection) 13 TFD2 13 22 TFD2

5VNPD 3
TFD2 2
D-GND 1 14 POD2 14 23 POD2
GP1A71 PHR-3 POD2 (Paper exit detection)
PCU PWB
5VNPD 1
POD2 2 15 HPOS 15 24 HPOS
D-GND 3
HPOS (SHIFTER HP) LG248NL 179228-3
5VNPD 1 16 POD1 16 25 POD1
HPOS 2 17 D-GND 17 26 D-GND
D-GND 3 12 5VNPD 12 21 5VNPD
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
4
1
2
3
10
LG248NL 179228-3 POD1 (Fusing rear detection) B30B-PHDSS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5VNPD 1 10 NC 10
POD1 2 18 NC 18
D-GND 3 19 NC 19
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
/POFM_V
/POFM_V
/POFM_V
/POFM_V
LG248NL 179228-3
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
DF11-4DP-SP1 SSJC6-4 SSJC6-6
(Upper main
P SM-3Pin R CN13
harness PA2)
1 FUFM_/V 1 1 FUFM_/V
FUFM 2 FUFM_LD 2 15 FUFM_LD

(Fusing cooling fan (40FAN)) 3 P-GND 3 19 P-GND
B32B-PHDSS
(Paper feed drive

FUM (Fusing motor) R SM-12p P (Upper main harness PA2) R SM-12p P CN1
(Paper exit UN harness PA2) harness PA2)
FUMB 1 1 FUMB 1 1 FUMB 1 4 FUMB
FUMA 2 2 FUMA 2 2 FUMA 2 5 FUMA
INT24V1 3 3 INT24V1 3 3 INT24V1 3 1 INT24V1
FUMB/ 5 5 FUMB/ 5 5 FUMB/ 5 3 FUMB/
FUMA/ 6 6 FUMA/ 6 6 FUMA/ 6 6 FUMA/
PHR-6-R B6B-PASK-1
POM (Paper exit motor) CN2

POMA 1 7 POMA 7 7 POMA 7 5 POMA
POMB 3 9 POMB 9 9 POMB 9 4 POMB DRIVER
POMA/ 4 10 POMA/ 10 10 POMA/ 10 6 POMA/ MAIN
INT24V1 5 11 INT24V1 11 11 INT24V1 11 2 INT24V1 PWB
POMB/ 6 12 POMB/ 12 12 POMB/ 12 3 POMB/
PHR-6 SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 B12B-PASK-1
FG FG
(PCU-MOTHER
CN1 connecting FFC PA2) CN18
D-GND 1 28 D-GND
D-GND 2 27 D-GND
D-GND 3 26 D-GND
D-GND 4 25 D-GND
/MPFC_RES 5 24 /MPFC_RES
PCU_RES 6 23 PCU_RES
PCU_TXD 7 22 PCU_TXD
D-GND 8 21 D-GND
PCU_RXD 9 20 PCU_RXD
PCU_DTR 10 19 PCU_DTR
MOTHER /FAX_LED 11 18 /FAX_LED
PWB PCU_DSR 12 17 PCU_DSR
M. PCU PWB-other PWB
D-GND 13 16 D-GND
/POF 14 15 /POF
TRANS_RST 15 14 TRANS_RST
LSU_RST 16 13 LSU_RST
SCK 17 12 SCK
D-GND 18 11 D-GND
D-GND 19 10 D-GND
TRANS_DAT 20 9 TRANS_DAT
JOBEND_INT 21 8 JOBEND_INT
RSV_DAT 22 7 RSV_DAT
/PCU_TRG 23 6 /PCU_TRG
TH1_LSU 24 5 TH1_LSU
D-GND 25 4 D-GND
D-GND 26 3 D-GND
D-GND 27 2 D-GND
D-GND 28 1 D-GND
28FMZ-BT 28FMZ-BT
(Paper feed main

PCU PWB
CN4 harness PA2) CN8
ADUMLCNT 1 1 ADUMLCNT
ADUML_/A 3 3 ADUML_/A
ADUML_A 5 5 ADUML_A
ADUML_B 7 7 ADUML_B
ADUML_/B 9 9 ADUML_/B
POMCNT 11 11 POMCNT
POM_/A 13 13 POM_/A
POM_A 15 15 POM_A
POM_B 17 17 POM_B
POM_/B 19 19 POM_/B

RRMCNT 21 21 RRMCNT
RRM_/A 23 23 RRM_/A
RRM_A 25 25 RRM_A
DRIVER MAIN D-GND 2 2 D-GND
PWB FUMCNT 4 4 FUMCNT
FUM_/A 6 6 FUM_/A
FUM_A 8 8 FUM_A
FUM_B 10 10 FUM_B
FUM_/B 12 12 FUM_/B
RRM_B 14 14 RRM_B
RRM_/B 16 16 RRM_/B
PFMCNT 18 18 PFMCNT
PFM_/A 20 20 PFM_/A
PFM_A 22 22 PFM_A
PFM_/B 24 24 PFM_/B
PFM_B 26 26 PFM_B
B26B-PNDZS B26B-PHDSS
CN5 CN3
INT24V1 1 3 INT24V1
P-GND 2 2 P-GND
5VNPD 3 1 5VNPD
B3P-VH B7P-VH
(1)
CN-F
24V4 1 1 24V4 1
P-GND 2 2 P-GND 2
DESK CONTROL 5VN 3 3 5VN 3
D-GND 4 4 D-GND 4 CN4
N. DESK & LCC
PWB (DC main harness PA2)

TXD_DSK 6 6 TXD_DSK 6 14 TXD_DSK
RXD_DSK 7 7 RXD_DSK 7 15 RXD_DSK
/DTR_DSK 8 8 /DTR_DSK 8 16 /DTR_DSK
DSR_DSK 9 9 DSR_DSK 9 17 /DSR_DSK
RES_DSK 10 10 RES_DSK 10 18 RES_DSK
/TRC_DSK 11 11 /TRC_DSK 11 19 /TRC_DSK
NC 12 R SM 11PIN P
B12B-PHDSS-B
MX-2600N/2600G/3100N/3100G
1 WH_L(DESK) 1 1 WH_L(DESK) 1
WH 2 WH_N(DESK) 2 3 WH_N(DESK) 3
2 F-GND 2
F.G. P EL 3PIN R
(DESK OPTION) SRA-21T-4
F.G.
CN-A 1 NC 1
NC 4 2 NC 2
TXD_LCC 7 3 TXD_LCC 3 20 TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC 8 4 RXD_LCC 4 21 RXD_LCC
LCC CONTROL /DTR_LCC 9 5 /DTR_LCC 5 22 /DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC 10 6 /DSR_LCC 6 23 /DSR_LCC
PWB RES_LCC 11 7 RES_LCC 7 24 RES_LCC
NC 3 8 F-GND 8
5VN 5 9 5VN 9
24V4 1 11 24V4 11 26 /TRC_LCC
P-GND 2 12 P-GND 12 B26B-PHDSS
/TRC_LCC 12 13 /TRC_LCC 13 PCU PWB
B12B-PHDSS-B 14 NC 14
15 NC 15
P EL 15PIN R
SRA-21T-4 F.G. CN8 (FROM - P1)
F.G. 6 24V4

B7P-VH
1 WH_L(LCC) 1 4 WH_L(LCC) 4
WH 2 WH_N(LCC) 2 12 WH_N(LCC) 12 CN7 (FROM - P1)
5 F-GND 5 7 P-GND
F.G. 1 NC 1 B8P-VH
(LCC OPTION) 2 NC 2 F.G. DC PWB
3 NC 3 SRA-21T-4 CN4 (FROM - P1)
6 NC 6 3 5VN
7 NC 7 6 D-GND
8 NC 8 B6P-VH
9 NC 9
10 NC 10
11 NC 11
P EL 12PIN R
CN4
1 WH_L(LSU) 1 1 WH_L(LSU) 1 1 WH_N(LSU)
WH 2 WH_N(LSU) 2 2 NC 2 2 WH_N(DESK/LCC)
P EL 2PIN R 3 WH_N(LSU) 3 3 NC
(LSU-WH harness) R EL 3PIN P 4 WH_L(DESK/LCC)
(LSU OPTION) 5 WH_L(LSU)
(WH-DESK_LCC harness II) B4P(5-3)-VH WH PWB
2
(2)
2
CN-F
24V4 1 1 24V4 1
: '09/Sep
P-GND 2 2 P-GND 2
MX-2301N
5VN 3 3 5VN 3
D-GND 4 4 D-GND 4 (DC main harness P2LT) CN4
TXD_DSK 6 6 TXD_DSK 6 14 TXD_DSK
RXD_DSK 7 7 RXD_DSK 7 15 RXD_DSK
/DTR_DSK 8 8 /DTR_DSK 8 16 /DTR_DSK
DSR_DSK 9 9 DSR_DSK 9 17 /DSR_DSK
RES_DSK 10 10 RES_DSK 10 18 RES_DSK
/TRC_DSK 11 11 /TRC_DSK 11 19 /TRC_DSK
DESK CONTROL PWB NC 12 R SM 11PIN P
B12B-PHDSS-B
1 WH_L(DESK) 1 1 WH_L(DESK) 1
WH 2 WH_N(DESK) 2 3 WH_N(DESK) 3
2 F-GND 2
F.G. P EL 3PIN R
(DESK OPTION) SRA-21T-4
F.G.
20 TXD_LCC
21 RXD_LCC
22 /DTR_LCC
23 /DSR_LCC
24 RES_LCC
25 D-GND
26 /TRC_LCC
B26B-PHDSS PCU PWB
(DC main harness P2LT)

CN8 (FROM P1)
6 24V4

B7P-VH
CN7 (FROM P1)

7 P-GND
B8P-VH
DC PWB
CN4 (FROM P1)
3 5VN
6 D-GND
B6P-VH
CN4
1 WH_L(LSU) 1 1 WH_L(LSU) 1 1 WH_N(LSU)
WH 2 WH_N(LSU) 2 2 NC 2 2 WH_N(DESK/LCC)
P EL 2PIN R 3 WH_N(LSU) 3 3 NC
(LSU-WH harness) R EL 3PIN P 4 WH_L(DESK/LCC)
(LSU OPTION) 5 WH_L(LSU)
(WH-DK_LSU harness P2LT) B4P(5-3)-VH WH PWB
CN17
1 24V3
2 P-GND
3 /CV_COPY
4 /CV_COUNT
5 /CV_START
O. Finisher & coin vendor
6 /CV_CA
7 /CV_CLCOPY
8 /CV_COLOR1
TO COIN VENDOR 9 /CV_STAPLE
(OPTION) 10 /CV_COLOR0
11 /CV_DUPLEX
12 5VN
13 /CV_SIZE0
14 /CV_SIZE1
15 /CV_SIZE2
16 /CV_SIZE3
B16B-PNDZS
CN CN (DC main harness PA2) CN4

1 TXD_FIN TXD_FIN 1 TXD_INS 1 7 TXD_INS
2 RXD_FIN RXD_FIN 2 RXD_INS 2 8 RXD_INS
3 /DTR_FIN /DTR_FIN 3 /DTR_INS 3 9 /DTR_INS
4 /DSR_FIN /DSR_FIN 4 /DSR_INS 4 10 /DSR_INS
5 RES_FIN RES_FIN 5 RES_INS 5 11 RES_INS
6 24V3 24V3 6 NC 6 12 D-GND
7 5VN 5VN 7 5VN 7 B26B-PHDSS
8 D-GND D-GND 8 D-GND 8
FINISHER PCU PWB
9 P-GND P-GND 9 NC 9
10 F-GND F-GND 10 F-GND 10
11 24V5 24V5 11 24V5 11
12 P-GND P-GND 12 P-GND 12
P EL 12PIN R
INSERTOR
SRA-21T-4
FINISHER & INSERTOR (OPTION)

F.G.
CN8 (FROM - P1)

7 24V5
B7P-VH-B
CN7 (FROM - P1)

6 P-GND DC PWB
B8P-VH-B
CN4 (FROM - P1)
4 5VN
B6P-VH-B
P. Scanner section 1/3
(CCD-F_FFC)
CN2
GND 41 1 GND
AFE_RDD 40 2 AFE_RDD 1 5VEXT
OCSW
AFE_WRD 39 3 AFE_WRD 2 D-GND
AFE_SCLK 38 4 AFE_SCLK 3 OCSW
(Document detection
CN10
AFE_CS 37 5 AFE_CS 5VEXT 1 EHR-3
/RES_CCDAD 36 6 /RES_CCDAD D-GND 2
emitting side
GND 35 7 GND OCSW 3
3.3V 34 8 3.3V 24VEXT 4
harness)
3.3V 33 9 3.3V /SIZE_LED1 5
ORS LED PWB

3.3V 32 10 3.3V /SIZE_LED2 6
3.3V 31 11 3.3V B6P-PH-H-S 24VEXT
3.3V 30 12 3.3V /SIZE_LED1
SRA-21T-4
3.3V 29 13 3.3V /SIZE_LED 2
F.G.
GND 28 14 GND
5V 27 15 5V
CCD PWB
5V 26 16 5V
CN4
8.5inch OPE SYSTEM

5V 25 17 5V MiM_A 1
MIRROR
MOTOR
GND 24 18 GND MiM_B 2
10V 23 19 10V MiM_/A 3
10V 22 20 10V MiM_/B 4
GND 21 21 GND B4P-PH-H-S
RA- 20 22 RA-
CL INVERTOR
(SCN-LAMP_FFC)
CN5
RA+ 19 23 RA+ P-GND 5 5 P-GND
GND 18 24 GND P-GND 4 4 P-GND 2
CL
RB- 17 25 RB- CL 3 3 CL 1
RB+ 16 26 RB+ 24VPD 2 2 24VPD
PWB
GND 15 27 GND 24VPD 1 1 24VPD
RC- 14 28 RC- 5597-05CPB7F 5597-05APB
RC+ 13 29 RC+
GND 12 30 GND (MHPS harness)
CN9
CLK- 11 31 CLK- MHPS 1 3 MHPS
MHPS
CLK+ 10 32 CLK+ D-GND 2 2 D-GND
GND 9 33 GND 5V 3 1 5V
RD- 8 34 RD- BM03B-GHS-TBT EHR-3
RD+ 7 35 RD+
GND 6 36 GND (OPE harness P2)
CN13
RE- 5 37 RE- GND 29 6 GND

RE+ 4 38 RE+ PD 28 5 PD
ORS-PD
PWB
GND 3 39 GND 5V_EXT 27 4 5V_EXT
AFE_CSTG 2 40 AFE_CSTG PDSEL0 26 1 PDSEL0
GND 1 41 GND PDSEL1 25 2 PDSEL1
FI-RE41S-VF FI-RE41S-VF PDSEL2 24 3 PDSEL2
(SCN-Mother B6P-PH-H-S
CN11
harness P2) 9 3.3VPD

CN6
SCANDATA0 - 1 1 SCANDATA0 -
CN1
SCANDATA0 + 2 2 SCANDATA0 + GND 50 1 GND
D-GND 3 3 D-GND GND 49 2 GND
SCANDATA1 - 4 4 SCANDATA1 - 5V_EXT 48 17 5V_EXT
D-GND 6 5 D-GND 3.3V_EXT 39 18 3.3V_EXT
SCANDATA2 - 7 8 SCANDATA2 - /BZR 38 16 /BZR
CR2 MFP-OPE PWB

SCANDATA2 + 8 10 SCANDATA2 + /KEYIN 37 19 /KEYIN
D-GND 9 7 D-GND SEG0LEDBPR 36 15 SEG0LEDBPR
SCANCLKOUT- 10 12 SCANCLKOUT- SEG1LEDCRR 35 13 SEG1LEDCRR
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 14 SCANCLKOUT+ SEG2D0 34 11 SEG2D0
D-GND 12 11 D-GND /F0D1 33 9 /F0D1
LIGHT
BACK
SCANDATA3 - 13 16 SCANDATA3 - /F1D2 32 7 /F1D2 2 /CCFT
SCANDATA3 + 14 15 SCANDATA3 + /F2G0 31 5 /F2G0 1 +CCFT
D-GND 15 13 D-GND /F3G1 30 3 /F3G1 S02(8.0)B-BHS
INVERTER PWB
B15P-PH-K-S B16B-PHDSS-B 501190-5029
CN12
5V2 1 1 1 4 5V2 (INVERTER

D-GND 2 2 2 6 D-GND harness P2)
CN4
nINFO_LED 4 3 3 12 nINFO_LED GND 5 5 GND

nWU_LED 5 4 4 8 WU_LED CCFT 4 4 CCFT
nPOW_LED 6 5 5 10 POW_LED +24V 3 3 +24V
nWU_KEY 7 6 6 14 nWU_KEY +24V 2 2 +24V
501190-2029 GND 1 1 GND
BM05B-GHS-TBT B5B-PAS K
CN3
PO SW
D-GND 3 7 7 1 D-GND /YL(Y1) 4
TOUCH
PWB
PANEL
CR2 MOTHER PWB
D-GND 9 8 8 2 D-GND XH(X1) 3

nPWRSW 8 9 9 3 nPWRSW YH(Y2) 2
B3P-PH-H-S /XL(X2) 1
52271-0469
(LCD FFC P2)
(OP harness P2)
CN1
D-GND 10 10 10 10 D-GND +3.3V 40 40 +3.3V

LCD_DATA3 + 11 11 11 6 LCD_DATA3 + NC 39 39 NC
LCD_DATA3 - 12 12 12 8 LCD_DATA3 - +3.3V 38 38 +3.3V
D-GND 15 13 13 16 D-GND +3.3V 37 37 +3.3V
LCD_CLK+ 13 14 14 12 LCD_CLK+ UD/LR 36 36 NC
LCD_CLK- 14 15 15 14 LCD_CLK- ENAB 35 35 ENAB
D-GND 16 16 16 22 D-GND F-GND 34 34 F-GND
LCD_DATA2+ 17 17 17 18 LCD_DATA2 + Vsync 33 33 Vsync
LCD_DATA2 - 18 18 18 20 LCD_DATA2 - D-GND 32 32 D-GND
D-GND 21 19 19 28 D-GND Hsync 31 31 Hsync
LCD_DATA1+ 19 20 20 24 LCD_DATA1 + D-GND 30 30 D-GND
LCD_DATA1 - 20 21 21 26 LCD_DATA1 - B5 29 29 B5
D-GND 22 22 22 34 D-GND B4 28 28 B4
LCD_DATA0+ 23 23 23 30 LCD_DATA0 + B3 27 27 B3
8.5-LVDS PWB
B24B-PHDSS-B DF1B-24Pin B2 25 25 B2
B1 24 24 B1
8.5 LCD UN
(OP harness P2)

GND 23 1 GND B0 23 23 B0
CN14
CN3
D-GND 6 6 D-GND GND 22 2 GND D-GND 22 22 D-GND

+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V GND 21 7 GND G5 21 21 G5
+5VN 4 4 +5VN GND 20 29 GND G4 20 20 G4
+12V 3 2 +12V GND 19 39 GND G3 19 19 G3
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
+24V2 2 1 +24V2 GND 18 40 GND D-GND 18 18 D-GND

P-GND 1 3 P-GND 3.3V 17 25 3.3V G2 17 17 G2
B6P-VH B6P-VH 3.3V_EXT 16 19 3.3V_EXT G1 16 16 G1
5V_EXT 15 23 5V_EXT G0 15 15 G0
CN14
14
CN12
nPOF_SCN 14 14 nPOF_SCN 24V_EXT 14 3 24V_EXT D-GND 14 D-GND

RXD_SCN 13 13 RXD_SCN 24V_EXT 13 5 24V_EXT R5 13 13 R5
LCD_SEL3 12 12 LCD_SEL3 /YL(Y1) 12 37 /YL(Y1) R4 12 12 R4
nCTS_SCN 11 11 nCTS_SCN XH(X1) 11 35 XH(X1) R3 11 11 R3
LCD_SEL1 10 10 LCD_SEL1 YH(Y2) 10 33 YH(Y2) D-GND 10 10 D-GND
TXD_SCN 9 9 TXD_SCN /XL(X2) 9 31 /XL(X2) R2 9 9 R2
LCD_SEL0 8 8 LCD_SEL0 SC_TEMP 8 27 SC_TEMP R1 8 8 R1
nRTS_SCN 7 7 nRTS_SCN VCONT 7 21 VCONT R0 7 7 R0
LCD_SEL2 6 6 LCD_SEL2 /CCFT 6 17 /CCFT NC 6 6 NC
nRES_SCN 5 5 nRES_SCN PNL_SEL0 5 15 PNL_SEL0 D-GND 5 5 D-GND
nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP PNL_SEL1 4 13 PNL_SEL1 D-GND 4 4 D-GND
nRES_MFPC_SCN 3 3 nRES_MFPC_SCN PNL_SEL2 3 11 PNL_SEL2 CK 3 3 CK
NC 2 2 NC PNL_SEL3 2 9 PNL_SEL3 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
D-GND 1 1 D-GND DISP 1 36 DISP D-GND 1 1 D-GND
B14B-PHDSS-B B14B-PHDSS-B 501190-5029 501571-4029 FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55) FH12-40S-0.5SH(55)

Q. Scanner section 2/3
(CCD-F_FFC)
CN2
GN D 41 1 GND
AFE_RDD 40 2 AFE_RDD 1 5VEXT
OCSW
AFE_WRD 39 3 AFE_WRD 2 D-GND
AFE_SCLK38 4 AFE_SCLK 3 OCSW
(Document detection
CN10
AFE_CS 37 5 AFE_CS 5VEXT 1 EHR-3
/RES_CCDAD 36 6 /RES_CCDAD D-GND 2
emitting side
GND 35 7 GND OCSW 3
3.3V 34 8 3.3V 24VEXT 4
harness)
3.3V 33 9 3.3V /SIZE_LED1 5
ORS LED PWB

3.3V 32 10 3.3V /SIZE_LED2 6
3.3V 31 11 3.3V B6P-PH-K-S 24VEXT
3.3V 30 12 3.3V /SIZE_LED1
SRA-21T-4
3.3V 29 13 3.3V /SIZE_LED2
F.G.
GND 28 14 GND
5V 27 15 5V
5V 26 16 5V
8.1inch OPE SYSTEM

CN4
5V 25 17 5V MiM_A 1
MIRROR
MOTOR
CCD PWB
GND 24 18 GND MiM_B 2

10V 23 19 10V MiM_/A 3
10V 22 20 10V MiM_/B 4
GND 21 21 GND B4P-PH-K-S
RA- 20 22 RA- (SCN-LAMP_FFC)
CL INVERTOR
CN5
RA+ 19 23 RA+ P-GND 5 5 P-GND
GND 18 24 GND P-GND 4 4 P-GND 2
CL
PWB
RB- 17 25 RB- CL 3 3 CL 1
RB+ 16 26 RB+ 24VPD 2 2 24VPD
GND 15 27 GND 24VPD 1 1 24VPD
RC- 14 28 RC- 5597-05CPB7F 5597-05APB
RC+ 13 29 RC+
GND 12 30 GND (MHPS harness)
CN9
MHPS
CLK- 11 31 CLK- MHPS 1 3 MHPS
CLK+ 10 32 CLK+ D-GND 2 2 D-GND
GND 9 33 GND 5V 3 1 5V
RD- 8 34 RD- BM03B-GHS-TBT EHR-3
RD+ 7 35 RD+
GND 6 36 GND (OPE harness P2)
C N13
RE- 5 37 RE- GND 29 6 GND
ORS-PD
RE+ 4 38 RE+ PD 28 5 PD
PWB
AFE_CSTG 2 40 AFE_CSTG PDSEL0 26 1 PDSEL0
GND 1 41 GND PDSEL1 25 2 PDSEL1
FI-RE41S-VF FI-RE41S-VF PDSEL2 24 3 PDSEL2
(SCN-Mother B6P-PH-H-S
CN11
harness P2) 9 3.3VPD

CN4
SCA NDATA0 - 1 1 SCANDATA0 -
CN 1
SCANDATA1 - 4 4 SCANDATA1 - 5V_EXT 48 17 5V_EXT
CR2 8.1 MFP-OPE PWB

D-GND 12 11 D-GND /F0D1 33 9 /F0D1
LIGHT
BACK
SCANDATA3 - 13 16 SCANDATA3 - /F1D2 32 7 /F1D2 2 /CCFT
SCANDATA3 + 14 15 SCANDATA3 + /F2G0 31 5 /F2G0 1 +CCFT
LCD INVERTOR PWB

D-GND 15 13 D-GND /F3G1 30 3 /F3G1 S02(8.0)B-BHS
B15P-PH-K-S B16B-PHDSS-B 501190-5029
CN1
5V2 1 1 1 4 5V2
D-GND 2 2 2 6 D-GND
nINFO_LED 4 3 3 12 nINFO_LED (INVERTER
nWU_LED 5 4 4 8 WU_LED harness P2)
CN4
nPOW_LED 6 5 5 10 POW_LED 24V_EXT 3 1 24V_EXT

nWU_KEY 7 6 6 14 nWU_KEY D-GND 2 2 D-GND
501190-2029 /CCFT 1 3 /CCFT
S3B-PH-SM4-TB S3B-PH-K-S
CN3
PO SW
D-GND 3 7 7 1 D-GND /YL(Y1) 1
TOUCH
PANEL
PWB
D-GND 9 8 8 2 D-GND XH(X1) 2

CR2 MOTHER PWB
nPWRSW 8 9 9 3 nPWRSW YH(Y2) 3

B3P-PH-H-S /XL(X2) 4
52271-0469
(OPE harness P2)
CN1
D-GND 10 10 10 10 D-GND
LCD_DATA3 + 11 11 11 6 LCD_DATA3 +
LCD_DATA3 - 12 12 12 8 LCD_DATA3 -
D-GND 15 13 13 16 D-GND
LCD_CLK+ 13 14 14 12 LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLK- 14 15 15 14 LCD_CLK-
D-GND 16 16 16 22 D-GND
LCD_DATA2 - 18 18 18 20 LCD_DATA2 -
D-GND 21 19 19 28 D-GND
(LCD FFC P2)
LCD_DATA1 - 20 21 21 26 LCD_DATA1 - VO 1 15 VO
8.1-LVDS PWB
D-GND 22 22 22 34 D-GND LP 2 14 LP
LCD_DATA0 + 23 23 23 30 LCD_DATA0 + D-GND 3 13 D-GND
LCD_DATA0 - 24 24 24 32 LCD_DATA0 - CP 4 12 CP
DF1B-24Pin D-GND 5 11 D-GND
B24B-PHDSS-B (OPE harness P2) 3.3V_EXT 6 10 3.3V_EXT
GND 23 1 GND M 7 9 M
CN14
CN3
D-GND 6 6 D-GND GND 22 2 GND D0 8 8 D0

+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V GND 21 7 GND D1 9 7 D1
+5VN 4 4 +5VN GND 20 29 GND D-GND 10 6 D-GND
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB
+12V 3 2 +12V GND 19 39 GND D2 11 5 D2

+24V2 2 1 +24V2 GND 18 40 GND D3 12 4 D3
P-GND 1 3 P-GND 3.3V 17 25 3.3V D-GND 13 3 D-GND
B6P - VH B6P-VH 3.3V_EXT 16 19 3.3V_EXT DISP 14 2 DISP
5V_EXT 15 23 5V_EXT VEE 15 1 VEE
CN 3
CN12
nPOF_SCN 14 14 nPOF_SCN 24V_EXT 14 3 24V_EXT 52030-2629

RXD_SCN 13 13 RXD_SCN 24V_EXT 13 5 24V_EXT
LCD_SEL3 12 12 LCD_SEL3 /YL(Y1) 12 37 /YL(Y1)
nCTS_SCN 11 11 nCTS_SCN XH(X1) 11 35 XH(X1)
8.1 LCD UN
LCD_SEL1 10 10 LCD_SEL1 YH(Y2) 10 33 YH(Y2)

TXD_SCN 9 9 TXD_SCN /XL(X2) 9 31 /XL(X2)
LCD_SEL0 8 8 LCD_SEL0 SC_TEMP 8 27 SC_TEMP
nRTS_SCN 7 7 nRTS_SCN VCONT 7 21 VCONT
LCD_SEL2 6 6 LCD_SEL2 /CCFT 6 17 /CCFT
nRES_SCN 5 5 nRES_SCN PNL_SEL0 5 15 PNL_SEL0
nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP PNL_SEL1 4 13 PNL_SEL1
nRES_MFPC_SCN 3 3 nRES_MFPC_SCN PNL_SEL2 3 11 PNL_SEL2
NC 2 2 NC PNL_SEL3 2 9 PNL_SEL3
D-GND 1 1 D-GND DISP 1 36 DISP
B14B-PHDSS-B B14B-PHDSS-B 501190-5029 501571-4009

2
(2)
(1)
2
: '09/Sep
MX-2301N
CN15 (Main unit - RSPF
1 SPPD1 P XAD 34PIN R interface harness PA2) CN15
2 SPPD2 3 SPPD1 3 1 SPPD1
3 SPFMCK 4 SPPD2 4 2 SPPD2
4 SPFMM1 9 SPFMCK 9 3 SPFMCK
R. Scanner section 3/3
10 SPFMM1 10 4 SPFMM1
5 SPFMM2
11 SPFMM2 11 5 SPFMM2
6 SPFMO1
12 SPFMO1 12 6 SPFMO1
7 SPFMO2
13 SPFMO2 13 7 SPFMO2
8 SPRMA
14 SPRMA 14 8 SPRMA
9 SPRMA/
15 SPRMA/ 15 9 SPRMA/
10 SPRMB
16 SPRMB 16 10 SPRMB
11 SPRMB/
17 SPRMB/ 17 11 SPRMB/
MX-2600N/2600G/3100N/3100G
12 SPRMO1
18 SPRMO1 18 12 SPRMO1
13 SGS 19 SGS 19 13 SGS
14 STMPS 20 STMPS 20 14 STMPS
15 SRRC 21 SRRC 21 15 SRRC
TO R-SPF 16 SPFC TO RSPF 22 SPFC 22 16 SPFC
17 SPWS 23 SPWS 23 17 SPWS
18 SELA_ 24 SELA_ 24 18 SELA_
19 SELB_ 25 SELB_ 25 19 SELB_
20 SELC_ 26 SELC_ 26 20 SELC_
21 SSELO 27 SSELO 27 21 SSELO
23 SPFFAN 29 SPFFAN 29 23 SPFFAN
26 5VPD 32 5VPD 32 26 5VPD
27 GND 33 D-GND 33 27 GND
28 NC 28 NC
B28B-PHDSS-B B28B-PHDSS-B
CN16 CN16
1 GND 1 P-GND 1 1 GND
2 GND 2 P-GND 2 2 GND
3 3.3V 8 AVCC 8 3 3.3V
4 3.3V
4 3.3V
7 5V_EXT 7 5 5V
5 5V
6 12V
6 12V
7 24V
7 24V
5 24VPD 5 8 24V
8 24V
6 24VPD 6 9 24V
9 24V
34 D-GND 34 10 GND
10 GND
B10B-PH-K-S

B10B-PH-K-S
CN6
CN6 CR2 SCN- n A_PNC 1
CR2 SCN-CNT n A_PNC 1 n A_COPY 2
PWB n A_COPY 2 CNT PWB n A_CA 3
n A_CA 3 n A_READY 4
n A_READY 4 n A_AUD 5
n A_AUD 5 5V 6
5V 6 D-GND 7 TO AUDITER
D-GND 7 TO AUDITER 24V 8
24V 8 NC 9
NC 9 n A_TC 10
n A_TC 10 24V 11
24V 11 PNC-a 12
PNC-a 12 D-GND 13
D-GND 13 B13P-PH-K-S (PNC harness)
B13P-PH-K-S (PNC harness)
S. FAX section
(SCN-Mother CN
CN2 CN3 1 D-GND
harness JP P2)
1 SP- D-GND1 30 2 D-GND
SPEAKER 2 SP+ 3.3V1 29 3 3.3V
S02B-PASK-2(LF)(SN) 3.3V2 28 4 3.3V
CNCT_FAX 26 5 24V
MJ1 (BOARD TO nFAXCS_CTS 27 6 nFAXCS_CTS
( JAPAN) CN2 BOARD) CN7 5V 25 7 5V
1 - 24V 1 1 24V +5V-1 24 8 nFAXCS_RTS
2 - AG 2 2 AG FLVPP 22 9 FLVPP
3 L1 24V 3 3 24V nFAXCS_CTS 23 10 nFAXCS_CTS
4 L2 AG 4 4 AG D-GND 21 11 D-GND
5 - 150VON 5 5 150VON D-GND2 20 12 nFAXD_RTS
6 - CION 6 6 CION D-GND 19 13 D-GND
MJ-62J-RD315 MSGMUTE 7 7 MSGMUTE 5V 17 14 5V
HS1- 8 8 HS1- FAX_WUP- 18 15 FAXCS_RXD_N
TO LINE MOTHER
(EX) HS2- 9 9 HS2- FAXCS_RXD_P 15 16 FAXCS_RXD_P
1 - CI- 10 10 CI- FAX_WUP- 13 17 FAX_WUP- PWB
2 T2 EXHS- 11 11 EXHS- +5V-2 16 18 FAXD_RXD_P
3 R1 SON1 12 12 SON1 D-GND3 14 19 FAXD_RXD_N
4 T1 SON2 13 13 SON2 D-GND 11 20 D-GND
5 R2 ECON 14 14 ECON D-GND4 12 21 FAXCS_TXD_N
6 - MRON 15 15 MRON FAXCS_TXD_P 9 22 FAXCS_TXD_P
MJ-64J-RD315 TELID 16 16 TELID FLVPP 10 23 nRES_FAX
CI2- 17 17 CI2- 5VS 7 24 5VS
NC 18 18 NC +5V2 8 25 FAXD_TXD_P
MJ2 TELID2 19 19 TELID2 FAXD_TXD_N 5 26 FAXD_TXD_N
1 - NC 20 20 NC +24V 6 27 nNCT_FAX
2 - DG 21 21 DG 3.3V3 4 28 3.3V
3 L1 3.3V 22 22 3.3V 3.3V4 3 29 3.3V
TO EX TEL
4 L2 DG 23 23 DG D-GND5 2 30 D-GND
5 - 5VS 24 24 5VS P-GND 1 31 P-GND
6 - DG 25 25 DG BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT B31B-CSRK
MJ-62J-RD315 SI3_RES- 26 26 SI3_RES-
SPK 27 27 SPK
MDM_ATXD 28 28 MDM_ATXD

MDM_ARXD 29 29 MDM_ARXD
CN1 MDM_ABITCLK 30 30 MDM_ABITCLK
1 TX+ MDM_ASPCLK 31 31 MDM_ASPCLK FAX MAIN PWB
2 RX+ RGDT- 32 32 RGDT-
TO HANDSET 3 RX- MDM_CLK 33 33 MDM_CLK
(JAPAN ONLY) 4 TX- AFERES- 34 34 AFERES-
5 DG BBITCLK 35 35 BBITCLK
6 RHS- BSPCLK 36 36 BSPCLK
BRXD 37 37 BRXD
BTXD 38 38 BTXD
HDMUTE- 39 39 HDMUTE-
TEL LIU PWB RHS- 40 40 RHS-
T X 24- 40R - 10ST- H1 TX25- 40P- 8ST- H1
R SM-4pin P (HDD SATA cable P2)
1 PWR_CPUFAN 1
2 PWM_CPUFAN 2 P QR/P4 8P S CN17
CPU FAN (HDD power interface harness P2)
3 P-GND 3 7 PWR_CPUFAN 7 1 PWR_CPUFAN
4 LOCK_CPUFAN 4 6 PWM_CPUFAN 6 3 PWM_CPUFAN
SATA POWER 3 P-GND 3 5 P-GND
12V 15 2 LOCK_CPUFAN 2 7 LOCK_CPUFAN
12V 14 2 PWR_HDDFAN
12V 13 4 PWM_HDDFAN
GND 12 6 P-GND
GND 11 8 LOCK_HDDFAN
GND 10 B10B-PHDSS-B
5V 9
T. MFP board section
5V 8 CN16
(HDD power interface harness P2)
5V 7 1 12V 1 1 12V
GND 6 5 D-GND 5 3 D-GND
GND 5 4 5V 4 2 5VN
HDD GND 4 8 D-GND 8 4 D-GND MOTHER PWB
3.3V 3 (HDD SATA cable P2) B4P-VH
3.3V 2
3.3V 1 MFP PWB
CN19 CN2
SATA SIGNAL 1 LCD_DATA0- 31 CH3_N 61 USB_DN_out 91 FAX1D_CTS 1 LCD_DATA0- 31 CH3_N 61 USB_DN 91 FAX1D_CTS
(HDD SATA cable P2)
GND 1 1 GND CN4 2 LCD_DATA0+ 32 CH3_P 62 USB_DP_out 92 FAX1CS_TXD 2 LCD_DATA0+ 32 CH3_P 62 USB_DP 92 FAX1CS_TXD
SATA_TXP 2 2 SATA_TXP 3 LCD_DATA1- 33 CH4_N 63 USB_VBUS_out 93 FAX1CS_RXD 3 LCD_DATA1- 33 CH4_N 63 USB_VBUS 93 FAX1CS_RXD
SATA_TXN 3 3 SATA_TXN 4 LCD_DATA1+ 34 CH4_P 64 USB_RTN_P_in 94 FAX1CS_RTS 4 LCD_DATA1+ 34 CH4_P 64 USB_RTN_P_in 94 FAX1CS_RTS
GND 4 4 GND LCD_DATA2- ECLK_LSU_N FAX1CS_CTS USB_RTN_N_in FAX1CS_CTS

5 35 65 USB_RTN_N_in 95 5 LCD_DATA2- 35 ECLK_LSU_N 65 95
SATA_RXN 5 5 SATA_RXN 6 LCD_DATA2+ 36 ECLK_LSU_P 66 PICVPPON 96 RES_FAX1 6 LCD_DATA2+ 36 ECLK_LSU_P 66 PICVPPON 96 RES_FAX1
SATA_RXP 6 6 SATA_RXP 7 LCD_CLK- 37 HSYNC_LSU_P 67 RXD_SCN 97 NCNCT_FAX1 7 LCD_CLK- 37 HSYNC_LSU_P 67 RXD_SCN 97 NCNCT_FAX1
GND 7 7 GND 8 LCD_CLK+ 38 HSYNC_LSU_N 68 NCTS_SCN 98 NWU_FAX2 8 LCD_CLK+ 38 HSYNC_LSU_N 68 NCTS_SCN 98 NWU_FAX2
3.3VECO
6SAT07P-328B-B5 9 LCD_DATA3- 39 VSYNC_K_N 69 TXD_SCN 99 _MFP_out 9 LCD_DATA3- 39 VSYNC_K_N 69 TXD_SCN 99 3.3V_ECO
1 5V CN5 10 LCD_DATA3+ 40 VSYNC_K_P 70 NRTS_SCN 100 RTS_LCDsub 10 LCD_DATA3+ 40 VSYNC_K_P 70 NRTS_SCN 100 RTS_LCD
12V 1 USB2.0 2 D- 11 nLDC_DISP(OC) 41 VSYNC_C_P 71 NRES_SCN 101 3.3V_FAX 11 nLDC_DISP 41 VSYNC_C_P 71 NRES_SCN 101 3.3V_FAX
GND 2 3 D+ 12 LCDC_REFCLKin 42 VSYNC_C_N 72 NRES_PCU 102 3.3V_FAX 12 LCD_REFCLKin 42 VSYNC_C_N 72 NRES_PCU 102 3.3V_FAX
(TYPE-A)
GND 3 4 GND 13 SCANDATA3+ 43 VSYNC_M_N 73 RXD_PCU 103 3.3V_FAX 13 SCANDATA3+ 43 VSYNC_M_N 73 RXD_PCU 103 3.3V_FAX
5V 4 UAR27-4K5J00 14 SCANDATA3- 44 VSYNC_M_P 74 NCTS_PCU 104 CTS_LCDsub 14 SCANDATA3- 44 VSYNC_M_P 74 NCTS_PCU 104 CTS_LCD
1 5V CN6 15 SCANCLKOUT+ 45 VSYNC_Y_P 75 TXD_PCU 105 5V0_FAX 15 SCANCLKOUT+ 45 VSYNC_Y_P 75 TXD_PCU 105 5V0_FAX
2 D- 16 SCANCLKOUT- 46 VSYNC_Y_N 76 NRTS_PCU 106 USB_FR_SEL 16 SCANCLKOUT- 46 VSYNC_Y_N 76 NRTS_PCU 106 USB_SEL_SW
USB2.0 3 D+ 17 SCANDATA2+ 47 LCDSEL0 77 NPOF_MFPC 107 LCDSEL2 17 SCANDATA2+ 47 LCDSEL0 77 NPOF_MFPC 107 LCDSEL2
(TYPE-B) 4 GND 18 SCANDATA2- 48 LCDSEL1 78 NREQ_PIC 108 LCDSEL3 18 SCANDATA2- 48 LCDSEL1 78 NREQ_PIC 108 LCDSEL3
UBR23-4K2200 19 SCANDATA1+ 49 +5VL 79 NCLR_PIC 109 DGND 19 SCANDATA1+ 49 +5VL 79 NCLR_PIC 109 DGND
1 TRP1+ CN9 20 SCANDATA1- 50 +5VL 80 TXD_PIC 110 DGND 20 SCANDATA1- 50 +5VL 80 TXD_PIC 110 DGND
2 TRP1- 21 SCANDATA0+ 51 +5VL 81 RXD_PIC 111 DGND 21 SCANDATA0+ 51 +5VL 81 RXD_PIC 111 DGND

3 TRP2+ 22 SCANDATA0- 52 +5VL 82 PWM0 112 DGND 22 SCANDATA0- 52 +5VL 82 PWM0 112 DGND
LAN 4 TRP2- 23 CH0_N 53 +5VL 83 FAN_CNCT 113 DGND 23 CH0_N 53 +5VL 83 FAN_CNCT 113 DGND
5 TRP3+ 24 CH0_P 54 +5VL 84 NRST_PIC 114 DGND 24 CH0_P 54 +5VL 84 NRST_PIC 114 DGND
6 TRP3- 25 CH1_N 55 +5VL 85 RES_MFP 115 DGND 25 CH1_N 55 +5VL 85 RES_MFP 115 DGND
7 TRP4+ 26 CH1_P 56 +5VL 86 PWM1 116 DGND 26 CH1_P 56 +5VL 86 PWM1 116 DGND
8 TRP4- 27 CH2_N 57 +5VL 87 NREQ_PIC_INT 117 DGND 27 CH2_N 57 +5VL 87 NREQ_PIC_INT 117 DGND
SI-51005-F 28 CH2_P 58 +5VL 88 FAX1D_TXD 118 DGND 28 CH2_P 58 +5VL 88 FAX1D_TXD 118 DGND
1 CD CN17 29 CLK_N 59 TXD_LCDsub 89 FAX1D_RXD 119 NC 29 CLK_N 59 TXD_LCD 89 FAX1D_RXD 119 NC
2 RXD 30 CLK_P 60 RXD_LCDsub 90 FAX1D_RTS 120 24V_FAX 30 CLK_P 60 RXD_LCD 90 FAX1D_RTS 120 24V_FAX
3 TXD TX25-120P-LT-H1E BOARD TO BOARD TX25-120P-LT-H1E
4 DTR
5 GND CN19
RS232C
6 DSR
5V
5V
5V
24V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
7 RTS
FLVPP
P-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
8 CTS
nFAXCS_CTS
nFAXCS_RTS
nFAXCS_CTS
FAXD_TXD_P
nNCT_FAX
FAXD_TXD_N
FAXCS_TXD_P
FAXD_RXD_P
FAXCS_TXD_N
FAXD_RXD_N
FAXCS_RXD_P
9 RI
DBR30-091F100
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
nFAXD_RTS 12
13
14
FAXCS_RXD_N 15
16
FAX_WUP- 17
18
19
20
21
22
nRES_FAX 23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
B31B-CSRK
2nd FAX UN (OPTION)

NM MODEL OTHER
CN19 CN13 LR PA-6pi n P CN CN
U. USB section
(SCN - mother harness P2) (8.5 OPE harness P2)

VBUS VBUS 10 2 VBUS 2 5 VBUS VBUS1
D2- FP_D- 9 3 D- 3 4 D- D1-
D2+ FP_D+ 8 4 D+ 4 3 D+ D1+ TO USB I/F
DGND DGND 7 5 GND 5 2 GND GND
DGND DGND 6 6 SHIELD 6 1 GND GND
VBUS DGND 5 BM05B-GHS-TBT
D3- DGND 4 USB I/F PWB
D3+ DGND 3
DGND DGND 2
DGND DGND 1 (8.5 OPE harness P2) (Keyboard interface harness P2) (Keyboard harness P2)
BM10B-GHS-TBT LR PA-5pin P P LR LR PA-6pin P CN
1 VBUS 1 1 1 1 VBUS 1 BLUE VBUS
2 D- 2 2 2 2 D- 2 LIGHTBLUE D-
3 D+ 3 3 3 3 D+ 3 BROWN D+
MOTHER 4 GND 4 4 4 4 GND 4 GRAY GND
PWB 5 SHIELD 5 5 5 5 SHIELD 5 GRAY GND
PA-5pin 6 FG 6 Soldering
USB converter PWB

CN11 (HUB interface harness P2) CN4 DOWN
VBUS 1 4 VBUS SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 1
DGND 2 3 D- DOWN CN3 2
FP_D+ 3 2 D+ VBUS1 10 (SCN mother harness P2) 3
FP_D- 4 1 GND D1- 9 4
DGND 5 BM04B-GHS-TBT D1+ 8 5
RE_D+ 6 GND 7 6
RE_D- 7 CN5 DOWN SHIELD1 6 7
DGND 8 6 VBUS VBUS2 5 8
DGND 9 5 D- D2- 4 9
5V 10 4 D+ D2+ 3 10
5V 11 3 GND GND 2 11
B11B-PH-K-S 2 SHIELD SHIELD2 1 12
1 SHIELD BM10B-GHS-TBT 13
BM06B-GHS-TBT 14
15
CN1 16 TO KEYBOARD
3 GND 17
2 5V 18
1 5V 19
B3B-PH-SM4-TB

20
FRONT UP 21
REAR DOWN CN2 UP 22
5 VBUS 23
4 D- USB HUB 24
3 D+ 25
2 GND
PWB 26
1 GND 27
BM05B-GHS-TBT 28
KEYBOARD
NM MODEL:STANDARD
KEYBOARD : OPTION OTHER:OPTON
179228-3(BLACK)
RSPF DRIVER PWB (SPF paper entry 2 sensor)
SCN-CNT PWB HF main unit - RSPF interface harness P2 SPPD2
1 +5VPD
CN16 PHR-10 2 SPPD2
GND 1 Transport interface harness P2 3 GND
GND 2 CN G PHR-13 SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC Transport harness P2 VHPGP1A73A+-18
3.3V 3 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD 1 179228-3(BLACK)
3.3V 4 (NC) SPPD2 2 2 SPPD2 2 (SPF scan front sensor)
V. RSPF section
5V 5 GND 3 3 GND 3 SPPD3

12V 6 (NC) +5VPD 4 4 +5VPD 4 1 +5VPD
24V 7 (NC) SPPD3 5 5 SPPD3 5 2 SPPD3
24V 8 GND 6 6 GND 6 3 GND
24V 9 SOCD 7 7 SOCD 7 VHPGP1A73A+-18
GND 10 GND 8 8 GND 8 179228-3
B10B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) +5VPD_SOCD 9 9 +5VPD_SOCD 9 (SPF open/close sensor)
RSPF connecting harness P2 +5VPD 10 10 +5VPD 10 SOCD
SPPD5 11 11 SPPD5 11 1 SOCD
XADR-34V/XADRP-34V CN A GND 12 12 GND 12 2 GND
1 GND 1 1 GND (NC) 13 (NC) 3 +5VPD_SOCD
2 GND 2 2 GND B13B-PH-K-S VHPGP1S73P+-18
3 SPPD1 3 3 SPPD1 179228-3(BLACK)
4 SPPD2 4 4 SPPD2 (SPF reverse rear sensor)
5 +24VPD 5 5 +24VPD SPPD5
CN15 6 +24VPD 6 6 +24VPD 1 +5VPD
SPPD1 1 7 +5V 7 7 +5V 2 SPPD5
SPPD2 2 8 AVCC 8 8 AVCC 3 GND
SPFMCK 3 9 SPFMCK 9 9 SPFMCK VHPGP1A73A+-18
SPFMM1 4 10 SPFMM1 10 10 SPFMM1
SPFMM2 5 11 SPFMM2 11 11 SPFMM2 SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-4
SPFMO1 6 12 SPFMO1 12 12 SPFMO1
SPFMO2 7 13 SPFMO2 13 13 SPFMO2
SPRMA 8 14 SPRMA 14 14 SPRMA SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
SPRMA/ 9 15 SPRMA/ 15 15 SPRMA/ 1 +24VPD_SRRC 1 SRRC
SPRMB 10 16 SPRMB 16 16 SPRMB 2 SRRC/ 2
(SPF resist roller clutch)
SPRMB/ 11 17 SPRMB/ 17 17 SPRMB/
SPRMO1 12 18 SPRMO1 18 18 SPRMO1 CN E PHR-11 179228-3
SGS 13 19 SGS 19 19 SGS +24VPD_SRRC 1 (SPF document empty sensor)
STMPS 14 20 STMPS 20 20 STMPS SRRC/ 2 PALR-08VF / PAP-08V-S SPED
SRRC 15 21 SRRC 21 21 SRRC SPED 3 1 SPED 1 1 SPED
SPFC 16 22 SPFC 22 22 SPFC GND 4 2 GND 2 2 GND
SPWS 17 23 SPWS 23 23 SPWS +5V_SPED 5 3 +5V_SPED 3 3 +5V_SPED
SELA 18 24 SELA 24 24 SELA +5VPD 6 4 +5VPD 4 VHPGP1S73P+-18
SELB 19 25 SELB 25 25 SELB SPPD1 7 5 SPPD1 5 179228-3(BLACK)
SELC 20 26 SELC 26 26 SELC GND 8 6 GND 6 (SPF paper entry sensor)
SSELO 21 27 SSELO 27 27 SSELO +24VPD 9 7 +24VPD 7 SPPD1
SPPD4 22 28 SPPD4 28 28 SPPD4 GND 10 (NC) 8 +24VPD_SW 8 1 +5VPD
SPFFAN 23 29 SPFFAN 29 29 SPFFAN +24VPD_SW 11 Paper feed harness P2 2 SPPD1
SPPD3 24 30 SPPD3 30 30 SPPD3 B11B-PH-K-S 3 GND
SPPD5 25 31 SPPD5 31 31 SPPD5 VHPGP1A73A+-18
5VPD 26 32 5VPD 32 32 5VPD
GND 27 33 GND 33 33 GND PS-187-2V
(NC) 28 (NC) 34 GND 34 34 GND SCOV (SPF cover SW)
B28B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) PHDR-28VS-1 PHDR-34VS-1 B34-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 1 +24VPD
2 +24VPD_SW
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3
CN B PHR-7-R 179228-4 / 292254-4 / 179228-4

GND 1 1 GND 1
STMPU 2 2 STMPU 2 STMPS
STMPS/ 3 3 STMPS/ 3
+24VPD_STMPS 4 4 +24VPD_STMPS 4 (Stamp solenoid)
+5VPD 5
(SPF reverse gate
CN C SPPD4 6 front sensor)
1 +24VPD_SGS GND 7 179228-3(BLACK)
SGS (NC) 2 (NC) B7B-PH-K-R SPPD4
3 SGS/ 1 +5VPD
(SPF document paper exit gate solenoid) PHR-3 B3B-PH-K-S 2 SPPD4
3 GND
VHPGP1A73A+-18
Base tray harness P2

SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-4
CN F SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-3 179228-3

1 SPFMA/ (SPF document
2 +24VPD SPLS1 length short sensor)
SPFM 3 SPFMA 1 SPLS1
4 SPFMB 2 GND
(SPF transport
5 +24VPD 3 +5VPD_SPLS1
motor) 6 SPFMB/ VHPGP1S73P+-18
PHR-6 B6B-PH-K-S 179228-3
(SPF document
SPLS2 length long sensor)
CN D PHR-12 1 SPLS2
SPLS1 1 2 GND
GND 2 3 +5VPD_SPLS2
+5VPD_SPLS1 3 VHPGP1S73P+-18
SPLS2 4
GND 5
CN H +5VPD_SPLS2 6 SMP-03V-NC / SMP-03V-NC
1 SPRMA/ AVCC 7 1 AVCC 1
2 +24VPD SPWS 8 2 SPWS 2
SPWS
3 (SPF document
SPRM 3 SPRMA GND 9 3 GND width sensor)
4 SPRMB SPFC/ 10
(SPF paper feed (NC)
5 +24VPD GND 11
reverse motor) 6 SPRMB/ +24VPD_SW_SPFC 12
PHR-6 B6B-PH-K-R B12B-PH-K-S SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
1 SPFC/ 1 SPFC
2 +24VPD_SW_SPFC 2
(SPF paper feed clutch)
Document tray harness P2
3. Signal list
Connector level Connec Pin PWB
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
"L" "H" tor No. No. name
1TNFD Waste toner full detection Detects waste toner. Empty Full CN13 7 PCU
switch [Mechanical switch]
1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL Detects the transfer belt Separated Contact CN13 31 PCU
detection separation CL.
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation BK Detects the transfer belt Separated Contact CN12 27 PCU
detection separation BK.
1TURC Primary transfer separation Controls the primary transfer Separated Contact CN11 12 PCU
clutch separation mode.
[Electromagnetic clutch]
ADUM_L ADU motor lower Drives the right door section. CN8 3, 5, 7, PCU Drives with
[Stepping motor] 9 the 4-phase
signal.
ADUM_L_C ADU motor lower current select Selects the ADU motor lower Large Small CN8 1 PCU
current. current current
APPD1 ADU transport path Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass CN7 4 PCU
detection 1 upper stream section.
[Transmission type]
APPD2 ADU transport path Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass CN7 18 PCU
detection 2 medium stream section.
[Transmission type]
CCFM_LD Process suction fan motor lock Detects the process suction fan Lock CN19 7 PCU
detection motor lock. detection
CCFM_V Process suction fan motor Cools the process. Stop Drive CN19 4 PCU
CCFT LCD backlight LCD backlight ON OFF CN13 6 SCU
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
CL Scanner lamp Radiates lights to the ON OFF CN5 3 SCU
document for the CCD to scan
the document images.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Upper limit CN9 3 PCU
(Lift HP detection)
[Transmission type]
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Upper limit CN9 4 PCU
(Lift HP detection)
[Transmission type]
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN5 8 PCU
feed tray 1) [DC brush motor]
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN5 10 PCU
feed tray 2) [DC brush motor]
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray YES NO CN9 9 PCU
[Transmission type] 1.
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray YES NO CN9 10 PCU
[Transmission type] 2.
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN5 1 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the paper
feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray Pass CN9 15 PCU
(Paper entry detection) 1.
[Transmission type]
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray Pass CN9 16 PCU
(Paper entry detection) 2.
[Transmission type]
CPFM_D Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section. Drive Stop CN6 24 PCU
[Brushless motor]
CPFM_LD Paper feed motor lock Detects the paper feed motor Lock CN6 22 PCU
detection lock. detection
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller ON OFF CN5 3 PCU
(Paper feed tray 1) in the paper feed tray section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller ON OFF CN5 5 PCU
(Paper feed tray 2) in the paper feed tray section.
CSPD1 Tray 1 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining CN9 21 PCU Detects
quantity detection quantity in the tray 1. quantity during lifting
up.
CSPD2 Tray 2 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining CN9 22 PCU Detects
quantity detection quantity in the tray 2. quantity during lifting
up.
CSS1 Tray 1 detection Detects the tray 1. YES NO CN9 25 PCU
CSS2 Tray 2 detection Detects the tray 2. YES NO CN9 26 PCU
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase. Reference CN11 16 PCU
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BL phase. Reference CN11 13 PCU

DL_BK Discharge lamp BK [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN10 1 PCU
the OPC drum.
DL_C Discharge lamp C [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN10 21 PCU
the OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp M [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN10 2 PCU
the OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN10 22 PCU
the OPC drum.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close Detects open/close of the ADU Open Close CN2 7 RD I/F
detection cover.
[Transmission type]
DSW_C Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/ Detects open/close of the tray Open Close CN9 30 PCU
close detection 1, 2 transport cover.
DSW_F Front door open/close switch Detects open/close of the front Open Close CN16 4 PCU
[Micro switch] door, and fusing, motor, LSU
laser power line.
DSW_R Right door open/close switch Detects open/close of the right Open Close CN16 3 PCU
[Micro switch] door, and fusing, motor, LSU
laser power line.
DVM_CL_D Development drive motor (CL) Drives the development Drive Stop CN11 8 PCU
[Brushless motor] section, the color OPC drum,
and the transfer section.
DVM_CL_LD Development drive motor (CL) Detects the development drive Lock CN11 10 PCU
lock detection motor (CL) lock. detection
DVM_K_D Development drive motor (K) Drives the development Drive Stop CN11 7 PCU
[Brushless motor] section, the black OPC drum,
and the transfer section.
DVM_K_LD Development drive motor (K) Detects the development drive Lock CN11 9 PCU
lock detection motor (K) lock. detection
FUFM_V Fusing fan motor Cools motor related to the OFF ON CN13 1 PCU
fusing section and paper exit
section.
FUFM_LD Fusing fan motor lock Detects the fusing fan motor Lock CN13 15 PCU
FUM Fusing drive motor Drives the fusing unit. CN8 6, 8, PCU Drives with
[Stepping motor] 10, 12 the 4-phase
signal.
FUM_CNT Fusing drive motor current Selects the fusing drive motor Large Small CN8 4 PCU
select current. current current
HLOUT_LM Heater lamp lower main Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN13 10 PCU
lower main.
HLOUT_UM Heater lamp upper main Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN13 14 PCU
upper main.
HLOUT_US Heater lamp upper sub Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN13 12 PCU
upper sub.
HLOUT_UW Heater lamp upper assist Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN13 8 PCU
upper assist.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detection Detects a change in the fusing Pressure Pressure CN13 30 PCU
sensor [Transmission sensor] pressure. release applying
HPOS Shifter home position Detects the shifter home Home CN12 24 PCU
detection position. position
HUD_M Humidity detection Detects the humidity. CN7 8 PCU Analog
detection
LSUSS_B LSU shutter solenoid Controls open/close of the LSU Open Close CN19 3 PCU
shutter.
MC_BK_ERR High voltage BK error Detects an abnormal output of Error CN6 17 PCU Judged
detection high voltage BK. detection when a high
voltage is
outputted.
MC_CL_ERR High voltage CL error Detects an abnormal output of Error CN6 19 PCU
high voltage CL. detection
MHPS Scanner home position Detects the scanner home Home CN9 1 SCU
sensor [Transmission type] position. position
MIM Scanner motor Scanner (reading) section CN4 1, 2, 3, SCU
[Stepping motor] 4
MPED Manual feed paper empty Detects paper empty in the YES NO CN3 7 RD I/F Manual
detection manual paper feed tray. paper feed
[Transmission type] unit
MPFD Manual feed paper entry Detects paper empty in the Pass CN7 6 PCU
detection [Transmission type] manual paper feed tray.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Controls the paper pickup Pickup CN7 22 PCU
(Manual paper feed) solenoid (manual paper feed)
[Electromagnetic solenoid] [Electromagnetic solenoid]

MPGS Manual feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the ON OFF CN7 14 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid] manual paper feed gate
solenoid.
MPLD Manual feed paper length Detects the paper length in the Detection CN3 16 RD I/F Manual
detector manual paper feed tray. paper feed
unit
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN7 20 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] feed roller in the manual paper
feed section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper Detects the paper width in the CN7 7 PCU Analog
width detector manual paper feed tray. detection
[Volume resistance]
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray Detects the pull-out position of Storing CN3 25 RD I/F Manual
pull-out position detection 1 the manual paper feed tray. position paper feed
(Retraction position) unit
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray Detects the pull-out position of Pull-out CN3 22 RD I/F Manual
pull-out position detection 2 the manual paper feed tray. position paper feed
(Pull-out position) unit
OCSW Original cover SW Detects open/close of the Close Open CN10 3 SCU
[Transmission type] document cover (document
size detection trigger).
OSM Shift motor [Stepping motor] Offsets the paper. CN12 12, 13, PCU Drives with
14,15 the 4-phase
signal.
OZFM_CNT OZFM speed control Controls the OZFM speed. CN5 14 PCU Pulse (Duty)
drive
OZFM_LD Ozone fan motor lock Detects the ozone fan motor Lock CN5 18 PCU
OZFM_V Ozone fan motor Discharges the ozone. Stop Drive CN5 12 PCU
PCS_CL Process control sensor Detects the toner patch density. CN6 9 PCU Analog
[Reflection type] detection
PCSS Process control shutter Controls ON/OFF of the Open Close CN6 11 PCU
solenoid process control and the
[Electromagnetic solenoid] registration shutter.
PFM Transport motor Transports between the CN8 20, 22, PCU Drives with
[Stepping motor] registration roller and the paper 24, 26 the 4-phase
feed section. Transports signal.
between the registration roller
and the right door section.
PFM_CNT Transport motor current select Selects the transport motor Large Small CN8 18 PCU
current. current current
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from Pass CN12 25 PCU
[Transmission type] fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the discharged paper. Pass CN12 23 PCU
[Transmission type]
POD3 Right tray paper exit Detects paper exit to the right Pass CN7 17 PCU
detection tray.
POFM_CNT Paper exit cooling fan motor Controls the speed of the CN12 17 PCU Pulse (Duty)
speed control paper exit cooling fan motor. drive
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN12 16 PCU
(F side)
POFM_LD1 POFM lock detection Detects the POFM lock. Lock CN12 18 PCU
detection
POFM_LD2 POFM lock detection Detects the POFM lock. Lock CN12 19 PCU
detection
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN12 16 PCU
(R side)
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller. CN8 13, 15, PCU Drives with
signal.
POM_CNT Paper exit drive motor Selects the paper exit drive Large Small CN8 11 PCU
current select motor current. current current
PPD1 Registration front detection Detects paper in front of the Pass CN6 12 PCU
[Transmission type] registration roller.
PPD2 Registration detection Detects paper at the rear of the Pass CN6 18 PCU
registration roller.
PRM Fusing pressure release motor Changes the fusing pressure. CN13 20, 22, PCU Drives with
signal.
PSCF_LD Power cooling fan motor 1 lock Detects the power cooling fan Lock CN5 13 PCU
detection motor 1 lock. detection
PSFM2_LD Power cooling fan motor 2 lock Detects the power cooling fan Lock CN5 22 PCU
detection motor 2 lock. detection
PSFM_V Power cooling fan motor 1 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN5 11 PCU

PSFM_V2 Power cooling fan motor 2 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN5 21 PCU
PTC_ERR PTC high voltage error Detects the output abnormality Error CN14 7 PCU
detection of the PTC high voltage. detection
PTC_HEAT PTC heater Turns ON/OFF of the PTC OFF ON CN12 30 PCU
heater.
PWM MFP cooling fan Cools the controller. OFF ON (PWM CN19 82 MFPC
control)
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Outputs the ON/OFF control ON OFF CN12 8 MOTHER
[Push switch] signal of the DC power.
RCFM_LD Machine rear section cooling Detects the cooling fan motor Lock CN13 23 PCU
fan motor lock detection lock in the machine rear detection
section.
RCFM_V Machine rear section cooling Cools the machine rear Stop Drive CN13 25 PCU
fan motor section.
REGS_F Registrations sensor (Front) Detects registration shift. CN6 5 PCU Analog
REGS_F_LED Registration sensor LED Registration sensor LED light CN6 7 PCU Analog
(Front) [LED] emitting output
REGS_R Registration sensor (Rear) Detects registration shift. CN6 6 PCU Analog
REGS_R_LED Registrations sensor LED Registration sensor LED light CN6 8 PCU Analog
(Rear) [LED] emitting output
RRM Registration motor Drives and turns ON the CN8 14, 16, PCU Drives with
[Stepping motor] registration roller. 23, 25 the 4-phase
signal.
RRM_CNT Registration motor current Selects the registration motor Large Small CN8 21 PCU
select current. current current
TCS_C Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (C). CN10 27 PCU Analog
[Magnetic sensor] detection
TCS_K Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K). CN10 7 PCU Analog
TCS_M Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (M). CN10 8 PCU Analog
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (Y). CN10 28 PCU Analog
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face-down paper Full CN12 22 PCU
[Transmission type] exit tray full.
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full Detects the paper exit full in the Full CN2 1 RD I/F
detection right tray.
TH1_LSU LSU UN thermister Detects the temperature. CN18 5 PCU Analog
detection
TH_LM_IN Lower main thermister Detects the temperature. CN12 9 PCU Analog
detection
TH_M Temperature detection Detects the temperature. CN7 19 PCU Analog
detection
TH_UM_IN Upper main thermister Detects the temperature. CN12 8 PCU Analog
detection
TH_UMCS_IN Upper main thermister Detects the temperature. CN12 1 PCU Analog
detection
TH_US_IN Upper sub thermister Detects the temperature. CN12 4 PCU Analog
detection
TNM_C Toner motor C Transports toner from the toner CN14 24, 26, PCU Drives with
[Stepping motor] cartridge to the developing unit. 28, 30 the 4-phase
signal.
TNM_K Toner motor K Transports toner from the toner CN14 21, 23, PCU Drives with
signal.
TNM_M Toner motor M Transports toner from the toner CN14 14, 16, PCU Drives with
signal.
TNM_Y Toner motor Y Transports toner from the toner CN14 11, 13, PCU Drives with
signal.
WH_CNT Dehumidifying heater control Turns ON/OFF the OFF ON CN5 19 PCU
dehumidifying heater.
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Stirs waste toner. CN13 11, 13 PCU Drives with
[Synchronous motor] the 2-phase
signal.

[12] OTHERS
MX-3100N
Service Manual
Item
Factory default
setting
X Bypass Plain, Auto-Inch
1. System settings Select Similar Sizes for Auto Detection 8-1/2" x 14"
Paper Type Registration -
A. Login method Auto Tray Switching Enabled
(1) When User Authentication is not Enabled Custom Size Registration Custom 1: X=17",
Y=11"
1) Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Custom 2: X=17",
2) Touch the [Admin Password] key. Y=11"
3) Touch the [Password] text box and enter the administrator Custom 3: X=17",
password. Y=11"
Address Control
4) Touch the [OK] key.
Address Book -
5) Displays the system setting key on the touch panel. Custom Index User 1
* To logout, touch the [Logout] key in the top right corner of the Program -
screen. Fax Data Receive/Forward
Also touch the [Exit] key to quit the system settings. I-Fax Settings*4
(If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.) X Reception Start -
X Manual Reception Key in Initial Screen Enabled
(2) When User Authentication is Enabled X Forward Received Data -
a. When user authentication is by login name and password Printer Condition Settings
(and e-mail address) Printer Default Settings
X Copies 1
1) Touch the login name key.
X Orientation Portrait
2) Touch the [Admin Login] key.
X Default Paper Size 8-1/2" x 11"
3) Touch the [Password] key. X Default Output Tray Varies depending
Enter the administrator password in the administrator pass- on the machine
word entry screen. configuration
X Default Paper Type Plain Paper
4) Touch the [OK] key.
X Initial Resolution Setting 600dpi
b. Login by user number (High Quality)
1) Touch the [Admin Login] key. X Disable Blank Page Print Disabled
2) Touch the [Password] key. X Line Thickness 5
X 2-Sided Print 1-Sided
Enter the administrator password in the administrator pass-
X Color Mode Auto
word entry screen.
X N-Up Print 1-Up
3) Touch the [OK] key. X Fit To Page Enabled
* To logout, press the [LOGOUT] ([*]) key. (Except when entering a X Output Varies depending
fax number.) on the machine
(If Auto Clear activates, logout will automatically take place.) configuration
Print per Unit Enabled
B. System setting list X Quick File Disabled
PCL Settings
(1) System setting (general) list
X PCL Symbol Set Setting PC-8
Factory default X PCL Font Setting Internal Font, 0:
Item Courier
setting
Total Count X PCL Line Feed Code 0.CR=CR;
LF=LF; FF=FF
Job Count -
X Wide A4 Disabled
Device Count -
PostScript Setting*5
Default Settings
X Print PS Errors Disabled
Clock
X Binary Processing Disabled
X Clock Adjust
Document Filing Control
Specify Time Zone -
USB-Device Check -
Date & Time Settings -
User Control*6
Synchronize with Internet Disable
Time Server Modify User Information -
X Daylight Saving Time Setting Disable *1: When a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer / stand/2 x 500 sheet
X Date Format [MM/DD/YYYY], [/], paper drawer is installed.
[Last], [12-Hour]
*2: When a stand/2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed.
Keyboard Select English (US)
List Print (User) *3: When a large capacity tray is installed.
All Custom Setting List - *4: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
Printer Test Page - *5: When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
Sending Address List -
*6: When user authentication is enabled and the logged-in user
Document Filing Folder List -
does not have the authority to configure the system settings
Paper Tray Settings
(administrator) (excluding factory default users).
Tray Settings
X Tray 1 Plain, 8-1/2" x11"
X Tray 2 Plain, 8-1/2" x11"
X Tray 3*1 Plain, Auto-Inch
X Tray 4*2
X Tray 5*3 Plain, 8-1/2" x11"
MX-3100N OTHERS 12 1
2 : '09/Sep
(2) System setting (administrator) list Factory default

Item
setting
Factory default Customize 3 -
Item
setting
X Data Entry*5
User Control
(Same as Scan)
User Authentication Setting
Home Screen Settings*2 -
X User Authentication Disabled
Preview Setting
X Authentication Method Setting Authenticate a User
X Default Preview Display
by Login Name and
Image Send Reception Date:
Password
Twice
X Device Account Mode Setting Disabled
Memory Box: Twice
Other Settings
Doc. Filing Twice
X Actions when the Limit of Pages for Output Job is Completed
X Received Date Image Check Setting Disabled
Jobs even when
X Default List/Thumbnail Display List
the Limit of Pages is
Reached Remote Operation Settings
X The Number of User Name Displayed 12 X Remote Software Operation
Setting on Operation Panel Operational Authority Prohibited
X A Warning when Login Fails Disabled View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled and MFP
X Automatically print stored jobs after login Disabled X Operation from Specified PC
X Default Network Authentication Server - Operational Authority Prohibited
Setting Hostname or IP Address of PC -
X Count Setting after Login - View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC
X User Information Print - and MFP
User List - X Operation by User who Has Password
Page Limit Group List - Operational Authority Prohibited
Authority Group List - View Password Entry Screen Display in Both PC
and MFP
Favorite Operation Group List*1 -
Device Control
X Favorite Operation Group Registration*1 -
Other Settings
X Home Screen List*1 -
X Original Feeding Mode All Disabled
User Count -
X Saddle Stitch Position Adjust*6 0.0 mm
Energy Save
X Auto Paper Selection Setting Plain Paper
Toner Save Mode
X Tandem Connection Setting
X Print Disabled
IP Address of Slave Machine 0.0.0.0
X Copy Disabled
Port Number 50001
Auto Power Shut-Off Enabled
Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled
2 Auto Power Shut-Off Timer 3 min.
(23/26 ppm model) Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled
10 min. X Detect Standard in Auto Color Mode 3
(31 ppm model) X Registration Adjustment
Preheat Mode Setting 1 min. X Optimization of a Hard Disk -
Operation Settings X Clear All Job Log Data -
Other Settings Original Size Detector Setting
X Keys Touch Sound Middle X Original Detection Size Combination Inch-1
Key Touch Sound at Initial Point Disabled X Cancel Detection at Document Glass Disabled
X Auto Clear Setting 60 sec. Disabling of Devices
Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled X Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled
X Message Time Setting 6 sec. X Disabling of Duplex Disabled
X MFP Display Language Setting American English X Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*7 Disabled
X Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled X Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8 Disabled
X Disabling of Bypass Printing Disabled X Disabling of Tray Setting Disabled
X Key Operation Setting 0.0 sec. X Disabling of Finisher*9 Disabled
Disable Auto Key Repeat Disabled X Disabling of Offset Disabled
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled X Disabling of Stapler*9 Disabled
X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled X Disabling of Punch*10 Disabled
X Initial Original Count Setting All disabled X Disabling of Color Mode*11 Disabled
MFP Display Pattern Setting Pattern 1 Fusing Control Settings 16 - 24 lbs.
Customize Key Setting*2 (60 - 90g/m2)
X Copy Copy Function Settings
Customize 1 File Initial Status Settings
Customize 2 Quick File X Color Mode Full Color
Customize 3 - X Paper Tray Varies depending
X Scan on the
machine
Customize 1 Address Review
configuration
Customize 2 File
X Exposure Type Auto
Customize 3 Quick File
X Copy Ratio 100%
X Internet Fax*3
X 2-Sided Copy 1-Side to 1-Side
(Same as Scan)
X Output -
X Fax*4
Other Settings
(Same as Scan)
X Copy Exposure Adjustment
X USB Memory Scan
Color 5
Customize 1 -
Black & White 5
Customize 2 -
Factory default Factory default
Item Item
setting setting
X Rotation Copy Setting Enabled Address Book Default Selection Tab Switch: ABC,
X Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios - Address Type: All
X Setting a Maximum Number of Copies 999 Initial Resolution Setting
X Initial Margin Shift Setting Scan Apply the
Side 1 1/2" Resolution Set
Side 2 1/2" when Stored:
Disabled
X Erase Width Adjustment
200 X 200 dpi
Edge Clearance Width 1/2"
Internet Fax*3 Apply the
Center Clearance Width 1/2"
Resolution Set
X Card Shot Settings when Stored:
Original Size X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8" Disabled
Fit to Page Disabled 200 X 100 dpi
X Automatic Saddle Stitch*6 Enabled Fax*4 Apply the
X Initial Tab Copy Setting 1/2" Resolution Set
X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disabled when Stored:
X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled Disabled Standard
X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled Default Exposure Settings Auto
X Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is Disabled Original Image Type Text
Supplied the Paper Moire Reduction Disabled
X B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode for Disabled Must Input Next Address Key at Disabled
Document Feeder Broadcast Setting
X B/W Quick Scan from Document Glass Enabled Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle
Color Adjustments The Number of File Name/Subject/Body 12
X Initial Color Balance Setting Factory default Keys Displayed Setting
state The Number of Direct Address Keys 10
X Auto Color Calibration - Displayed Setting
Network Settings Disable Switching of Display Order Disabled
IPv4 Settings DHCP Hold Setting for Received Data Print Disabled
IPv6 Settings Disabled Default Verification Stamp Disabled
Enable TCP/IP Enabled Erase Width Adjustment
Enable NetWare Enabled Edge Clearance Width 1/2"
Enable EtherTalk Enabled Center Clearance Width 1/2
Enable NetBEUI Enabled X Settings to Disable Registration
Reset the NIC - Disable Registering Destination from All disabled
Ping Command - Operation Panel
Printer Settings Disable Registering Destination on Web All disabled
Page*12
Default Settings
Disable Registration of Program All disabled
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled
Disable Registration of Memory Box All disabled
X Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled
Disable Destination Registration Using All disabled
X A4/Letter Size Auto Change Disabled
Global Address Search*12
X Print Density Level
Disable Registration Using Network Disabled
Color 3
Scanner Tool*12
Black & White 3
X Settings to Disable Transmission
X CMYK Exposure Adjustment 0
Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode Disabled
X Bypass Tray Settings
Disable Selection From Address Book All disabled
Enable Detected Paper Size in Bypass Disabled
Disable Direct Entry All disabled
Tray
Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*3 Disabled
Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Enabled
Disable PC-Fax Transmission*4 Disabled
Tray
X Own Name and Destination Set
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Disabled
Select Sender Data Registration
X Job Spool Queuing Enabled Sender Name -
Interface Settings Sender Fax Number -
X Hexadecimal Dump Mode Disabled I-Fax Own Address -
X I/O Timeout 60 sec. Registration of Own Name Select -
X Enable USB Port Enabled Scan Settings
X USB Port Emulation Switching Auto X Other Settings
X Enable Network Port Enabled Default Sender Set -
X Network Port Emulation Switching Auto Default Color Mode Settings
X Port Switching Method Switch at End of Black & White Mono 2
Job Color Mode Auto, Grayscale
Auto Color Calibration - Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto Disabled
Image Send Settings Mode
Operation Settings Initial File Format Setting
X Other Settings File Type PDF
Default Display Settings Scan (fax when fax Black & White MMR (G4)
is installed) Color/Grayscale Medium
Hold settings for a while after scanning Disabled Specified Pages per File Disabled
has been completed Number of Pages Disabled
Switch Automatically to Copy Mode Enabled Compression Mode at Broadcasting
Screen Black & White MH (G3)
Item Item
setting setting
Color/Grayscale Medium Delete quick files at power up Enabled
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments Unlimited (protected files excluded)
(E-mail) X Default Color Mode Settings
Maximum Size of Data Attachments Unlimited Color Auto
(FTP/Desktop/Network Folder) Black & White Mono 2
Bcc Setting X Default Exposure Settings Auto
Enable Bcc Disabled Original Image Type Text
Display Bcc Address on the Job Status Disabled Moire Reduction Disabled
Screen X Initial Resolution Settings 600 x 600 dpi
Disable Scan Function X Color Data Compression Ratio Setting Medium
USB Memory Scan Disabled X Scan Complete Sound Setting Middle
PC Scan Disabled X Default Output Tray *13 Varies depending
Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disabled on the
X Default Address Setting Disabled machine
I-Fax Settings*3 configuration
X I-Fax Default Settings X Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disabled
Auto Wake Up Print Enabled X Batch Print Settings
Compression Setting MH (G3) Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled
Speaker Volume Setting - Selection of [User Unknown] is not Enabled
Receive Signal Middle allowed.
Communication Error Signal Middle X Erase Width Adjustment
Original Print on Transaction Report Print Out Error Edge Clearance Width 1/2"
Report Only Center Clearance Width 1/2"
Transaction Report Print Select Setting X Card Shot Settings
Single Sending Print Out Error Original Size X: 3-3/8", Y: 2-1/8"
Report Only Fit to Page Disabled
Broadcasting Print Out All Report Document Output Options
Receiving No Printed Report X Print
Activity Report Print Select Setting Copy Enabled
Auto Print at Memory Full Disabled Print Enabled
Print Daily at Designated Time Disabled Scan Send Disabled
Body Text Print Select Setting Disabled Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*3 Disabled
Pre-Setting Mail Signature Disabled Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*4 Disabled
X I-Fax Send Settings Scan to HDD Enabled
I-Fax Reception Report On/Off Setting Disabled X Scan Send
I-Fax Reception Report Request Timeout 1 hour Copy Disabled
Setting Scan Send Enabled
Number of Resend Times at Reception 2 Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*3 Disabled
Error Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*4 Disabled
Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments Unlimited Scan to HDD Enabled
Rotation Sending Setting All Enabled X Internet Fax Send*3
Printing Page Number at Receiver Enabled Copy Disabled
Recall in Case of Line Busy Times: 2, Interval 3 Scan Send Disabled
min. Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax) Enabled
Recall in Case of Communication Error Times: 2, Interval 3 Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax) Disabled
min.
Scan to HDD Disabled
X I-Fax Receive Settings
X Fax Send*4
Auto Receive Reduce Setting Enabled
Copy Disabled
Duplex Reception Setting Disabled
Scan Send Disabled
Set Address for Data Forwarding -
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PC-I-Fax)*3 Disabled
Direct SMTP Disabled
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)*4 Enabled
Add Hostname or IP Address Too Disabled
Scan to HDD Disabled
Hostname or IP Address -
List Print (Administrator)
Receiving Date & Time Print Disabled
Administrator Settings List -
A3 RX Reduce Disabled
Image Sending Activity Report -
POP3 Communication Timeout Setting 60 sec.
Data Receive/Forward List -
Reception Check Interval Setting 5 min.
Web Settings List*12 -
I-Fax Output Setting Varies depending
Metadata Set List*5 -
on the machine
Security Settings
configuration
SSL Settings
X Allow/Reject Mail or Domain Setting All Invalid
X Server Port
Document Filing Settings
HTTPS Disabled
Other Settings
IPP-SSL Disabled
X Default Mode Settings Sharing Mode
Redirect HTTP to HTTPS in Device Web Disabled
X Sort Method Setting Date
Page Access
X Administrator Authority Setting
X Client Port
Delete File Disabled
HTTPS Enabled
Delete Folder Disabled
FTPS Enabled
Change Password Disabled
SMTP-SSL Enabled
X Delete All Quick Files
POP3-SSL Enabled
Delete -
LDAP-SSL Enabled
Item Item
setting setting
Level of Encryption Low Serial Number -
IPsec Settings Disabled PS3 Expansion Kit -
IEEE802.1X Setting Disabled Internet Fax Expansion Kit -
Enable/Disable Settings E-mail Alert and Status -
Printer Condition Settings Application Integration Module -
X Disable Blank Page Print Disabled Application Communication Module -
User Control External Account Module -
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Disabled XPS Expansion Kit -
Operation Settings Data Backup
X Cancel Auto Clear Timer Disabled Storage Backup -
X Disabling of Job Priority Operation Disabled Device Cloning -
X Disabling of Bypass Printing Disabled Initialize and/or Store Settings
X Disable Auto Key Repeat Disabled Restore Factory Defaults -
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment Disabled Store Current Configuration -
X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled Restore Configuration -
Device Control Sharp OSA Settings
X Disabling of Document Feeder Disabled External Account Setting*15
X Disabling of Duplex Disabled X External Account Control Disabled
X Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*7 Disabled X Enable Authentication by External Server Disabled
X Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8 Disabled USB Device Settings*16
X Disabling of Tray Setting Disabled X External Keyboard Internal driver
X Disabling of Finisher*9 Disabled Level of Encryption None
X Disabling of Offset Disabled X USB Memory Internal driver
X Disabling of Stapler*9 Disabled Level of Encryption None
X Disabling of Punch*10 Disabled
*1: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in "User Control" in
X Disabling of Color Mode*11 Disabled
the Web pages
X Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disabled
X Disabling of Slave Machine Mode Disabled *2: This cannot be set on the machine. Set this in the system set-
Copy Function Settings tings in the Web pages.
X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disabled *3: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled *4: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection Disabled
*5: When the application integration module is installed.
Printer Settings
*6: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled
X Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled *7: When a large capacity tray is installed.
X Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper Disabled *8: When a stand/1 x 500 sheet paper drawer / stand/2 x 500 sheet
Select paper drawer is installed.
Image Send Settings *9: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
X Other Disabling
*10: When a punch module is installed.
Disable Switching of Display Order Disabled
Disable Scan Function *11: When a color-related problem has occurred.
PC Scan Disabled *12: When network connection is enabled.
USB Memory Scan Disabled *13: When the exit tray unit is installed.
X Settings to Disable Registration *14: It may not be possible to use some settings, depending on the
Disable Registering Destination from All disabled peripheral devices installed.
Operation Panel
*15: When the external account module is installed.
Disable Registering Destination on Web All disabled
Page*12 *16: When the external account module or application communica-
Disable Registration of Program All disabled tion module is installed.
Disable Registration of Memory Box All disabled
Disable Destination Registration Using All disabled 2. Paper JAM code
Global Address Search*12
Disable Registration Using Network Disabled A. PCU JAM cause
Scanner Tools*12
X Settings to Disable Transmission Code Code content
Disable [Resend] on Image Send Mode Disabled NO_JAM_CAUSE No jam. Also used to cancel a jam.
Disable Selection from Address Book All disabled NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
Disable Direct Entry All disabled STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
Disable PC-I-Fax Transmission*3 Disabled TRAY1 Cassette 1 paper feed JAM
Disable PC-Fax Transmission*4 Disabled (CPFD1 not-reached JAM)
Document Filing Settings CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
X Disable Stamp for Reprinting Disabled CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
X Batch Print Settings CPFD1_N3 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Selection of [All Users] is not allowed. Enabled CPFD1_N4 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Selection of [User Unknown] is not Enabled CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
allowed. CPFD1_S3 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Change Administrator Password See "TO THE CPFD1_S4 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
ADMINISTRATOR TRAY2 Cassette 2 paper feed JAM
OF THE MACHINE" (CPFD2 not-reached JAM)
in the Safety Guide. CPFD2_N3 CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
Product Key*4 CPFD2_N4 CPFD2 Not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Code Code content Code Code content
CPFD2_S2 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) FIN_TIME Finisher paper fast delivery JAM
CPFD2_S3 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) FIN_PAOF Paper spec data reception overflow
CPFD2_S4 CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) FPATPD_S Saddle transport remaining JAM
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper) FPPD3_N Saddle paper exit not-reached JAM
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) FPPD3_S Saddle paper exit remaining JAM
PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) CPFD2_DESK CPFD2 JAM
PPD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) (Desk communication abnormality detection)
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM PPD1_LCC PPD1 JAM
(Manual feed tray feed paper) (LCC communication abnormality detection)
PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper) PPD2_FIN PPD2 JAM
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper) (Finisher communication abnormality detection)
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper) FSSMJ Stapler shift motor JAM
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper) FPDMJ Paper exit motor JAM
PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) FSDMJ Saddle motor JAM
PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) FGMJ Gripper motor JAM
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper) FSPTMJ Saddle paper transport motor JAM
PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
B. SCU JAM cause
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
Code Code content
PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
NO_JAM_CAUSE No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
NO_MATCH Parameter no matching
PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
STOP_JAM Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM
(Manual feed tray feed paper)
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM
PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD2_S4 PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
SPRDMD_S SPRDMD remaining JAM
PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout)
SPSD_SCN Exposure start notification timer end
PPD2_DRUM PPD2 JAM (Drum lock detection)
SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM
SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM
POD1_FUS POD1 JAM (Detection of twining to fusing)
P_SHORT Short size JAM
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM
TRAY3 Cassette 3 (Desk 1) paper feed JAM
DPFD1_N4 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
DPFD1_S3 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
TRAY4 Cassette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed JAM
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM
(MPFD not-reached)
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
LCC Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached)
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM
MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
PDPPD1_N Paper pass inlet port not-reached JAM
PDPPD1_S Paper pass inlet port remaining JAM
PDPPD2_N Paper pass outlet port not-reached JAM
PDPPD2_S Paper pass outlet port remaining JAM
FPPD1_N Finisher inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
FPPD1_S Finisher inlet port sensor remaining JAM
FPPD2_N Saddle section not-reached JAM
FPPD2_S Saddle section remaining JAM
FPDD_S Bundle exit remaining JAM
FSTPLJ Staple JAM
FPNCHJ Punch JAM
FDOP Finisher door open JAM
3. Necessary works when replacing the PWB and the HDD
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
2 : '09/Sep
2 B. Works and procedures necessary for HDD replacement

Note for HDD replacement
Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before
replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter

HDD storage data and backup
Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
HDD replacement and firmware installation (version up)
Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD
(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the
HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Backup Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Disable of
means procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable SIM49-3 Service
2 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
3 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Senders Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, Storage backup Storage backup
etc.)
4 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
5 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable
(Learning)
6 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable
(Learning)
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable
WEB PAGE.
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable
9 New N/A (FSS) Not available Available Disable Not available Disable
information
10 Input profile (Printer) Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with Service
(Registration from user WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE. or User
WEB page)
11 Output profile (Printer) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
(Registration from Service WEB PAGE.
WEB page)
12 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE. or User
13 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
14 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
15 Main program Available Available Disable Not available Enable Emergency update Service
procedures of the
firmware
16 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using SIM49-3 and USB memory.
2 : '09/Sep
2
(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be 3) Then the following message is displayed to indicate that a
backed up HDD trouble occurred.
a. Work contents and procedures

Version Check
When a new HDD
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
IcM:HDD Trouble
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
is normal but a program model) is used * When the above messages are displayed, the HDD is broken
error occurs in it is used. down. Turn OFF the main power and replace the HDD with a
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. new one.
(Servicing)
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup
b. Work contents and procedures
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB
memory.) When a new HDD
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
authentication data) is normal but a program model) is used *
error occurs in it is used.
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User
or servicing) Step 1 Reinstall the firmware Use SIM49-1 to reinstall
Back up the data to PC with Web page. (program) in the boot mode. the firmware (program).
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14 Step 2 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data, Input profile) and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
Step 3 Replace the HDD. Formatting is automatically complex machine.
performed.
Step 4 Reinstall the firmware Use SIM49-1 to reinstall
(program) in the boot mode. the firmware (program). Step 3 To step 4 The trouble code, U2-05,
is displayed. Cancel
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex
with SIM16.
Formatting is automatically machine.
performed. Step 4 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
Step 6 To step 7 The trouble code, U2-05,
is no need to perform
is displayed. Cancel
formatting procedure with SIM.
with SIM16.
Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
the HDD data and the image related memory and to
is no need to perform
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
formatting procedure with SIM.
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
Fax models.)
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
the HDD data and the image related memory and to
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
shipping.
Fax models.)
Step 9 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD. (4) HDD replacement and firmware installation
Step 10 Import the data backed up in Step 1. (version up)
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup
to import. a. Operations and displays after HDD replacement
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 When a new HDD without the main program in it or a normal HDD
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User with abnormal main program data in it is installed to the machine
authentication data) and the main power is turned ON, the following operations and dis-
Step 11 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in plays are made.
Step 2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, Input profile,
1) When the power is turned ON, the main program error is dis-
Output profile, User font, Use macro played.
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)
Main Program Error!!
(3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage
data cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Display when HDD breakdown 2) The above error message is displayed for 10 sec. Then the fol-
lowing message is displayed.
When the machine is booted with the HDD broken down, the fol-
lowing operation and the display are made.
1) When the power is turned ON, the main program error is dis- Emergency Prog Init
played. Please wait
Main Program Error!! 3) The machine enters the boot mode which indicates that there
is an error in the main program.
2) The above error message is displayed for 10 sec. Then the fol- Version Check
lowing message is displayed. IcM:UNUSUAL
Emergency Prog Init

Please wait
2 : '09/Sep
b. Operations in the boot mode

2
When the machine is booted in the boot mode, the firmware version check, the firmware install, and the version-up operation can be per-
formed.
When a HDD is installed to the machine and the above operation is performed, the firmware must be installed.
* In the boot mode, the following keys are used for operation. Note that the functions of the keys in the boot mode differ from those in the nor-
mal mode.
b-1. Key functions and operations in the boot mode
8.5 Inch LCD model
UP key DOWN key
JOB STATUS PRINT

READY
DATA
SYSTEM
SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA
HOME
LOGOUT
MENU key
OK key
Key name in the normal mode Key name in the boot mode Function
Start key (Monochrome) [OK] key Performs the selected item or function.
Home key [MENU] key Selects a menu.
Job status key [UP] key Selects an item.
System setting key [DOWN] key Selects an item.
8.1 Inch LCD model
UP key DOWN key
PRINT
DOCUMENT READY
FILING DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND
DATA
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
LOGOUT
MENU key OK key
Key name in the normal mode Key name in the boot mode Function
Start key (Monochrome) [OK] key Performs the selected item or function.
Job status key [MENU] key Selects a menu.
Document filling key [UP] key Selects an item.
Image send key [DOWN] key Selects an item.
b-2. Functions in the boot mode

The following two functions are available in the boot mode.
Function Content
Firmware version check function Displays the firmware version of the ICU PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, and the FAC PWB.
Firmware install (update) function Installs (revises) the firmware by transmitting data from the PC which is connected to the ICU PWB, the SCU PWB, the
PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and other options with the USB memory or the USB cable.
2 : '09/Sep
b-3. Selection of functions in the boot mode 6) Check the result of install (update) of the firmware.
2
There are two functions available in the boot mode. These modes Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to check the results of install
can be selected by pressing MENU key and BACK key. (update) of all the firmware programs.
Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM

Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG
Version Check
conf:xxxxxxxx Screen Display of Firmware Update Results
OK: Update success
NG: Update failed
MENU key Not Update: The update process is not executed.
MENU key
Cause of Update process not executed:
The option unit for the target firmware is not connected.
Firm Update
7) Turn OFF the power to terminate the boot mode.
From USB Memory
(5) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD
storage Operation Manual data
c. Firmware install and version-up procedures in the boot
mode 1) Obtain the Operation Manual data.
1) Boot the machine in the boot mode. When the Version Check Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu on
display is indicated, press [MENU] key, and the machine the web site (Tech-DS home page).
enters the Firm Update mode. Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing
the file hierarchy.
Firm Update (To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx"
and "**_pdf.idx" and "version.txt" as well as the Operation
From USB Memory Manual data (**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files
are copied without changing the file hierarchy, these files also
2) Insert the USB memory which includes the update firmware file are copied.)
(SFU file) into the USB port of the machine, and press [OK]
NOTE:
key.
When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if
there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are
Firm Update compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which
> 0100P200.sfu satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.
The file size is different.
SFU file display The time stamp is different.
3) Select the firmware file (SFU file) of the target. The file exists only in the USB memory.
Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to select the target file. 2) Enter the SIM49-3 mode.
When [OK] key is pressed with the directory name displayed,
the control can enter the lower level directory. (However, one-

step lower level) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower level directory, the ',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
control can return to the upper level directory. ),/( ',5!)2/'(5
',5!0$18$/
4) Press [OK] key.
The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. (It takes about 1
minute.)
Firm Update
Reading Data

Display of reading file data
5) After completion of reading, the firmware is installed (updated). 3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
(It takes about 5 - 6 minutes.) When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
ANGE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
Firm Update button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu
1.
IcuM
4) Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen
shifts to the Operation Manual data install menu.)
Display of firmware install (Update) process
The current version and the update version are displayed.
* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is currently
installed (updated) is displayed sequentially. 5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
* The screen may flash instantaneously during the install [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
(update) process. This is a normal operation. are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual
is installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT
MX-3100N (2) Rear cabinet
Service Manual
1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
1. Disassembly and assembly

A. Cabinet
e 1
j
l
i
m
a
r
k
(3) Left cabinet rear lower/Left cabinet

p 1) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
h
g f
2
o
b
q d
c
Parts
1
a Front cabinet
b Rear cabinet
c Left cabinet rear lower
2) Remove the desk connection lid (A). Remove the screw, and
d Left cabinet
remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet (C).
e Upper cabinet right
f Upper cabinet left
g Upper cabinet rear cover
h Upper cabinet rear
i Front cabinet upper
j Operation panel base plate C
k Right cabinet front
l Right connection cabinet B
m Right cabinet rear cover
n Right cabinet rear 2
o Paper exit cover
p Paper exit tray cabinet
q Left cabinet rear A 4
r Frame cover
1 3
(1) Front cabinet
1) Remove the front cabinet band. Remove the front cabinet
hinge. Remove the front cabinet.
MX-3100N EXTERNAL OUTFIT A 1

(4) Upper cabinet right/Upper cabinet left (6) Front cabinet upper/Operation panel base plate
1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and 1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
the table glass (C). front cabinet upper.
2 3
C B
1
2) Remove the screw, and remove the operation panel base

2) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet right (A) and
plate.
the upper cabinet left (B).
(7) Right cabinet front/Right connection cabinet/Right

cabinet rear cover/Right cabinet rear
1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
(5) Upper cabinet rear cover/Upper cabinet rear
2) Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid (A). Remove the
screw, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover (B).
B
2 2
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the

earth wire. Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet 3
rear.

3) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front (A). (9) Frame cover
Remove the screw, and remove the right connection cabinet 1) Remove the waste toner box, and open the drum positioning
(B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screw, and unit.
remove the right cabinet rear cover (D). Remove the desk con-
2) Remove the front cabinet.
nection lid (E). Remove the screw, and remove the right cabi-
net rear (F). 3) Remove the front cabinet upper.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the frame cover.
B 2
1
6 D
A
4
3
C
F
5
E
(8) Paper exit cover/Paper exit tray cabinet/Left

cabinet rear
1) Remove the paper exit cover (A). Open the front cabinet, and
remove the screw.
Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet (B).
Remove the screw, and remove the left cabinet rear (C).
C 4 2 2

1.
[B]
NM MODEL OTHER
MX-3100N
D2- FP_D- 9 3 D- 3 4 D- D1-

D2+ FP_D+ 8 4 D+ 4 3 D+ D1+
DGND DGND 6 6 SHIELD 6 1 GND GND /CCFT 2
LCD
VBUS DGND 5 BM05B-GHS-TBT +CCFT 1
D3- DGND 4 USB I/F PWB S02(8.0)B-BHS
D3+ DGND 3
DGND DGND 2
DGND DGND 1 CN4
GND 29 6 GND GND 5 5 GND
TOUCH PANEL
BM10B-GHS-TBT PD 28 5 PD CCFT 4 4 CCFT
CN13
5V_EXT 27 4 5V_EXT +24V 3 3 +24V
INVERTER PWB
PWB
PDSEL0 26 1 PDSEL0 +24V 2 2 +24V
ORS-PD
PDSEL1 25 2 PDSEL1 GND 1 1 GND
PDSEL2 24 3 PDSEL2 BM05B-GHS-TBT B5B-PAS K
BACK LIGHT
B6P-PH-H-S CN3
9 3.3VPD /YL(Y1) 4
SCANDATA0 - 1 1 SCANDATA0 - XH(X1) 3
CN11
CN6
2
SCANDATA0 + 2 2 SCANDATA0 + GND 50 1 GND YH(Y2) 2
CN1
D-GND 3 3 D-GND GND 49 2 GND /XL(X2) 1
SCANDATA1 - 4 4 SCANDATA1 - 5V_EXT 48 17 5V_EXT 52271-0469
A. 8.5 inch operation panel

OPERATION PANEL
5
D-GND 12 11 D-GND /F0D1 33 9 /F0D1
SCANDATA3 - 13 16 SCANDATA3 - /F1D2 32 7 /F1D2
SCANDATA3 + 14 15 SCANDATA3 + /F2G0 31 5 /F2G0
D-GND 15 13 D-GND /F3G1 30 3 /F3G1
B15P-PH-K-S B16B-PHDSS-B 501190-5029
CR2 MFP-OPE PWB

5V2 1 1 1 4 5V2
D-GND 2 2 2 6 D-GND
CN12
nINFO_LED 4 3 3 12 nINFO_LED
nWU_LED 5 4 4 8 WU_LED
nPOW_LED 6 5 5 10 POW_LED
1
nWU_KEY 7 6 6 14 nWU_KEY
501190-2029
D-GND 3 7 7 1 D-GND
D-GND 9 8 8 2 D-GND
PWB
PO SW
nPWRSW 8 9 9 3 nPWRSW
B3P-PH-H-S
D-GND 10 10 10 10 D-GND +3.3V 40 40 +3.3V
CN1
6
LCD_DATA3 + 11 11 11 6 LCD_DATA3 + NC 39 39 NC
3
LCD_DATA3 - 12 12 12 8 LCD_DATA3 - +3.3V 38 38 +3.3V
D-GND 15 13 13 16 D-GND +3.3V 37 37 +3.3V
LCD_CLK+ 13 14 14 12 LCD_CLK+ UD/LR 36 36 NC
LCD_CLK- 14 15 15 14 LCD_CLK- ENAB 35 35 ENAB
Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
D-GND 16 16 16 22 D-GND F-GND 34 34 F-GND

LCD_DATA2 + 17 17 17 18 LCD_DATA2 + Vsync 33 33 Vsync
D-GND 21 19 19 28 D-GND Hsync 31 31 Hsync
CR2 MOTHER PWB

LCD_DATA1 + 19 20 20 24 LCD_DATA1 + D-GND 30 30 D-GND
LCD_DATA1 - 20 21 21 26 LCD_DATA1 - B5 29 29 B5
D-GND 22 22 22 34 D-GND B4 28 28 B4
LCD_DATA0 + 23 23 23 30 LCD_DATA0 + B3 27 27 B3
B24B-PHDSS-B DF1B-24Pin B2 25 25 B2
B1 24 24 B1
GND 23 1 GND B0 23 23 B0
D-GND 6 6 D-GND GND 22 2 GND D-GND 22 22 D-GND
MX-3100N OPERATION PANEL B 1

CN3
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V GND 21 7 GND G5 21 21 G5
CN14
PWRSW
+5VN 4 4 +5VN GND 20 29 GND G4 20 20 G4
+12V 3 2 +12V GND 19 39 GND G3 19 19 G3
+24V2 2 1 +24V2 GND 18 40 GND D-GND 18 18 D-GND
P-GND 1 3 P-GND 3.3V 17 25 3.3V G2 17 17 G2
B6P-VH B6P-VH 3.3V_EXT 16 19 3.3V_EXT G1 16 16 G1
8.5-LVDS PWB
5V_EXT 15 23 5V_EXT G0 15 15 G0
Service Manual
nPOF_SCN 14 14 nPOF_SCN 24V_EXT 14 3 24V_EXT D-GND 14 14 D-GND
CN14
RXD_SCN 13 13 RXD_SCN 24V_EXT 13 5 24V_EXT R5 13 13 R5
4
CN12
LCD_SEL3 12 12 LCD_SEL3 /YL(Y1) 12 37 /YL(Y1) R4 12 12 R4
OCSW
nCTS_SCN 11 11 nCTS_SCN XH(X1) 11 35 XH(X1) R3 11 11 R3

LCD_SEL1 10 10 LCD_SEL1 YH(Y2) 10 33 YH(Y2) D-GND 10 10 D-GND
TXD_SCN 9 9 TXD_SCN /XL(X2) 9 31 /XL(X2) R2 9 9 R2
LCD_SEL0 8 8 LCD_SEL0 SC_TEMP 8 27 SC_TEMP R1 8 8 R1
nRTS_SCN 7 7 nRTS_SCN VCONT 7 21 VCONT R0 7 7 R0
LCD_SEL2 6 6 LCD_SEL2 /CCFT 6 17 /CCFT NC 6 6 NC
nRES_SCN 5 5 nRES_SCN PNL_SEL0 5 15 PNL_SEL0 D-GND 5 5 D-GND
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB

nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP PNL_SEL1 4 13 PNL_SEL1 D-GND 4 4 D-GND
nRES_MFPC_SCN 3 3 nRES_MFPC_SCN PNL_SEL2 3 11 PNL_SEL2 CK 3 3 CK
NC 2 2 NC PNL_SEL3 2 9 PNL_SEL3 D-GND 2 2 D-GND
D-GND 1 1 D-GND DISP 1 36 DISP D-GND 1 1 D-GND
B14B-PHDSS-B B14B-PHDSS-B 501190-5029 501571-4029 FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
5VEXT 1 1 5VEXT
CN10
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
OCSW 3 3 OCSW
24VEXT 4
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6P-PH-H-S 24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED 2
F.G.
SRA-21T-4
Signal Name Function/Operation
OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection timing switch
PWRSW Operaton panel power supply switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.
No. Name Function/Operation

1 MFP OPE-P PWB Detects the pressed key on the operation panel.
3 Document detection light receiving PWB Receives light from the document detection light emitting PWB to detect the document size.
4 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits light for detection of the document size.
5 LCD INV PWB Emits the document size detection LED lights.
6 USB connector PWB For USB connecting

NM MODEL OTHER
D2- FP_D- 9 3 D- 3 4 D- D1-
D2+ FP_D+ 8 4 D+ 4 3 D+ D1+
DGND DGND 6 6 SHIELD 6 1 GND GND /CCFT 2
VBUS DGND 5 BM05B-GHS-TBT +CCFT 1
LCD
D3- DGND 4 USB I/F PWB S02(8.0)B-BHS
D3+ DGND 3
DGND DGND 2
2
DGND DGND 1 CN4
TOUCH PANEL
BM10B-GHS-TBT PD 28 5 PD D-GND 2 2 D-GND
CN13
5V_EXT 27 4 5V_EXT /CCFT 1 3 /CCFT
PWB
PDSEL0 26 1 PDSEL0 S3B-PH-SM4-TB S3B-PH-K-S
INVERTER PWB
ORS-PD
PDSEL1 25 2 PDSEL1
PDSEL2 24 3 PDSEL2
BACK LIGHT
B6P-PH-H-S CN3
9 3.3VPD /YL(Y1) 1
5
SCANDATA0 - 1 1 SCANDATA0 - XH(X1) 2
CN11
CN6
SCANDATA0 + 2 2 SCANDATA0 + GND 50 1 GND YH(Y2) 3
CN1
D-GND 3 3 D-GND GND 49 2 GND /XL(X2) 4
SCANDATA1 - 4 4 SCANDATA1 - 5V_EXT 48 17 5V_EXT 52271-0469
B. 8.1 inch operation panel

D-GND 12 11 D-GND /F0D1 33 9 /F0D1
SCANDATA3 - 13 16 SCANDATA3 - /F1D2 32 7 /F1D2
SCANDATA3 + 14 15 SCANDATA3 + /F2G0 31 5 /F2G0
D-GND 15 13 D-GND /F3G1 30 3 /F3G1
B15P-PH-K-S B16B-PHDSS-B 501190-5029
CR2 MFP-OPE PWB

5V2 1 1 1 4 5V2
D-GND 2 2 2 6 D-GND
CN12
nINFO_LED 4 3 3 12 nINFO_LED
nWU_LED 5 4 4 8 WU_LED
nPOW_LED 6 5 5 10 POW_LED
1
nWU_KEY 7 6 6 14 nWU_KEY
501190-2029
D-GND 3 7 7 1 D-GND
D-GND 9 8 8 2 D-GND
PWB
PO SW
nPWRSW 8 9 9 3 nPWRSW
B3P-PH-H-S
D-GND 10 10 10 10 D-GND V0 1 15 V0
CN1
6
LCD_DATA3 + 11 11 11 6 LCD_DATA3 + LP 2 14 LP
3
D-GND 15 13 13 16 D-GND CP 4 12 CP
LCD_CLK+ 13 14 14 12 LCD_CLK+ D-GND 5 11 D-GND
LCD_CLK- 14 15 15 14 LCD_CLK- 3.3V_EXT 6 10 3.3V_EXT
D-GND 16 16 16 22 D-GND M 7 9 M
LCD_DATA2 + 17 17 17 18 LCD_DATA2 + D0 8 8 D0
LCD_DATA2 - 18 18 18 20 LCD_DATA2 - D1 9 7 D1
D-GND 21 19 19 28 D-GND D-GND 10 6 D-GND
CR2 MOTHER PWB

LCD_DATA1 + 19 20 20 24 LCD_DATA1 + D2 11 5 D2
LCD_DATA1 - 20 21 21 26 LCD_DATA1 - D3 12 4 D3
D-GND 22 22 22 34 D-GND D-GND 13 3 D-GND
LCD_DATA0 + 23 23 23 30 LCD_DATA0 + DISP 14 2 DISP
LCD_DATA0 - 24 24 24 32 LCD_DATA0 - VEE 15 1 VEE
B24B-PHDSS-B DF1B-24Pin 52030-2629
GND 23 1 GND

CN3
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V GND 21 7 GND
CN14
PWRSW
+5VN 4 4 +5VN GND 20 29 GND
+12V 3 2 +12V GND 19 39 GND
+24V2 2 1 +24V2 GND 18 40 GND
P-GND 1 3 P-GND 3.3V 17 25 3.3V
B6P-VH B6P-VH 3.3V_EXT 16 19 3.3V_EXT
8.1-LVDS PWB
5V_EXT 15 23 5V_EXT
nPOF_SCN 14 14 nPOF_SCN 24V_EXT 14 3 24V_EXT
CN14
RXD_SCN 13 13 RXD_SCN 24V_EXT 13 5 24V_EXT
4
CN12
LCD_SEL3 12 12 LCD_SEL3 /YL(Y1) 12 37 /YL(Y1)
OCSW
nCTS_SCN 11 11 nCTS_SCN XH(X1) 11 35 XH(X1)

LCD_SEL1 10 10 LCD_SEL1 YH(Y2) 10 33 YH(Y2)
TXD_SCN 9 9 TXD_SCN /XL(X2) 9 31 /XL(X2)
LCD_SEL0 8 8 LCD_SEL0 SC_TEMP 8 27 SC_TEMP
nRTS_SCN 7 7 nRTS_SCN VCONT 7 21 VCONT
LCD_SEL2 6 6 LCD_SEL2 /CCFT 6 17 /CCFT
nRES_SCN 5 5 nRES_SCN PNL_SEL0 5 15 PNL_SEL0
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB

nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP PNL_SEL1 4 13 PNL_SEL1
nRES_MFPC_SCN 3 3 nRES_MFPC_SCN PNL_SEL2 3 11 PNL_SEL2
NC 2 2 NC PNL_SEL3 2 9 PNL_SEL3
D-GND 1 1 D-GND DISP 1 36 DISP
B14B-PHDSS-B B14B-PHDSS-B 501190-5029 501571-4009
5VEXT 1 1 5VEXT
CN10
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
OCSW 3 3 OCSW
24VEXT 4
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6P-PH-H-S 24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED 2
F.G.
SRA-21T-4
1 : '08 Oct 15

OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection timing switch
PWRSW Operaton panel power supply switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.

1 MFP OPE-P PWB Detects the pressed key on the operation panel.
3 Document detection light receiving PWB Receives light from the document detection light emitting PWB to detect the document size.
4 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits light for detection of the document size.
5 LCD INV PWB Emits the document size detection LED lights.
6 USB connector PWB For USB connecting
2. Operational descriptions 3. Disassembly and assembly

A. Outline A. 8.5 inch operation panel unit
The operation panel is composed of the MFP OPE PWB, the LCD
INV PWB, the LVDS PWB, the USB CN PWB, the LCD unit, ansd
the operation key, and is used to operation the machine, to set and
to displat the status. e
The LCD is provided in two types: 8.5 inch color LCD and 8.1 inch
monochorme LCD. They differ in the operations. They are con- g
nected with the document detection light receiving PWB for detec-
tion of the documetn size. They receive light from the document f c
deteciton light emitting PWB attahced to the rear frame side,
detecting the document size. a
The power switch of the operation panel outputs the ON/OFF con- b
trol signal of the DC power. d
The USB connecter can be connected with the USB memory, the
USB keyboard, the IC card writer, the IC card reader, and he USB Parts
hub, sending these electronic data to the mother PWB. a LCD INV PWB
The MX-2600N and the MX-3100N are provided with the keyboard b POWER SW PWB
(standard for North America, option for other than SEN) under the c MFP OPE-P PWB
operation panel unit, allowing text input. d USB connector PWB
e LVDS PWB
f LCD module
g Touch panel
1) Remove the operation panel base plate.

2) Remove the screw, and disconnect each connector (4 posi- 1
tions).
*3
*1 *1 *2
*4 *1
*1: Don't pull the lead wire. The connector can be locked.
Hold the housing section of connector, pull out it.
*2: There is a locking section on the reverse side. Use care for
that.
*3: Slowly pull the lead wire and disconnect the connector.
*4: Pull out the connector from the mylar sheet.

1 : '08 Oct 15
3) Remove the screw, and remove the earth harness from the (3) LVDS PWB
1 main unit. Place the operation panel upside down. 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS
shield sheet.
(1) LCD INV PWB/POWER SW PWB/MFP OPE-P PWB

3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the earth
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
wire. Remove the LVDS PWB.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the
* When the LVDS PWB is removed, the earth plate for the
LCD INV PWB and the POWER SW PWB.
LCD is also removed. Be careful not to lose it.
3) Remove the screw and the earth wire. Peel off the Mylar, and
remove the earth sheet and the MFP OPE-P PWB.
(4) LCD module

2) Remove the LVDS shield sheet.
Mylar.
(2) USB connector PWB

2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB
connector PWB.

4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LCD holder. 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the
Mylar.
5) Remove the LCD module.

4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the LCD unit.
(5) Touch panel

1) Remove the operation panel unit. 5) Remove the touch panel.
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS
shield sheet.

1 : '08 Oct 15
B. 8.1 inch operation panel unit (1) POWER SW PWB/MFP OPE-P PWB
2) Remove the screw, and remove the POWER SW PWB.
f b
d
g
a
Parts
a POWER SW PWB
b MFP OPE-P PWB
3) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the MFP
c USB connector PWB
OPE-P PWB.
d LCD INV PWB
e LVDS PWB
f LCD module
g Touch panel
1) Remove the operation panel base plate.

1 2) Remove the screw, and disconnect each connector (4 posi-
tions).
(2) USB connector PWB

*3
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB
connector PWB.
*1
*1 *2
*1
*1: Don't pull the lead wire. The connector can be locked.
Hold the housing section of connector, pull out it.
*2: There is a locking section on the reverse side. Use care for
that.
*3: Slowly pull the lead wire and disconnect the connector.
3) Place the operation panel upside down.

(3) LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB (5) Touch panel
1) Remove the operation panel unit. 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the LCD INV PWB (A) and the LVDS PWB (B). the LCD unit.
* When the LCD INV PWB and the LVDS PWB are removed,
the earth wire for the LCD is also removed. Be careful not to
lose it.
3) Remove the touch panel.
(4) LCD module

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LCD holder.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the LCD module.

C. Keyboard unit 3) Remove the screw, and remove the keytop unit.
b
a
4) Remove the screw, and slide and remove the operation base
plate.
Parts
a Keyboard 5) Remove the screw. Disconnect the connector. Remove the
b USB conversion PWB keyboard.
c USB hub PWB
(1) Keyboard/USB conversion PWB

2) Pull out the keytop unit. Remove the black sheet, and discon-
nect the connector.

6) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Remove the screw
and the earth wire, and remove the USB conversion PWB.
(2) USB hub PWB

1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector. Remove the
USB hub PWB.

[C] RSPF SECTION
MX-3100N
Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram

A. Paper feed section
CN H
SPRMA/ 1
+24VPD 2
SPRMA 3
SPRMB 4
+24VPD 5
SPRMB/ 6
B6B-PH-K-R 179228-3
CN E 1 SPED
+24VPD_SRRC 1 2 GND
SRRC/ 2 PALR-08VF / PAP-08V-S 3 +5V_SPED
SPED 3 1 SPED 1
GND 4 2 GND 2 179228-3(BLACK)
1 +5VPD
+5V_SPED 5 3 +5V_SPED 3
2 SPPD1
+5VPD 6 4 +5VPD 4
3 GND
SPPD1 7 5 SPPD1 5
GND 8 6 GND 6 PS-187-2V
+24VPD 9 7 +24VPD 7 1 +24VPD
GND 10 (NC) 8 +24VPD_SW 8 2 +24VPD_SW
+24VPD_SW 11
B11B-PH-K-S
SCOV
SPRM
SPPD1 SPFC
SPED
RSPF DRIVER
PWB
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
179228-3
1 SPLS1
2 GND
3 +5VPD_SPLS1
179228-3
CN D 1 SPLS2
SPLS1 1 2 GND
GND 2 3 +5VPD_SPLS2
+5VPD_SPLS1 3
SPLS2 4
GND 5
+5VPD_SPLS2 6 SMP-03V-NC / SMP-03V-NC
AVCC 7 1 AVCC 1
SPWS 8 2 SPWS 2
GND 9 3 GND 3
SPFC/ 10
GND 11 (NC)
+24VPD_SW_SPFC 12
B12B-PH-K-S SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
1 SPFC/ 1
2 +24VPD_SW_SPFC 2
B. Reversing section
RSPF DRIVER PWB

+24VPD_STMPS
+5VPD_SOCD
+24VPD_SGS
SPRMA/
SPRMB/
SPRMA
SPRMB
STMPU
+24VPD
+24VPD
+24VPD
+24VPD
STMPS/
SPFMA/
SPFMB/
SPFMA
SPFMB
SPPD4
+5VPD
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD5
+5VPD
+5VPD
+5VPD
SOCD
GND
GND
SGS/
GND
GND
GND
GND
(NC)
(NC)
B13B-PH-K-S
B6B-PH-K-R
B7B-PH-K-R
B6B-PH-K-S
B3B-PH-K-S
10
11
12
13
CN G
CN B
CN C
CN H
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN F
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(NC)
(NC)
179228-3(BLACK)
VHPGP1A73A+-18
10
11
12
SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
+5VPD_SOCD
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD5
+5VPD
+5VPD
+5VPD
SOCD
SPPD4
+5VPD
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SPFM
179228-3(BLACK)
VHPGP1A73A+-18
1
2
3
SPPD5
+5VPD
GND
SPPD5
SGS SPRM
SPPD4
MX-3100N RSPF SECTION C 1

C. Transport section
CN F
SPFMA/ 1
+24VPD 2
SPFMA 3
SPFMB 4
+24VPD 5
SPFMB/ 6
B6B-PH-K-S SPFM
+24VPD_SRRC
CN E
1
SMP-02V-NC /
1
SMR-02V-N
+24VPD_SRRC 1
SRRC
SRRC/ 2 2 SRRC/ 2
SPED 3
GND 4
+5V_SPED 5
+5VPD 6
RSPF DRIVER PWB
SPPD1 7
GND 8
+24VPD 9
GND 10
+24VPD_SW 11
B11B-PH-K-S
SPPD3
179228-3(BLACK)
1
2
+5VPD
SPPD2
SPPD2
3 GND
CN G SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC VHPGP1A73A+-18
+5VPD 1 1 +5VPD 1
SPPD2 2 2 SPPD2 2
GND 3 3 GND 3 179228-3(BLACK)
+5VPD 4 4 +5VPD 4 1 +5VPD
SPPD3 5 5 SPPD3 5 2 SPPD3
GND 6 6 GND 6 3 GND
SOCD 7 7 SOCD 7 VHPGP1A73A+-18
GND 8 8 GND 8
+5VPD_SOCD 9 9 +5VPD_SOCD 9
+5VPD 10 10 +5VPD 10 179228-3
SPPD5
GND
11
12
11
12
SPPD5
GND
11
12
1
2
SOCD
GND
SOCD
(NC) 13 (NC) 3 +5VPD_SOCD
B13B-PH-K-S VHPGP1S73P+-18
2. Operational descriptions
A. Document size detection
(1) Document size detection
Size detection on the document tray
The document width is detected with the SPF document width sen-
sor (SPWS), and the document length is detected with the SPF
document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is
judged from the document width and the document length accord-
ing to the table below. When documents of different sizes are SPWS
mixed and set on the document tray, the largest document size is
SPLS1
detected.
SPLS2
Document length sensor
Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON

B. Paper feed transport operation 7) Preliminary paper feed completion (Second sheet)
(1) Single-side scan

1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
8) Paper feed start (Second sheet)
2) Preliminary paper feed start (First sheet)

Pickup roller falling
9) Scan completion (First sheet)/Resist operation (Second sheet)
3) Preliminary paper feed completion/Paper feed start (First

sheet)
10) Scan start (Second sheet)
4) Resist operation (First sheet)
11) Paper exit completion (First sheet)

5) Scan start (First sheet)
6) Preliminary paper feed start (Second sheet) 12) Scan completion (Second sheet)

13) Paper exit completion (Second sheet) 5) Scan start (First sheet front surface)
14) Pickup roller rising 6) Gate falling (First sheet front surface)
(2) Duplex scan

7) Scan completion (First sheet front surface)
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
2) Preliminary paper feed start (First sheet) 8) Reverse stop

Pickup roller falling Gate rising

sheet) 9) Reverse start
4) Resist operation (First sheet front surface) 10) Reverse after resist operation

11) Resist operation (First sheet back surface) 17) Document transport continuation
12) Scan start (First sheet back surface) 18) Preliminary paper feed start (Second sheet)
19) Preliminary paper feed completion/Paper feed start (Second

13) Gate falling (First sheet back surface) sheet)
14) Scan completion (First sheet back surface)

20) Resist operation (Second sheet front surface)
15) Reverse stop gate rising

16) Reverse start
22) Scan start (Second sheet front surface)

23) Same operations as "5) Scan start (First sheet front surface)" (3) Stamping operation
and later. 1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
24) Paper exit completion (Second sheet)
2) Preliminary paper feed start (First sheet)

Pickup roller falling
25) Pickup roller rising

sheet)
4) Resist operation (First sheet)
5) Scan start (First sheet)
6) Scan completion (First sheet)

7) Stop at the stamping position/Stamping operation (First sheet) 13) Pickup roller rising
C. RSPF mixed document select switch

8) Paper exit start (First sheet)/Preliminary paper feed start (Sec-
ond sheet) This machine is provided with the random paper feed function
which allows feeding documents of different sizes.
The random paper feed can be used only for single surface docu-
ment of the following combinations.
Destination Combinations for random paper feed

AB series A3 and B4
B4 and A4R
A4 and B5
B5 and A5
Inch width 8.5" and 11" width
To enable the mixed document mode, set the mixed document
select switch to ON. To disable le, turn it OFF.
10) Stop at the stamping position/Stamping operation (Second ON

sheet)
OFF
11) Paper exit start (Second sheet)
12) Paper exit completion (Second sheet)

3. Disassembly and assembly 4) Remove the rear cabinet.
A. Document tray unit
5) Remove the stopper.
Parts
a SPF document with sensor
1) Remove screw from the bottom of the RSPF unit.
2) Open the paper feed unit, and remove the screw.
6) Disconnect the connector. Remove the paper feed PG holder,

and remove the document tray unit.
2
1
1
3
3) Remove the front cabinet.

(1) SPF document with sensor B. Paper feed unit
1) Remove the document tray unit.
2) Remove the document tray lower.
a
Parts
a SPF cover SW
1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.

2) Remove the transport unit.
3) Remove the earth wire. Remove the spring and the paper feed
PG holder, and remove the paper feed unit and the upper PG
link arm.
3) Remove the SPF document width sensor.
3 1
(1) SPF cover SW

3) Remove the paper feed unit.

5) Remove the upper cover. 3) Remove screw from the bottom of the RSPF unit.
6) Remove the SPF cover SW.
C. Transport unit
2) Remove the connecter.

D. Reversing section 1) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.
4) Remove the resin E-ring and the bearing. Remove the drive
unit, and remove each part.
3 2
Parts 1 3
a Document paper exit gate solenoid
(1) Document paper exit gate solenoid

2) Remove the transport unit. (1) SPF paper feed clutch
3) Remove the solenoid adjustment plate. Remove the SPF doc-
ument paper exit gate solenoid.
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the SPF paper feed clutch.
* When installing, insert the pin of the SPF document paper
exit gate solenoid into the gate.
E. Drive unit (2) SPF resist roller clutch

3) Remove the E-ring, and remove the SPF resist roller clutch.
b
d
c
a
Parts
a SPF paper feed clutch
b SPF resist roller clutch
c SPF paper feed reverse motor
d SPF transport motor

(3) SPF paper feed reverse motor F. Base tray section
4) Remove the drive unit.
5) Remove the SPF paper feed reverse motor.
Parts
a RSPF drive PWB
(1) RSPF drive PWB

2) Remove the RSPF drive PWB.
(4) SPF transport motor
4) Remove the drive unit.
5) Loosen the screw of the tension holder to reduce the tension of
the belt. Remove the SPF transport motor.
1 2

[D] SCANNER SECTION
MX-3100N
Service Manual
MHPS
6 9
3
MIM
7
CLI
3
1
2
2
1
8
CL INVERTOR
D-GND
P-GND
P-GND
24VPD
24VPD
MHPS
5597-05APB
CL
5V
EHR-3
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
B4P-PH-H-S
5597-05CPB7F
BM03B-GHS-TBT
CR2 SCN-CNT PWB

1
2
3
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
CN2
D-GND
P-GND
P-GND
24VPD
24VPD
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
MHPS
MiM_A
MiM_B
6 /RES_CCDAD
40 AFE_CSTG
AFE_WRD
AFE_SCLK
CL
5V
AFE_RDD
AFE_CS
CLK+
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RC+
RD+
CLK-
FI-RE41S-VF
RA+
RB+
RE+
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
10V
10V
RC-
RD-
RA-
RB-
RE-
5V
5V
5V
CN9 CN5 CN4

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
41
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
FI-RE41S-VF
41
40
39
38
AFE_CS 37
/RES_CCDAD 36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
AFE_CSTG
AFE_WRD
AFE_SCLK
CLK+
AFE_RDD
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RC+
RD+
CLK-
RA+
RB+
RE+
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
10V
10V
RC-
RD-
GND
RA-
RB-
RE-
5V
5V
5V
CCD PWB

CLI Scanner lamp Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.

1 Pulley belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire.
3 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor power to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
4 Reflector Condenses the copy lamp light.
5 No. 2 mirror Inducts the document image into the No. 3 mirror.
6 No. 3 mirror Inducts the document image into the lens.
7 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
8 CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
9 Idle gear Transmits the scanner motor drive power to the belt.
MX-3100N SCANNER SECTION D 1

A. Outline
This section performs the following functions. B
G
1) Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the
R
contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of
three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (ana-
log).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
B. Detail description R
(1) Optical section drive G
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner B
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by (Image data for 1 line)
the drive wires.
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
(2) Scanner lamp drive R G B
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage Red component Green component Blue component
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal image data image data image data
sent from the scanner control PWB.
(3) Image scan/color separation (4) Image signal A/D conversion
Light is radiated to the document by the scanner lamp, and the con- 1) The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted
trast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog). Each color pixel has 10bit information.
The color components of document images are extracted to R, G, 2) The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image
and B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B). process section.
The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the
green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue CCD PWB
components. This operation is called the color separation. Analog IC
The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD CCD
AFE ADC LVDS
elements, R, G, and B. (6 Lines) R
G
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by
B
the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direc-
tion is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner Buffer TG
motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and
reflected to the CCD.
The scan resolution is 600 dpi.
Timing
Generator
(5) Zooming operation

Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).

3. Disassembly and assembly 5) Remove the screw, and remove the scanner unit.
A. Scanner unit
f
b
d
a
c
e
Parts
a Scanner lamp
b CL inverter PWB
c CCD unit
d Scanner motor
e Document detection light receiving PWB
f Document detection light emitting PWB (1) Scanner lamp/CL inverter PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet 1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
rear. the table glass (C).
2) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
3) Remove the upper cabinet right and the upper cabinet left.. 2 3
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band. C B
1
2) Shift the lamp unit to the right end. Loosen the screw, and
remove the wire.
2
3

3) While rotating the lamp unit, lift it. Remove the harness holder (2) CCD unit
and the flat cable, and remove the lamp unit. 1) Remove the dark box cover. Disconnect the connector, and
remove the CCD unit.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the lamp.
2 (3) Scanner motor

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the scanner motor.
5) Remove the CL inverter PWB.

2
(4) Document detection light receiving PWB

1) Remove the operation base plate.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the document detection
light receiving PWB.

(5) Document detection light emitting PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the light emitting unit.
3) Remove the document detection light emitting PWB.

[E] PAPER FEED SECTION
MX-3100N
Service Manual

A. Manual paper feed section
DRIVER MAIN PWB

CN3
INT24V1 1 2 INT24V1
INT24V1 2 5 INT24V1
PFMB/ 3 6 PFMB/
PFMB 4 3 PFMB
PFMA 5 1 PFMA
PFMA/ 6 4 PFMA/
B13B-PASK-1
PCU PWB
CN1 CN7
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
SIN3 3 2 SIN3 2 2 SIN3
SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 16 SELIN1
APPD1 7 4 APPD1 4 4 APPD1
APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 18 APPD2
APPD3 9 5 APPD3 5 5 NC(APPD3)
POD3 10 21 POD3 21 17 POD3
MPFD 11 6 MPFD 6 6 MPFD
MPWD 13 7 MPWD 7 7 MPWD
TH_M 14 23 TH_M 23 19 TH_M
HUD_M 15 8 HUD_M 8 8 HUD_M
S16B-PHDSS-B
15 24V3 15 9 24V3
31 /MPGS 31 14 /MPGS
30 /MPFS 30 22 /MPFS
14 24V3 14 11 24V3
RIGHT 1
2
/MPUC
24V3
1
2
28
13
/MPUC
24V3
28
13
20
12
/MPUC
24V3
DOOR I/F R SM2PIN P P QR/P4 32PIN S B22B-PHDSS
PWB CN3(2/2)
NC (GND) 11
NC (5VLED) 12
NC (GND) 17
NC (GND) 21 R SM2P P
NC (GND) 23 1 24V3 1
NC (GND) 26 PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-H 2 /MPFS 2
NC (GND)
NC
30
32
8
7
24V3
/MPFS
1
2 PFM
MPED 7 6 MPED 3 1 MPED
2 D-GND
D-GND 8 5 D-GND 4 3 5VLED7
5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5
NC (FAX_D) 1 PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H R SM2P P
NC (GND)
5VLED6
2
3
2
3
/MPGS
5VLED6
7
6
4
1
/MPGS
5VLED6
2
5
1
2
24V3
/MPGS
1
2
MPUC
5 24V3 1
2 D-GND 4
MPFD 10 1 MPFD 8 3 MPFD 3
1 MPFD
2 D-GND
1
3
5
2
4
6
APPD2 4
3 5VLED6
D-GND 5
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VLED10 6
24V3
24V3
24V3
DF11-6DP-SP2
1 4
5 MPFS
MPFD
3
2 TH_D/HUD_M
MPED
MPGS MTOP2
MPWD MTOP1
MPLD 16
PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H
12 MPLD 3
9 NC 1
1 MPLD MPLD
2 D-GND
MPLD2 13 14 MPLD2 1 8 NC 2 3 5VLED12
5VLED12 18 11 5VLED12 4 7 NC 3
6 MPLD 4
5VN 19 10 5VN 5 5 D-GND 5
MPWD 20 9 MPWD 6 4 5VLED12 6
3 5VN 7 3 5VN
2 MPWD 8 2 MPWD
1 D-GND 9 1 D-GND
MTOP2 22 8 MTOP2 7 1 MTOP2

2 D-GND
5VLED13 24 7 5VLED13 8 3 5VLED13
MTOP1 25 6 MTOP1 9 1 MTOP1

2 D-GND
5VLED9 27 5 5VLED9 10 3 5VLED9
5VN 28 4 5VN 11 1 5VN

HUD_M 29 3 HUD_M 12 2 HUD_M
TH_M 31 1 TH_M 14 4 TH_M
5VLED4 15 13 5VLED4 2
S32B-PHDSS-B
8
6
7
2
4
5
3
1
DF11-8DP-SP1
MX-3100N PAPER FEED SECTION E 1

Signal name Name Function/Operation
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Manual feed paper empty detection
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Manual feed paper entry detection
MPDS Paper pickup solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
MPLD Manual paper feed length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the manual paper feed section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
detector
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (Storing position)
detector 1
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (Pulling out position)
detector 2
PFM Transport motor Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed section, transport between
the resist roller and the right door section.
TH_M/HUD_M Temperature/humidity detection Detects temperature and humidity.

1 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller Separates paper to prevent double feed.
3 Paper pickup roller Sends paper to the paper transport section.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
5 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. /
Transports paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.

B. Tray paper feed section
PCU PWB
CN6
INT24V2 1 32 INT24V2
P-GND 2 30 P-GND
/CPFM_GAIN 3 28 /CPFM_GAIN
/CPFM_CK 4 26 /CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D 5 24 /CPFM_D
CPFM_LD 6 22 CPFM_LD
NC 7 B32B-PHDSS
R SM-2Pin P CN5
1 /CPFC 1 1 /CPFC 1 1 /CPFC
2 24V3 2 2 24V3 2 2 24V3
R SM-2Pin P 3 /CPUC1 3 3 /CPUC1
1 /CPUC1 1 4 24V3 4 4 24V3
2 24V3 2 5 /CPUC2 5 5 /CPUC2
6 24V3 6 6 24V3
R SM-2Pin P
7 P-GND 7 7 P-GND
1 /CPUC2 1
8 /CLUM1 8 8 /CLUM1
2 24V3 2
9 P-GND 9 9 P-GND
P-GND 1 10 /CLUM2 10 10 /CLUM2
/CLUM1 2 R SM-10Pin P B24B-PHDSS
P-GND 1
/CLUM2 2
CN16
24V1 1 1 24V1
24V(RDSW) 2 2 24V(RDSW)
3 24V(RDSW)
4 24V(FDSW)
PHNR-12-H + B4P-VH
BU12P-TR-P-H P DF1B-32DE S C N9

CPED1 2 8 CPED1 5 9 CPED1 9 9 CPED1
5VN 1 4 5VN 9 13 5VN 13 13 5VN

CLUM1 31 5VN 31 31 5VN
30 DSW_C 30 30 DSW_C
CPUC1 29 D-GND 29 29 D-GND
CPFM
CLUD1 4
CPED1 CLUM2
2
1
3 CPUC2
10 DSW_R
CPFC CSPD1 2 21 CSPD1 21 21 CSPD1
9 D-GND 3 23 D-GND 23 23 D-GND

CPFD1
CSS1 CSS1
D-GND
1
2
25
27
CSS1
D-GND
25
27
25
27
CSS1
D-GND
CSPD1 NC
NC
3
4
11
PHNR-9-H
BU09P-TR-P-H

CPED2 2 5 CPED2 5 10 CPED2 10 10 CPED2
CLUD2
CPED2
6
5 5VN 1 1 5VN 9 14 5VN 14 14 5VN
7 CPFD2 D-GND 3 3 D-GND 7 18 D-GND 18 18 D-GND
8
CSS2
12 CSPD2 5VNPD 1 20 5VNPD 20 20 5VNPD
11 CSS2 1 26 CSS2 26 26 CSS2
NC 3 B32B-PHDSS
NC 4

CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 1 upper limit detection
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Tray 2 upper limit detection
CLUM1 Paper feed tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CLUM2 Paper feed tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CPED 1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Tray 1 paper empty detection
CPED 2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Tray 2 paper empty detection
CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection Detects tray 1 paper pass.
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection Detects tray 2 paper pass.
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray section.
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
CSS1 Tray 1 installation detection Tray 1 installation defection
CSS2 Tray 2 installation detection Tray 2 installation defection
DSW_C Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/close detection Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/close detection

2 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper transport section.
4 Torque limiter Always provides a certain level of resistance to the rotation of the separation roller,
preventing against double feed.
6 Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper transport section.
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and the paper feed roller (No. 2 paper
feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
9 Transport roller 5 (drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
10 Transport roller 7 (drive) Transport paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2 and 3, 4 to the transport roller 8.
11 Rotating plate Lifts up the paper, and always keeps constant the paper feed position.
12 Transport roller 14 (drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 2 to the transport roller 4.
A. Hand feed B. Tray paper feed
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface, (1) Paper feed front operation
separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it
Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller
to the paper feed roller section.
falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to pre-
The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
vent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual
paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate
paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the resist roller by the manual stops at the specified position.
transport roller. (2) Paper feed operation
When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup tim-
ing, feeding paper.
At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper
to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
to prevent against double feed of paper.
(3) Paper remaining detection
The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in
total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper
empty. The result is displayed.
(4) Paper remaining quantity detection method
The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rota-
tions of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up
operation of the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper limit
sensor.

(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

A. Manual paper feed unit 1) Open the right door.
c a
b
2) Remove the screw, and remove the connector cover. Remove
the screw and remove the ADU inner cover.
Parts
a Temperature humidity sensor
b Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
c Manual paper feed gate solenoid
d Paper pickup solenoid

3) Remove the ADU cabinet F and the ADU cabinet R. (1) Temperature and humidity sensor/Manual paper
feed tray paper width detector
1) Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
2) Remove the MF tray upper inside cover.
3) Disengage the pawl, lift the MF tray upper and MF tray 2, and
disconnect the connector.
4) Remove the MF harness cover, and disconnect the connector.
1
1
4) Remove the temperature and humidity sensor.

2
5) Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual

feed tray unit.
5) Remove the manual paper feed tray paper width detector.
6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed

unit.

(2) Manual paper feed gate solenoid 4) Remove each part, and remove the MF drive plate.
1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
2
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the MF front plate.
3) Disconnect the connector, and disengage the pawl, and

remove the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
6) Remove the MF upper base paper guide unit.
(3) Paper pickup solenoid

1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
7) Remove the MF upper guide supporting plate.
3) Remove each part, and remove the transport roller 12 (drive).
1 2
2
1

8) Remove the paper pickup solenoid. 5) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1, 2.
B. Tray paper feed unit

1) Remove the right cabinet front. C. Others
Parts
3) Remove the right lower door unit. a Tray 1, 2 installation detection
(1) Tray 1, 2 installation detection

4) Remove the paper feed movable PG lower.

1

tray 1, 2 installation detection unit.
3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the tray 1, 2 installation

detection.
Remove the spring from the tray 1, 2 installation detection.

[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
MX-3100N
Service Manual
RRM DRIVER MAIN PWB

CN3
INT24V1 2 1 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 2 INT24V1
PFMB/ 6 3 PFMB/
PFMB 3 4 PFMB
PFMA 1 5 PFMA
PFMA/ 4 6 PFMA/
PHR-6
1 PFM INT24V1 1 7 INT24V1

INT24V1 6 8 INT24V1
2 RRMB/ 3 9 RRMB/
RRMB 5 10 RRMB
RRMA 4 11 RRMA
RRMA/ 2 12 RRMA/
B6P-PH-K-R 13 N,C
PPD2 B13B-PASK-1
3
PCU PWB
BU06P-TR-P-H+PHNR-06-H CN6
PPD1 PPD1 2 5 PPD1 2 12 PPD1
179228-3 3 5VNPD 4 16 5VNPD
2 PPD2 5 18 PPD2
1 D-GND 6 20 D-GND
B32B-PHDSS
5VNPD 1
PPD2 2
D-GND 3
179228-3

PFM Transport motor Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed section,
transport between the resist roller and the right door section.
PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller.
PPD1 Resist detection Detects the paper in rear of resist roller.
RRM Resist motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.

1 Resist roller (drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls the transport timing of
paper, and adjusts the relative relations between images and paper.
2 Resist roller (idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the transport
power of the transport roller.
3 Transport roller 8 (drive) Transports the paper to resist roller.
MX-3100N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F 1

Transport paper from each paper feed section to the resist roller
with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch con-
trols ON/OFF of each transport roller. The resist roller controls the
relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images.
The resist roller controls the relative positions of the transported
paper and transfer images. The resist roller is driven by the trans-
port motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer
images are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor.

A. Resist roller unit
1) Remove the developing unit (K).
2) Remove the drum unit (K).
3) Remove the primary transfer unit.
4) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
6) Remove the ADU connection drive.

the resist roller unit.
MX-3100N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F 2

6
7
8
P
1
2
SM-2Pin
R
1
2
CN1
6
D-GND 4 1 D-GND
n BD 3 2 n BD
R
1
2
SM-2Pin
D-GND 2 3 D-GND
5VN 1 4 5VN
P
1
2
B4B-PH-K-S 5 D-GND
LSUSS
6 LSUTH1
7 NC
B7B-PH-K-S
CN19
D-GND 4 B7B-PH-K-S
9
10
1
2
3
LSUTH1 3
NC 2
PCU PWB
/LSUSS_B
INT24V1
NC 1
NC
B4B-PH-K-S
6
CN3 CN4
3.3V CN 2 1 3.3V CN
D-GND 1 8 D-GND
5V CN 4 5 5V CN
Service Manual
D-GND 3 7 D-GND
24V 5 2 24V
P-GND 6 4 P-GND
S06B-XASK-1
CN4
5
5VLD 1 6 5VLD
D-GND 2 12 D-GND
CN1 CN7 /SCK_LSU 4 14 /SCK_LSU
MX-3100N LSU SECTION G 1

+5V 50 1 5V_LD D-GND 3 15 D-GND
4
+5V 48 2 5V_LD /TRANS_DAT 5 13 /TRANS_DAT
D-GND 6 18 D-GND
DT_K1+ 11 14 DT_K1+
/RST_DAT 8 16 /RST_DAT
2 3
DT_K1- 9 12 DT_K1-
LSU_ASIC_RST 7 10 LSU_ASIC_RST
GND 13 10 D-GND
/TRANS_RST 9 11 /TRANS_RST
PGM
n SH_K1 4 9 /SH_K1
JOBEND_INT 10 17 JOBEND_INT
GND 6 7 D-GND
TH_LSU 11 20 TH_LSU
n SH_K2 8 5 /SH_K2
/PCU_TRG 12 19 /PCU_TRG
GND 10 3 D-GND
VSYNC_K_N 13 28 VSYNC_K_N
n LDERR_K 12 17 /LDERR_K
VSYNC_K_P 14 27 VSYNC_K_P
DT_K2+ 5 8 DT_K2+
VSYNC_C_P 15 26 VSYNC_C_P
MOTHER PWB
DT_K2- 3 6 DT_K2-
VSYNC_C_N 16 25 VSYNC_C_N
GND 7 4 D-GND
VSYNC_M_N 17 24 VSYNC_M_N
VREF_K1 16 15 VREF_K1
LSU PWB
VSYNC_M_P 18 23 VSYNC_M_P
VREF_K2 14 13
1
VREF_K2
VSYNC_Y_P 19 22 VSYNC_Y_P
n ENB_K 18 11 /ENB_K
VSYNC_Y_N 20 21 VSYNC_Y_N
n SH_YMC1 40 49 /SH_C1 S20B-PHDSS B28B-PHDSS
GND 42 47 D-GND CN5 CN5
n SH_YMC2 44 45 /SH_C2 CH0_N 1 23 CH0_N
GND 46 43 D-GND CH0_P 2 24 CH0_P
DT_C1+ 23 50 DT_C1+ D-GND 3 22 D-GND
DT_C1- 21 48 DT_C1- D-GND 4 21 D-GND
GND 25 46 D-GND CH1_N 5 19 CH1_N
LD PWB
n LDERR_C 20 41 /LDERR_C CH1_P 6 20 CH1_P
VREF_C1 24 39 VREF_C1 CH2_N 7 17 CH2_N
VREF_C2 22 37 VREF_C2 CH2_P 8 18 CH2_P
DT_C2+ 17 44 DT_C2+ D-GND 9 16 D-GND
DT_C2- 15 42 DT_C2- D-GND 10 15 D-GND
GND 19 40 D-GND CLCLK_N 11 13 CLCLK_N
n ENB_YMC 38 35 /ENB_C CLCLK_P 12 14 CLCLK_P
DT_M1+ 47 38 CH3_N 13 11 CH3_N
DT_M1+
DT_M1- 45 36 CH3_P 14 12 CH3_P
DT_M1-
D-GND
n LDERR_M 32 33 /LDERR_M D-GND 16 9 D-GND
VREF_M1 36 31 VREF_M1 CH4_N 17 7 CH4_N
VREF_M2 34 29 VREF_M2 CH4_P 18 8 CH4_P
DT_M2+ 41 32 DT_M2+ ECLK_LSU_N 19 5 ECLK_LSU_N
DT_M2- 39 30 DT_M2- ECLK_LSU_P 20 6 ECLK_LSU_P
D-GND
D-GND 22 3 D-GND
DT_Y1+ 35 26 DT_Y1+ HSYNC_LSU_P 23 1 HSYNC_LSU_P
DT_Y1- 33 24 DT_Y1- HSYNC_LSU_N 24 2 HSYNC_LSU_N
GND 37 22 D-GND S24B-PHDSS B24B-PHDSS
[G] LSU SECTION
n LDERR_Y 26 27 /LDERR_Y
VREF_Y1 30 25 VREF_Y1
VREF_Y2 28 23 VREF_Y2
DT_Y2+ 29 20 DT_Y2+
DT_Y2- 27 18 DT_Y2-
GND 31 16 D-GND
LDCHK_1 1 19 LDCHK_1
LDCHK_2 2 21 LDCHK_2
501571-5007 501190-5017
CN2
/BREAK 1 6 /BREAK
POLYCLK 2 5 POLYCLK
/LOCK 3 4 /LOCK
/START 4 3 /START
P-GND 5 2 P-GND
24V1 6 1 24V1
B6B-PH-K-S B6B-PH-K-S
MX-3100N
1.
2 : '09/Sep

name
PGM Polygon motor Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.
LSUSS LSU shutter solenoid Opens/closes the LSU shutter.

1 LD PWB Controls flashing of laser beams and the output values.
2 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams to focus.
3 f lens 1 Laser beams are refracted so that the laser scanning speed at the both ends of the OPC drum is the same as
4 f lens 1 that at the center.
5 Reflection mirror Assures the optical path for laser.
6 Cylindrical lens Collects the laser beams, and focuses it on the OPC drum.
7 Collective lens for BD Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
8 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
9 LSU PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB
control signal and image data.
10 LSU thermistor Measures the temperature in LSU.
2. Operational descriptions (Scanning system)
A. Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit through the PCU
are converted into laser beams which are radiated to the surface of
the OPC drum.
In this model, 2-laser system is employed where 2 lines of laser for
2 one color are radiated. However, the 23ppm model employs the
one-laser system which radiates one laser for one color.
The LSU unit is composed of the optical element from laser to the
polygon mirror, the primary system including the mirror which
assures light path, and the main scanning system.
B. Composition
(Primary system)
LD1 LD2 LD2 LD1 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
Main scanning direction
Rear
Scanning LD2
direction LD1
Scanning
direction
LD2
LD1
BK C M Y
Front

2 : '09/Sep
(Writing position on paper) 3. Disassembly and assembly

A. LSU
Paper exit direction
Rear
Scanning a
direction
LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1
LD1 LD2 LD2 LD1
Front
(On the polygon motor) Parts

a Polygon motor
Model Number of Rotating Bearing Remarks
mirror surface speed 1) Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet. [Refer
2 MX-2301/2600/ 7 surfaces 27334rpm OIL to "Left cabinet lower, left cabinet" in "External view."]
3100 2) Remove the waste toner box.
C. Outline of LSU specifications
Effective scan width : 307mm
2 Resolution: 1200dpi (26/31 ppm models)
600dpi (23 ppm model)
Beam diameter: Main scan = 50 to 65m, Sub scan = 60 to 75m
1
2 Laser power: Max 0.255mW (26/31 ppm models)

Max 0.380mW (23 ppm model)
LD wavelength: 770 to 795nm 2
3) Remove the LSU left plate PA.

4) Remove the LSU slant adjustment plate screw (A), and loosen (1) Polygon motor
the screw (B). 1) Remove the LSU.
Remove the LSU shaft fixing plate. Remove the screw. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the LSU CNT PWB cover R.
5) Shift the front side of the LSU shaft from (A) to (B), and remove 3) Remove the screw, and lift the LSU CNT PWB cover F (A).
the LSU shaft. Remove the screw, and lift the polygon motor unit (B).
1
A
2
3 A
1 2
B
6) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LSU. 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the polygon motor.
* When installing, do not touch the polygon mirror movable
section and the mirror surface.

B. Others 5) Remove the screw, and remove the ozone air inlet duct A.
Parts
a LSU shutter solenoid 1
6) Remove the screw, and remove the ozone air inlet duct B.
(1) LSU shutter solenoid 1
2) Remove the MC PWB.
3) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
the filter box unit.
7) Remove the LSU.

the LSU shutter solenoid unit.
4) Remove the screw and remove the duct harness cover. Dis-
connect the connector.
* When installing, insert the projected section (A) of the sole-

noid arm into the hole in the lever link arm.

9) Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the LSU shut-
ter solenoid.
* When installing, engage the solenoid pin (A) with the shutter
lever arm.

1.
[H]
MC
MX-3100N
MC-CL
CN1 CN6
GB-Y INT24V2 8 31 INT24V2
GB
D-GND 7 29 D-GND
GB-M
/HV_DATA 6 27 /HV_DATA
MC
GB-C
/HV_LD 4 23 /HV_LD
MC PWB
GB-K HV_REM 3 21 HV_REM
MC_CL_ERR 2 19 MC_CL_ERR
GB
MC-K MC_BK_ERR 1 17 MC_BK_ERR
B8B-PASK B32B-PHDSS
MC
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H CN10
NC 2
GB
/DL_BK 3 10 /DL_BK 1 1 /DL_BK
MC
PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H
NC 2
GB
/DL_C 3 10 /DL_C 1 21 /DL_C
NC 2
/DL_M 3 10 /DL_M 1 2 /DL_M
PCU PWB
2
NC 2
/DL_Y 3 10 /DL_Y 1 22 /DL_Y
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
B40B-PADSS-1
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
MX-3100N PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION H 1

Service Manual
DL_BK
CN11
DVM_CL INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
P-GND 2 3 P-GND
/DVMK_CK 4 5 /DVMK_CK
/DVMK_D 5 7 /DVMK_D
DVMK_LD 7 9 DVMK_LD
NC 3
NC 6
VM_CL
INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2
P-GND 2 4 P-GND
/DVMC_CK 4 6 /DVMC_CK
/DVMC_D 5 8 /DVMC_D
NC 3 B18B-PHDSS
NC 6
DVM_K
DVM_CL Developing drive motor (Color) Color developing unit/Color drum drive
DVM_K Developing drive motor (Black) Black developing unit/Black drum drive
DL Discharge lamp (Y,M,C,BK) Light is radiated to the discharge lamp to discharge the OPC drum surface.
MC Main charger (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
GB Grid (Y,M,C,K) The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.

1 OPC drum (Y,M,C,K) Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade Cleans and remove residual toner from the OPC drum surface.
2. Operational descriptions 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the

cleaning blade.
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
Screen grid High voltage unit
Main corona unit

The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt-
age applied to the screen grid.
2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
Aluminum
OPC drum layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
Laser beams
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.

4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged. 2) Remove the waste toner box unit.
Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
CGL CGL
CTL CTL
1
2
Lens
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,

light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated. 3) Loosen the blue screw. Check to confirm that the lock is
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the released, and open the drum positioning unit.
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
A
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing B
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.
(CAUTION)
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
manually released, turn the power OFF/ON after completion of
the operation. This procedure initializes the transfer roller to
return it to the home position.

A. Drum unit 1
1) Open the front cover.

5) Pinch the knob and remove the development unit. (1) Waste toner drive motor
1) Remove the frame cover. (Refer to "Frame cover" in "External
view.")
the waste toner drive unit.
Remove the screw, and remove the waste toner drive motor
from he waste toner drive unit.
6) Hold the lock lever and pull out each drum unit slowly.
Hold the lower section of the unit and remove it with both
hands.
(2) Waste toner full detection switch

1) Remove the frame cover. (Refer to "Frame cover" in "External
view.")
the waste toner drive unit.
B. Others
b
a
3) Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the waste toner
box instillation lever.
Parts
Disconnect the connector and disengage the pawl. Remove
a Waste toner drive motor
the waste toner full detection switch.
b Waste toner full detection switch

2
1.
[i]
2
1
No.
TNM
CRUM
MX-3100N
Signal name
: '09/Sep
CRUM(Y,M,C,K)
Toner transport pipe

Toner motor (Y,M,C,K)
Name
Name
CN15
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 2 5VN
/CRM_K_DT 9 2 /CRM_K_DT 2 4 /CRM_K_DT
TONER SUPPLY SECTION
/CRM_K_CK 11 3 /CRM_K_CK 3 3 /CRM_K_CK

TSR-04V-K
5VN 3 5 5VN 5 2 5VN
/CRM_C_DT 13 6 /CRM_C_DT 6 4 /CRM_C_DT
/CRM_C_CK 15 7 /CRM_C_CK 7 3 /CRM_C_CK
TSR-04V-K
5VN 2 9 5VN 9 2 5VN
/CRM_M_DT 10 10 /CRM_M_DT 10 4 /CRM_M_DT
/CRM_M_CK
/CRM_M_CK
CRUM(Y)
12 11 11 3 /CRM_M_CK
TSR-04V-K
5VN 4 13 5VN 13 2 5VN
/CRM_Y_DT 14 14 /CRM_Y_DT 14 4 /CRM_Y_DT
/CRM_Y_CK 16 15 /CRM_Y_CK 15 3 /CRM_Y_CK
CRUM(M)
B16B-PHDSS P SM-18Pin R TSR-04V-K
Data memory for toner cartridge.

CN14 CN3 CN5
24V3 22 12 24V3 +24V 1
MX-3100N TONER SUPPLY SECTION i 1

TNM_Y_/B 11 1 TMY_/B +24V 2
TNM_Y
PCU PWB
TNM_Y_B 13 3 TMY_B TMK_A 3
CRUM(C)
TNM_Y_/A 15 5 TMY_/A TMK_/A 4
Toner supply motor to the developing unit

Service Manual
TNM_Y_A 17 7 TMY_A TMK_B 5

P-GND 19 9 P-GND TMK_/B 6
TNM_K_/B 21 17 TMK_/B CN4
TNM_K_B 23 15 TMK_B +24V 1
TNM_M
TNM_K_/A 25 13 TMK_/A +24V 2

TNM_K_A 27 11 TMK_A TMC_A 3
CRUM(K)
P-GND 29 19 P-GND TMC_/A 4
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
P-GND 12 2 P-GND TMC_B 5
TNM_M_A 14 10 TMM_A TMC_/B 6
TNM_M_/A 16 8 TMM_/A CN2
TNM_C
TNM_M_B 18 6 TMM_B +24V 1
Toner supply pipe from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
TNM_M_/B 20 4 TMM_/B +24V 2
TNM_C_A 24 20 TMC_A TMM_A 3
TNM_C_/A 26 18 TMC_/A TMM_/A 4
TNM_C_B 28 16 TMC_B TMM_B 5
TNM_K
TNM_C_/B 30 14 TMC_/B TMM_/B 6

B30B-PHDSS B20B-PNDZS CN1
+24V 1
+24V 2
TMY_A 3
PWB
TMY_/A 4
TMY_B 5
TM-DRV
TMY_/B 6
When the toner cartridge is inserted into the machine, the lock pawl A. Toner cartridges
is released and the supply shutter is opened. 1) Open the front cover.
2) Lift the lock lever, and pull it out slowly and horizontally.
The transport shutter is opened and closed by the shaft linked with
the developing lever.
The toner supply section of the developing unit is opened and

closed when the open/close level on the unit pushes the block .
MX-3100N TONER SUPPLY SECTION i 2

CN11
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
P-GND 2 3 P-GND
/DVMK_D 5 7 /DVMK_D
DVMK_LD 7 9 DVMK_LD
NC 3
NC 6
DVM_K
INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2
P-GND 2 4 P-GND
/DVMC_CK 4 6 /DVMC_CK
/DVMC_D 5 8 /DVMC_D
NC 3 B18B-PHDSS
NC 6
CN1 C N6
BS-Y INT24V2 8 31 INT24V2
D-GND 7 29 D-GND
MC PWB
/HV_DATA 6 27 /HV_DATA
BS-M
/HV_LD 4 23 /HV_LD
DVM_CL
BS-C HV_REM 3 21 HV_REM

MC_CL_ERR 2 19 MC_CL_ERR
BS-K MC_BK_ERR 1 17 MC_BK_ERR
BS_K
B8B-PASK B32B-PHDSS
Service Manual
MX-3100N DEVELOPING SECTION J 1

BS_C
TCS_K
BS_M
2
TCS_C
TCS_K PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H CN10

24V3 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 5 5VN
BS_Y
TCS_K 3 6 TCS_K 6 7 TCS_K 4 7 TCS_K
PCU PWB
TSG_BK 1 8 TSG_BK 8 6 TSG_BK 5 9 TSG_BK
TCS_M
2 DVTYP_K 2 3 DVTYP_K 8 15 DVTYP_K
3 TNCRU_K 3 2 TNCRU_K 9 17 TNCRU_K
TCS_Y
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 19 5VN
1
C QR/P8-8P P
2
TCS_C PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H
24V3 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 25 5VN
TCS_C 3 6 TCS_C 6 7 TCS_C 4 27 TCS_C
[J] DEVELOPING SECTION

TSG_C 1 8 TSG_C 8 6 TSG_C 5 29 TSG_C
1
2
2 DVTYP_C 2 3 DVTYP_C 8 35 DVTYP_C
3 TNCRU_C 3 2 TNCRU_C 9 37 TNCRU_C
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 39 5VN
3
C QR/P8-8P P
TCS_M PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H
24V3 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 6 5VN
TCS_M 3 6 TCS_M 6 7 TCS_M 4 8 TCS_M
1
TSG_M 1 8 TSG_M 8 6 TSG_M 5 10 TSG_M
2 DVTYP_M 2 3 DVTYP_M 8 16 DVTYP_M
3 TNCRU_M 3 2 TNCRU_M 9 18 TNCRU_M
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 20 5VN
C QR/P8-8P P
TCS_Y PHNR-10-H+BU10P-TR-P-H
24V3 2 5 5VN 5 8 5VN 3 26 5VN
TCS_Y 3 6 TCS_Y 6 7 TCS_Y 4 28 TCS_Y
1
TSG_Y 1 8 TSG_Y 8 6 TSG_Y 5 30 TSG_Y
2 DVTYP_Y 2 3 DVTYP_Y 8 36 DVTYP_Y
3 TNCRU_Y 3 2 TNCRU_Y 9 38 TNCRU_Y
: '09/Sep
4 5VN 4 1 5VN 10 40 5VN

C QR/P8-8P P B40B-PADSS-1
MX-3100N
2
1.
2
2 : '09/Sep

DVM_CL Developing drive motor (Color) Color developing unit/Color drum drive
DVM_K Developing drive motor (Black) Black developing unit/Black drum drive
BS Developing bias (Y,M,C,K) Developer bias
TCS Toner density sensor (Y,M,C,K) Controls the toner density in the developing unit.

1 Developer roller Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
2 Mixing roller Mixing of developer
3 Toner filter (Y,M,C,K) Prevents dispersing of toner

This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum gen- A. Development unit
erated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner.
2
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller. Parts
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively a Density sensor
charged due to mechanical friction. 1) Open the front cover.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC
component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.

2 : '09/Sep
3) Check that the lock is released as shown in (A). (1) Density sensor
Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit. 1) Remove the developing unit.
* When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the 2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV guide.
screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A). Remove the screw, and disconnect the connector.
Remove the density sensor.
2
A
B

5) Pinch the knob and remove the development unit.

2 : '09/Sep
[K] TRANSFER SECTION

MX-3100N
Service Manual

A. Transfer section
1st TC PWB CN1 CN2

MC PWB CN1 C N6
1TC-Y INT24V2 8 1 INT24V2 INT24V2 8 31 INT24V2
P-GND 7 2 D-GND D-GND 7 29 D-GND
1TC-REV 6 3 1TC-REV /HV_DATA 6 27 /HV_DATA
1TC-M 1TC-Y-CC 5 4 1TC-Y-CC /HV_CLK 5 25 /HV_CLK
1TC-M-CC 4 5 1TC-M-CC /HV_LD 4 23 /HV_LD
1TC-C-CC 3 6 1TC-C-CC HV_REM 3 21 HV_REM
1TC-C
1TC-K-CC 2 7 1TC-K-CC MC_CL_ERR 2 19 MC_CL_ERR
HV_REM 1 8 HV_REM MC_BK_ERR 1 17 MC_BK_ERR
1TC-K N,C 9 9 N,C B8B-PASK B32B-PHDSS
B9B-PASK B9B-PASK
P SM-3Pin R CN13
1TUD_CL 1 1 1TUD_CL 1 31 1TUD_CL
B32B-PHDSS
CN12
1TUD_BK 1 1 1TUD_BK 1 27 1TUD_BK
5VLED 3 3 5VLED 3 29 5VLED
4 PTC_HEAT 4 30 PTC_HEAT
P SM-4pin R B30B-PHDSS
5 6
14 1TURC
DVM_K PCU PWB
CN11
1 INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
P-GND 2 3 P-GND
/DVMK_D 5 7 /DVMK_D
1TC_CMY 1TUD_CL DVMK_LD 7 9 DVMK_LD

NC 3
NC 6
1TC_K 1TUD_BK
R
1
SM-2Pin
24V3
P
1 11 24V3
3 2 1TURC 2 12 1TURC
B18B-PHDSS
2 8
7 2nd TC PWB CN1 CN14
PTC INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2
PTC B2P-VH D-GND 2 4 D-GND
3 /TC_DATA
/TC_CLK
3
4
6
8
/TC_DATA
/TC_CLK
4 2TC /TC_LD 5 10 /TC_LD
9 2-TC
/HV_REM
PTC_ERR
6
7
5
7
/HV_REM
PTC_ERR
PS-187 /PTC_CLK 8 9 /PTC_CLK
B8B-PASK B30B-PHDSS
13
11
1TNFD
10
WTNM 12 P SL2PIN R P DF1B-24DE S CN13
1 WTNM_1 1 17 WTNM_1 17 11 WTNM_1
2 WTNM_2 2 19 WTNM_2 19 13 WTNM_2
1TNFD 1 21 1TNFD 21 7 1TNFD

B32B-PHDSS

1TC_CMY Primary transfer output (CMY) Color transfer high voltage
1TC_K Primary transfer output (K) B/W transfer high voltage
1TNFD Waste toner full detection switch Waste toner full detection
1TUD_BK Transfer belt separation BK detection B/W transfer folder position detection
1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL detection Color transfer roller position detection
1TURC Primary transfer separation clutch Transfer roller separation control
2TC Secondary belt transfer output Secondary transfer high voltage
DVM_K Developing drive motor (K) Transfer unit drive (Commonly used with the B/W developing drive roller)
WTNM Waste toner drive motor Transports waste toner.
PTC PTC output PTC high voltage

1 Primary transfer cleaner blade Clean and remove residual toner from the primary transfer belt.
2 Primary transfer belt Toner on the drum is transferred to form toner images on the belt.
3 Primary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the primary transfer belt.
4 Primary transfer belt drive roller Drives the transfer belt.
5 Primary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower.
6 Primary transfer belt tension roller Apply a tension to the transfer belt.
7 Belt CL brush Transfer belt back surface cleaning.
MX-3100N TRANSFER SECTION K 1

2 : '09/Sep

8 PTC opposing roller Roller to flow a PTC current.
9 Secondary transfer belt Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper.
10 Secondary transfer roller Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper.
11 Secondary transfer belt dirve roller Drives the transfer belt.
12 Secondary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower.
13 PTC unit Reduces the positive charges on the primary transfer belt.
2 14 Y auxiliary roller Holds the belt position by separation of the Y transfer roller.
B. Pro-reg sensor section
18 NC 18
PCU PWB 17 NC 17
CN6 16 NC 16 P SM2P R
24V3 13 15 24V3 15 1 24V3 1
/PCSS 11 14 /PCSS 14 2 /PCSS 2
/REGS_R_LED 8 13 /REGS_R_LED 13
REGS_R 6 12 REGS_R 12
D-GND 4 11 D-GND 11
5VNPD 2 10 5VNPD 10 3 /REGS_R_LED
9 NC 9 4 REGS_R PCSS
PCS_CL 9 8 PCS_CL 8 2 D-GND
7 NC 7 1 5VNPD
6 D-GND 6 5 PCS_R
5 5VNPD 5
/REGS_F_LED 7 4 /REGS_F_LED 4
REGS_F 5 3 REGS_F 3
D-GND 3 2 D-GND 2 5 PCS_F REGS_R
1 1 3 /REGS_F_LED
5VNPD 1 5VNPD
4 REGS_F
B32B-PHDSS P SM18P R
2 D-GND
1 5VNPD
REGS_F

PCSS Color image density sensor PWB Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the resist sensor.
reflection plate shutter solenoid
REGS_F Color image density sensor/ Detection of resist shift on the machine front (F) side, and detection of the color toner patch density.
Image registration sensor F
REGS_R Black image density sensor/ Detection of resist shift on the machine rear (R) side, and detection of the black toner patch density.
Image registration sensor R

2. Operational descriptions (2) Primary (intermediate) transfer roller separation
mechanism and contents
A. Transfer
The primary transfer roller operates pressing all the rollers, sepa-
(1) Transfer operation rates all the rollers, or presses only black depending on the opera-
a. Transfer operation tion mode.
When the roller separation clutch (1TURC) turns ON, the transfer
cam rotates to shift the primary transfer link and the primary trans-
fer arm linked with the cam in the arrow direction, performing sepa-
rating operation of the roller.
All pressing
PTC Constant All separating

current
Toner images on the OPC drum are transferred to the primary
transfer belt by applying the positive high voltage to the primary
transfer roller.
Negative charge is generated by the PTC unit, and this weakens
positive charges on the transfer belt, reducing the attractive force
between the primary transfer belt and toner.
By this operation, the transfer efficiency in the secondary transfer is
improved.
Pressing only black
Next, the positive high voltage is applied to the secondary transfer
belt, and toner images on the primary transfer belt are transferred
to paper. In the monochrome mode and the color mode, the black
(K) transfer voltage is selected.
b. Cleaning operation
In the cleaning operation, the polarity of the applying voltage of the
secondary transfer belt is made negative, and unnecessary toner is
transferred to the primary transfer belt, and it is cleaned by the pri-
mary transfer belt cleaning blade, and transported to the waste It also performs all pressing, all separating, or pressing only black
toner section. with the roller separation sensors (1TUD_CL, 1TUD_K) and the
separation detection arm.
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
All pressing ON OFF
All separating OFF ON
Pressing only black OFF OFF
The primary transfer drive and the secondary transfer drive are
commonly used with the black developing motor.
Constant
voltage

B. Image density detection and resist detection 3. Disassembly and assembly
Image density detection and image resist detection are performed A. Primary transfer unit
by the sensors arranged on the front frame side and the rear frame
side. 1) Open the front cover.
(1) Function and operation of the color image density

sensor/image resist sensor F (REGS F) provided
on the front frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the color
toner patch density is detected.
When the image resist adjustment is performed, the image resist
shift on the front frame side is detected.
The shutter plate is provided on the sensor. The shutter plate is
closed before operation of the process control. The sensor sensitiv-
ity adjustment is performed by using the shutter plate as the refer-
ence reflection plate.
The operation of the shutter plate is controlled by the process con-
trol shutter solenoid (PCSS).
(2) Function and operation of the black image density
sensor/image resist sensor R (REGS R) provided
on the rear frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the black
toner patch density is detected.
When the image resist adjustment is performed, the image resist
shift on the rear frame side is detected.
3) Loosen the blue screw.
4) Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that

the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum posi-
tioning unit.
* Failure to complete this step may damage the primary trans-
fer belt.
A
B

5) Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer C. Pro-reg sensor unit
unit.
(NOTE) Parts
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is a Process control shutter solenoid
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of
1) Remove the developing unit (K).
the work. (Power OFF-ON)
This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to the 2) Remove the drum unit (K).
home position. 3) Remove the resist roller unit.
4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
B. Secondary transfer unit
pro-reg sensor unit.
(1) Process control shutter solenoid

2) Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
1) Remove the pro-reg sensor unit.
2) Remove the screw. Disconnect the connector, and remove the
3 process control shutter solenoid.
* When installing, engage the process control shutter solenoid
with the groove section of the shutter mounting plate (A).

1.
[L]
P SM-5pin_N R P DF1 B - 2 4D E S CN6

5 24V3 5 1 24V3 1 1 24V3 CN6
MX-3100N
4 PRM_A 4 3 PRM_A 3 8 PRM_A PRM_A 9

3 PRM_B 3 5 PRM_B 5 4 PRM_B PRM_B 5
2 PRM_/A 2 7 PRM_/A 7 6 PRM_/A PRM_/A 7
1 PRM_/B 1 9 PRM_/B 9 2 PRM_/B PRM_/B 3
TM-DRV PWB
B10B-PNDZS B10B- PNDZS
5VN 1 11 5VN 11
HLPCD 2 13 HLPCD 13
D-GND 3 15 D-GND 15
P R
780W BK 780W
4 L-HL(MAIN) 4
(AWG16) (AWG16)
810W BK 810W
5 L-HL(SUB) 5
(AWG16) (AWG16)
CN2
3 L-HL(UM)
1 N-HL(UM)
HL PWB
2 N-HL(US) CN4
B03P-VL(BK) /HL_PR 7
WH 480W
YL-2pin 1 N-HL(MAIN) 1 HL_OUT_UW 6
(AWG18) (AWG18)
R
1 1 HL_OUT_LM 5
3
1
2
2 2 HL_OUT_US 4
510W WH 510W
FUSER SECTION
P R 2 N-HL(SUB) 2
3
1
2
CN3 HL_OUT_UM 3
VL-3pin
(AWG18) (AWG18)
P
PRM
2 N-HL(UW) D-GND 2
3 L-HL(US) INT24V1 1
R YL P
300W WH 300W 1 N-HL(LM) B07B-PASK-S
6 N-HL(UW) 6
(AWG18) (AWG18) B03P-VL(RD)
300W WH 300W
3 N-HL(LOW) 3
(AWG18) (AWG18)
P YL R CN13
INT24V1 4
P SM-3pin(BK) R D-GND 6
BK
1 TH_UM_IN 1 HL_OUT_UW 8
WH
2 TH_UMCS_IN 2 HL_OUT_LM 10
BL
HLPCD
3 D-GND 3 P DF1B-20DE E HL_OUT_US 12
20 N,C 20 CN12 HL_OUT_UM 14
B-1 TH_UM_IN B-9 18 TH_UM_IN 18 8 TH_UM_IN /HL_PR 16
P SM-2pin R B-2 D-GND B-8 16 D-GND 16 6 D-GND B32B-PHDSS
1 TH_US_IN 1 B-3 TH_US_IN B-7 14 TH_US_IN 14 4 TH_US_IN
2 D-GND 2 B-4 D-GND B-6 12 D-GND 12 2 D-GND CN13
2
B-5 TH_LM_IN B-5 10 TH_LM_IN 10 9 TH_LM_IN D-GND 32
P SM-2pin R B-6 D-GND B-4 8 D-GND 8 7 D-GND HLPCD 30
HL_U
1 TH_LM_IN 1 B-7 POFM_CNT B-3 6 POFM_CNT 6 5 POFM_CNT 5VN 28
2 D-GND 2 B-8 D-GND B-2 4 D-GND 4 3 D-GND
B-9 TH_UMCS_IN B-1 2 TH_UMCS_IN 2 1 TH_UMCS_IN
HL_LM
RCZR 9PIN B30B-PHDSS PRM_/B 26
PRM_/A 24
PRM_B 22
PRM_A 20
B32B-PHDSS
HLTS2
PCU PWB
2
2
R
YL P
MX-3100N FUSER SECTION L 1

RTH1
2
Service Manual
HLTS3
HLTS1
HLTS3
2 1
2
4
1
2
R SM-12p P R SM-12p P CN1
FUMB 1 1 FUMB 1 1 FUMB 1 4 FUMB
FUMA 2 2 FUMA 2 2 FUMA 2 5 FUMA
3
B6B-PASK-1
DRIVER MAIN PWB
FUM
FUM Fusing motor Drives the fusing unit.
HL_LM Heater lamp (3) Heats the fusing roller (pressing).
HL_U Heater lamp (1) Heats the fusing roller (heating).
HL_US Heater lamp (2) Heats the fusing roller (heating).
HLPCD Fusing pressure release Detects pressure release of the fusing roller.
sensor
HLTS1 Thermostat (1) Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
HLTS2 Thermostat (2) Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
HLTS3 Thermostat (3) When the temperature rises abnormally, conduction to the heater lamp is cut off. [For the fusing roller (pressing)]
PRM Fusing pressure release motor Adjusts the fusing roller pressure.
RTH1 Fusing temperature sensor (1) Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Center section)
RTH2 Fusing temperature sensor (2) Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Edge section)
RTH3 Fusing temperature sensor (3) Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (pressing).

1 Fusing roller (Heating) Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2 Separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (heating).
3 Fusing roller (Pressing) Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
4 Fusing cleaning roller Cleans the fusing roller (pressing).
2. Operational descriptions C. Fusing operation

Color toner (Y,M,C,K) on paper is subject to heat and pressure to
A. Fusing unit drive be fused on paper.
For driving the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the At that time, color toner of Y, M, C, and K are mixed to reproduce
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat colors approximate to the document image colors.
roller gear.
The heater lamps are provided in the lower and the upper heat
Driving by the drive motor (stepping motor) is performed according roller to heat paper from the upper and the lower sides.
to the control signal sent from the PCU.
This is because paper must be heated both from the upper side
and from the lower side together in order to melt and fuse toner in
the four layers on the paper.
PCU FUM The upper and the lower heat rollers of silicon rubber are
employed.
This is because of the following reasons.
B. Heater lamp drive
The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther-
mistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the
specified level, the heater lamp ON signal is sent from the PCU to
the heater lamp drive circuit on the HL PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and
heating the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller,
the thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is cut off.
1) To increase the nip quantity. To increase the heating capacity

for paper.
2) By pressing the flexible roller, multi-layer toner can be fused
without deformation.
3) An even pressure can be applied to rough surface of toner lay-
ers (multi-layer structure).

2 : '09/Sep
D. Automatic pressure release system E. Fusing temperature control

The upper and the lower heat rollers are normally pressed. When, The temperature sensor is provided at the center and the edge sec-
however, one of the following conditions is satisfied, they are tion of the upper heat roller and at the edge section of the lower
released from the pressure. heat roller.
When the machine shifts to the pre-heating mode. The heat roller temperature is detected by each temperature sen-
When the machine shifts to the auto power shut off mode. sor to control the heater lamp to maintain the temperature at the
specified level.
When the power switch of the operation panel is turned OFF.
In addition, the fusing temperature is switched according to the kind
When the machine has been left in the ready state for 20 min-
of paper.
utes.
When the envelope mode is used. In the case of SW-A
(1) Pressure release operation Mode Paper Upper Upper Lower

heater heater heater
The pressure release motor (PRM) rotates to drive the pressure lamp main lamp sub lamp main
release lever of the fusing unit to the pressure release state via the Ready Black/White 170 180 140
reduction gears (6 pcs.). condition plain paper
When 1710ms passes from operating the pressure release detec- Print mode Color plain 170 180 140
tion level and driving the pressure release sensor (HLPCD) to the paper
transmission state (L level), the pressure release motor stops to Thick paper 170 175 140
complete the pressure release operation. OHP 165 165 135
Envelope 180 180 145
Glossy paper 180 160 145
Pressure release lever
Pressing condition A. Fusing unit
a
c
a
Pressure release
motor (PRM)
Pressure release
state
d
(2) Pressing operation b
When an end use performs any operation or when the machine
receives a job signal, the pressure release motor rotates reversely
to dive the pressure release lever to the pressing state. Parts
When 430ms passes from when the pressure release sensor a Upper thermostat
(HLPCD) is in the interruption state (H level), the pressure motor b Lower thermostat
stops to complete the pressing operation. c Upper heater lamp
NOTE: When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine, d Lower heater lamp
be sure to turn OFF the power switch of the operation
2 panel and check to confirm that 10 sec. passed after the
LCD is turned OFF.
If the main power switch is turned OFF with the LCD dis-
played, the power is tu5ned off without completion of the
pressure release operation. This will deform the upper and
the lower heat rollers.
When, in addition, the fusing roller is installed again after
removing it, be sure to install it under the pressure release
state.

2) Remove the blue screw. Release the lock lever. Remove the (2) Lower thermostat
fusing unit. 1) Remove the fusing unit.
3
2
1
1
(1) Upper thermostat

1) Remove the fusing unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the

lower thermostat.
* Install so that the caulked section of the terminal faces
down.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the terminal. Remove the

upper thermostat.
* Install so that the caulked section of the terminal faces up. A

(3) Upper heater lamp 5) Remove the screw and remove the lamp holder. Remove the
1) Remove the fusing unit. upper heater lamp.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. NOTE: When installing, fit the projected section of the upper
heater lamp with the hole in the cover.

(4) Lower heater lamp
1) Remove the fusing unit.
4) Remove the connector of the upper heater lamp.

4) Remove the connector of the lower heater lamp. B. Others
5) Remove the screw and the clamp. Remove the screw and the
lamp holder. Remove the lower heater lamp. a
* When installing, treat the wires so that the harness of the
lower heater lamp does not separate from the boss (A). Parts
a Fusing pressure release motor
(1) Fusing pressure release motor

1) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to "Front cabinet
upper" in "External view.")
the fusing pressure release motor unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing pressure release

motor.

[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
MX-3100N
Service Manual

A. Duplex section
RIGHT DOOR I/F

PWB
CN2
TFD3 1 6 TFD3 1 1 TFD3
POD3 1 3 POD3 4 4 POD3

3 7 DSW_ADU
4 1 8 D-GND
DSW_ADU 1 3 D-GND 2 9 5VLED2
D-GND 2 2 DSW_ADU 3 10 APPD1
POD3 5VLED2 3 1 5VLED2 4 11 D-GND
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H 12 5VLED5
TFD3 APPD1 1 3 APPD1 1

13
14
APPD3
GND
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 2 15 5VLED
5VLED5 3 1 5VLED5 3 16 NC
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H S16B-PHDSS-B
CN3(1/2)
APPD2 1 4 APPD2
D-GND 2 5 D-GND
5VLED10 3 6 5VLED10
APPD1 DSW_ADU S32B-PHDSS-B
1
ADUML DRIVER MAIN
PWB
CN2
INT24V1 2 7 INT24V1
INT24V1 5 8 INT24V1
ADUMLB/ 6 9 ADUMLB/
ADUMLB 3 10 ADUMLB
2 ADUMLA 1 11 ADUMLA
ADUMLA/ 4 12 ADUMLA/
B12B-PASK-1
APPD2

ADUML ADU motor lower Drives the right door section.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass detection
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass detection
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit to right tray.
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full.

1 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
2 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
3 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper.
MX-3100N DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION M 1

B. Paper exit section
DF11-4DP-SP1 SSJC6-4
/POFM_V
/POFM_V
/POFM_V
/POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
4
1
2
3
P DF1B-26p S
R SM4PIN P
20 N,C 20
1 POFM_V 1
21 N,C 21
2 /POFM_CNT 2
22 N,C 22
3 P-GND 3
23 N,C 23
4 POFM_LD1 4
24 N,C 24
1 POFM_V 1 25 N,C 25
2 /POFM_CNT 2 26 N,C 26 PCU PWB
3 P-GND 3 CN12
4 POFM_LD2 4 6 POFM_V 6 16 POFM_V
R SM4PIN P 7 /POFM_CNT 7 17 /POFM_CNT
11 P-GND 11 20 P-GND
R SM-6Pin P
5 24V2 5 1 24V2 1 11 24V2
1 /OSM_XB 1 2 /OSM_XB 2 12 /OSM_/B
2 /OSM_XA 2 3 /OSM_XA 3 13 /OSM_/A
3 /OSM_B 3 4 /OSM_B 4 14 /OSM_B
4 /OSM_A 4 5 /OSM_A 5 15 /OSM_A
TFD2 6 NC 6
HPOS 5VNPD 3
TFD2 2 13 TFD2 13 22 TFD2
D-GND 1
5VNPD 1 14 POD2 14 23 POD2

POD2 2
D-GND 3
15 HPOS 15 24 HPOS
OSM 5VNPD 1
HPOS 2
D-GND 3 16 POD1 16 25 POD1
17 D-GND 17 26 D-GND
POD1 2 B30B-PHDSS
D-GND 3 10 NC 10
18 NC 18
POM
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
POFM_R 19 NC 19
3
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
POD2
DRIVER MAIN
SSJC6-6
PWB
R SM-12p P R SM-12p P CN1
POD1 FUMB 1 1 FUMB 1 1 FUMB 1 4 FUMB
POFM_F FUM FUMA

INT24V1
2
3
2
3
FUMA
INT24V1
2
3
2
3
FUMA
INT24V1
2
3
5
1
FUMA
INT24V1
2 B6B-PASK-1
CN2
POMA 1 7 POMA 7 7 POMA 7 5 POMA
POMB 3 9 POMB 9 9 POMB 9 4 POMB
POMA/ 4 10 POMA/ 10 10 POMA/ 10 6 POMA/
POMB/ 6 12 POMB/ 12 12 POMB/ 12 3 POMB/
B12B-PASK-1

FUM Fusing drive motor Drives the fusing unit.
HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
OSM Shifter motor Performs offset of paper.
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects paper exit from fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the exit paper.
POFM_F Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_R Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects face-down paper exit tray full.

1 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport roller 13.
2 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 9 to the transport roller 1. / Transport paper to
the duplex (ADU) section.
3 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transport paper to the
duplex (ADU) section.

2. Operational descriptions 1) Open the right door.
A. Duplex
Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1.
At that time, paper is passed under the ADU reverse gate guide.
When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead
edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and
rotates reversely after the specified time.
By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is
sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the
right side of the Ado gate which lowers by its own weight.
The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor
lower to transport paper to the duplex paper feed position.
Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then
2) Remove the right door unit.
transported to the machine again.
B. Paper exit
Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray.
When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the
paper exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely.
Paper is passed through the ADU reverse gate, and discharged
to the right tray.

A. Duplex unit
(1) RD I/F PWB

a 2) Remove the connector cover. Remove the ADU inner cover.
b c
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the RD I/F PWB.
Parts
a RD I/F PWB
b Manual paper feed clutch
c ADU motor lower

(2) Manual paper feed clutch B. Paper exit unit
2) Remove the connector cover and the ADU inner cover.
a b
3) Remove the MF drive connection plate. Disconnect the con-
nector. Remove the manual paper feed clutch unit.
d c
4) Remove the manual paper feed clutch.
Parts
a Paper exit cooling fan motor
b Shifter motor
c Fusing drive motor
d Paper exit drive motor
(3) ADU motor lower

2) Open the control box.
2) Remove the paper exit unit, and disconnect the connector.
1
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU motor lower.

(1) Paper exit cooling fan motor 3) Remove the shifter motor.
1) Remove the paper exit unit.
2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
(3) Fusing drive motor

2) Remove the fusing drive motor.
3) Remove the paper exit cooling fan motor.
(4) Paper exit drive motor

2) Remove the paper exit drive motor.
(2) Shifter motor

2) Disconnect the connector and remove the earth terminal.
Remove the snap band, and remove the slide motor unit.

[N] DRIVE SECTION
MX-3100N 3) Remove the
Service flywheel.
Manual
* Installing sequence: (1)C (2) KM (3)KM
(Engraved mark for each color)
1. Disassembly and assembly * After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with
A. Main drive unit the harness.
b b
a
b
KM
C
d
KM
f 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
e the main drive unit.
* Hold section A and remove.
Parts
a TM drive PWB
b Toner motor
c Developing drive motor (K)
d Developing drive motor (CL)
e Rresist motor
f Primary transfer separation clutch
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External

view.")
2) Remove the screw, and open the control box.
MX-3100N DRIVE SECTION N 1

(1) TM drive PWB/Toner motor (3) Developing drive motor (CL)
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External
view.") view.")
2) Open the control box. 2) Open the control box.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 3) Remove the flywheel.
the TM dive PWB. 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the developing drive motor (CL).

the toner motor.
(4) Resist motor
view.")
3) Remove the flywheel.
the resist motor.
(2) Developing drive motor (K)

view.")
3) Remove the flywheel.
the developing drive motor (K)

(5) Primary transfer separation clutch 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External view.")
view.") 2) Open the control box.
2) Open the control box. 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the each
3) Remove the flywheel. terminal. Remove the driver main PWB unit.
4) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear. Disconnect the con-
nector, and remove the E-ring, and remove the primary trans-
fer separation clutch.
* When installing, engage the projected section for stopping
the clutch rotation with the frame projection.
4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Disengage

the pawl, and remove the filter box unit.
B. Paper feed drive unit
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed drive

unit.
a
d
f b
e
c
Parts
a Transport motor
b Paper feed motor
c Paper tray lift-up motor
d Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
e Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
f Tray vertical transport clutch

(1) Transport motor (3) Paper tray lift-up motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External 1) Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to "Rear cabinet" in "External
view.") view.")
2) Open the control box. 2) Open the control box.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 3) Remove the driver main PWB unit.
the transport motor. 4) Remove the filter box unit.
the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
(2) Paper feed motor

view.")
6) Disengage the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling.
3) Remove the driver main PWB unit.
4) Remove the filter box unit.
the paper feed motor.
(4) Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1/Paper feed

tray 2)/Tray vertical transport clutch
1) Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
2) Remove the paper feed motor.
3) Remove the paper feed drive unit.
4) Remove the gear and disconnect the connector.

5) Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame upper unit. 9) Remove the tray vertical transport clutch unit.
10) Remove the E-ring, and remove the tray vertical transport
6) Remove the paper feed clutch unit.
clutch.
7) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
8) Remove the belt.

1 : '08 Oct 15
[O] PWB SECTION

MX-3100N * Inserting
Service position
Manual an inserting procedure when the DIMM
memory is removed
1. Disassembly and assembly 1
A. Control box
DIMM1
DIMM2
i
DIMM4
h
DIMM3
e g
a
c
f
DIMM1: Option
d
DIMM2: 512MB
b DIMM3: 1GB
DIMM4: Empty 1
3) Stopper (A) with your finger to release the lock of the memory
PWB.
Parts
a DIMM memory PWB (512MB)
b DIMM memory PWB (1GB)
c PROG1 ROM PWB
d PROG2 ROM PWB
e MFP cnt PWB
f HDD
g PCU Flash ROM PWB
h PCU PWB
i Mother PWB
A A
(1) DIMM memory PWB (512MB/1GB)/PROG1 ROM
PWB/PROG 2 ROM PWB/MFP cnt PWB
1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB. 4) When the lock is released, the memory PWB tilts. Pull it out
under that state.
* Be sure to release the lock before pulling it out.
* Do not touch the IC on the memory PWB.
* When placing the HDD on the upper side, do not apply an

excessive force to the DIMM memory. So remove it or put a
spacer.
MX-3100N PWB SECTION O 1

* Note for removing procedure of the memory PWB c) Raise the memory PWB until the connector stopper
Remove the PWB inside the tilt of the memory PWB first. clicks.
(Removing the IC outside the tilt will result in poor efficiency * Check to confirm that the lock pin (A) is in the center
of work.) of the lock hole.
* The stopper (B) must penetrate inside the PWB.
Outside Inside Outside Inside
* Note for installing procedure of the memory PWB

Install the PWB outside the tilt of the memory PWB first. A A
(Installing the IC inside the tilt will result in poor efficiency B B
of work.)
5) Release the lock, and remove the PROG1 ROM PWB (A) and
the PROG2 ROM PWB (B).
Outside Inside Outside Inside
a) Tilt the memory PWB and fit with the connector port. Put
the memory PWB up to the line (A) in the figure.
* When inserting, be sure to hold the both ends and be
sure not to touch the IC on the PWB.
A B
About 15
A

the MFP cnt PWB.
b) Push the memory PWB which is kept tilted fully to the

bottom.
* Be careful not to tilt left and right.
* The gold plated section must be hidden.
[ Tilting left and right ]
[ The gold plated

section can be seen ]
[ Normal ]

(2) HDD 2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB.
1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB.
1
the HDD unit.
(4) PCU PWB

2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB.
the PCU PWB.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the angle from the HDD.
* Since the HDD is weak to shock, carefully treat it without
knocking the edge of the HDD or falling or applying a shock.
(5) Mother PWB

(3) PCU Flash ROM PWB the mother PWB.
1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet lid.

B. Power unit 3) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
the filter box unit.
Parts
a AC power PWB
b DC power PWB 4) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
the AC power PWB unit.
(1) AC power PWB
the AC power PWB.

the DC power PWB.
(2) DC power PWB


C. Others 3) Remove the screw, and pull out the scanner control PWB unit.
Disconnect the connector.
b
a
c
d
f
4) Remove the screw, and remove the scanner control PWB.

e
Parts
a SCN Flash ROM PWB
b Scanner control PWB
c HL PWB
d Secondary transfer PWB
e Driver main PWB
f Primary transfer PWB
g MC PWB
(1) SCN Flash ROM PWB/Scanner control PWB

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Release the lock, and remove the SCN Flash ROM PWB.
(2) HL PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cover.
the duct.
2
1

4) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove (5) Primary transfer PWB
the HL PWB. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the flywheel.
* After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with
the harness.
(3) Secondary transfer PWB

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the rear cover.
the secondary transfer PWB.
KM
C
KM

the primary transfer PWB.
(4) Driver main PWB

the driver main PWB.

(6) MC PWB
3) Remove the screw, and remove the flywheel.
* After installing, check to confirm that it is not in contact with
the harness.
KM
C
KM
4) Disconnect the connector, remove the supporter, and remove
the primary transfer PWB unit.

the MC PWB and the supporter.

[P] FAN SECTION
MX-3100N 3) Disconnect
Service the connector and remove the screw, and remove
Manual
the duct.

A. Fan motor
f
g 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
e the rear cooling fan motor.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and be
careful of the pulling direction of the harness (B).
d
Parts B
a Rear cooling fan motor A
b Ozone fan motor
c Power cooling fan motor
d Power cooling fan motor2
e Controller cooling fan motor
f Fusing fan motor
g Process air inlet fan motor
(1) Rear cooling fan motor

(2) Ozone fan motor
view.")
MX-3100N FAN SECTION P 1

4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove (4) Power cooling fan motor2
the ozone fan motor from the filter box unit. 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
the AC power PWB unit.
(3) Power cooling fan motor

view.")
2) Open the control box. 5) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle, and remove
the harness. Remove the screw, and remove the DC power
unit.
the power cooling fan.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and
arrange the engraved mark (B) in the blowing direction with
the arrow direction (C) of the metal plate.
A
6) Remove the screw, and remove the power cooling fan motor.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the
harness (B) facing upward.

(5) Controller cooling fan motor (7) Process air inlet fan motor
1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover. 1) Remove the LSU.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB. 2) Remove the screw. Remove the duct. At the unit on its side
and disconnect the connector.
3) Remove the screw and the snap band, and remove the pro-
cess air inlet fan motor.

the controller cooling fan motor.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and the
harness (B) facing downward.
(6) Fusing fan motor

the fusing fan motor.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the
harness (B) facing downward.
B A

[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
MX-3100N 3) Remove the
Service screw, and remove the main switch unit.
Manual

A. Sensor/Switch
4) Disconnect the connector, disengage the pawl, and remove

the main switch.
c * When installing, be careful of connection of the connector.
b
a
3
2
R
1
Parts
a Main switch F
b Front door open/close switch
c Right door open/close switch
(1) Main switch (2) Front door open/close switch

1) Remove the front cabinet. [Refer to "Front cabinet" in "External 1) Remove the frame cover. (Refer to "Frame cover" in "External
view."] view.")
2) Remove the screw, and remove the frame cover. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the front door open/close
switch unit.
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the front door open/close switch.
2
3
MX-3100N SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION Q 1

(3) Right door open/close switch
4) Remove the resist roller unit.
the right door open/close switch cover unit.
6) Remove the right door open/close switch.
MX-3100N SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION Q 2

COPYRIGHT 2009 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft Windows operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft
Corporation in the U. S.A. and other countries.
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 2000 Server, Windows Server 2003
and Internet Explorer are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987 -2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2009 September Printed in Japan

SM Sharp Mx3100n

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SM Sharp Mx3100n

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2 : '09/Sep

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

2. Warning for servicing

3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage

MX-3100N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

6) Place of much dust

7) Place near a wall

8) Unstable or slant surface

MX-3100N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE

1. Article constitution (Main unit and option)

Paper exit system Document feeder system

SHARPDESK SHARPDESK APPLICATION

MX-3100N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1

2. Main function of the main unit

STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option

STD: Standard provision. {: Installable. ---: Cannot be connected.

MX-3100N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 2

Platen/RSPF Monochrome Color

Outer dimensions MX-2301N/2600G/3100G: (7) Printable area

2 23-sheets model 26-sheets model 31-sheets model

* LCC is not allowed the heavy paper passing.

b. Manual paper feed tray paper feeding

2 23-sheets model 26-sheets model 31-sheets model

*1: Engine speed in finisher output

(2) Memory, hard disk

Local Memory (Copy) Standard 1GB

* Capacity depends on procurement and sourcing status.

C. Operation panel D. Scanner section

(2) Document table

Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)

(3) Automatic document feeder

Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)

E. Paper feed section

H. Printer function I. Image send function

(3) PDL emulation (3) Support image

Mode Scanner Internet Fax Fax

(6) Environment setting

Setting item General

Each folder in the

(3) Data operation contents L. Ambient conditions

* "Color" includes "Color/BW Mixing."

1. Supply system table

B. Europe/East Europe/Russia/Australia/New Zealand

MX-3100N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 1

MX-3100N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 2

MX-3100N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 3

MX-3100N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 4

MX-3100N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 5

In an actual case, the ratio of monochrome output and color output

MX-3100N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 6

Serial No. in production day

Example: 1st of production onJune 1, 2008

MX-3100N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 7

1. Identification of each section and functions

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

When a finisher / saddle

When a finisher is installed

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)

provide a correct position.) $7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.

oping roller main pole position in the following procedures. $7'(9(92B/B.

. & 0 < (;(&87(

% 0,''/(63(('*%B&

of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan. $ % 0,''/(63(('*%B&

& 0,''/(63(('*%B0

* U2 trouble has occurred. $ 0,''/(63((''9%B.

& 0,''/(63((''9%B0